This action might not be possible to undo. Are you sure you want to continue?
O Brooker BEng CEng MICE MIStructE
A J Harris BSc MSc DIC MICE CEng FGS
T Harrison BSc PhD CEng MICE FICT
R M Moss BSc PhD DIC CEng MICE MIStructE
R S Narayanan FREng
R Webster CEng FIStructE
How to Design Concrete
Structures using Eurocode 2
A cement and concrete industry publication
Foreword
The introduction of European standards to UK construction is a signiﬁcant event. The ten design standards, known
as the Eurocodes, will affect all design and construction activities as current British Standards for design are due
to be withdrawn in 2010 at the latest. BS 8110, however, has an earlier withdrawal date of March 2008. The aim
of this publication is to make the transition to Eurocode 2: Design of concrete structures as easy as possible by
drawing together in one place key information and commentary required for the design and detailing of typical
concrete elements.
The cement and concrete industry recognised that a substantial effort was required to ensure that the UK design
profession would be able to use Eurocode 2 quickly, effectively, efﬁciently and with conﬁdence. With support
from government, consultants and relevant industry bodies, the Concrete Industry Eurocode 2 Group (CIEG)
was formed in 1999 and this Group has provided the guidance for a coordinated and collaborative approach to
the introduction of Eurocode 2. Part of the output of the CIEG project was the technical content for 7 of the 11
chapters in this publication. The remaining chapters have been developed by The Concrete Centre.
Acknowledgements
The content of Chapters 1 and 3 to 8 were produced as part of the project Eurocode 2: transition from UK to
European concrete design standards. This project was part funded by the DTI under the Partners in Innovation
scheme. The lead partner was British Cement Association. The work was carried out under the guidance of the
Concrete Industry Eurocode 2 Group and overseen by a Steering Group of the CIEG (members are listed on inside
back cover).
Particular thanks are due to Robin Whittle, technical editor to the CEN/TC 250/SC2 committee (the committee
responsible for structural Eurocodes), who has reviewed and commented on the contents. Thanks are also due to
John Kelly and Chris Clear who have contributed to individual chapters.
Gillian Bond, Issy Harvey, Kevin Smith and the designers at Media and Design Associates and Michael Burbridge Ltd
have also made essential contributions to the production of this publication.
Published by The Concrete Centre
Riverside House, 4 Meadows Business Park, Station Approach, Blackwater, Camberley, Surrey GU17 9AB
Tel: +44 (0)1276 606800 Fax: +44 (0)1276 606801 www.concretecentre.com
CCIP–006
Published December 2006
ISBN 190481841
Price Group P
© The Concrete Centre. Joint copyright with British Cement Association for Chapters 1 and 3 to 8.
Permission to reproduce extracts from British Standards is granted by British Standards Institution.
British Standards can be obtained from BSI Customer Services, 389 Chiswick High Road, London W4 4AL.
Tel: +44 (0)20 8996 9001 email: cservices@bsiglobal.com
CCIP publications are produced on behalf of the Cement and Concrete Industry Publications Forum – an industry
initiative to publish technical guidance in support of concrete design and construction.
CCIP publications are available from the Concrete Bookshop at www.concrete bookshop.com
Tel: +44(0)7004607777
All advice or information from The Concrete Centre (TCC), British Cement Association (BCA) and Quarry Products Association (QPA) is intended for
those who will evaluate the signiﬁcance and limitations of its contents and take responsibility for its use and application. No liability (including that for
negligence) for any loss resulting from such advice or information is accepted by TCC, BCA and OPA or their subcontractors, suppliers or advisors. Readers
should note that publications from TCC, BCA and OPA are subject to revision from time to time and should therefore ensure that they are in possession
of the latest version. Part of this publication has been produced following a contract placed by the Department for Trade and Industry (DTI); the views
expressed are not necessarily those of the DTI.
Printed by Michael Burbridge Ltd, Maidenhead.
Contents
1. Introduction to Eurocodes 1
2. Getting started 9
3. Slabs 17
4. Beams 25
5. Columns 33
6. Foundations 43
7. Flat slabs 51
8. Deﬂection calculations 59
9. Retaining walls 67
10. Detailing 79
11. BS 8500 for building structures 91
How to Design Concrete
Structures using Eurocode 2
The Eurocode family
This chapter shows how to use Eurocode 2
1
with the other Eurocodes. In
particular it introduces Eurocode: Basis of structural design
2
and Eurocode 1:
Actions on structures
3
and guides the designer through the process of
determining the design values for actions on a structure. It also gives a brief
overview of the significant differences between the Eurocodes and BS 8110
4
,
(which will be superseded) and includes a glossary of Eurocode terminology.
The development of the Eurocodes started in 1975; since then they have
evolved significantly and are now claimed to be the most technically
advanced structural codes in the world. The many benefits of using Eurocode 2
are summarised below. There are ten Eurocodes covering all the main structural
materials (see Figure 1). They are produced by the European Committee for
Standardization (CEN), and will replace existing national standards in 28
countries.
Each country is required to publish a Eurocode with a national title page and
forward but the original text of the Eurocode must appear as produced by
CEN as the main body of the document. A National Annex (NA) can be
included at the back of the document (see Figure 2). Throughout this
publication it is assumed that the UK National Annexes will be used.
Table 1 details which existing standards relating to concrete design will be
replaced by the new Eurocodes. During the implementation period it is
recommended that existing standards are considered for use where the
European standards have not yet been issued.
How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2
1. Introduction to Eurocodes
R S Narayanan FREng O Brooker BEng, CEng, MICE, MIStructE
Benefits of using Eurocode 2
Learning to use the new Eurocodes will require time and effort on
behalf of the designer, so what benefits will there be?
1. The new Eurocodes are claimed to be the most technically
advanced codes in the world.
2. Eurocode 2 should result in more economic structures than
BS 8110.
3. The Eurocodes are logical and organised to avoid repetition.
4. Eurocode 2 is less restrictive than existing codes.
5. Eurocode 2 is more extensive than existing codes.
6. Use of the Eurocodes will provide more opportunity for designers
to work throughout Europe.
7. In Europe all public works must allow the Eurocodes to be used.
2
F
E
2
Figure 2
Typical Eurocode layout
Table 1
Concrete related Eurocodes and their equivalent current standards
Figure 1
The Eurocodes
Eurocode Title Superseded standards
BS EN 1990 Basis of structural design BS 8110: Part 1 – section 2
BS EN 1991–1–1 Densities, selfweight and BS 6399: Part 1 and BS 648
imposed loads
BS EN 1991–1–2 Actions on structures –
exposed to fire
BS EN 1991–1–3 Snow loads BS 6399: Part 2
BS EN 1991–1–4 Wind actions BS 6399: Part 3
BS EN 1991–1–5 Thermal actions –
BS EN 1991–1–6 Actions during execution –
BS EN 1991–1–7 Accidental actions –
BS EN 1991–2 Traffic loads on bridges BD 37/88
BS EN 1991–3 Actions induced by cranes –
and machinery
BS EN 1991–4 Silos and tanks –
BS EN 1992–1–1 General rules for buildings BS 8110: Parts 1, 2 and 3
BS EN 1992–1–2 Fire resistance of concrete BS 8110: Part 1, Table 3.2 and
structures BS 8110: Part 2, section 4
BS EN 1992–2 Bridges BS 5400: Part 4
BS EN 1992–3 Liquidretaining and BS 8007
containment structures
BS EN 1997–1 Geotechnical design – BS 6031, BS 8002, BS 8004,
General rules BS 8006, BS 8008 &BS 8081
BS EN 1997–2 Geotechnical design – Ground BS 5930
investigation and testing
BS EN 1998 Design of structures for –
earthquake resistance (6 parts)
Structural safety,
serviceability and durability
Actions on structures
Design and detailing
Geotechnical
and seismic
design
A: National title page
B: National Foreword
C: CEN title page
D: Main text
E: Main Annex(es)
F: National Annex
BS EN 1990, Eurocode:
Basis of structural design
BS EN 1991, Eurocode 1:
Actions on structures
BS EN 1992, Eurocode 2: Concrete
BS EN 1993, Eurocode 3: Steel
BS EN 1994, Eurocode 4: Composite
BS EN 1995, Eurocode 5: Timber
BS EN 1996, Eurocode 6: Masonry
BS EN 1999, Eurocode 9: Aluminium
BS EN 1997, Eurocode 7:
Geotechnical design
BS EN 1998, Eurocode 8:
Seismic design
D
D
D
D
C
B
A
Eurocode: Basis of
structural design
This Eurocode underpins all structural design irrespective of the
material of construction. It establishes principles and requirements for
safety, serviceability and durability of structures. (Note, the correct title
is Eurocode not Eurocode 0.) The Eurocode uses a statistical approach
to determine realistic values for actions that occur in combination with
each other.
There is no equivalent British Standard for Eurocode: Basis of structural
design and the corresponding information has traditionally been
replicated in each of the material Eurocodes. It also introduces new
definitions (see Glossary) and symbols (see Tables 2a and 2b), which
will be used throughout this publication to assist familiarity. Partial
factors for actions are given in this Eurocode, whilst partial factors for
materials are prescribed in their relevant Eurocode.
Representative values
For each variable action there are four representative values. The
principal representative value is the characteristic value and this can be
determined statistically or, where there is insufficient data, a nominal
value may be used. The other representative values are combination,
frequent and quasipermanent; these are obtained by applying to the
characteristic value the factors c
0
, c
1
and c
2
respectively (see Figure 3).
A semiprobabilistic method is used to derive the c factors, which vary
depending on the type of imposed load (see Table 3). Further information
on derivation of the c factors can be found in Appendix C of the Eurocode.
The combination value (c
0
Q
k
) of an action is intended to take
account of the reduced probability of the simultaneous occurrence of
two or more variable actions. The frequent value ( c
1
Q
k
) is such that it
should be exceeded only for a short period of time and is used
primarily for the serviceability limit states (SLS) and also the accidental
ultimate limit state (ULS). The quasipermanent value ( c
2
Q
k
) may be
exceeded for a considerable period of time; alternatively it may be
considered as an average loading over time. It is used for the longterm
affects at the SLS and also accidental and seismic ULS.
Combinations of actions
In the Eurocodes the term ‘combination of actions’ is specifically used
for the definition of the magnitude of actions to be used when a limit
state is under the influence of different actions. It should not be
confused with ‘load cases’, which are concerned with the arrangement
of the variable actions to give the most unfavourable conditions and
are given in the material Eurocodes. The following process can be used
to determine the value of actions used for analysis:
1. Identify the design situation (e.g. persistent, transient, accidental).
2. Identify all realistic actions.
3. Determine the partial factors (see below) for each applicable
combination of actions.
4. Arrange the actions to produce the most critical conditions.
2
How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2
33
Action
c
0
c
1
c
2
Imposed loads in buildings (see BS EN 1991–1–1)
Category A: domestic, residential areas 0.7 0.5 0.3
Category B: office areas 0.7 0.5 0.3
Category C: congregation areas 0.7 0.7 0.6
Category D: shopping areas 0.7 0.7 0.6
Category E: storage areas 1.0 0.9 0.8
Category F: traffic area, vehicle weight < 30 kN 0.7 0.7 0.6
Category G: traffic area, 30 kN < vehicle weight < 160 kN 0.7 0.5 0.3
Category H: roofs* 0.7 0 0
Snow loads on buildings (see BS EN 1991–3)
For sites located at altitude H > 1000 m above sea level 0.7 0.5 0.2
For sites located at altitude H < 1000 m above sea level 0.5 0.2 0
Wind loads on buildings (see BS EN 1991–1–4) 0.5 0.2 0
Temperature (nonfire) in buildings (see BS EN 1991–1–5) 0.6 0.5 0
Key
*See also 1991–1–1: Clause 3.3.2
3
Figure 3
Representative values of variable actions
⁵
Table 2b
Selected subscripts
Table 3
Recommended values of
c
factors for buildings (from UK National Annex)
Table 2a
Selected symbols for Eurocode
Symbol Definition
G
k
Characteristic value of permanent action
Q
k
Characteristic value of single variable action
g
G Partial factor for permanent action
g
Q Partial factor for variable action
c
0 Factor for combination value of a variable action
c
1 Factor for frequent value of a variable action
c
2 Factor for quasipermanent value of a variable action
j
Combination factor for permanent actions
Subscript Definition
A Accidental situation
c Concrete
d Design
E Effect of action
fi Fire
k Characteristic
R Resistance
w Shear reinforcement
y Yield strength
Characteristic value of QK
I
n
s
t
a
n
t
a
n
e
o
u
s
v
a
l
u
e
o
f
Q
Time
Combination value of c0QK
Frequent value of c1QK
Quasi
permanent
value of c2QK
Where there is only one variable action (e.g. imposed load) in a
combination, the magnitude of the actions can be obtained by
multiplying them by the appropriate partial factors.
Where there is more than one variable action in a combination, it is
necessary to identify the leading action (Q
k,1
) and other accompanying
actions (Q
k,i
). The accompanying action is always taken as the
combination value.
Ultimate limit state
The ultimate limit states are divided into the following categories:
EQU Loss of equilibrium of the structure.
STR Internal failure or excessive deformation of the structure
or structural member.
GEO Failure due to excessive deformation of the ground.
FAT Fatigue failure of the structure or structural members.
The Eurocode gives different combinations for each of these ultimate
limit states. For the purpose of this publication only the STR ultimate
limit state will be considered.
For persistent and transient design situations under the STR limit
state, the Eurocode defines three possible combinations, which are given
in Expressions (6.10), (6.10a) and (6.10b) of the Eurocode (see Tables 4
and 5). The designer (for UK buildings) may use either (6.10) or the less
favourable of (6.10a) and (6.10b).
At first sight it appears that there is considerably more calculation
required to determine the appropriate load combination; however, with
experience the designer will be able to determine this by inspection.
Expression (6.10) is always equal to or more conservative than the less
favourable of Expressions (6.10a) and (6.10b). Expression (6.10b) will
normally apply when the permanent actions are not greater than 4.5
times the variable actions (except for storage loads (category E, Table 3)
where Expression (6.10a) always applies).
Therefore, for a typical concrete frame building, Expression (6.10b) will
give the most structurally economical combination of actions.
Serviceability limit state
There are three combinations of actions that can be used to check the
serviceability limit states (see Tables 6 and 7). Eurocode 2 indicates
which combination should be used for which phenomenon (e.g.
deflection is checked using the quasipermanent combination). Care
should be taken not to confuse the SLS combinations of characteristic,
frequent and quasipermanent, with the representative values that
have the same titles.
For members supporting one variable action the combination
1.25 G
k
+ 1.5 Q
k
(derived from (Exp 6.10b))
can be used provided the permanent actions are not greater
than 4.5 times the variable actions (except for storage loads).
3
1. Introduction to Eurocodes
4 4
Table 4
Design values of actions, ultimate limit state – persistent and transient design situations (table A1.2 (B) Eurocode)
Table 5
Design values of actions, derived for UK design, ultimate limit state – persistent and transient design situations
Table 6
Design values of actions, serviceability limit states
Table 7
Example design combinations for deflection (quasipermanent) derived for typical UK reinforced concrete design
Combination Expression reference Permanent actions Leading variable action Accompanying variable actions
Unfavourable Favourable Main (if any) Others
Exp. (6.10) g
G, j , sup
G
k , j , sup
g
G, j , inf
G
k , j , inf
g
Q,1
Q
k,1
g
Q,1
c
0,1
Q
k, i
Exp. (6.10a) g
G, j , sup
G
k , j , sup
g
G, j , inf
G
k , j , inf
g
Q,1
c
0,1
Q
k,1
g
Q,1
c
0,1
Q
k,i
Exp. (6.10b) jg
G, j , sup
G
k , j , sup
g
G, j , inf
G
k , j , inf
g
Q,1
Q
k,1
g
Q,1
c
0,1
Q
k, i
Note
1 Design for either Expression (6.10) or the less favourable of Expressions (6.10a) and (6.10b).
Combination Expression reference Permanent actions Leading variable action Accompanying variable actions
Unfavourable Favourable Main (if any) Others
Combination of permanent and variable actions
Exp. (6.10) 1.35 G
k
a
1.0 G
k
a
1.5
c
Q
k
Exp. (6.10a) 1.35 G
k
a
1.0 G
k
a
1.5 c
0,1
b
Q
k
Exp. (6.10b) 0.925
d
x 1.35 G
k
a
1.0 G
k
a
1.5
c
Q
k
Combination of permanent, variable and accompanying variable actions
Exp. (6.10) 1.35 G
k
a
1.0 G
k
a
1.5
c
Q
k,1
1.5
c
c
0,i
b
Q
k, i
Exp. (6.10a) 1.35 G
k
a
1.0 G
k
a
1.5 c
0,1
b
Q
k
1.5
c
c
0,i
b
Q
k,i
Exp. (6.10b) 0.925
d
x 1.35 G
k
a
1.0 G
k
a
1.5
c
Q
k,1
1.5
c
c
0,i
b
Q
k,i
Key
a Where the variation in permanent action is not considered significant, G
k,j,sup
and G
k,j,inf
may be taken as G
k
b The value of
c
0
can be obtained from Table NA A1.1 of the UK National Annex (reproduced here as Table 3)
c Where the accompanying load is favourable, g
Q,i
= 0
d The value of j in the UK National Annex is 0.925
Combination Permanent actions Variable actions Example of use in Eurocode 2
Unfavourable Favourable Leading Others
Characteristic G
k,j,sup
G
k,j,inf
Q
k,1
c
0, i
Q
k,i
Frequent G
k,j,sup
G
k,j,inf
c
1,1
Q
k,1
c
2, i
Q
k,i
Cracking – prestressed concrete
Quasipermanent G
k,j,sup
G
k,j,inf
c
2,1
Q
k,1
c
2, i
Q
k,i
Deflection
Notes
1 Where the variation in permanent action is not considered significant. G
k,j,sup
and G
k,j,inf
may be taken as G
k
2 For values of
c
0,
c
1
and
c
2
refer to Table 3
Combination Permanent actions Variable action
Unfavourable Leading
Office G
k
a
0.3
b
Q
k,1
Shopping area G
k
a
0.6
b
Q
k,1
Storage G
k
a
0.8
b
Q
k,1
Key
a Where the variation in permanent action is not considered significant G
k,j,sup
and G
k,j,inf
may be taken as G
k
b Values of
c
2
are taken from UK NA (see Table 3)
4
How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2
555
Table 8
Eurocode 1, its parts and dates of publication
Figure 4
Relationship between Eurocode 2 and other Eurocodes
Key
a Planned publication date (correct at time of publication) Source: BSI
8
BS EN 1997
EUROCODE 7
Geotechnical
design
BS EN 206
Specifying
concrete
BS 8500
Specifying
concrete
BS EN 13670
Execution of
structures
BS EN 1990
EUROCODE
Basis of structural
design
BS EN 1991
EUROCODE 1
Actions on
structures
BS EN 1992
EUROCODE 2
Design of concrete
structures
Part 1–1: General
rules for structures
Part 1–2: Structural
fire design
BS EN 1992 Part 3:
EUROCODE 2
Liquidretaining
structures
BS EN 1992
EUROCODE 2
Part 2:
Bridges
BS EN 1998
EUROCODE 8
Seismic
design
BS EN 10080
Reinforcing
steels
BS 4449
Reinforcing
steels
BS EN 13369
Precast
concrete
Precast
concrete
product
standards
Reference Title Publication date
Eurocode National Annex
BS EN 1991–1–1 Densities, July December
selfweight and 2002 2005
imposed loads
BS EN 1991–1–2 Actions on November Due
structures 2002 October
exposed to fire 2006
a
BS EN 1991–1–3 Snow loads July December
2003 2005
BS EN 1991–1–4 Wind actions April Due
2005 January
2007
a
BS EN 1991–1–5 Thermal actions March Due
2004 December
2006
a
BS EN 1991–1–6 Actions during December Due
execution 2005 June
2007
a
BS EN 1991–1–7 Accidental actions September Due
due to impact 2006 October
and explosions 2007
a
BS EN 1991–2 Traffic loads October Due
on bridges 2003 December
2006
a
BS EN 1991–3 Actions induced September Due
by cranes 2006 January
and machinery 2007
a
BS EN 1991–4 Actions in silos June Due
and tanks 2006 June
2007
a
Eurocode 1
Eurocode 1 supersedes BS 6399: Loading for buildings
6
and BS 648:
Schedule of weights of building materials
7
. It contains within its ten parts
(see Table 8) all the information required by the designer to assess the
individual actions on a structure. It is generally selfexplanatory and it
is anticipated the actions to be used in the UK (as advised in the UK
National Annex) will typically be the same as those in the current
British Standards. The most notable exception is the bulk density of
reinforced concrete, which has been increased to 25 kN/m
3
. Currently
not all the parts of Eurocode 1 and their National Annexes are
available, in which case it is advised that the loads recommended in
the current British Standards are used.
Eurocode 2
There are four parts to Eurocode 2; Figure 4 indicates how they fit into
the Eurocode system, which includes other European standards.
Part 1–1
Eurocode 2, Part 1–1: General rules and rules for buildings
9
is the
principal part which is referenced by the three other parts. For the UK
designer there are a number of differences between Eurocode 2 and
BS 8110, which will initially make the new Eurocode seem unfamiliar.
The key differences are listed below to assist in the familiarisation process.
1. Eurocode 2 is generally laid out to give advice on the basis of
phenomena (e.g. bending, shear etc) rather than by member
types as in BS 8110 (e.g. beams, slabs, columns etc).
2. Design is based on characteristic cylinder strengths not cube
strengths.
3. The Eurocode does not provide derived formulae (e.g. for bending,
only the details of the stress block are expressed). This is the
traditional European approach, where the application of a Eurocode
is expected to be provided in a textbook or similar publication.
The Eurocodes allow for this type of detail to be provided in
‘Noncontradictory complementary information’ (NCCI) (See
Glossary).
4. Units for stress are mega pascals, MPa (1 MPa = 1 N/mm
2
).
5. Eurocode 2 uses a comma for a decimal point. It is expected that
UK designers will continue to use a decimal point. Therefore to
avoid confusion, the comma should not be used for separating
multiples of a thousand.
6. One thousandth is represented by ‰.
7. The partial factor for steel reinforcement is 1.15. However, the
characteristic yield strength of steel that meets the requirements
of BS 4449 will be 500 MPa; so overall the effect is negligible.
8. Eurocode 2 is applicable for ribbed reinforcement with characteristic
yield strengths of 400 to 600 MPa. There is no guidance on plain
bar or mild steel reinforcement in the Eurocode, but guidance is
given in the background paper to the UK National Annex
10
.
9. The effects of geometric imperfection (‘notional horizontal loads’)
are considered in addition to lateral loads.
5
1. Introduction to Eurocodes
6 6
10. Minimum concrete cover is related to bond strength, durability
and fire resistance. In addition to the minimum cover an
allowance for deviations due to variations in execution
(construction) should be included. Eurocode 2 recommends
that, for concrete cast against formwork, this is taken as 10 mm,
unless the construction is subject to a quality assurance system
in which case it could be reduced to 5 mm or even 0 mm where
nonconforming members are rejected (e.g. in a precast yard).
It is recommended that the nominal cover is stated on the
drawings and construction tolerances are given in the
specification.
11. Higher strengths of concrete are covered by Eurocode 2, up to
class C90/105. However, because the characteristics of higher
strength concrete are different, some Expressions in the Eurocode
are adjusted for classes above C50/60.
12. The ‘variable strut inclination’ method is used in Eurocode 2 for
the assessment of the shear capacity of a section. In practice,
design values for actual structures can be compared with
tabulated values. Further advice can be found in Chapter 4,
originally published as Beams
11
.
13. The punching shear checks are carried out at 2d from the face of
the column and for a rectangular column, the perimeter is
rounded at the corners.
14. Serviceability checks can still be carried out using ‘deemed to
satisfy’ span to effective depth rules similar to BS 8110. However,
if a more detailed check is required, Eurocode 2 guidance varies
from the rules in BS 8110 Part 2.
15. The rules for determining the anchorage and lap lengths are more
complex than the simple tables in BS 8110. Eurocode 2 considers
the effects of, amongst other things, the position of bars during
concreting, the shape of the bar and cover.
Part 1–2
Eurocode 2, Part 1–2: Structural fire design
12
, gives guidance on design for
fire resistance of concrete structures. Although much of the Eurocode
is devoted to fire engineering methods, the design for fire resistance
may still be carried out by referring to tables for minimum cover and
dimensions for various elements. These are given in section 5 of Part
1–2. Further advice on using the tabular method is given in Chapter 2,
originally published as Getting started
13
.
Part 2
Eurocode 2, Part 2: Bridges
14
applies the general rules given in Part 1–1
to the design of concrete bridges. As a consequence both Part 1–1 and
Part 2 will be required to carry out a design of a reinforced concrete
bridge.
Part 3
Eurocode 2, Part 3: Liquidretaining and containment structures
15
applies
the general rules given in Part 1–1 to the liquidretaining structures
and supersedes BS 8007
16
.
Eurocode 7
Eurocode 7: Geotechnical design
17
is in two parts and gives guidance on
geotechnical design, ground investigation and testing. It has a broad
scope and includes the geotechnical design of spread foundations, piled
foundations, retaining walls, deep basements and embankments. Like
all the Eurocodes it is based on limit state design principles, which is
a significant variation for most geotechnical design. Further guidance
related to simple foundations is given in Chapter 6, originally
ppublished as Foundations
18
.
Eurocode 8
Eurocode 8: Design of structures for earthquake resistance
19
is divided into
six parts and gives guidance on all aspects of design for earthquake
resistance and covers guidance for the various structural materials for
all types of structures. It also includes guidance for strengthening and
repair of buildings. In areas of low seismicity it is anticipated that detailing
structures to Eurocode 2 will ensure compliance with Eurocode 8.
Related Standards
BS 8500/BS EN 206
BS 8500: Concrete – Complementary British Standard to BS EN 206–1
20
replaced BS 5328 in December 2003 and designers should currently
be using this to specify concrete. Further guidance can found in
Chapter 11, originally published as How to use BS 8500 with BS 8110
21
.
BS 4449/BS EN 10080
BS 4449: Specification for carbon steel bars for the reinforcement of
concrete
22
has been revised ready for implementation in January 2006.
It is a complementary standard to BS EN 10080 Steel for the
reinforcement of concrete
23
and Normative Annex C of Eurocode 2. The
most significant changes are that steel characteristic yield will change
to 500 MPa. There are three classes of reinforcement, A, B and C, which
indicate increasing ductility. Class A is not suitable for use where
redistribution of 20% and above has been assumed in the design.
BS EN 13670
BS 8110 Part 1 sections 6 and 7 specify the workmanship for concrete
construction. There is no equivalent guidance in Eurocode 2, and it is
intended that execution (construction) will be covered in a new
standard BS EN 13670 Execution of concrete structures
24
. This is still in
preparation and is not expected to be ready for publication until 2008
at the earliest. In the intervening period the draft background paper to
the UK National Annex of Eurocode 2, Part 1

1
10
recommends that
designers use the National structural concrete specification for building
construction
25
, which refers to BS 8110 for workmanship.
6
How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2
77
Glossary of Eurocode terminology
Term Definition
Principles Clauses that are general statements, definitions, requirements and analytical models for which no
alternative is permitted. They are identified by (P) after the clause number.
Application Rules These are generally recognised rules, which comply with the principles and satisfy their requirements.
Nationally Determined Parameter (NDP) Eurocodes may be used to satisfy national Building Regulations, which themselves will not be
harmonized. NDPs are therefore used to allow a country to set its own levels of safety. NDPs also allow
certain other parameters (generally influenced by climate, geography and geology) to be left open for
selection nationally: NDPs are advised in the National Annex.
National Annex (NA) A National Annex accompanies each Eurocode and it contains a) the values of NDPs b) the national
decision regarding the use of Informative Annexes and c) references to NCCIs
Normative The term used for the text of Standards that forms the core requirements. Compliance with Eurocodes
will generally be judged against the normative requirements.
Informative A term used only in relation to annexes, which seek to inform rather than require.
NCCI Noncontradictory complementary information. References in a National Annex which contains further
information or guidance which does not contradict the Eurocode.
Characteristic value A value that may be derived statistically with a probability of not being exceeded during a reference
period. The value corresponds to a specified fractile for a particular property of material or product. The
characteristic values are denoted by subscript ‘k’ (e.g. Q
k
etc). It is the principal representative value
from which other representative values may be derived.
Representative value Value used for verification of a limit state. It may be the characteristic value or an accompanying value,
e.g. combination, frequent or quasipermanent.
Design values These refer to representative values modified by partial factors. They are denoted by subscript ‘d’
(e.g. f
cd
= f
ck
/g
c ;
Q
d
= g
Q
Q
k
).
Action (F) Set of forces, deformations or accelerations acting on the structure.
Combination of actions Set of design values used for the verification of the structural reliability for a limit state under the
simultaneous influence of different and statistically independent actions.
Fixed action Action that has a fixed distribution and position over the structure or structural member.
Free action Action that may have various spatial distributions over the structure.
Permanent actions (G) Actions that are likely to act throughout the life of the structure and whose variation in magnitude
with time is negligible (e.g. permanent loads).
Variable actions (Q) Actions whose magnitude will vary with time (e.g. wind loads).
Effect of action (E) Deformation or internal force caused by an action.
Accidental action (A) Action, usually of short duration but of significant magnitude, that is unlikely to occur on a given
structure during the design working life.
Accompanying action An action in a combination that is not the leading variable action.
Transient design situation Design situation that is relevant during a period much shorter than the design working life of the structure.
Persistent design situation Design situation that is relevant during a period of the same order as the design working life of the structure.
Accidental design situation Design situation involving exceptional conditions of the structure.
Irreversible serviceability limit state Serviceability limit state where some consequences of actions will remain when the actions are removed.
Reversible serviceability limit state Serviceability limit state where no consequences of actions will remain when the actions are removed.
Execution Construction of the works.
7
1. Introduction to Eurocodes
8
References
1 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. BS EN 1992, Eurocode 2: Design of concrete structures. BSI (4 parts).
2 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. BS EN 1990, Eurocode: Basis of structural design. BSI, 2002.
3 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. BS EN 1991, Eurocode 1: Actions on structures. BSI (10 parts).
4 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. BS 8110: The structural use of concrete. BSI (3 parts).
5 GULVANESSIAN, H, CALGARO, J A & HOLIC
´
Y, M T. Designers’ guide to EN 1990. Thomas Telford, 2002.
6 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. BS 6399: Loading for buildings. BSI (3 parts).
7 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. BS 648: Schedule of weights of building materials. BSI, 1964.
8 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. Web page: www.bsiglobal.com/Eurocodes/Progress/index.xalter. BSI.
9 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. BS EN 1992–1–1, Eurocode 2: Design of concrete structures. General rules and rules for buildings. BSI, 2004.
10 BRITISH STANDARD INSTITUTION. PD 6687. Background paper to the UK National Annex to BS EN 1992–1–1. BSI, 2006.
11 MOSS, R M &BROOKER, O. How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2: Beams (TCC/03/19). The Concrete Centre, 2006.
12 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. BS EN 1992–1–2, Eurocode 2: Design of concrete structures. Structural fire design. BSI, 2004.
13 BROOKER, O. How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2: Getting started (TCC/03/17). The Concrete Centre, 2005.
14 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. BS EN 1992–2, Eurocode 2: Design of concrete structures. Bridges. BSI, 2005.
15 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. BS EN 1992–3, Eurocode 2: Design of concrete structures. Liquidretaining and containment structures.
BSI, due 2006.
16 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. BS 8007: Code of practice for design of concrete structures for retaining aqueous liquids. BSI, 1987.
17 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. BS EN 1997, Eurocode 7: Geotechnical design. BSI (2 parts).
18 WEBSTER, R &BROOKER, O. How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2: Foundations (TCC/03/21). The Concrete Centre, 2006.
19 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. BS EN 1998, Eurocode 8: Design of structures for earthquake resistance. BSI (6 parts).
20 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. BS 8500: Concrete – Complementary British Standard to BS EN 206–1, 2002 (2 parts).
21 HARRISON, T A &BROOKER, O. How to use BS 8500 with BS 8110 (TCC/03/11). The Concrete Centre, 2005.
22 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. BS 4449: Specification for carbon steel bars for the reinforcement of concrete. BSI, 2005.
23 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. BS EN 10080: Steel for the reinforcement of concrete – Weldable reinforcing steel – General. BSI, 2005.
24 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. EN 13670: Execution of concrete structures – Part 1: Common. BSI, due 2008.
25 THE CONCRETE SOCIETY. CS 152: National structural concrete specification for building construction, third edition. The Society, 2004.
8
1. Introduction to Eurocodes
The design process
This chapter is intended to assist the designer determine all the design
information required prior to embarking on detailed element design. It
covers design life, actions on structures, load arrangements, combinations
of actions, method of analysis, material properties, stability and
imperfections, minimum concrete cover and maximum crack widths.
The process of designing elements will not be revolutionised as a result
of using Eurocode 2
1
, although much of the detail may change – as
described in subsequent chapters.
Similarly, the process of detailing will not vary significantly from current
practice. Guidance can be found in Chapter 10 or in Standard method of
detailing
2
. With regard to specification, advice can be found in Chapter 1,
originally published as Introduction to Eurocodes
3
. Concept designs
prepared assuming that detailed design would be to BS 8110 may be
continued through to detailed design using Eurocode 2.
In the longterm it is anticipated that Eurocode 2 will lead to more
economic structures.
Design life
The design life for a structure is given in Eurocode: Basis of structural
design
4
. The UK National Annex (NA) to Eurocode presents UK values
for design life; these are given in Table 1 (overleaf). These should be used
to determine the durability requirements for the design of reinforced
concrete structures.
Actions on structures
Eurocode 1: Actions on structures
5
consists of 10 parts giving details of
a wide variety of actions. Further information on the individual codes
can be found in Chapter 1. Eurocode 1, Part 1–1: General actions –
Densities, selfweight, imposed loads for buildings
6
gives the densities and
selfweights of building materials (see Table 2 overleaf).
The key change to current practice is that the bulk density of reinforced
concrete has been increased to 25 kN/m
3
. The draft National Annex to
this Eurocode gives the imposed loads for UK buildings and a selection is
How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2
2. Getting started
O Brooker BEng, CEng, MICE, MIStructE
10
reproduced in Table 3. It should be noted that there is no advice given
for plant rooms.
At the time of writing not all the parts of Eurocode 1 and their National
Annexes are available; it is advised that existing standards are considered
for use where European standards have not yet been issued.
Load arrangements
The term load arrangements refers to the arranging of variable actions
(e.g. imposed and wind loads) to give the most onerous forces in a
member or structure and are given in Eurocode 2 and its UK NA.
For building structures, the UK NA to Eurocode 2, Part 1–1 allows any
of the following sets of load arrangements to be used for both the
ultimate limit state and serviceability limit state:
Load set 1. Alternate or adjacent spans loaded
The design values should be obtained from the more critical of:
■ Alternate spans carrying the design variable and permanent loads
with other spans loaded with only the design permanent load (see
Figure 1). The value of
g
G
should be the same throughout.
■ Any two adjacent spans carrying the design variable and
permanent loads with other spans loaded with only the design
permanent load (see Figure 2). The value of
g
G
should be the
same throughout.
Load set 2. All or alternate spans loaded
The design values should be obtained from the more critical of:
■ All spans carrying the design variable and permanent loads
(see Figure 3).
■ Alternate spans carrying the design variable and permanent loads
with other spans loaded with only the design permanent load (see
Figure 1). The value of
g
G
should be the same throughout.
Generally, load set 2 will be used for beams and slabs in the UK as it
requires three load arrangements to be considered, while load set 1
will often require more than three arrangements to be assessed.
Alternatively, the UK NA makes the following provision for slabs.
Load set 3. Simplified arrangements for slabs
The load arrangements can be simplified for slabs where it is only
necessary to consider the all spans loaded arrangement (see Figure 3),
provided the following conditions are met:
■ In a oneway spanning slab the area of each bay exceeds 30 m
2
(a bay means a strip across the full width of a structure bounded
on the other sides by lines of support).
■ The ratio of the variable actions (Q
k
) to the permanent actions (G
k
)
does not exceed 1.25.
■ The magnitude of the variable actions excluding partitions does not
exceed 5 kN/m
2
.
2
Figure 2
Adjacent spans loaded
Figure 3
All spans loaded
Figure 1
Alternate spans loaded
Table 1
Indicative design working life (from UK National Annex to Eurocode)
Design life (years) Examples
10 Temporary structures
10–30 Replaceable structural parts
15–25 Agricultural and similar structures
50 Buildings and other common structures
120 Monumental buildings, bridges and other civil
engineering structures
Table 2
Selected bulk density of materials (from Eurocode 1, Part 1–1)
Material Bulk density (kN/m
3
)
Normal weight concrete 24.0
Reinforced normal weight concrete 25.0
Wet normal weight reinforced concrete 26.0
10
How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2
113
Combination of actions
The term combination of actions refers to the value of actions to be
used when a limit state is under the influence of different actions.
The numerical values of the partial factors for the ULS combination can
be obtained by referring to Eurocode: Basis of structural design or to
Chapter 1.
.(
There are three SLS combinations of actions – characteristic, frequent
and quasipermanent. The numerical values are given in Eurocode: Basis
of structural design.
Material properties
Concrete
In Eurocode 2 the design of reinforced concrete is based on the
characteristic cylinder strength rather than cube strength and should
be specified according to BS 8500: Concrete – complementary British
Standard to BS EN 206–1
7
(e.g. for class C28/35 concrete the cylinder
strength is 28 MPa, whereas the cube strength is 35 MPa). Typical
concrete properties are given in Table 4.
Concrete up to class C90/105 can be designed using Eurocode 2.
For classes above C50/60, however, there are additional rules and
variations. For this reason, the design of these higher classes is not
considered in this publication.
It should be noted that designated concretes (e.g. RC30) still refer
to the cube strength.
Reinforcing steel
Eurocode 2 can be used with reinforcement of characteristic
strengths ranging from 400 to 600 MPa. The properties of steel
reinforcement in the UK for use with Eurocode 2 are given in
BS 4449 (2005): Specification for carbon steel bars for the
reinforcement of concrete
8
and are summarised in Table 5 (on page 4).
A characteristic yield strength of 500 MPa has been adopted by the
UK reinforcement industry. There are three classes of reinforcement,
A, B and C, which provide increasing ductility. Class A is not suitable
where redistribution of 20% and above has been assumed in the
design. There is no provision for the use of plain bar or mild steel
reinforcement, but guidance is given in the background paper to the
National Annex
9
.
Table 4
Selected concrete properties based on Table 3.1 of Eurocode 2, Part 1–1
Table 3
Selected imposed loads for buildings (from draft UK National Annex to Eurocode 1, Part 1–1)
For members supporting one variable action the ULS combination
1.25 G
k
+ 1.5 Q
k
(derived from Exp. (6.10b), Eurocode)
can be used provided the permanent actions are not greater than
4.5 times the variable actions (except for storage loads).
Symbol Description Properties
f
ck
(MPa) Characteristic cylinder strength 12 16 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 28
a
32
a
f
ck,cube
(MPa) Characteristic cube strength 15 20 25 30 37 45 50 55 60 35 40
f
ctm
(MPa) Mean tensile strength 1.6 1.9 2.2 2.6 2.9 3.2 3.5 3.8 4.1 2.8 3.0
E
cm
b
(GPa) Secant modulus of elasticity 27 29 30 31 33 34 35 36 37 32 34
Key
a Concrete class not cited in Table 3.1, Eurocode 2, Part 1–1
b Mean secant modulus of elasticity at 28 days for concrete with quartzite aggregates. For concretes with other aggregates refer to Cl 3.1.3 (2)
Category Example use q
k
(kN/m
2
) Q
k
(kN)
A1 All uses within selfcontained dwelling units 1.5 2.0
A2 Bedrooms and dormitories 1.5 2.0
A3 Bedrooms in hotels and motels, hospital wards and toilets 2.0 2.0
A5 Balconies in single family dwelling units 2.5 2.0
A7 Balconies in hotels and motels 4.0 min. 2.0 at outer edge
B1 Offices for general use 2.5 2.7
C5 Assembly area without fixed seating, concert halls, bars, places of worship 5.0 3.6
D1/2 Shopping areas 4.0 3.6
E12 General storage 2.4 per m height 7.0
E17 Dense mobile stacking in warehouses 4.8 per m height (min. 15.0) 7.0
F Gross vehicle weight ≤ 30kN 2.5 10.0
11
2. Getting started
12 4
Structural analysis
The primary purpose of structural analysis in building structures is to
establish the distribution of internal forces and moments over the
whole or part of a structure and to identify the critical design
conditions at all sections. The geometry is commonly idealised by
considering the structure to be made up of linear elements and plane
twodimensional elements.
The type of analysis should be appropriate to the problem being
considered. The following may be used: linear elastic analysis, linear
elastic analysis with limited redistribution, and plastic analysis. Linear
elastic analysis may be carried out assuming cross sections are
uncracked (i.e. concrete section properties); using linear stressstrain
relationships, and assuming mean values of elastic modulus.
For the ultimate limit state only, the moments derived from elastic
analysis may be redistributed (up to a maximum of 30%) provided
that the resulting distribution of moments remains in equilibrium with
the applied loads and subject to certain limits and design criteria (e.g.
limitations of depth to neutral axis).
Regardless of the method of analysis used, the following principles apply:
■ Where a beam or slab is monolithic with its supports, the critical
design hogging moment may be taken as that at the face of the
support, but should not be taken as less than 0.65 times the full
fixed end moment.
■ Where a beam or slab is continuous over a support that may be
considered not to provide rotational restraint, the moment
calculated at the centre line of the support may be reduced by
(F
Ed,sup
t/8), where F
Ed,sup
is the support reaction and t is the breadth
of the support.
■ For the design of columns the elastic moments from the frame
action should be used without any redistribution.
Bending moment and shear force coefficients for beams are given in
Table 6; these are suitable where spans are of similar length and the
other notes to the table are observed.
Minimum concrete cover
The nominal cover can be assessed as follows:
Where c
min
should be set to satisfy the requirements below:
■ safe transmission of bond forces
■ durability
■ fire resistance
and Dc
dev
is an allowance which should be made in the design for
deviations from the minimum cover. It should be taken as 10 mm,
unless fabrication (i.e. construction) is subjected to a quality assurance
system, in which case it is permitted to reduce Dc
dev
to 5 mm.
Table 6
Bending moment and shear coefficients for beams
Table 7
Exposure classes
Class Description
No risk of corrosion or attack
X0 For concrete without reinforcement or embedded metal where there
is no significant freeze/thaw, abrasion or chemical attack.
Corrosion induced by carbonation
XC1 Dry or permanently wet
XC2 Wet, rarely dry
XC3/4 Moderate humidity or cyclic wet and dry
Corrosion induced by chlorides other than from seawater
XD1 Moderate humidity
XD2 Wet, rarely dry
XD3 Cyclic wet and dry
Corrosion induced by chlorides from seawater
XS1 Exposed to airborne salt but not in direct contact with sea water
XS2 Permanently submerged
XS3 Tidal, splash and spray zones
Freeze/thaw with or without deicing agents
XF1 Moderate water saturation without deicing agent
XF2 Moderate water saturation with deicing agent
XF3 High water saturation without deicing agent
XF4 High water saturation with deicing agent or sea water
Chemical attack (ACEC classes)
Refer to BS 8500–1 and Special Digest 1
11
Table 5
Characteristic tensile properties of reinforcement
Class (BS 4449) and designation (BS 8666) A B C
Characteristic yield strength f
yk
or f
0.2k
(MPa) 500 500 500
Minimum value of k = ( f
t
/f
y
)
k
≥ 1.05 ≥ 1.08 ≥ 1.15 < 1.35
Characteristic strain at maximum force e
uk
(%) ≥ 2.5 ≥ 5.0 ≥ 7.5
Notes
1 Table derived from BS EN 1992–1–1 Annex C, BS 4449: 2005 and BS EN 10080
10
.
2 The nomenclature used in BS 4449: 2005 differs from that used in BS EN 1992–1–1
Annex C and used here.
3 In accordance with BS 8666, class H may be specified, in which case class A, B or C
may be supplied.
Moment Shear
Outer support 25% of span moment 0.45 (G + Q)
Near middle of end span 0.090 Gl + 0.100 Ql
At first interior support – 0.094 (G + Q) l 0.63 (G + Q)
a
At middle of interior spans 0.066 Gl + 0.086 Ql
At interior supports – 0.075 (G + Q) l 0.50 (G + Q)
Key
a 0.55 (G + Q) may be used adjacent to the interior span.
Notes
1 Redistribution of support moments by 15% has been included.
2 Applicable to 3 or more spans only and where Q
k
≤ G
k
.
3 Minimum span ≥ 0.85 longest span.
4 l is the effective length, G is the total of the ULS permanent actions, Q is the total
of the ULS variable actions.
c
nom
= c
min
+ Dc
dev
Exp. (4.1)
12
How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2
135
Minimum cover for bond
The minimum cover to ensure adequate bond should not be less than
the bar diameter, or equivalent bar diameter for bundled bars, unless
the aggregate size is over 32 mm.
Minimum cover for durability
The recommendations for durability in Eurocode 2 are based on
BS EN 206–1
12
. In the UK the requirements of BS EN 206 –1 are
applied through the complementary standard BS 8500. The UK
National Annex (Table 4.3 (N) (BS)) gives durability requirements that
comply with BS 8500, but which significantly modify the approach
taken in Eurocode 2. To determine the minimum cover for durability
(and also the strength class and minimum water cement ratio) either
the UK National Annex or BS 8500 can be used.
The various exposure classes from BS 8500 are given in Table 7. Selected
recommendations are given in Table 8 (on page 6) for the concrete
strength, minimum cement ratio, minimum concrete cover and maximum
cement content for various elements in a structure based on the exposure
of that element. This is taken from Chapter 11, originally published as
How to use BS 8500 with BS 8110
13
.
Design for fire resistance
Eurocode 2 Part 1–2: Structural fire design
14
, gives several methods
for determining the fire resistance of concrete elements; further
guidance can be obtained from specialist literature. Design for
fire resistance may still be carried out by referring to tables to
determine the minimum cover and dimensions for various elements,
as set out below.
Rather than giving the minimum cover, the tabular method is based
on nominal axis distance, a (see Figure 4). This is the distance from the
centre of the main reinforcing bar to the surface of the member. It is
a nominal (not minimum) dimension. The designer should ensure that
a ≥ c
nom
+ f
link
+ f
bar
/2.
There are three standard fire exposure conditions that may be satisfied:
R Mechanical resistance for load bearing
E Integrity of separation
I Insulation
Tables 9 and 10 give the minimum dimensions for columns and slabs
to meet the above conditions. The tables offer more flexibility than
BS 8110 in that there are options available to the designer e.g. section
sizes can be reduced by increasing the axis distance. Further information
is given in Eurocode 2 and subsequent chapters, including design
limitations and data for walls and beams.
Table 9
Minimum column dimensions and axis distances for columns with
rectangular or circular section – method A
Standard fire Minimum dimensions (mm)
resistance Column width ( b
min
)/axis distance (a) of the main bars
Column exposed on more Exposed on one side
than one side (
m
f i
= 0.7) (
m
f i
= 0.7)
R 60 250/46 155/25
350/40
R 120 350/57* 175/35
450/51*
R 240 † 295/70
Notes
1 Refer to BS EN 1992–1–2 for design limitations.
2
m
fi
is the ratio of the design axial load under fire conditions to the design resistance
of the column at normal temperature conditions. Conservatively
m
fi
may be taken
as 0.7
* Minimum 8 bars
† Method B indicates 600/70 for R 240 and
m
fi
= 0.7 and may be used.
See EN 1992–1–2 Table 5.2b
Standard Minimum dimensions (mm)
fire
Oneway Twoway spanning slab Flat slab Ribs in a twoway spanning ribbed slab
resistance
spanning slab
l
y
/l
x
≤ 1.5 1.5 < l
y
/l
x
≤ 2 (b
min
is the width of the rib)
REI 60 h
s
= 80 80 80 180 b
min
= 100 120 ≥200
a = 20 10 15 15 a = 25 15 10
REI 120 h
s
= 120 120 120 200 b
min
= 160 190 ≥300
a = 40 20 25 35 a = 45 40 30
REI 240 h
s
= 175 175 175 200 b
min
= 450 700
a = 65 40 50 50 a = 70 60
–––
Notes
1 Refer to BS EN 1992–1–2 for design limitations.
2 a is the axis distance (see Figure 4).
3 h
s
is the slab thickness, including any noncombustible flooring.
Figure 4
Sections through structural members, showing nominal axis distance, a
Table 10
Minimum dimensions and axis distances for reinforced concrete slabs
13
2. Getting started
14 6
Table 8
Selected
a
recommendations for normalweight reinforced concrete quality for combined exposure classes and cover to reinforcement for at least a
50year intended working life and 20 mm maximum aggregate size
Exposure conditions Cement/
combination
designations
b
Nominal cover to reinforcement
d
Typical example Primary Secondary
15 +Dc
dev
20 +Dc
dev
25 +Dc
dev
30 +Dc
dev
35 +Dc
dev
40 +Dc
dev
45 +Dc
dev
50 +Dc
dev
Strength class
c
, maximum w/c ratio, minimum cement or combination
content (kg/m
3
), and equivalent designated concrete (where applicable)
Recommended that this exposure is not applied to reinforced concrete
Internal mass
concrete
Internal elements
(except humid
locations)
Buried concrete
in AC1 ground
conditions
e
Vertical surface
protected from
direct rainfall
Exposed vertical
surfaces
Exposed horizontal
surfaces
Elements subject
to airborne
chlorides
Car park decks and
areas subject to
deicing spray
Vertical elements
subject to deicing
spray and freezing
Car park decks,
ramps and external
areas subject to
freezing and
deicing salts
Exposed vertical
surfaces near coast
Exposed horizontal
surfaces near coast
X0
___
XC1
XC2
XC3
&
XC4
XD1
f
XD3
f
XS1
f
___
AC1
___
XF1
XF3
___
___
XF2
XF4
XF4 (air
entrained)
XF4
XF1
XF3 (air
entrained)
All
All
All
All except IVB
All except IVB
All except IVB
All except IVB
All
IIBV, IIIA
CEM I, IIA,
IIBS, SRPC
IIIB, IVBV
IIBV, IIIA
CEM I, IIA,
IIBS, SRPC
IIIB, IVBV
CEM I, IIA,
IIBS, SRPC
IIBV, IIIA, IIIB
CEM I, IIA,
IIBS, SRPC
IIBV, IIIA
IIIB
CEM I, IIA,
IIBS, SRPC
C20/25,
0.70, 240 or
RC20/25
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
<<<
___
C40/50,
0.45, 340 or
RC40/50
C40/50,
0.45, 340 or
RC40/50
C40/50,0.45,
340
g
or
RC40/50XF
g
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
<<<
C25/30,
0.65, 260 or
RC25/30
C30/37,
0.55, 300
or RC30/37
C30/37,
0.55, 300
or RC30/37
<<<
C32/40,
0.55, 300
plus air
g,h
C40/50,
0.45, 360
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
<<<
<<<
C28/35,
0.60, 280 or
RC28/35
C28/35,
0.60, 280 or
RC28/35
<<<
C28/35,
0.60, 280
plus air
g,h
or PAV2
C32/40,
0.55, 320
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
See
BS 8500
See
BS 8500
C32/40,
0.40, 380
See
BS 8500
<<<
<<<
C25/30,
0.65, 260 or
RC25/30
<<<
<<<
C25/30,
0.60, 280
plus air
g, h, j
or PAV1
C28/35,
0.60, 300
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
C35/45,
0.45, 360
C32/40,
0.45, 360
C25/30,
0.50, 340
C40/50,
0.45, 360
g
<<<
<<<
<<<
<<<
<<<
<<<
<<<
C35/45,
0.40, 380
See
BS 8500
C32/40,
0.40, 380
C35/45,
0.40, 380
See
BS 8500
C32/40,
0.40, 380
See
BS 8500
C28/35,
0.40, 380
g, h
C32/40,
0.50, 340
C28/35,
0.50, 340
C25/30,
0.50, 340
<<<
<<<
<<<
<<<
<<<
<<<
<<<
<<<
C32/40,
0.45, 360
C40/50,
0.40, 380
C28/35,
0.45, 360
C32/40,
0.45, 360
C40/50,
0.40, 380
C32/40
0.45, 360
C40/50,
0.40, 380
g
C28/35
0.45, 360
g, h
<<<
C25/30,
0.55, 320
C25/30,
0.55, 320
<<<
<<<
<<<
<<<
<<<
<<<
<<<
<<<
C28/35,
0.50, 340
C35/45,
0.45, 360
C25/30,
0.50, 340
C32/40,
0.50, 340
C35/45,
0.45, 360
C32/40,
0.50, 340
<<<
C28/35,
0.50, 340
g, h
<<<
<<<
<<<
<<<
___
Not recommended
<<< Indicates that concrete
quality in cell to the left
should not be reduced
Key
a This table comprises a selection of common exposure class combinations.
Requirements for other sets of exposure classes, e.g. XD2, XS2 and XS3 should
be derived from BS 85001: 2002, Annex A.
b See BS 85002, Table 1. (CEM I is Portland cement, IIA to IVB are cement combinations.)
c For prestressed concrete the minimum strength class should be C28/35.
d Dc
dev
is an allowance for deviations.
e For sections less than 140 mm thick refer to BS 8500.
f Also adequate for exposure class XC3/4.
g Freeze/thaw resisting aggregates should be specified.
h Air entrained concrete is required.
j This option may not be suitable for areas subject to
severe abrasion.
14
How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2
15
a) Bracing system b) Floor diaphragm c) Roof diaphragm
7
Figure 5
Examples of the effect of geometric imperfections
Stability and imperfections
The effects of geometric imperfections should be considered in
combination with the effects of wind loads (i.e. not as an alternative
load combination). For global analysis, the imperfections may be
represented by an inclination y
i
.
y
i
= (1/200) x a
h
x a
m
where
a
h
= (2/Rl), to be taken as not less than 2/3 nor greater than 1.0
a
m
= [0.5 (1 + 1/m)]
0
.
5
l is the height of the building in metres
m is the number of vertical members contributing to the horizontal
force in the bracing system.
The effect of the inclination may be represented by transverse forces at
each level and included in the analysis along with other actions (see
Figure 5):
Effect on bracing system: H
i
= y
i
(N
b
– N
a
)
Effect on floor diaphragm: H
i
= y
i
(N
b
+ N
a
)/2
Effect on roof diaphragm: H
i
= y
i
N
a
where N
a
and N
b
are longitudinal forces contributing to H
i
.
In most cases, an allowance for imperfections is made in the partial
factors used in the design of elements. However for columns, the effect
of imperfections, which is similar in principle to the above, must be
considered (see Chapter 5, originally published as Columns
15
).
Steel
stress
(s
s
)MPa
OR OR
Table 11
Maximum bar size or spacing to limit crack width
w
max
= 0.4 mm w
max
= 0.3 mm
Maximum Maximum Maximum Maximum
bar bar bar bar
size (mm) spacing (mm) size (mm) spacing (mm)
160 40 300 32 300
200 32 300 25 250
240 20 250 16 200
280 16 200 12 150
320 12 150 10 100
360 10 100 8 50
Note
The steel stress may be estimated from the expression below (or see Figure 6):
s
s
= f
yk
mA
s,req
g
ms
n A
s,prov
d
where
f
yk
= characteristic reinforcement yield stress
g
ms
= partial factor for reinforcing steel
m = total load from quasipermanent combination
n = total load from ULS combination
A
s,req
= area of reinforcement at the ULS
A
s,prov
= area of reinforcement provided
d = ratio of redistributed moment to elastic moment
Crack control
Crack widths should be limited to ensure appearance and durability
are satisfactory. In the absence of specific durability requirements
(e.g. water tightness) the crack widths may be limited to 0.3 mm in
all exposure classes under the quasipermanent combination. In the
absence of requirements for appearance, this limit may be relaxed (to
say 0.4 mm) for exposure classes X0 and XC1 (refer to Table 7). The
theoretical size of the crack can be calculated using the expressions
given in Cl 7.3.4 from Eurocode 2–1–1 or from the ‘deemed to satisfy’
requirements that can be obtained from Table 11, which is based on
tables 7.2N and 7.3N of the Eurocode. The limits apply to either the
bar size or the bar spacing, not both.
Figure 6
Determination of steel stress for crack width control
To determine stress in the reinforcement (s
s
), calculate the ratio G
k
/Q
k
,
read up the graph to the appropriate curve and read across to determine s
su
.
s
s
can be calculated from the expression: s
s
= s
su
A
s,req
A
s,prov
1
d
( ( ) )
15
2. Getting started
16
References
1 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. BS EN 1992, Eurocode 2: Design of concrete structures. BSI (4 parts).
2 INSTITUTION OF STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS/THE CONCRETE SOCIETY. Standard method of detailing. ISE/CS. 2006.
3 NARAYANAN, R S & BROOKER, O. How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2: Introduction to Eurocodes (TCC/03/16). The Concrete Centre, 2005.
4 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. BS EN 1990, Eurocode: Basis of structural design. BSI, 2002.
5 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. BS EN 1991, Eurocode 1: Actions on structures. BSI (10 parts).
6 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. BS EN 1991, Eurocode 1: Actions on structures Part 1–1: General actions – Densities, selfweight, imposed loads
for buildings. BSI, 2002.
7 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. BS 8500–1: Concrete – Complementary British Standard to BS EN 206–1– Part 1: Method of specifying and
guidance for the specifier. BSI, 2002.
8 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. BS 4449: Specification for carbon steel bars for the reinforcement of concrete. BSI, 2005.
9 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. Background paper to the UK National Annex to BS EN 1992–1–1. BSI, 2006.
10 BRITISH STAND ARDS INSTITUTION. BS EN 10080: Steel for the reinforcement of concrete – Weldable reinforcing steel – General. BSI, 2005.
11 BUILDING RESEARCH ESTABLISHMENT. Special Digest 1: Concrete in aggressive ground. BRE, 2005.
12 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. BS EN 206–1: Concrete – Part: Specification, performance, production and conformity. BSI, 2000.
13 HARRISON, T A BROOKER, O. How to use BS 8500 with BS 8110 (TCC/03/11). The Concrete Centre, 2005.
14 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. BS EN 1992–1–2, Eurocode 2: Design of concrete structures. General rules – structural fire design, BSI, 2004.
15 MOSS, R M & BROOKER, O. How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2: Columns, (TCC/03/20). The Concrete Centre, 2006.
16
2. Getting started
Designing to Eurocode 2
This chapter covers the analysis and design of slabs to Eurocode 2
1
which is
essentially the same as with BS 8110
2
. However, the layout and content of
Eurocode 2 may appear unusual to designers familiar with BS 8110. Eurocode 2
does not contain the derived formulae or specific guidance on determining
moments and shear forces. This has arisen because it has been European
practice to give principles in the codes and for the detailed application to
be presented in other sources such as textbooks.
Chapter 1, originally published as Introduction to Eurocodes
3
, highlighted the
key differences between Eurocode 2 and BS 8110, including terminology.
Chapter 7, originally published as Flat slabs
4
covers the design of flat slabs.
It should be noted that values from the UK National Annex (NA) have been
used throughout, including values that are embedded in derived formulae.
(Derivations can be found at www.eurocode2.info.) A list of symbols related to
slab design is given at the end of this chapter.
Design procedure
A procedure for carrying out the detailed design of slabs is shown in Table 1.
This assumes that the slab thickness has previously been determined during
conceptual design. More detailed advice on determining design life, actions,
material properties, methods of analysis, minimum concrete cover for
durability and control of crack widths can be found in Chapter 2, originally
published as Getting started
5
.
Fire resistance
Eurocode 2, Part 1–2: Structural fire design
6
, gives a choice of advanced,
simplified or tabular methods for determining the fire resistance. Using tables
is the fastest method for determining the minimum dimensions and cover for
slabs. There are, however, some restrictions which should be adhered to.
Further guidance on the advanced and simplified methods can be obtained
from specialist literature.
Rather than giving a minimum cover, the tabular method is based on
nominal axis distance, a. This is the distance from the centre of the main
reinforcing bar to the surface of the member. It is a nominal (not minimum)
How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2
3. Slabs
R M Moss BSc, PhD, DIC, CEng, MICE, MIStructE O Brooker BEng, CEng, MICE, MIStructE
Continues page 19
18
Standard fire Minimum dimensions (mm)
resistance
Oneway
a, b
Twoway spanning slab
a,b,c,d
Ribs in a twoway spanning ribbed slab
e
spanning slab
l
y
/l
x
≤ 1.5
f
1.5 <l
y
/l
x
≤ 2
f
2
Table 1
Slab design procedure
REI 60
REI 90
REI 120
REI 240
h
s
=
a =
h
s
=
a =
h
s
=
a =
h
s
=
a =
80
20
100
30
120
40
175
65
80
10
g
100
15
g
120
20
175
40
80
15
g
100
20
120
25
175
50
b
min
=
a =
b
min
=
a =
b
min
=
a =
b
min
=
a =
100
25
120
35
160
45
450
70
120
15
g
160
25
190
40
700
60
≥200
10
g
≥250
15
g
≥300
30
–––
Notes
1 This table is taken from BS EN 1992–1–2 Tables 5.8 to 5.11. For flat slabs refer to
Chapter 7.
2 The table is valid only if the detailing requirements (see note 3) are observed and in
normal temperature design redistribution of bending moments does not exceed 15%.
3 For fire resistance of R90 and above, for a distance of 0.3l
eff
from the centre line of each
intermediate support, the area of top reinforcement should not be less than the following:
A
s,req
(x) = A
s,req
( 0) ( 1 – 2.5( x/ l
eff
) )
where:
x is the distance of the section being considered from the centre
line of the support.
A
s,req
( 0) is the area of reinforcement required for normal temperature design.
A
s,req
(x) is the minimum area of reinforcement required at the section
being considered but not less than that required for normal
temperature design.
l
eff
is the greater of the effective lengths of the two adjacent spans.
4 There are three standard fire exposure conditions that need to be satisfied:
R Mechanical resistance for load bearing
E Integrity of separation
I Insulation
5 The ribs in a oneway spanning ribbed slab can be treated as beams and reference can
be made to Chapter 4, Beams. The topping can be treated as a twoway slab where
1.5 < l
y
/ l
x
≤ 2.
Key
a The slab thickness h
s
is the sum of the slab thickness and the thickness of any
noncombustible flooring.
b For continuous solid slabs a minimum negative reinforcement A
s
≥ 0.005 A
c
should be provided over intermediate supports if
1) cold worked reinforcement is used; or
2) there is no fixity over the end supports in a two span slab; or
3) where transverse redistribution of load effects cannot be achieved.
c In two way slabs the axis refers to the lower layer of reinforcement.
d The term two way slabs relates to slabs supported at all four edges. If this is
not the case, they should be treated as oneway spanning slabs.
e For twoway ribbed slabs the following notes apply:
The axis distance measured to the lateral surface of the rib should be at
least (a + 10).
The values apply where there is predominantly uniformly distributed loading.
There should be at least one restrained edge.
The top reinforcement should be placed in the upper half of the flange.
f l
x
and l
y
are the spans of a twoway slab (two directions at right angles) where
l
y
is the longer span.
g Normally the requirements of BS EN 1992–1–1 will determine the cover.
Table 2
Minimum dimensions and axis distances for reinforced concrete slabs (excluding flat slabs)
Step Task Further guidance
Chapter in this publication Standard
1 Determine design life 2: Getting started NA to BS EN 1990 Table NA.2.1
2 Assess actions on the slab 2: Getting started BS EN 1991 (10 parts) and National Annexes
3 Determine which combinations of actions apply 1: Introduction to Eurocodes NA to BS EN 1990 Tables NA.A1.1 and NA.A1.2 (B)
4 Determine loading arrangements 2: Getting started NA to BS EN 1992–1–1
5 Assess durability requirements and determine concrete strength 2: Getting started BS 8500: 2002
6 Check cover requirements for appropriate fire resistance period 2: Getting started and Table 2 Approved Document B. BS EN 1992–1–2: Section 5
7 Calculate min. cover for durability, fire and bond requirements 2: Getting started BS EN 1992–1–1 Cl 4.4.1
8 Analyse structure to obtain critical moments and shear forces 2: Getting started and Table 3 BS EN 1992–1–1 section 5
9 Design flexural reinforcement See Figure 1 BS EN 1992–1–1 section 6.1
10 Check deflection See Figure 3 BS EN 1992–1–1 section 7.4
11 Check shear capacity See Table 7 BS EN 1992–1–1 section 6.2
12 Check spacing of bars 2: Getting started BS EN 1992–1–1 section 7.3
Note
NA = National Annex.
18
How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2
19
End support /slab connection First Interior Interior
Pinned Continuous
interior spans supports
End End End End
support
support span support span
Moment 0 0.086Fl – 0.04Fl 0.075Fl –0.086Fl 0.063Fl –0.063Fl
Shear 0.40F 0.46F 0.6F 0.5F
Notes
1 Applicable to oneway spanning slabs where the area of each bay exceeds 30 m
2
,
Q
k
≤ 1.25 G
k
and q
k
≤ 5 kN/m
2
2 F is the total design ultimate load, l is the span
3 Minimum span > 0.85 longest span, minimum 3 spans
4 Based on 20% redistribution at supports and no decrease in span moments
3
f
ck
f
ctm
Minimum%(0.26 f
ctm
/f
yk
a
)
25 2.6 0.13%
28 2.8 0.14%
30 2.9 0.15%
32 3.0 0.16%
35 3.2 0.17%
40 3.5 0.18%
45 3.8 0.20%
50 4.1 0.21%
Key
a Where f
yk
= 500 MPa.
Table 3
Bending moment and shear coefficients for slabs
Table 4
Values for K’
Table 6
Minimum percentage of reinforcement required
%redistribution d (redistribution ratio) K’
0 1.00 0.208
a
10 0.90 0.182
a
15 0.85 0.168
20 0.80 0.153
25 0.75 0.137
30 0.70 0.120
K z/d
≤0.05 0.950
a
0.06 0.944
0.07 0.934
0.08 0.924
0.09 0.913
0.10 0.902
0.11 0.891
0.12 0.880
K z/d
0.13 0.868
0.14 0.856
0.15 0.843
0.16 0.830
0.17 0.816
0.18 0.802
0.19 0.787
0.20 0.771
Carry out analysis of slab to determine design moments (M)
(Where appropriate use coefficients from Table 3)
Obtain lever arm z from Table 5 or
Calculate tension reinforcement required from
Check minimum reinforcement requirements (see Table 6)
No compression reinforcement required
Check maximum reinforcement requirements
A
s, max
= 0.04 A
c
for tension or compression
reinforcement outside lap locations
Determine K’ from Table 4 or
K’ = 0.60d – 0.18d
2
– 0.21 where d ≤ 1.0
Outside scope of
this publication
Compression
reinforcement
required – not
recommended for
typical slabs
START
Concrete class
≤C50/60?
Is K ≤ K’ ?
Yes
Yes
No
No
Determine K from: K =
Figure 1
Procedure for determining flexural reinforcement
dimension, so the designer should ensure that
a ≥ c
nom
+ f
link
+ f
bar
/2.
The requirements for various types of slab are given in Table 2.
Flexure
The design procedure for flexural design is given in Figure 1; this
includes derived formulae based on the simplified rectangular stress
block from Eurocode 2. Where appropriate, Table 3 may be used to
determine bending moments and shear forces for slabs. Further
information for the design of twoway, ribbed or waffle slabs is given in
the appropriate sections on pages 5 and 6.
bd
2
f
ck
M
1 + 1 – 3.53K ≤ 0.95d z =
2
d
[ ]
A
s
=
f
yd
z
M
A
s, min
= where f
ck
≥ 25
f
yk
0.26 f
ctm
b
t
d
Key
a Limiting z to 0.95d is not a requirement of Eurocode 2, but is considered to be good practice.
Table 5
z/d for singly reinforced rectangular sections
Key
a It is often recomended in the UK that K´ should be limited to 0.168 to ensure ductile failure.
19
3. Slabs
20 4
Figure 2
Simplified rectangular stress block for concrete up to class C50/60 from Eurocode 2
Deflection
Eurocode 2 has two alternative methods of designing for deflection,
either by limiting spantodepth ratio or by assessing the theoretical
deflection using the Expressions given in the Eurocode. The latter
is dealt with in detail in Chapter 8, originally published as Deflection
calculations
7
.
The spantodepth ratios should ensure that deflection is limited to
span /250 and this is the procedure presented in Figure 3.
Eurocode 2 offers various methods for determining the stressstrain
relationship of concrete. For simplicity and familiarity the method
presented here is the simplified rectangular stress block, which is
similar to that found in BS 8110 (see Figure 2).
The Eurocode gives recommendations for the design of concrete up to
class C90/105. However, for concrete greater than class C50/60, the stress
block is modified. It is important to note that concrete strength is based
on the cylinder strength and not the cube strength (i.e. for class C28/35
the cylinder strength is 28 MPa, whereas the cube strength is 35 MPa).
Figure 4
Determination of steel stress
Figure 3
Procedure for assessing deflection
To determine stress in the reinforcement (s
s
), calculate the ratio
G
k
/Q
k
, read up the graph to the appropriate curve and read across
to determine s
su
.
s
s
can be calculated from the expression: s
s
= s
su
A
s,req
A
s,prov
1
d
( ( ) )
Is basic l/d x F1 x F2 x F3 ≥ Actual l/d ?
Increase
A
s,prov
Determine Factor 3 (F3)
F3 = 310/s
s
Where s
s
= Stress in reinforcement at serviceability
limit state (see Figure 4)
s
s
may be assumed to be 310 MPa (i.e. F3 = 1.0)
Note: A
s,prov
≤ 1.5 A
s,req’d
(UK National Annex)
Determine basic l/d from Figure 5
Check complete
Determine Factor 1 (F1)
For ribbed or waffle slabs
F1 = 1 – 0.1 ((b
f
/b
w
) – 1) ≥ 0.8
†
(b
f
is flange breadth and b
w
is rib breadth)
Otherwise F1 = 1.0
Determine Factor 2 (F2)
Where the slab span exceeds 7 m and it supports
brittle partitions, F2 = 7/l
eff
Otherwise F2 = 1.0
No
Yes
START
†
The Eurocode is ambiguous regarding linear interpolation. It is understood that this
was the intention of the drafting committee and is in line with current UK practice.
20
How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2
2155
Design for shear
It is not usual for a slab to contain shear reinforcement, therefore it is
only necessary to ensure that the concrete shear stress capacity
without shear reinforcement (v
Rd,c
– see Table 7) is more than applied
shear stress (v
Ed
= V
Ed
/( bd )). Where shear reinforcement is required,
e.g. for ribs in a ribbed slab, refer to Chapter 4, originally published as
Beams
8
.
Twoway slabs
Unlike BS 8110 there is no specific guidance given in Eurocode 2 on
how to determine the bending moments for a twoway slab. The
assessment of the bending moment can be carried out using any
suitable method from Section 5 of the Code. However, coefficients
may be obtained from Table 8 (taken from the Manual for the design of
building structures to Eurocode 2
9
) to determine bending moments per
unit width (M
sx
and M
sy
) where:
M
sx
= b
sx
w l
x
2
M
sy
= b
sy
w l
x
2
Where b
sx
and b
sy
are coefficients, l
x
is the shorter span and w (load
per unit area) is the STR ultimate limit state combination. For more
information on combinations refer toChapter 1, originally published as
Introduction to Eurocodes
3
.
Table 7
v
Rd,c
resistance of members without shear reinforcement, MPa
Figure 5
Basic spantoeffectivedepth ratios
r
I
= Effective depth, d (mm)
A
s
/(bd)
≤200 225 250 275 300 350 400 450 500 600 750
0.25% 0.54 0.52 0.50 0.48 0.47 0.45 0.43 0.41 0.40 0.38 0.36
0.50% 0.59 0.57 0.56 0.55 0.54 0.52 0.51 0.49 0.48 0.47 0.45
0.75% 0.68 0.66 0.64 0.63 0.62 0.59 0.58 0.56 0.55 0.53 0.51
1.00% 0.75 0.72 0.71 0.69 0.68 0.65 0.64 0.62 0.61 0.59 0.57
1.25% 0.80 0.78 0.76 0.74 0.73 0.71 0.69 0.67 0.66 0.63 0.61
1.50% 0.85 0.83 0.81 0.79 0.78 0.75 0.73 0.71 0.70 0.67 0.65
1.75% 0.90 0.87 0.85 0.83 0.82 0.79 0.77 0.75 0.73 0.71 0.68
≥2.00% 0.94 0.91 0.89 0.87 0.85 0.82 0.80 0.78 0.77 0.74 0.71
k 2.000 1.943 1.894 1.853 1.816 1.756 1.707 1.667 1.632 1.577 1.516
Table derived from: v
Rd,c
= 0.12 k (100r
I
f
ck
)
1/3
≥ 0.035 k
1.5
f
ck
0.5
where k = 1 + R(200/d) ≤ 2 and r
I
= A
s
/(bd) ≤ 0.02
Note
1 This table has been prepared for f
ck
= 30.
2 Where r
I
exceeds 0.40% the following factors may be used:
f
ck
25 28 32 35 40 45 50
Factor 0.94 0.98 1.02 1.05 1.10 1.14 1.19
Notes
1 For twoway spanning slabs, the check should be
carried out on the basis of the shorter span.
2 This graph assumes simply supported span
condition (K = 1.0).
K = 1.5 for interior span condition
K = 1.3 for end span condition
K = 0.4 for cantilevers
3 Compression reinforcement, r’, has been taken as 0.
4 Curves based on the following expressions:
where r ≤ r
0
and
where r > r
0
.
11+ + 3.2 –1 = K
r
f
ck
r
0
1.5
d
l
f
ck
r
r
0
[ ( ) ]
11+ + = K
(
r – r
’)
f
ck
r
0
1.5
d
l
12
f
ck
r
0
r
’
[ ]
1.5
Percentage of tension reinforcement (A
s,req’d
/bd)
21
3. Slabs
22 6
Figure 6
Procedure for determining flexural capacity of flanged ribs
Ribbed or waffle slabs
Current practices for determining forces in ribbed and waffle slabs may also
be used for designs to Eurocode 2. Where a waffle slab is treated as a
twoway slab refer to previous section, but note that their torsional stiffness
is significantly less than for a twoway slab and the bending moment co
efficients may not be applicable. Where it is treated as a flat slab reference
may be made to Chapter 7, originally published as Flat slabs
4
The position of the neutral axis in the rib should be determined, and
then the area of reinforcement can be calculated depending on
whether it lies in the flange or web (see flow chart in Figure 6). The
main differences compared with BS 8110 are that the assessment of
the flange width is more sophisticated (see Figures 7 and 8).
Where a slab is formed with permanent blocks or a with a topping
thickness less than 50 mm and onetenth of the clear distance
between ribs it is recommended that a longitudinal shear check is
carried out to determine whether additional transverse reinforcement is
required (see BS EN 1992–1–1, Cl 6.2.4).
Table 8
Bending moment coefficients for twoway spanning rectangular slabs
supported by beams
Type or panel Short span coefficients for Longspan
and moments values of l
y
/l
x
coefficients
considered for all values
of l
y
/l
x
1.0 1.25 1.5 1.75 2.0
Interior panels
Negative moment 0.031 0.044 0.053 0.059 0.063 0.032
at continuous edge
Positive moment 0.024 0.034 0.040 0.044 0.048 0.024
at midspan
One short edge discontinuous
Negative moment 0.039 0.050 0.058 0.063 0.067 0.037
at continuous edge
Positive moment 0.029 0.038 0.043 0.047 0.050 0.028
at midspan
One long edge discontinuous
Negative moment 0.039 0.059 0.073 0.083 0.089 0.037
at continuous edge
Positive moment 0.030 0.045 0.055 0.062 0.067 0.028
at midspan
Two adjacent edges discontinuous
Negative moment 0.047 0.066 0.078 0.087 0.093 0.045
at continuous edge
Positive moment 0.036 0.049 0.059 0.065 0.070 0.034
at midspan
START
Concrete class
≤ C50/60?
Is x ≤ 1.25h
f
Is K
f
≤ K’
Outside scope
of this
publication
Neutral axis in
flange.
Design as
rectangular
section.
Redesign
section
Determine l
0
(see Figure 7) and b
eff
from:
b
eff
= (b
w
+ b
eff1
+ b
eff2
) where
b
eff1
= (0.2b
1
+ 0.1 l
0
) ≤ 0.2 l
0
≤ b
1
b
eff2
= (0.2b
2
+ 0.1 l
0
) ≤ 0.2 l
0
≤ b
2
Note: The flange width at the support will be
different from that at midspan.
For symbols refer to Figures 7 and 8
Determine K’ from Table 2 or
K’ = 0.60d – 0.18d
2
– 0.21 where d ≤ 1.0
Calculate depth to neutral axis x from:
x = 2.5 (d – z)
Calculate lever arm z from
Neutral axis in web
Calculate moment capacity of flange from:
M
R,f
= 0.57 f
ck
(b
eff
– b
w
) h
f
(d – 0.5h
f
)
Calculate area of reinforcement required from
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
Determine K from: K =
1 + 1 – 3.53K ≤ 0.95d z =
2
d
[ ]
bd
2
f
ck
M
A
s
= +
f
ywd
(d – 0.5 h
f
)
M
R,f
f
ywd
z
M– M
R,f
K
f
= and
f
ck
b
w
d
2
M – M
R,f
Yes
22
How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2
237
Rules for spacing and
quantity of reinforcement
Minimum area of principal reinforcement
The minimum area of principal reinforcement in the main direction is
A
s, min
= 0.26 f
c tm
b
t
d/f
y k
but not less than 0.0013b
t
d, where b
t
is the
mean width of the tension zone (see Table 6). For a Tbeam with the
flange in compression, only the width of the web is taken into account
in calculating the value of b
t
.
Minimum area of secondary reinforcement
The minimum area of secondary transverse reinforcement is
20% A
s, min
. In areas near supports, transverse reinforcement is not
necessary where there is no transverse bending moment.
Maximum area of reinforcement
Outside lap locations, the maximum area of tension or compression
reinforcement should not exceed A
s, max
= 0.04 A
c
Minimum spacing of reinforcement
The minimum clear distance between bars should be the greater of:
■ Bar diameter
■ Aggregate size plus 5 mm
■ 20 mm
Maximum spacing of reinforcement
For slabs less than 200 mm thick the following maximum spacing
rules apply:
■ For the principal reinforcement: 3h but not more than 400 mm
■ For the secondary reinforcement: 3.5h but not more than 450 mm
The exception is in areas with concentrated loads or areas of maximum
moment where the following applies:
■ For the principal reinforcement: 2h but not more than 250 mm
■ For the secondary reinforcement: 3h but not more than 400 mm
Where h is the depth of the slab.
For slabs 200 mm thick or greater the bar size and spacing should be
limited to control the crack width and reference should be made to
section 7.3.3 of the Code or Chapter 2, originally published as Getting
started
5
.
Figure 7
Definition of l
0
, for calculation of effective flange width
Figure 8
Effective flange width parameters
Symbol Definition Value
A
c
Cross sectional area of concrete bh
A
s
Area of tension steel
A
s2
Area of compression steel
A
s, prov
Area of tension steel provided
A
s, req’d
Area of tension steel required
b
eff
Effective flange width
b
t
Mean width of the tension zone
b
min
Width of beam or rib
b
w
Width of rib web
d Effective depth
d
2
Effective depth to compression reinforcement
f
cd
Design value of concrete compressive strength a
cc
f
ck
/g
c
f
ck
Characteristic cylinder strength of concrete
f
ctm
Mean value of axial tensile strength 0.30 f
ck
2/3
for f
ck
≤ C50/60
(from Table 3.1, Eurocode 2)
h
f
Flange thickness
h
s
Slab thickness
K Factor to take account of the different See Table NA.4 in
structural systems UK National Annex
l
eff
Effective span of member See Section 5.3.2.2 (1)
l
0
Distance between points of zero moment
l/d Limiting spantodepth ratio
l
x
, l
y
Spans of a twoway slab
M Design moment at the ULS
x Depth to neutral axis (d – z)/0.4
x
max
Limiting value for depth to neutral axis (d – 0.4)d where d ≤1.0
z Lever arm
a
cc
Coefficient taking account of long term 0.85 for flexure and
effects on compressive strength and of axial loads.
unfavourable effects resulting from the 1.0 for other phenomena
way load is applied (From UK National Annex)
d Ratio of the redistributed moment to the
elastic bending moment
g
m
Partial factor for material properties 1.15 for reinforcement (g
s
)
1.5 for concrete (g
c
)
r
0
Reference reinforcement ratio Rf
ck
/1000
r Required tension reinforcement at midspan A
s
/bd
to resist the moment due to the design
loads (or at support for cantilevers)
r’ Required compression reinforcement at A
s2
/bd
midspan to resist the moment due to the
design loads (or at support for cantilevers)
Selected symbols
23
3. Slabs
24
References
1 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. BS EN 1992–1–1: Eurocode 2: Design of concrete structures – Part 1–1 General rules and rules for buildings. BSI, 2004.
2 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. BS 8110–1: The structural use of concrete – Part 1, Code of practice for design and construction. BSI, 1997.
3 NARAYANAN, R S & BROOKER, O. How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2: Introduction to Eurocodes. The Concrete Centre, 2005.
4 MOSS, R M & BROOKER, O. How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2: Flat slabs. The Concrete Centre, 2006.
5 BROOKER, O. How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2: Getting started. The Concrete Centre, 2005.
6 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. BS EN 1992–1–2, Eurocode 2: Design of concrete structures. General rules – structural fire design, BSI 2004.
7 WEBSTER, R & BROOKER, O. How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2: Deflection calculations. The Concrete Centre, 2006.
8 MOSS, R M & BROOKER, O. How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2: Beams. The Concrete Centre, 2006.
9 THE INSTITUTION OF STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS/THE INSTITUTION OF CIVIL ENGINEERS. Manual for the design of concrete building structures to
Eurocode 2. IStructE/ICE, 2006.
24
3. Slabs
4. Beams
How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2
4. Beams
R M Moss bSc, lhL, LlC, Clng, MlCl, MlStructl O Brooker blng, Clng, MlCl, MlStructl
Designing to Eurocode 2
This chapter covers the analysis and design of concrete beams to Eurocode 2
1
which is essentially the same as with BS 8110
2
lowever, the ayout and
content o¦ lurocode 2 may appear unusua to desgners ¦amar wth bS S!!0
lurocode 2 does not contan the derved ¦ormuae or spec¦c gudance on
determnng moments and shear ¦orces ¹hs has arsen ecause t has
een luropean practce to gve prncpes n the codes and ¦or the detaed
appcaton to e presented n other sources such as textoos
Chapter !, orgnay pushed as /··oJac/o· o /a·ocoJe· hghghted the
ey d¦¦erences etween lurocode 2 and bS S!!0, ncudng termnoogy
lt shoud e noted that vaues ¦rom the 0l Natona Annex (NA) have een
used throughout, ncudng vaues that are emedded n derved ¦ormuae
(dervatons can e ¦ound at wwweurocode2n¦o) A st o¦ symos reated
to eam desgn s gven at the end o¦ ths chapter
3
Design procedure
A procedure ¦or carryng out the detaed desgn o¦ eams s shown n ¹ae !
¹hs assumes that the eam dmensons have prevousy een determned
durng conceptua desgn Concept desgns prepared assumng detaed desgn
woud e to bS S!!0 may e contnued through to detaed desgn usng
lurocode 2 More detaed advce on determnng desgn ¦e, actons, matera
propertes, methods o¦ anayss, mnmum concrete cover ¦or duraty and
contro o¦ crac wdths can e ¦ound n Chapter 2, orgnay pushed as
Oe/·q ·a·eJ
, and in Chapter !
Fire resistance
lurocode 2, lart !÷2 ´·aca·a/ /·e Je·/q· , gves a choce o¦ advanced,
smp¦ed or tauar methods ¦or determnng the ¦re resstance 0sng taes
s the ¦astest method ¦or determnng the mnmum dmensons and cover
¦or eams ¹here are, however, some restrctons and ¦ these appy ¦urther
gudance on the advanced and smp¦ed methods can e otaned ¦rom
specast terature
kather than gvng a mnmum cover, the tauar method
s ased on nomna axs dstance,
a (see lgure !) ¹hs s the dstance ¦rom
the centre o¦ the man ren¦orcng ar to the top or ottom sur¦ace o¦ the
Co·/·ae· oaqe ??
26 2
e c n a d i u g r e h t r u F k s a T p e t S
d r a d n a t S Chapter in this publication
! Letermne desgn ¦e 2 Oe/·q ·a·eJ NA to bS lN !990 ¹ae NA2!
2 Assess actons on the eam 2 Oe/·q ·a·eJ bS lN !99! (!0 parts) and Natona Annexes
3 Letermne whch comnatons o¦ actons appy ! /··oJac/o· o /a·ocoJe· NA to bS lN !990 ¹aes NAA!! and NAA!2 (b)
4 Letermne oadng arrangements 2 Oe/·q ·a·eJ NA to bS lN !992÷!÷!
S Assess duraty requrements and determne concrete strength 2 Oe/·q ·a·eJ bS SS00 2002
6 Chec cover requrements ¦or approprate ¦re resstance perod 2 Oe/·q ·a·eJ and 'lre resstance' Approved Locument b bS lN !992÷!÷! Secton S
secton
/ Cacuate mn cover ¦or duraty, ¦re and ond requrements 2 Oe/·q ·a·eJ bS lN !992÷!÷! C 44!
S Anayse structure to otan crtca moments and shear ¦orces 2 Oe/·q ·a·eJ and ¹ae 3 bS lN !992÷!÷! secton S
9 ! 6 n o  t c e s ! ÷ ! ÷ 2 9 9 ! N l S b n o  t c e s ' e r u x e  l ' e e S t n e m e c r o ¦ n  e r  a r u x e  ¦ n g  s e L
2 6 n o  t c e s ! ÷ ! ÷ 2 9 9 ! N l S b n o  t c e s ' r a e h s  a c  t r e V ' e e S y t  c a p a c r a e h s  c e h C 0 !
4 / n o  t c e s ! ÷ ! ÷ 2 9 9 ! N l S b n o  t c e s ' n o  t c e  ¦ e L ' e e S n o  t c e  ¦ e d  c e h C ! !
!2 Chec spacng o¦ ars 2 Oe/·q ·a·eJ bS lN !992÷!÷! secton /3
Note
NA Natona Annex
Table 1
Beam design procedure
Table 2
Minimum dimensions and axis distances for beams made with reinforced concrete for fire resistance
Figure 3
Simplified rectangular stress block for
concrete up to class C50/60 from Eurocode 2
d
h
x
Section
A
s2
A
s
Neutral axis
b
d
2
Strain
ε
c
ε
s
ε
sc
0.8x
F
sc
f
cd
Stress block and forces
z
F
c
F
st
Figure 1
Section through structural member,
showing nominal axis distances a and a
sd
b
a
a
sd
h > b
Standard fire resistance Minimum dimensions (mm)
Possible combinations of a and b
min
where a is the average axis distance and b
min
is the width of the beam
Simply supported beams Continuous beams
A B C D E F G H
R60 b
min
= 120 160 200 300 120 200
a = 40 35 30 25 25 12
a
R90 b
min
= 150 200 300 400 150 250
a = 55 45 40 35 35 25
R120 b
min
= 200 240 300 500 200 300 450 500
a = 65 60 55 50 45 35 35 30
R240 b
min
= 280 350 500 700 280 500 650 700
a = 90 80 75 70 75 60 60 50
Notes
1 This table is taken from BS EN 1992–1–2 Tables 5.5 and 5.6.
2 The axis distance, a
sd
, from the side of the beam to the corner bar should be a +10 mm except where b
min
is greater than the values in columns C and F.
3 The table is valid only if the detailing requirements (see note 4) are observed and, in normal temperature design, redistribution of bending moments does not exceed 15%.
4 For fire resistance of R90 and above, for a distance of 0.3l
eff
from the centre line of each intermediate support, the area of top reinforcement should not be less than the following:
A
s,req
(x) = A
s,req
( 0)( 1– 2.5( x/ l
eff
) )
where:
x is the distance of the section being considered from the centre line of the support.
A
s,req
( 0) is the area of reinforcement required for normal temperature design.
A
s,req
(x) is the minimum area of reinforcement required at the section being considered but not less than that required for normal temperature design.
l
eff
is the greater of the effective lengths of the two adjacent spans.
5 For fire resistances R120 – R240, the width of the beam at the first intermediate support should be at least that in column F, if both the following conditions exist:
a there is no fixity at the end support; and
b the acting shear at normal temperature V
sd
> 0.67 V
Rd,max
.
Key
a Normally the requirements of BS EN 1992–1–1 will determine the cover.
26
How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2
273
Outside scope of this
publication
Carry out analysis of beam to determine
design moments (M) (see Table 3)
Obtain lever arm z from Table 5 or use
Calculate tension reinforcement
required from
Check minimum reinforcement
requirements (see Table 6)
No compression reinforcement required
Check maximum reinforcement requirements A
s, max
= 0.04 A
c
for tension or compression reinforcement outside lap locations
Determine K’ from Table 4 or
K’ = 0.60d – 0.18d
2
– 0.21
where d ≤ 1.0
Compression reinforcement
required
Calculate lever arm z from
START
Concrete class
≤C50/60?
Is K ≤ K’ ?
Yes
Yes
No
No
Determine K from K =
M
bd
2
f
ck
Calculate compression
reinforcement required from
where
Figure 2
Procedure for determining flexural reinforcement
Table 3
Bending moment and shear coefficients for beams
member. It is a nominal (not minimum) dimension, so the designer
should ensure that:
a ≥ c
nom
+ f
link
+ f
bar
/2 and a
sd
= a + 10 mm
Table 2 gives the minimum dimensions for beams to meet the
standard fire periods.
Flexure
The design procedure for flexural design is given in Figure 2; this includes
derived formulae based on the simplified rectangular stress block from
Eurocode 2. Table 3 may be used to determine bending moments and
shear forces for beams, provided the notes to the table are observed.
Table 4
Values for K’
% redistribution d (redistribution ratio) K’
0 !00 020S
a
!0 090 0!S2
a
!S 0SS 0!6S
20 0S0 0!S3
30 0/0 0!20
2S 0/S 0!3/
Key
a lt s o¦ten recomended n the 0l that /shoud e mted to 0!6S to ensure ducte ¦aure
K z/d
<00S 0 9S0
a
006 0944
00/ 0934
00S 0924
009 09!3
0!0 0902
K z/d
0!! 0S9!
0!2 0SS0
0!3 0S6S
0!4 0SS6
0!S 0S43
0!6 0S30
0!/ 0S!6
0!S 0S02
0!9 0/S/
020 0//!
Key
a lmtng · to 09SJ s not a requrement o¦ lurocode 2, ut s consdered to e good practce
for singly reinforced rectangular sections
Table 6
Minimum percentage of required reinforcement
f
ck
f
ctm
Minimum percentage (0.26 f
ctm
/ f
yk
a
)
2S 26 0!3%
2S 2S 0!4%
30 29 0!S%
32 30 0!6%
3S 32 0!/%
40 3S 0!S%
4S 3S 020%
S0 4! 02!%
Key
a Assumng 
y
S00 Mla
Table 5
z/d
A
s2
=
(K–K’) f
ck
bd
2
f
sc
(d–d
2
)
Calculate tension
reinforcement required from
1 + 1 – 3.53 K’ z =
2
d
[ ]
1 + 1 – 3.53K ≤ 0.95d z =
2
d
[ ]
A
s, min
= where f
ck
≥ 25
f
yk
0.26 f
ctm
b
t
d
A
s
=
f
yd
z
M
A
s
= + A
s2
f
yd
z
K’f
ck
bd
2
f
yd
f
sc
f
sc
= 700 ≤ f
yd
x
x – d
2
[ ]
Moment Shear
Outer support 25% of span moment 0.45 (G + Q)
Near mdde o¦ end span 0090 Gl + 0.100 Ql
At first interior support – 0.094 (G + Q) l 0.63 (G + Q)
a
At middle of interior spans 0.066 Gl + 0.086 Ql
At interior supports – 0.075 (G + Q) l 0.50 (G + Q)
Key
a 0.55 (G + Q) may be used adjacent to the interior span.
Notes
1 Redistribution of support moments by 15% has been included.
2 Applicable to 3 or more spans only and where Q
k
≤ G
k
.
3 Minimum span ≥ 0.85 longest span.
4 l is the span, G is the total of the ULS permanent actions, Q is the total
of the ULS variable actions.
27
4. Beams
28 4
Figure 5
Procedure for determining vertical shear reinforcement
Determine v
Ed
where
v
Ed
= design shear stress v
Ed
= V
Ed
/(b
w
z) = V
Ed
/(0 . 9 b
w
d)] [
Yes (cot y = 2.5)
No No
START
Determine the concrete strut capacity v
Rd, max cot y = 2.5
fromTable 7
Redesign
section
Determine y from:
Calculate area of shear reinforcement:
Check maximum spacing for vertical shear reinforcement:
s
l, max
= 0.75 d
=
s
A
sw
y = 0.5 sin
1
0.20 f
ck
(1 – f
ck
/250)
v
Ed
 
f
ywd
cot y
v
Ed
b
w
Is
v
Ed
< v
Rd, max coty = 2.5
?
Is
v
Ed
< v
Rd, max cot y = 1.0
?
(see Table 7)
Yes
Table 7
Minimum and maximum concrete strut capacity in terms of stress
f
ck
v
Rd,max cot y = 2.5
v
Rd,max cot y = 1.0
20 2.54 3.68
25 3.10 4.50
28 3.43 4.97
30 3.64 5.28
32 3.84 5.58
35 4.15 6.02
40 4.63 6.72
45 5.08 7.38
50 5.51 8.00
Figure 4
Strut inclination method
Longitudinal
reinforcement in tension
Vertical shear
reinforcement
Concrete strut in compression
y
Eurocode 2 offers various methods for determining the stressstrain
relationship of concrete. For simplicity and familiarity the method
presented here is the simplified rectangular stress block, which is
similar to that found in BS 8110 (see Figure 3).
Eurocode 2 gives recommendations for the design of concrete up to
class C90/105. However, for concrete greater than class C50/60, the
stress block is modified. It is important to note that concrete strength
is based on the cylinder strength and not the cube strength (i.e. for
class C30/37 the cylinder strength ( f
ck
) is 30 MPa, whereas the cube
strength is 37 MPa).
Vertical shear
Eurocode 2 introduces the strut inclination method for shear capacity
checks. In this method the shear is resisted by concrete struts acting in
compression and shear reinforcement acting in tension.
The angle of the concrete strut varies, depending on the shear force
applied (see Figure 4). The procedure for determining the shear capacity
of a section is shown in Figure 5 (which includes UK NA values) and is
in terms of shear stress in the vertical plane rather than a vertical force
as given in Eurocode 2. Where shear reinforcement is required, then
the angle of the concrete strut should be calculated. For many typical
beams the minimum angle of strut will apply (when cot y = 2.5 or y =
21.8º) i.e. for class C30/37 concrete the strut angle exceeds 21.8º only
when the shear stress is greater than 3.27 N/mm
2
(refer to Table 7).
As with BS 8110, there is a maximum permitted shear capacity, v
Rd,max
,
(when cot y =1.0 or y = 45º), but this is not restricted to 5 MPa as in
BS 8110.
Deflection
lurocode 2 has two aternatve methods ¦or checng de¦ecton,
ether a mtng spantodepth rato may e used or the theoretca
de¦ecton can e assessed usng the expressons gven n the Code
¹he atter s deat wth n deta n Chapter S, orgnay pushed as
/e/ec/o· ca/ca/a/o··7
¹he spantodepth ratos shoud ensure that de¦ecton s mted to
span/2S0 and ths s the procedure presented n lgure 6
Flanged beams
langed eams can e treated n much the same way as n bS S!!0
¹he man d¦¦erences compared wth bS S!!0 are that the assessment
o¦ the ¦ange wdth s more sophstcated (see lgures 9 and !0) and
that lurocode 2 contans a chec to con¦rm that the shear stress at
Co·/·ae· oaqe 3'
28
How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2
29
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
32
34
36
S
p
a
n
t
o
d
e
p
t
h
r
a
t
i
o
(
Percentage of tension reinforcement (A
s,req’d
/bd)
l
/
d
)
0.40% 0.60% 0.80% 1.00% 1.20% 1.40% 1.60% 1.80% 2.00%
f
ck
ck
ck
ck
ck
ck
ck
ck
ck
= 50
f = 45
f = 40
f = 35
f = 32
f = 30
f = 28
f = 25
f = 20
f
ck
ck
ck
ck
ck
ck
ck
ck
ck
= 50
f = 45
f = 40
f = 35
f = 32
f = 30
f = 28
f = 25
f = 20
Figure 7
Basic spantoeffectivedepth ratios
Notes
1 ¹hs graph assumes smpy supported span condton
(/ !0)
/ !S ¦or nteror span condton
/ !3 ¦or end span condton
/ 04 ¦or cantevers
2 Compresson ren¦orcement, r', has een taen as 0
3 Curves ased on the ¦oowng expressons
where r < r
0
and
where r > r
0
!!÷ ÷ 32 ÷! /
r

c
r
0
!S
J
/

c
r
r
0
 ( ) 
!!÷ ÷ /
(
r ÷ r
')

c
r
0
!S
J
/
!2

c
r
0
r
'
 
!S
5
Figure 6
Procedure for assessing deflection
Is basic l/d x K x F1 x F2 x F3 ≥ Actual l/d ?
Increase
A
s,prov
Determine Factor 3 (F3)
F3 = 310/s
s
Where s
s
= Stress in reinforcement at serviceability
limit state (see Figure 8)
s
s
may assumed to be 310 MPa (i.e. F3 = 1.0)
Note: A
s,prov
≤ 1.5 A
s,req’d
(UK National Annex)
Determine basic l/d and K from Figure 7
Check complete
Determine Factor 1 (F1)
For ribbed or waffle slabs
F1 = 1 – 0.1 ((b
f
/b
w
) – 1) ≥ 0.8
†
(b
f
is flange breadth and b
w
is rib breadth)
Otherwise F1 = 1.0
Determine Factor 2 (F2)
Where the slab span exceeds 7 m and it supports
brittle partitions, F2 = 7/l
eff
≤ 1.0
Otherwise F2 = 1.0
No
Yes
START
†
The Eurocode is ambiguous regarding linear interpolation. It is understood that
it was the intention of the drafting committee that linear interpolation be used
and this is in line with current UK practice.
Figure 8
Determination of steel stress
To determine stress in the reinforcement (s
s
), calculate the ratio
G
k
/Q
k
, read up the graph to the appropriate curve and read across
to determine s
su
.
s
s
can be calculated from the expression: s
s
= s
su
A
s,req
A
s,prov
1
d
( ( ) )
Ratio G
k
/Q
k
U
n
m
o
d
i
f
i
e
d
s
t
e
e
l
s
t
r
e
s
s
,
s
s
u
180
200
220
240
260
280
300
320
1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0
c
2
= 0.8, g
G
= 1.35
c
2
= 0.6, g
G
= 1.35
c
2
= 0.3, g
G
= 1.35
c
2
= 0.2, g
G
= 1.35
c
2
= 0.6, g
G
= 1.25
c
2
= 0.3, g
G
= 1.25
c
2
= 0.2, g
G
= 1.25
29
4. Beams
30 6
Figure 11
Procedure for determining flexural capacity of flanged beams
Figure 9
Definition of l
o
, for calculation of effective flange width
Figure 10
Effective flange width parameters
l
0
= 0.85 l
1
l
0
= 0.15 (l
1
+ l
2
)
l
1
l
3
l
2
l
0
= 0.7 l
2
l
0
= 0.15 l
2
+ l
3
b
1
b
1
b
2
b
2
b
w
b
eff
b
eff,2
b
b
eff,1
START
Is x ≤ 1.25h
f
?
Is K
f
≤ K’ ?
Carry out analysis of beam to determine design
moments, M (see Table 3)
Neutral axis in
flange. Design
as rectangular
section (Figure 2)
and then check
longitudinal shear
(Figure 14)
Redesign section
Determine l
0
(see Figure 9) and b
eff
from:
b
eff
= (b
w
+ b
eff1
+ b
eff2
) where
b
eff1
= (0.2b
1
+ 0.1 l
0
) ≤ 0.2 l
0
≤ b
1
b
eff2
= (0.2b
2
+ 0.1 l
0
) ≤ 0.2 l
0
≤ b
2
Note: The flange width at the support will be
different from that at midspan.
For symbols refer to Figures 9 and 10
Determine K’ from Table 4 or
K’ = 0.60d – 0.18d
2
– 0.21 where d ≤ 1.0
Calculate depth to neutral axis x from:
x = 2.5 (d – z)
Calculate lever arm z from
Neutral axis in web
Calculate moment capacity of flange from:
M
R,f
= 0.57 f
ck
(b
eff
– b
w
) h
f
(d – 0.5h
f
)
Calculate area of reinforcement required from Check longitudinal
shear
(see Figure 14)
Yes
No
Yes
No
Determine K from K =
where b = b
w
at support
b = b
eff
in span
1 + 1 – 3.53K ≤ 0.95d z =
2
d
[ ]
bd
2
f
ck
M
A
s
= +
f
ywd
(d – 0.5 h
f
)
M
R,f
f
ywd
M– M
R,f
K
f
= and
f
ck
b
w
d
2
M – M
R,f
Figure 12
Placing of tension reinforcement in flanged cross section
Figure 13
Notations for the connection between flange and web
A
A
F
d
F
d
S
f
b
eff
A
sf
h
f
F
d
+ F
d
D
F
d
+ F
d
D
Dx
b
w
y
f
Longitudinal bar
anchored beyond
this projected point
Compressive struts
b
eff
b
eff1
b
eff2
A
s
b
w
h
f
30
How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2
317
Figure 14
Procedure for determining longitudinal shear capacity of flanged beams
Yes
No No
No
Calculate the longitudinal shear stress
from: v
Ed
= DF
d
/(h
f
Dx)
(see Figure 13)
Determine the concrete strut capacity
fromTable 8 or from:
v
Rd
= 0.160 f
ck
(1 – f
ck
/250)
Calculate area of transverse reinforcement from:
Yes (cot y
f
= 2.0) Yes (cot y
f
= 1.25)
Is v
RD
> v
Ed
? Is v
RD
> v
Ed
?
Is length of
flange under consideration
in tension?
Determine y
f
from:
Determine the concrete
strut capacity fromTable 8
or from:
v
Rd
= 0.195 f
ck
(1 – f
ck
/250)
=
s
A
sf
y
f
=0.5sin
1
0.2f
ck
(1 – f
ck
/250)
v
Ed
 
f
yd
cot y
f
v
Ed
h
f
Table 8
Concrete strut capacity for longitudinal shear in flanged beams
f
ck
v
Rd,max
Flange in compression Flange in tension
9 S 3 4 9 2 0 2
9 3 4 0 6 3 S 2
S S 4 S 9 3 S 2
S ! S 2 2 4 0 3
4 4 S 6 4 4 2 3
/ S S 2 S 4 S 3
S S 6 S 3 S 0 4
0 2 / 0 9 S S 4
0 S / 0 4 6 0 S
Minimum area of shear reinforcement
¹he mnmum area o¦ shear ren¦orcement n eams, /sw,mn shoud
e cacuated ¦rom
where
r
w,mn
can e otaned ¦rom ¹ae 9
/
sw
·/
w
4 r
w,mn
the nter¦ace o¦ the ¦ange and we can e ressted y the transverse
ren¦orcement n the ¦ange ¹he poston o¦ the neutra axs shoud
e determned, and then the area o¦ ren¦orcement can e cacuated
dependng whether t es n the ¦ange or we (see lgure !!)
At supports the tenson ren¦orcement to resst hoggng moments
shoud e dstruted across the ¦u wdth o¦ the e¦¦ectve ¦ange as
shown n lgure !2 ¹he spantodepth de¦ecton checs usng rato o¦
tenson ren¦orcement shoud e ased on area o¦ concrete aove
centre o¦ tenson stee
Longitudinal shear
¹he shear stress n the vertca pane etween the ¦ange and we shoud
e assessed accordng to secton 624 and lgure 6/ o¦ the lurocode
(reproduced here as lgure !3) ¹he change n ¦orce n the ¦ange can
e assessed ¦rom the moment and ever arm at a partcuar ocaton
¹he lurocode states that the maxmum ength that can e consdered
¦or the change n ¦orce s ha¦ the dstance etween the maxmum
moment and the pont where the moment s .ero Ceary, the maxmum
ongtudna ¦orce w occur where the change n moment, and
there¦ore ¦orce, s the greatest, ¦or a un¦ormy dstruted oad on a
contnuous eam ths w e the ength o¦ eam cosest to the support
lgure !4 shows a ¦ow chart ¦or assessng the ongtudna shear
capacty, n many cases the transverse ren¦orcement n the sa w e
su¦¦cent to resst the shear ¦orce ¹hs chec s ncuded to ensure that
where partcuary thn ¦anges are used there s adequate ren¦orcement
¹he ongtudna shear capacty s ased on the varae strut ncnaton
method, whch was descred n the secton on vertca shear
Rules for spacing and
quantity of reinforcement
Minimum area of longitudinal reinforcement
¹he mnmum area o¦ ren¦orcement s /
s, mn
026 
c tm
/
t
J/
y 
ut
not ess than 000!3/
t
J, where /
t
s the mean wdth o¦ the tenson
.one (see ¹ae 6) lor a ¹eam wth the ¦ange n compresson, ony
the wdth o¦ the we s taen nto account n cacuatng the vaue o¦ /
Maximum area of longitudinal reinforcement
¹he maxmum area o¦ tenson or compresson ren¦orcement, outsde
ap ocatons shoud not exceed /
s, max
004 /
c
Minimum spacing of reinforcement
¹he mnmum cear dstance etween ars shoud e the greater o¦
bar dameter
Aggregate s.e pus S mm
20 mm
Table 9
Values for r
w,min
f
ck 20 25 28 30 32 35 40 45 50
r
w,mn
x !0
3
0/2 0S0 0SS 0SS 09! 09S !0! !0/ !!3
31
4. Beams
32
References
1 bkl¹lSl S¹ANLAkLS lNS¹l¹0¹lON bS lN !992÷!÷!, lurocode 2 /e·/q· o co·c·ee ··aca·e·  /a· '' Oe·e·a/ ·a/e· a·J ·a/e· o·
/a//J/·q· bSl, 2004
2 bkl¹lSl S¹ANLAkLS lNS¹l¹0¹lON bS S!!0÷! I/e ··aca·a/ a·e o co·c·ee  /a· ' CoJe o o·ac/ce o· Je·/q· a·J co···ac/o· bSl, !99/
3 NAkA¥ANAN, k S 8 bkOOllk, O /ou o Je·/q· co·c·ee ··aca·e· a·/·q /a·ocoJe ? /··oJac/o· o /a·ocoJe· ¹he Concrete Centre, 200S
4 bkOOllk, O /ou o Je·/q· co·c·ee ··aca·e· a·/·q /a·ocoJe ? Oe/·q ·a·eJ ¹he Concrete Centre, 200S
5 bkl¹lSl S¹ANLAkLS lNS¹l¹0¹lON bS lN !992÷!÷2, lurocode 2 /e·/q· o co·c·ee ··aca·e· Oe·e·a/ ·a/e·  ··aca·a/ /·e Je·/q· bSl, 2004
7 vlbS¹lk, k 8 bkOOllk, O /ou o Je·/q· co·c·ee ··aca·e· a·/·q /a·ocoJe ? /e/ec/o· ca/ca/a/o·· ¹he Concrete Centre, 2006
6 LllAk¹MlN¹ Ol COMM0Nl¹llS ANL lOCAl COVlkNMlN¹ /a·J/oo/ o //'99?'? LClC, due 2006
s
/
to resst the moment due to the desgn
oads (or at support ¦or cantevers)
r' kequred compresson ren¦orcement at /
s2
//J
mdspan to resst the moment due to the
desgn oads (or at support ¦or cantevers)
(¦rom ¹ae 3!, lurocode 2)
/
¦
lange thcness
/ lactor to tae account o¦ the d¦¦erent See tae NA4 n
x e n n A  a n o  t a N l 0 s m e t s y s  a r u t c u r t s
/
e¦¦
l¦¦ectve span o¦ memer See Secton S322 (!)
/
o
Lstance etween ponts o¦ .ero moment
//J Spantodepth rato
/ Lesgn moment at the 0lS
\ ( s  x a  a r t u e n o t h t p e L J·)/04
\
max
lmtng vaue ¦or depth to neutra axs (d ÷ 04)J where d <!0
· lever arm
a
cc
Coe¦¦cent tang account o¦ ong term 0SS ¦or ¦exure and
e¦¦ects on compressve strength and o¦ axa oads
un¦avourae e¦¦ects resutng ¦rom the !0 ¦or other phenomena
wa ) x e n n A  a n o  t a N l 0 m o r l ( d e   p p a s  d a o  y
d kato o¦ the redstruted moment to the
eastc endng moment
g
m
larta ¦actor ¦or matera propertes !!S ¦or ren¦orcement (g
s
)
!S ¦or concrete (g
c
)
r
0
ke¦erence ren¦orcement rato R
c
/!000
r kequred tenson ren¦orcement at mdspan / /J (¦or rectanguar eams)
/
c
Cross sectona area o¦ concrete
/
s
Area o¦ tenson stee
/
s2
Area o¦ compresson stee
/
s, prov
Area o¦ tenson stee provded
/
s, req'd
Area o¦ tenson stee requred
/
e¦¦
l¦¦ectve ¦ange wdth
/
t
Mean wdth o¦ the tenson .one
/
mn
vdth o¦ eam or r
/
w
vdth o¦ secton, or wdth o¦ we on ¦anged eams
J l¦¦ectve depth
J
2
l¦¦ectve depth to compresson ren¦orcement

cd
Lesgn vaue o¦ concrete compressve strength a
cc

c
/g
c
¦or 
c
< CS0/60

c
Characterstc cynder strength o¦ concrete

ctm
Mean vaue o¦ axa tense strength 030 
c
(2/3)
¦or 
c
< CS0/60
S e u l a V n o i t i n i f e D l o b m y Sy e u l a V n o i t i n i f e D l o b m
Selected symbols
32
4. Beams
Designing to Eurocode 2
This chapter is intended to assist engineers with the design of columns and
walls to Eurocode 2
1
. It sets out a design procedure to follow and gives useful
commentary on the provisions within the Eurocode. The layout and content
of Eurocode 2 may appear unusual to designers familiar with BS 8110
2
.
Eurocode 2 does not contain the derived formulae; this is because it has been
European practice to give principles and general application rules in the codes
and for detailed application rules to be presented in other sources such as
textbooks or guidance documents.
Chapter 1, originally published as Introduction to Eurocodes
3
, highlighted the
key differences between Eurocode 2 and BS 8110, including terminology.
It should also be noted that values from the UK National Annex (NA) have
been used throughout this publication, including values that are embedded in
derived formulae. (Derivations can be found at www.eurocode2.info.) A full list
of symbols related to column design is given at the end of this chapter.
Design procedure
A procedure for carrying out the detailed design of braced columns (i.e.
columns that do not contribute to resistance of horizontal actions) is shown
in Table 1. This assumes that the column dimensions have previously been
determined during conceptual design or by using quick design methods, for
example those presented in Economic concrete frame elements
4
. Column sizes
should not be significantly different from those obtained using BS 8110. Steps
1 to 4 of Table 1 are covered by earlier chapters and the next step is therefore
to consider fire resistance.
Fire resistance
Eurocode 2, Part 1–2: Structural fire design
5
, gives a choice of advanced, simplified
or tabular methods for determining fire resistance of columns. Using tables is the
fastest method for determining the minimum dimensions and cover for columns.
There are, however, some restrictions and if these apply further guidance can
be obtained from specialist literature.
6
The simplified method may give more
economic columns, especially for small columns and/or high fire resistance periods.
Rather than giving a minimum cover, the tabular method is based on nominal
axis distance, a (see Figure 1). This is the distance from the centre of the main
How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2
5. Columns
R Moss BSc, PhD, DIC, CEng, MICE, MIStructE O Brooker BEng, CEng, MICE, MIStructE
Continues page 35
34
How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2
Table 1
Column design procedure
Step Task Further guidance
Chapter in the publication Standard
1 Determine design life 2: Getting started UK NA to BS EN 1990 Table NA.2.1
2 Assess actions on the column 2: Getting started BS EN 1991 (10 parts) and UK National Annexes
3 Determine which combinations of actions apply 1: Introduction to Eurocodes UK NA to BS EN 1990 Tables NA.A1.1 and NA.A1.2 (B)
4 Assess durability requirements and determine concrete strength 2: Getting started BS 8500: 2002
5 Check cover requirements for appropriate fire resistance period 2: Getting started and Table 2 Approved Document B. BS EN 1992–1–2
6 Calculate min. cover for durability, fire and bond requirements 2: Getting started BS EN 1992–1–1 Cl. 4.4.1
7 Analyse structure to obtain critical moments and axial
forces
2: Getting started and ‘Structural
analysis’ section
BS EN 1992–1–1 section 5
8 Check slenderness See Figures 2 and 3 BS EN 1992–1–1 section 5.8
9 Determine area of reinforcement required See Figures 2 and 3 BS EN 1992–1–1 section 6.1
10 Check spacing of bars ‘Rules for spacing’ section BS EN 1992–1–1 sections 8 and 9
Note
NA = National Annex.
Table 2
Minimum column dimensions and axis distances for fire resistance
Standard fire
resistance
Minimum dimensions (mm)
Column width b
min
/axis distance, a, of the main
bars
Column exposed on more than
one side
Column
exposed on
one side
(μ
fi
= 0.7)
μ
fi
= 0.5 μ
fi
= 0.7
R 60 200/36
300/31
250/46
350/40
155/25
R 90 300/45
400/38
a
350/53
450/40
a
155/25
R 120 350/45
a
450/40
a
350/57
a
450/51
a
175/35
R 240 450/75
a b
295/70
Note
The table is taken from BS EN 1992–1–2 Table 5.2a (method A) and is valid under the
following conditions:
1 The effective length of a braced column under fire conditions lo,fi ≤ 3m. The value of lo,fi
may be taken as 50% of the actual length for intermediate floors and between 50%
and 70% of the actual length for the upper floor column.
2 The first order eccentricity under fire conditions should be ≤ 0.15b (or h). Alternatively
use method B (see Eurocode 2, Part 1–2, Table 5.2b). The eccentricity under fire
conditions may be taken as that used in normal temperature design.
3 The reinforcement area outside lap locations does not exceed 4% of the concrete
cross section.
4 μfi is the ratio of the design axial load under fire conditions to the design resistance of
the column at normal temperature conditions. μfi may conservatively be taken as 0.7.
Key
a Minimum 8 bars
b Method B may be used which indicates 600/70 for R 240 and μ
fi
= 0.7.
See BS EN 1992–1–2 Table 5.2b
Table 3
Minimum reinforced concrete wall dimensions and axis distances for
loadbearing for fire resistance
Standard
fire
resistance
Minimum dimensions (mm)
Wall thickness/axis distance, a, of the main bars
Wall exposed on one side
(μ
fi
= 0.7)
Wall exposed on two
sides (μ
fi
= 0.7)
REI 60 130/10
a
140/10
a
REI 90 140/25 170/25
REI 120 160/35 220/35
REI 240 270/60 350/60
Notes
1 The table is taken from BS EN 1992–1–2 Table 5.4.
2 See note 4 of Table 2.
Key
a Normally the requirements of BS EN 1992–1–1 will determine the cover.
Figure 1
Section through structural member, showing nominal axis distance a
h ≥ b
a
b
35
5. Columns
present methods A and B. Both are equally applicable, although
method A has smaller limits on eccentricity than method B. Method A
is slightly simpler and is presented in Table 2; limits of applicability
are given in the notes. Similar data for loadbearing walls is given in
Table 3.
For columns supporting the uppermost storey, the eccentricity will
often exceed the limits for both methods A and B. In this situation
Annex C of Eurocode 2, Part 1–2 may be used. Alternatively,
consideration can be given to treating the column as a beam for
determining the design fire resistance.
Column design
A flow chart for the design of braced columns is shown in Figure 2. For
slender columns, Figure 3 will also be required.
Structural analysis
The type of analysis should be appropriate to the problem being
considered. The following may be used: linear elastic analysis, linear
elastic analysis with limited redistribution, plastic analysis and
nonlinear analysis. Linear elastic analysis may be carried out assuming
cross sections are uncracked (i.e. concrete section properties),
using linear stressstrain relationships and assuming mean values
of longterm elastic modulus.
For the design of columns the elastic moments from the frame action
should be used without any redistribution. For slender columns a
nonlinear analysis may be carried out to determine the second order
moments; alternatively use the moment magnification method
(Cl 5.8.7.3) or nominal curvature method (Cl 5.8.8) as illustrated in
Figure 3. The latter is expected to be adopted in the UK.
Design moments
The design bending moment is illustrated in Figure 4 and defined as:
M
Ed
= Max {M
02
, M
0e
+ M
2
, M
01
+ 0.5 M
2
}
where
M
01
= Min {M
top
, M
bottom
} + e
i
N
Ed
M
02
= Max {M
top
, M
bottom
} + e
i
N
Ed
e
i
= Max {l
o
/400, h/30, 20} (units to be in millimetres).
M
top
, M
bottom
= Moments at the top and bottom of the column
M
0e
= 0.6 M
02
+ 0.4 M
01
≥ 0.4 M
02
M
2
= N
Ed
e
2
where N
Ed
is the design axial load and e
2
is deflection due to second order effects
M
01
and M
02
should be positive if they give tension on the same side.
A nonslender column can be designed ignoring second order effects
and therefore the ultimate design moment, M
Ed
= M
02
.
The calculation of the eccentricity, e
2
, is not simple and is likely to
require some iteration to determine the deflection at approximately
midheight, e
2
. Guidance is given in Figure 3.
Figure 2
Flow chart for braced column design
Use column chart (see Figure 9) to ﬁnd A
s
required for N
Ed
and M
Ed.
Alternatively, solve by iteration or by using RC
Spreadsheet TCC53 from Spreadsheets for concrete design to
BS 8110 and Eurocode 2
7
START
Initial column size may be determined using quick design
methods or through iteration.
Determine the actions on the column
using an appropriate analysis method.
The ultimate axial load is N
Ed
and the ultimate moments
are M
top
and M
bottom
(Moments from analysis)
Determine the effective length, l
o
, using either:
1. Figure 5
2. Table 4
3. Expression (5.15) from BS EN 1992–1–1
Determine ﬁrst order moments (see Figure 4)
M
01
= Min {M
top
, M
bottom
} + e
i
N
Ed
M
02
= Max {M
top
, M
bottom
} + e
i
N
Ed
Where e
i
= Max {l
o
/400, h/30, 20} (units to be in millimetres).
M
01
and M
02
should have the same sign
if they give tension on the same side.
Determine slenderness, l, from either:
l = l
o
/i where i = radius of gyration or
l = 3.46 l
o
/h for rectangular sections (h = overall depth) or
l = 4.0 l
o
/d for circular sections (d = column diameter)
Determine slenderness limit, λ
lim
, from:
l
lim =
15.4C
√n
(See ‘Slenderness’ section on page 5 for explanation.)
Column is slender
(refer to Figure 3).
Yes
Column is not slender. M
Ed
= M
02
No
Check rules for spacing and quantity of reinforcement
(see page 7)
Is l ≥ l
lim
?
reinforcing bar to the surface of the member. It is a nominal (not
minimum) dimension, and the designer should ensure that:
a ≥ c
nom
+ f
link
+ f
bar
/2.
For columns there are two tables given in Eurocode 2 Part 1–2 that
36
How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2
Figure 3
Flow chart for slender columns (nominal curvature method)
Effective length
Figure 5 gives guidance on the effective length of the column.
However, for most real structures Figures 5f) and 5g) only are
applicable, and Eurocode 2 provides two expressions to calculate the
effective length for these situations. Expression (5.15) is for braced
members and Expression (5.16) is for unbraced members.
In both expressions, the relative flexibilities at either end, k
1
and k
2
,
should be calculated. The expression for k given in the Eurocode
involves calculating the rotation of the restraining members, which in
practice requires the use of framework analysis software. Alternatively,
PD 6687: Background paper to the UK National annex
8
provides a
simplification, based on the stiffness of the beams attached to either
side of the column. This relative stiffness, k, can therefore be calculated
as follows (provided the stiffness of adjacent columns does not vary by
more than 15% of the higher stiffness):
k =
EI
c
Σ
2EI
b
≥ 0.1
l
c
l
b
where
I
c
, I
b
are the column and beam uncracked second moments of area
l
c
, l
b
are the column and beam lengths
Once k
1
and k
2
have been calculated, the effective length factor, F, can
be established from Table 4 for braced columns. The effective length is
then l
o
= Fl.
For a 400 mm square internal column supporting a 250 mm thick flat
slab on a 7.5 m grid, the value of k could be 0.11, and therefore l
o
= 0.59l.
In the edge condition k is effectively doubled and l
o
= 0.67l. If the internal
column had a notionally ‘pinned’ support at its base then l
o
= 0.77l.
It is also generally accepted that Table 3.19 of BS 8110 may
conservatively be used to determine the effective length factor. In the
long term, Expressions (5.15) and (5.16) will be beneficial as they are
particularly suitable for incorporation into design software.
From Figure 2
Determine K
r
from Figure 9 or from
K
r
= (n
u
 n) / (n
u
 n
bal
) ≤ 1
where
n = N
Ed
/ (A
c
f
cd
), relative axial force
N
Ed
= the design value of axial force
n
u
= 1 + w
n
bal
= 0.4
w = A
s,est
f
yd
/ (A
c
f
cd
)
A
s,est
= the estimated total area of steel
A
c
= the area of concrete
Revise value
of A
s,est
No
Yes
Check detailing requirements
Calculate Kh from Kh = 1 + b h
ef
≥ 1
where
h
ef
= the effective creep ratio
b = 0.35 + f
ck
/200 – λ/150
l = the slenderness ratio.
See section on creep (page 6)
Calculate e
2
from
e
2 = 0.1
(
K
r
Kh f
yd
)
l0
2
0.45d Es
where
Es = elastic modulus of reinforcing steel
(200 GPa)
M
0e
= 0.6 M
02
+ 0.4 M
01
≥ 0.4 M
02
M
2
= N
Ed
e
2
M
Ed
= Max {M
02
, M
0e
+ M
2
, M
01
+ 0.5 M
2
}
Use column chart to ﬁnd A
s,req’d
for N
Ed
and M
Ed
Alternatively, solve by iteration or by using
RC Spreadsheet
7
a) l
0
= l b) l
0
= 2l c) l
0
= 0.7l d) l
0
= l /2 e) l
0
= l f) l/2 < l
0
< l g) l
0
> 2l
y
l
y
y
M
Figure 5
Effective lengths for isolated members
First order
moments for
‘stocky’ columns
M
02
M
01
M
02
0.5 M
2
M M
01 2
+ 0.5
2 Ed 2
M M
0e 2
+ M
0e
Additional second
order moments for
‘slender’ columns
Total moment
diagram for
‘slender’ columns
+ =
M
e N
i Ed
M N = e
Figure 4
Design bending moments
Is A
s req’d
& A
s, est
?
37
5. Columns
Table 4
Effective length factor, F, for braced columns
k2 k1
0.10 0.20 0.30 0.40 0.50 0.70 1.00 2.00 5.00 9.00 Pinned
0.10 0.59 0.62 0.64 0.66 0.67 0.69 0.71 0.73 0.75 0.76 0.77
0.20 0.62 0.65 0.68 0.69 0.71 0.73 0.74 0.77 0.79 0.80 0.81
0.30 0.64 0.68 0.70 0.72 0.73 0.75 0.77 0.80 0.82 0.83 0.84
0.40 0.66 0.69 0.72 0.74 0.75 0.77 0.79 0.82 0.84 0.85 0.86
0.50 0.67 0.71 0.73 0.75 0.76 0.78 0.80 0.83 0.86 0.86 0.87
0.70 0.69 0.73 0.75 0.77 0.78 0.80 0.82 0.85 0.88 0.89 0.90
1.00 0.71 0.74 0.77 0.79 0.80 0.82 0.84 0.88 0.90 0.91 0.92
2.00 0.73 0.77 0.80 0.82 0.83 0.85 0.88 0.91 0.93 0.94 0.95
5.00 0.75 0.79 0.82 0.84 0.86 0.88 0.90 0.93 0.96 0.97 0.98
9.00 0.76 0.80 0.83 0.85 0.86 0.89 0.91 0.94 0.97 0.98 0.99
Pinned 0.77 0.81 0.84 0.86 0.87 0.90 0.92 0.95 0.98 0.99 1.00
105 kNm
105 kNm 105 kNm
105 kNm 105 kNm
r
m
= 1.0 r
m
= 1.0 r
m
= 0
a) C = 1.7  1 = 0.7 b) C = 1.7  0 = 1.7 c) C = 1.7 + 1.0 = 2.7
0
Figure 6
Calculating factor C
Slenderness
Eurocode 2 states that second order effects may be ignored if they
are less than 10% of the first order effects. As an alternative, if the
slenderness (l) is less than the slenderness limit (l
lim
), then second
order effects may be ignored.
Slenderness, l = l
o
/i where i = radius of gyration and slenderness limit.
l
lim
=
20ABC
≤
15.4C
n n
where
A = 1/(1+0.2 h
ef
) (if h
ef
is not known, A = 0.7 may be used)
B = (if ω, reinforcement ratio, is not known,
B = 1.1 may be used)
C = 1.7 – r
m
(if r
m
is not known, C = 0.7 may be used – see below)
n = N
Ed
/ (A
c
f
cd
)
r
m
= M
01
/M
02
M
01
, M
02
are the first order end moments, M
02
 ≥ M
01

If the end moments M
01
and M
02
give tension on the same side,
r
m
should be taken positive.
Of the three factors A, B and C, C will have the largest impact on
l
lim
and is the simplest to calculate. An initial assessment of l
lim
can
therefore be made using the default values for A and B, but including
a calculation for C (see Figure 6). Care should be taken in determining
C because the sign of the moments makes a significant difference. For
unbraced members C should always be taken as 0.7.
Column design resistance
For practical purposes the rectangular stress block used for the design
of beams (see Chapter 4, originally published as Beams
9
) may also be
used for the design of columns (see Figure 7). However, the maximum
compressive strain for concrete classes up to and including C50/60,
when the whole section is in pure compression, is 0.00175 (see Figure
8a). When the neutral axis falls outside the section (Figure 8b), the
maximum allowable strain is assumed to lie between 0.00175 and
0.0035, and may be obtained by drawing a line from the point of zero
strain through the ‘hinge point’ of 0.00175 strain at middepth of the
section. When the neutral axis lies within the section depth then the
maximum compressive strain is 0.0035 (see Figure 8c).
0.00175
h
x
x x
hinge
point
hinge
point
0.00175 / ( /2) x x – h
h
d
h/ 2
0.0035 max 0.0035 max
0.00175 mi n
d) General relationship c) When x < h b) When x > h a) Pure compression
0.00175
e
x
e
x
Figure 8
Strain diagrams for columns
a) Strain diagram b) Stress diagram
h
d
c
s
sc
e
cu2
e
sc
e
y
d
2
s
st
n. axis
d
2
x
f
cd
A
s2
A
s
Figure 7
Stress block diagram for columns
38
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
1.3
1.2
1.1
1.0
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1
0
0 0.05 0.10 0.15 0.20 0.25 0.30 0.35 0.40 0.45
0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
A f bhf
s yk ck
/
M/bh f
2
ck
N
b
h
f
/
c
k
K
r
= 0.2
d h
2
/ = 0.05
Figure 9a
Column design chart for rectangular columns d
2
/h = 0.05
How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2
The general relationship is shown in Figure 8d). For concrete classes
above C50/60 the principles are the same but the maximum strain
values vary.
Two expressions can be derived for the area of steel required, (based on
a rectangular stress block, see Figure 7) one for the axial loads and the
other for the moments:
A
sN
/2 = (N
Ed
– f
cd
b d
c
) / (σ
sc
– σ
st
)
where
A
sN
= Area of reinforcement required to resist axial load
N
Ed
= Axial load
f
cd
= Design value of concrete compressive strength
σ
sc
(σ
st
) = Stress in compression (and tension) reinforcement
b = Breadth of section
d
c
= Effective depth of concrete in compression = lx ≤ h
l = 0.8 for ≤ C50/60
x = Depth to neutral axis
h = Height of section
A
sM
/2 = [M – f
cd
b d
c
(h/2 – d
c
/2)] / [(h/2–d
2
) (σ
sc
+σ
st
)]
where
A
sM
= Total area of reinforcement required to resist moment
Realistically, these can only be solved iteratively and therefore either
computer software (e.g. RC Spreadsheet TCC53 from Spreadsheets for
concrete design to BS 8110 and EC2
7
) or column design charts (see
Figures 9a to 9e) may be used.
Creep
Depending on the assumptions used in the design, it may be necessary
to determine the effective creep ratio h
ef
(ref. Cl. 3.1.4 & 5.8.4). A
nomogram is provided in the Eurocode (Figure 3.1) for which the
cement strength class is required; however, at the design stage it often
not certain which class applies. Generally, Class R should be assumed.
Where the ground granulated blastfurnace slag (ggbs) exceeds 35%
of the cement combination or where pulverized fuel ash (pfa) exceeds
20% of the cement combination, Class N may be assumed. Where
ggbs exceeds 65% or where pfa exceeds 35%, Class S may be assumed.
Biaxial bending
The effects of biaxial bending may be checked using Expression (5.39),
which was first developed by Breslaer.
(
M
Edz
)
a
+
(
M
Edy
)
a
≤ 1.0
M
Rdz
M
Rdy
where
M
Edz,y
= Design moment in the respective direction including second
order effects in a slender column
M
Rdz,y
= Moment of resistance in the respective direction
a = 2 for circular and elliptical sections; refer to Table 5 for rectangular
sections
N
Rd
= A
c
f
cd
+ A
s
f
yd
Continues page 41
39
5. Columns
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.7
0.9
1.0
d h
2
/ = 0.15
1.3
1.2
1.1
1.0
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1
0
0 0.05 0.10 0.15 0.20 0.25 0.30 0.35 0.40
A f bhf
s yk ck
/
N
b
h
f
/
c
k
M bh f /
2
ck
K
r
=1
0.6
0.8
Figure 9c
Column design chart for rectangular columns d
2
/h = 0.15
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.3
1.2
1.1
1.0
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1
0
0 0.05 0.10 0.15 0.20 0.25 0.30 0.35 0.40 0.45
M bh f /
2
ck
d h
2
/ = 0.10
K
r
=1
0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
N
b
h
f
/
c
k
A f bhf
s yk
/
ck
Figure 9b
Column design chart for rectangular columns d
2
/h = 0.10
40
A f bhf
s yk ck
/
d h
2
/ = 0.25
M/bh f
2
ck
N
b
h
f
/
c
k
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.3
1.2
1.1
1.0
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1
0
0 0.05 0.10 0.15 0.20 0.25 0.30
1.0
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1
0
K
r
= 1
Figure 9e
Column design chart for rectangular columns d
2
/h = 0.25
0 0.05 0.10 0.15 0.20 0.25 0.30 0.35
0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
1.2
1.1
1.3
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
A f bhf
s yk ck
/
d h
2
/ = 0.20
M/bh f
2
ck
N
b
h
f
/
c
k
K
r
= 1
0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
Figure 9d
Column design chart for rectangular columns d
2
/h = 0.20
How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2
41
Table 5
Value of a for rectangular sections
N
Ed
/N
Rd
0.1 0.7 1.0
a 1.0 1.5 2.0
Note
Linear interpolation may be used.
Unbraced columns
There is no comment made on the design of sway frames in Eurocode 2.
However, it gives guidance on the effective length of an unbraced
member in Expression (5.16). The value for C of 0.7 should always be
used in Expression (5.13N). The design moments should be assessed
including second order effects. The tabular method for fire resistance
design (Part 1–2) does not explicitly cover unbraced columns; however
reference can be made to the Handbook to EN 1992–1–2
6
.
Walls
When the section length of a vertical element is four times greater
than its thickness it is defined as a wall. The design of walls does not
differ significantly from that for columns except for the following:
■ The requirements for fire resistance (see Table 3).
■ Bending will be critical about the weak axis.
■ There are different rules for spacing and quantity of reinforcement
(see below).
There is no specific guidance given for bending about the strong axis
for stability. However, the principles of CIRIA Report 108
10
may be
followed. Alternatively the strut and tie method may be used (section
6.5 of the Eurocode).
Rules for spacing and
quantity of reinforcement
Maximum areas of reinforcement
In Eurocode 2 the maximum nominal reinforcement area for columns
and walls outside laps is 4% compared with 6% in BS 8110. However,
this area can be increased provided that the concrete can be placed
and compacted sufficiently. If required selfcompacting concrete may
be used for particularly congested situations, where the reinforcing bars
should be spaced to ensure that the concrete can flow around them.
Further guidance can be found in Selfcompacting concrete.
11
Minimum reinforcement requirements
The recommended minimum diameter of longitudinal reinforcement in
columns is 12 mm. The minimum area of longitudinal reinforcement in
columns is given by: A
s,min
= 0.10 N
Ed
/f
yd
≥ 0.002A
c
Exp. (9.12N)
The diameter of the transverse reinforcement should not be less than
6 mm or one quarter of the maximum diameter of the longitudinal bars.
Symbol Definition Value
1/r
0
Reference curvature ε
yd
/(0.45 d)
1/r Curvature K
r
Kh 1/r
0
a Axis distance for fire resistance
A Factor for determining slenderness limit 1 / (1+0.2 h
ef
)
A
c
Cross sectional area of concrete bh
A
s
Area of total column reinforcement
B Factor for determining slenderness limit
c Factor depending on curvature distribution 10 (for constant crosssection)
C Factor for determining slenderness limit 1.7 – r
m
d Effective depth
e
2
Second order eccentricity (1/r)l
o
/c
e
i
Eccentricity due to geometric imperfections
E
s
Elastic modulus of reinforcing steel 200 GPa
f
cd
Design value of concrete compressive strength α
cc
f
ck
/γc
f
ck
Characteristic cylinder strength of concrete
l Clear height of compression member between
end restraints
l
o
Effective length
K
r
Correction factor depending on axial load
Kh Factor taking into account creep
M
01
,M
02
First order moments including the effect of
geometric imperfections M
02
 ≥ M
01

M
2
Nominal second order moment N
Ed
e
2
M
0e
Equivalent first order moment 0.6 M
02
+ 0.4 M
01
≥ 0.4 M
02
M
Ed
Ultimate design moment
M
Eqp
First order bending moment under
quasipermanent loading
n Relative axial force N
Ed
/(A
c
f
cd
)
n
bal
Value of n at maximum moment of resistance 0.4
n
u
Factor to allow for reinforcement in the column 1 + ω
N
Ed
Ultimate axial load
r
m
Moment ratio M
01
/M
02
x Depth to neutral axis (d – z)/0.4
z Lever arm
α
cc
Coefficient taking account of long term effects 0.85 for flexure and axial
on compressive strength and of unfavourable loads. 1.0 for other
effects resulting from the way load is applied phenomena (From UK NA)
β Factor 0.35 + f
ck
/200 – λ/150
ε
yd
Design value of strain in reinforcement f
yd
/E
s
γ
m
Partial factor for material properties 1.15 for reinforcement (γ
s
)
1.5 for concrete (γ
c
)
l Slenderness l
o
/i
l
lim
Slenderness limit
μ
fi
Degree of utilisation in a fire N
Ed,fi
/N
Rd
h
ef
Effective creep ratio h(
∞
,t
o
) M
Eqp
/M
Ed
h (
∞
,t
o
) Final creep coefficient to Cl 3.1.4
ω Mechanical reinforcement ratio A
s
f
yd
/(A
c
f
cd
)
x Absolute value of x
Max. {x,y+z} The maximum of values x or y + z
Selected symbols
5. Columns
42
5. Columns
References
1 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. BS EN 1992–1–1, Eurocode 2: Design of concrete structures. General rules and rules for buildings. BSI, 2004.
2 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. BS 8110–1, Structural use of concrete – Part 1, Code of practice for design and construction. BSI, 2004.
3 NARAYANAN, R S & BROOKER, O. How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2: Introduction. The Concrete Centre, 2005.
4 GOODCHILD, C H. Economic concrete frame elements. BCA 1997.
5 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. BS EN 1992–1–2. Eurocode 2: Design of concrete structures. General rules – structural fire design. BSI, 2004.
6 DEPARTMENT OF COMMUNITIES AND LOCAL GOVERNMENT. Handbook to EN 1992–1–2. DCLG, due 2006.
7 GOODCHILD, C H WEBSTER, R M. Spreadsheets for concrete design to BS 8110 and Eurocode 2, version 3. The Concrete Centre, 2006.
8 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. Background paper to the UK National Annex to BS EN 1992–1–1 and BS EN 1992–1–2. BSI, due 2006.
9 MOSS, R M & BROOKER, O. How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2: Beams. The Concrete Centre, 2006.
10 CIRIA. Report 102: Design of shear wall buildings. CIRIA, 1984.
11 THE CONCRETE SOCIETY. Technical Report No 62: Selfcompacting concrete. A review. The Society, 2005.
Spacing requirements for columns
The maximum spacing of transverse reinforcement (i.e. links) in
columns (Clause 9.5.3(1)) should not exceed:
■ 12 times the minimum diameter of the longitudinal bars.
■ 60% of the lesser dimension of the column.
■ 240 mm.
At a distance greater than the larger dimension of the column above
or below a beam or slab these spacings can be increased by a factor
of 1.67. The minimum clear distance between the bars should be the
greater of the bar diameter, aggregate size plus 5 mm or 20 mm.
No longitudinal bar should be further than 150 mm from transverse
reinforcement (links) in the compression zone.
Particular requirements for walls
The minimum area of vertical reinforcement in walls is given by:
A
s,min
= 0.002A
c
Half of this area should be located at each face. The distance between
two adjacent vertical bars should not exceed the lesser of either three
times the wall thickness or 400 mm.
The minimum area of horizontal reinforcement in walls is the greater
of either 25% of vertical reinforcement or 0.001 A
c
. However, where
crack control is important, early age thermal and shrinkage effects
should be considered explicitly.
Eurocode 7: Geotechnical design
Scope
All foundations should be designed so that the soil safely resists the
actions applied to the structure. The design of any foundation consists of
two components; the geotechnical design and the structural design of the
foundation itself. However, for some foundations (e.g. flexible rafts) the effect
of the interaction between the soil and structure may be critical and must
also be considered. Geotechnical design is covered by Eurocode 7
1
, which
supersedes several current British Standards including BS 5930
2
, BS 8002
3
and BS 8004
4
. The new Eurocode marks a significant change in geotechnical
design in that limit state principles are used throughout and this should
ensure consistency between the Eurocodes. There are two parts to Eurocode 7,
Part 1: General rules and Part 2: Ground investigation and testing. Guidance on
the design of retaining walls can be found in Chapter 9.
The essential features of Eurocode 7, Part 1 relating to foundation design are
discussed in this chapter. It should be emphasised that this publication covers
only the design of simple foundations, which are a small part of the scope of
Eurocode 7. Therefore it should not be relied on for general guidance on this
Eurocode. At the time of writing it is anticipated that the National Annex (NA)
for Part 1 will be published in July 2007.
Limit states
The following ultimate limit states (ULS) should be satisfied for geotechnical
design; they each have their own combinations of actions. (For an explanation
of Eurocode terminology please refer to Chapter 1, originally published as
Introduction to Eurocodes
5
.)
EQU Loss of equilibrium of the structure.
STR Internal failure or excessive deformation of the structure or structural
member.
GEO Failure due to excessive deformation of the ground.
UPL Loss of equilibrium due to uplift by water pressure.
HYD Failure caused by hydraulic gradients.
In addition, the serviceability limit states (SLS) should be satisfied. It will
usually be clear that one of the limit states will govern the design and
therefore it will not be necessary to carry out checks for all of them, although
it is considered good practice to record that they have all been considered.
Geotechnical Categories
Eurocode 7 recommends three Geotechnical Categories to assist in establishing
the geotechnical design requirements for a structure (see Table 1).
How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2
6. Foundations
R Webster CEng, FIStructE O Brooker BEng, CEng, MICE, MIStructE
44
How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2
Table 1
Geotechnical categories of structures
Category Description Risk of geotechnical failure Examples from Eurocode 7
1 Small and relatively simple structures Negligible None given
2 Conventional types of structure and foundation
with no difficult ground or loading conditions
No exceptional risk Spread foundations
3 All other structures Abnormal risks Large or unusual structures
Exceptional ground conditions
Table 2
Design values of actions derived for UK design, STR/GEO ultimate limit state – persistent and transient design situations
Combination
Expression reference
from BS EN 1990
Permanent actions Leading variable
action
Accompanying variable actions
Unfavourable Favourable Main (if any) Others
Combination 1 (Application of combination 1 (BS EN 1997) to set B (BS EN 1990))
Exp. (6.10) 1.35 G
k
a
1.0 G
k
a
1.5
b
Q
k
– 1.5
b
c
o,i
c
Q
k,i
Exp. (6.10a) 1.35 G
k
a
1.0 G
k
a
– 1.5 c
o
,
1
c
Q
k
1.5
b
c
o,i
c
Q
k,i
Exp. (6.10b) 0.925
d
x 1.35 G
k
a
1.0 G
k
a
1.5
b
Q
k
– 1.5
b
c
o,i
c
Q
k,i
Combination 2 (Application of combination 2 (BS EN 1997) to set C (BS EN 1990))
Exp. (6.10) 1.0 G
k
a
1.0 G
k
a
1.3
b
Q
k,1
– 1.3
b
c
o,i
b
Q
k,i
Key
a Where the variation in permanent action is not considered significant G
k,j,sup
and G
k,j,inf
may be taken as G
k
b Where the action is favourable, g
Q
,
i
= 0 and the variable actions should be ignored
c The value of c
o
can be obtained from Table NA.A1.1 of the UK NA to BS EN 1990 (or see Table 3 of Chapter 1)
d The value of j in the UK NA to BS EN 1990 is 0.925
Table 3
Partial factors for geotechnical material properties
Angle of shearing
resistance
(apply to tan h)
Effective cohesion Undrained shear
strength
Unconfined strength Bulk density
Symbol g
h
g
c’
g
cu
g
qu
g
g
Combination 1 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0
Combination 2 1.25 1.25 1.4 1.4 1.0
It is anticipated that structural engineers will take responsibility for the
geotechnical design of category 1 structures, and that geotechnical
engineers will take responsibility for category 3 structures. The
geotechnical design of category 2 structures may be undertaken by
members of either profession. This decision will very much depend on
individual circumstances.
Methods of design and combinations
There has not been a consensus amongst geotechnical engineers
over the application of limit state principles to geotechnical design.
Therefore, to allow for these differences of opinion, Eurocode 7
provides for three Design Approaches to be used for the ULS. The
decision on which approach to use for a particular country is given
in its National Annex. In the UK Design Approach 1 will be specified
in the National Annex. For this Design Approach (excluding pile and
anchorage design) there are two sets of combinations to use for the
STR and GEO ultimate limit states. The values for the partial factors
to be applied to the actions for these combinations of partial factors
are given in Table 2 and the partial factors for the geotechnical
material properties are given in Table 3. Combination 1 will generally
govern the structural resistance, and Combination 2 will generally
govern the sizing of the foundations.
The partial factors for soil resistance to sliding and bearing should be
taken as 1.0 for both combinations.
The partial factors to be applied to the actions at the EQU limit state
are given in Table 4; the geotechnical material partial factors being the
same as for Combination 2 in Table 3.
For the SLS, Eurocode 7 does not give any advice on whether the
characteristic, frequent or quasipermanent combination should be
used. Where the prescriptive method is used for spread foundations
(see page 3) then the characteristic values should be adopted. For
45
6. Foundations
direct methods of calculation the frequent combination can be used
for sizing of foundations and the quasipermanent combination can be
used for settlement calculations.
Further information on design combinations can be found in Chapter 1,
originally published as Introduction to Eurocodes
5
.
Geotechnical design report
A geotechnical design report should be produced for each project,
even if it is only a single sheet. The report should contain details of
the site, interpretation of the ground investigation report, geotechnical
design recommendations and advice on supervision, monitoring and
maintenance of the works. It is likely that this report will require input
from more than one consultant, depending on whether the project is in
Geotechnical Category 1, 2 or 3.
The foundation design recommendations should include bearing
resistances and characteristic values for soil parameters. It should
also clearly state whether the values are applicable to SLS or ULS and
whether they are for Combination 1 or Combination 2.
Spread foundations
The geotechnical design of spread foundations (e.g. strip and pad
foundations) is covered by section 6 of Eurocode 7, Part 1 and this
gives three methods for design:
■ Direct method – calculation is carried out for each limit state.
■ Indirect method – experience and testing used to determine
serviceability limit state parameters that also satisfy all relevant
limit states (included in Eurocode 7 mainly to suit French design
methods, and is not discussed further here).
■ Prescriptive method in which a presumed bearing resistance is used.
For most spread foundations in the UK, settlement will be the
governing criterion; traditionally ‘allowable bearing pressures’ have been
used to limit settlement. This concept of increasing the factor of safety
on bearing resistances to control settlement may still be used with the
prescriptive method. The exception is for soft clays where Eurocode 7
requires settlement calculations to be undertaken.
When using the direct method, calculations are carried out for each
limit state. At the ULS, the bearing resistance of the soil should be
checked using partial factors on the soil properties as well as on
the actions. At the SLS the settlement of the foundations should be
calculated and checked against permissible limits.
The prescriptive method may be used where calculation of the soil
properties is not possible or necessary and can be used provided that
conservative rules of design are used. Therefore reference can continue
to be made to Table 1 of BS 8004 (see Table 5) to determine presumed
(allowable) bearing pressures for category 1 structures and preliminary
calculations for category 2 structures. Alternatively, the presumed
bearing resistance to allow for settlement can be calculated by the
geotechnical designer and included in the geotechnical design report.
Table 4
Design values of actions derived for UK design, EQU ultimate limit
state – persistent and transient design situations
Combination
Expression
reference
Permanent actions Leading
variable
action
Accompanying variable
actions
Unfavourable Favourable Main
(if any)
Others
Exp. (6.10) 1.1 G
k
a
0.90 G
k
a
1.5
b
Q
k
– 1.5
c
c
o,i
c
Q
k,i
Key
a Where the variation in permanent action is not considered significant G
k, j, sup
and G
k, j, inf
may be taken as G
k
b Where the action is favourable, g
Q
,
i
= 0 and the variable actions should be ignored
c The value of c
o
can be obtained from Table NA.A1.1 of the UK NA to BS EN 1990
Table 5
Presumed allowable bearing values under static loading (from BS 8004)
Category Type of soil Presumed allowable bearing value (kN/m
2
) Remarks
Non
cohesive
soils
Dense gravel, or dense sand and gravel > 600 Width of foundation not less than 1 m.
Groundwater level assumed to be below the base
of the foundation.
Medium dense gravel, or medium
dense sand and gravel
< 200 to 600
Loose gravel, or loose sand and gravel < 200
Compact sand > 300
Medium dense sand 100 to 300
Loose sand < 100
Cohesive
soils
Very stiff boulder clay and hard clay 300 to 600 Susceptible to longterm consolidation settlement
Stiff clay 150 to 300
Firm clay 75 to 150
Soft clay and silt <75
Very soft clay and silt Not applicable
Note
These values are for preliminary design purposes only.
46
How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2
Partial factors for the soil parameters used to determine the resistances
can be obtained from Table 3 above (Combination 2).
The pressure distribution under the base should be assessed to ensure
that the maximum pressure does not exceed the bearing resistances
obtained from the geotechnical design report at both EQU and GEO
ultimate limit states (see Figure 2). If the eccentricity is greater than
L/6 at SLS, then the pressure distribution used to determine the
settlement should be modified because tension cannot occur between
the base and the soil. In this case the designer should satisfy himself
that there will be no adverse consequences (e.g. excessive rotation of
the base). It should also be noted that the ULS pressure distribution
diagram will be rectangular and not trapezoidal.
Reinforced concrete pads
Where the pad foundations require reinforcement the following checks
should be carried out to ensure:
■ Sufficient reinforcement to resist bending moments.
■ Punching shear strength.
■ Beam shear strength.
The moments and shear forces should be assessed using the STR
combination:
1.35 G
k
+ 1.5 Q
k
STR combination 1 (Exp. (6.10))
However, there may be economies to made from using Expressions
(6.10a) or (6.10b) from the Eurocode.
The critical bending moments for design of bottom reinforcement
are located at the column faces. Both beam shear and punching
shear should then be checked at the locations shown in Figure 3. For
punching shear the ground reaction within the perimeter may be
deducted from the column load (Expression (6.48), Eurocode 2–1–1
6
).
It is not usual for a pad foundation to contain shear reinforcement,
therefore it is only necessary to ensure that the concrete shear stress
capacity without shear reinforcement (v
Rd,c
– see Table 6) is greater than
applied shear stress (v
Ed
= V
Ed
/(bd)).
If the basic shear stress is exceeded, the designer may increase the
depth of the base. Alternatively, the amount of main reinforcement
could be increased or, less desirably, shear links could be provided. (See
Chapter 4, originally published as Beams
8
for an explanation of how to
design shear reinforcement.)
A flow chart showing the design process for shallow foundations is
given in Figure 1.
Where there is a moment applied to the foundation, the EQU limit
state should also be checked. Assuming the potential overturning of
the base is due to the variable action from the wind, the following
combination should be used (the variable imposed action is not
considered to contribute to the stability of the structure):
0.9 G
k
+ 1.5 Q
k,w
EQU combination
where:
G
k
is the stabilising characteristic permanent action
(Use 1.1 G
k
for a destabilising permanent action)
Q
k,w
is the destabilising characteristic variable wind action
Figure 1
Procedures for depth of spread foundations
Design foundation (structural design) using the worst of
Combinations 1 and 2 (ULS) for actions and geotechnical
material properties.
START
Design using
direct method?
Obtain soil parameters from Ground Investigation report
Size foundation
(geotechnical design) using
the worst of Combinations
1 or 2 (ULS) for actions
and geotechnical material
properties. Combination 2
will usually govern.
Use prescriptive method.
Size foundation
(geotechnical design)
using SLS for actions
and presumed
bearing resistance
Is there an
overturning moment?
Check overturning using EQU
limit state for actions and
GEO Combination 2
for material properties.
Yes No
Yes
No
M M
M
P
P
P
e
e e
e = / M P
P
P
L
L
L
L
1 +
e 6
6e
1
2P
1.5 3 L e
L = width of base
SLS pressure distributions ULS pressure distribution
or
P
2 L e
P P P
Figure 2
Pressure distributions for pad foundations
47
6. Foundations
START
Determine value of factor β
(β =1.0 when applied moment is zero; refer to Expressions
(6.38) to (6.42) from BS EN 1992–1–1 for other cases)
Determine value of vEd,max
(design shear stress at face of column) from:
vEd,max = β(VEd – DVEd) (from Exp. (6.38))
(u0deff)
where u0 is perimeter of column
(see Clause 6.4.5 for columns at base edges)
deff = (dy + dz)/2 where dy and dz
are the effective depths in orthogonal directions
Determine value of vRd,max (refer to Table 7)
Determine concrete punching shear capacity vRd (without
shear reinforcement) from 2dvRd,c/a (Refer to Table 6 for vRd,c)
Yes
Either increase main
steel, or provide
punching shear
reinforcement required.
(Not recommended
for foundations.)
No
No shear reinforcement required. Check complete.
Figure 4
Procedure for determining punching shear capacity for pad foundations
Yes
Redesign foundation Is vEd,max < vRd, max?
No
Determine value of vEd, (design shear stress) from:
vEd = (VEd – DVEd)
(u1deff)
where u1 is length of control perimeter (refer to Figure 5). For
eccentrically loaded bases, refer to Exp. (6.51).
The control perimeter will have to be found through iteration;
it will usually be between d and 2d
Is vEd < vRd at
critical perimeter?
Design for punching shear
Eurocode 2 provides specific guidance on the design of foundations for
punching shear, and this varies from that given for slabs. In Eurocode 2 the
shear perimeter has rounded corners and the forces directly resisted by
the ground should be deducted (to avoid unnecessarily conservative
designs). The critical perimeter should be found iteratively, but it is
generally acceptable to check at d and 2d. Alternatively, a spreadsheet
could be used (e.g. spreadsheet TCC81 from Spreadsheets for concrete
design to BS 8110 and Eurocode 2
7
). The procedure for determining the
punching shear requirements is shown in Figure 4.
Table 6
v
Rd
,
c
resistance of members without shear reinforcement, MPa
r
l Effective depth, d (mm)
300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000
a
0.25% 0.47 0.43 0.40 0.38 0.36 0.35 0.35 0.34
0.50% 0.54 0.51 0.48 0.47 0.45 0.44 0.44 0.43
0.75% 0.62 0.58 0.55 0.53 0.52 0.51 0.50 0.49
1.00% 0.68 0.64 0.61 0.59 0.57 0.56 0.55 0.54
1.25% 0.73 0.69 0.66 0.63 0.62 0.60 0.59 0.58
1.50% 0.78 0.73 0.70 0.67 0.65 0.64 0.63 0.62
1.75% 0.82 0.77 0.73 0.71 0.69 0.67 0.66 0.65
≥2.00% 0.85 0.80 0.77 0.74 0.72 0.70 0.69 0.68
k 1.816 1.707 1.632 1.577 1.535 1.500 1.471 1.447
Key
a For depths greater than 1000 calculate vRd,c directly.
Notes
1 Table derived from: vRd,c = 0.12 k (100rI fck)
(1/3)
≥ 0.035 k
1.5
fck
0.5
where k = 1 + √(200/d) ≤ 2 and rI = √(rIy +rIz) ≤ 0.02,
rIy = Asy/(bd) and rIz = Asz/(bd)
2 This table has been prepared for fck = 30;
where rl exceed 0.40% the following factors may be used:
f
ck
25 28 32 35 40 45 50
Factor 0.94 0.98 1.02 1.05 1.10 1.14 1.19
Beam shear
faces
2d
d
d
h
Bends may be
required
Punching shear perimeters,
(load within deducted from V )
Ed
Figure 3
Shear checks for pad foundations
b
z
2d
2d
b
y
u
1
u
1
Figure 5
Typical basic control perimeters around loaded areas
48
How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2
flexure reference should be made to Chapter 4, originally published as
Beams
8
.
Alternatively, a truss analogy may be used; this is covered in Sections 5.6.4
and 6.5 of Eurocode 2–1–1. The strut angle y should be at least 21.8° to
the horizontal; note that y should be measured in the plane of the column
and pile.
Both beam shear and punching shear should then be checked as shown in
Figure 6. For beam shear, the design resistances in Table 6 may be used. If the
basic shear stress is exceeded, the designer should increase the depth of the
base. Alternatively, the amount of main reinforcement could be increased or,
less desirably, shear links could be provided. Care should be taken that main
bars are fully anchored. As a minimum, a full anchorage should be provided
from the inner face of piles. Large radius bends may be required.
When assessing the shear capacity in a pile cap, only the tension steel
placed within the stress zone should be considered as contributing to the
shear capacity (see Figure 7).
Raft foundations
The basic design processes for rafts are similar to those for isolated
pad foundations or pilecaps. The only difference in approach lies in the
selection of an appropriate method for analysing the interaction between
the raft and the ground so as to achieve a reasonable representation of
their behaviour. For stiffer rafts (i.e. spantothickness greater than 10) with
a fairly regular layout, simplified approaches such as yield line or the flat
slab equivalent frame method may be employed, once an estimation of
the variations in bearing pressure has been obtained from a geotechnical
specialist. Whatever simplifications are made, individual elastic raft
reactions should equate to the applied column loads.
Thinner, more flexible rafts or those with a complex layout may require
the application of a finite element or grillage analysis. For rafts bearing
on granular subgrades or when contiguouspiled walls or diaphragm
perimeter walls are present, the ground may be modelled as a series
of Winkler springs. However, for cohesive subgrades, this approach is
unlikely to be valid, and specialist software will be required.
Piled foundations
For the purpose of this chapter it is assumed that the pile design will be
carried out by a specialist piling contractor. The actions on the piles must
be clearly conveyed to the pile designer, and these should be broken down
into the unfactored permanent actions and each of the applicable variable
actions (e.g. imposed and wind actions). The pile designer can then carry
out the structural and geotechnical design of the piles.
Where moments are applied to the pilecap the EQU combination
should also be used to check the piles can resist the overturning forces.
These EQU loads must also be clearly conveyed to the pile designer
and procedures put in place to ensure the piles are designed for the
correct forces.
A pilecap may be treated as a beam in bending, where the critical
bending moments for the design of the bottom reinforcement are
located at the column faces. For further guidance on designing for
Table 7
Values for v
Rd, max
f
ck
v
Rd,max
20 3.68
25 4.50
28 4.97
30 5.28
32 5.58
35 6.02
40 6.72
45 7.38
50 8.00
a a
b
F
h
F
Figure 8
Dimensions for plain foundations
Stress zone
45
o
A
s
contributing to shear capacity
Figure 7
Shear reinforcement for pilecaps
Punching shear 5 2d from column face
f /5
f /5
f
Beam shear 5 d from column face
Figure 6
Critical shear perimeters for piles
49
6. Foundations
Table 8
Minimum percentage of reinforcement required
f
ck
f
ctm
Minimum % (0.26 f
ctm
/f
yk
a
)
25 2.6 0.13%
28 2.8 0.14%
30 2.9 0.15%
32 3.0 0.16%
35 3.2 0.17%
40 3.5 0.18%
45 3.8 0.20%
50 4.1 0.21%
Key
a Where f
yk
= 500 MPa.
Plain concrete foundations
Strip and pad footings may be constructed from plain concrete
provided the following rules are adhered to.
■ In compression, the value of a
cc
, the coefficient taking account of
longterm effects applied to design compressive strength
(see Cl. 3.1.6), should be taken as 0.6 as opposed to 0.85 for
reinforced concrete.
■ The minimum foundation depth, h
F
, (see Figure 8) may be
calculated from:
where:
s
gd
= the design value of the ground bearing pressure
f
ctd
= the design concrete tensile strength from Exp. (3.16)
For many situations this is unlikely to offer any savings over the current
practice of designing for h
f
≥ a.
The possibility of splitting forces, as advised in Clause 9.8.4 of Eurocode
2–1–1, may need to be considered.
Eurocode 2 allows plain concrete foundations to contain reinforcement
for control of cracking.
Rules for spacing and
quantity of reinforcement
Crack control
Refer to Chapter 2, originally published as Getting started
9
.
Minimum area of principal reinforcement
The minimum area of reinforcement is A
s,min
= 0.26 f
ctm
b
t
d/f
yk
but not
less than 0.0013b
t
d (see Table 8).
Maximum area of reinforcement
Except at lap locations, the maximum area of tension or compression
reinforcement, should not exceed A
s,max
= 0.04 A
c
Minimum spacing of reinforcement
The minimum spacing of bars should be the greater of:
■ Bar diameter,
■ Aggregate size plus 5 mm, or
■ 20 mm.
Deep elements
For deep elements the advice in Eurocode 2 for the side faces of deep
beams may be followed. The UK National Annex recommends that 0.2%
is provided in each face. The distance between bars should not exceed
the lesser of twice the beam depth or 300 mm. For pile caps the side
face may be unreinforced if there is no risk of tension developing.
Symbol Definition Value
A
c
Cross sectional area of concrete bh
A
s
Area of tension steel
A
s, prov
Area of tension steel provided
A
s, req’d
Area of tension steel required
d Effective depth
d
eff
Average effective depth (d
y
+ d
z
) /2
f
cd
Design value of concrete compressive strength a
cc
f
ck
/g
c
f
ck
Characteristic cylinder strength of concrete
f
ctm
Mean value of axial tensile strength 0.30 f
ck
2/3
for f
ck
≤ C50/60
(from Table 3.1, Eurocode 2)
G
k
Characteristic value of permanent action
h Overall depth of the section
l
eff
Effective span of member See Section 5.3.2.2 (1)
M Design moment at the ULS
Q
k
Characteristic value of a variable action
Q
k,w
Characteristic value of a variable wind action
V
Ed
Design value of applied shear force
v
Ed
Design value of applied shear stress
V
Rd,c
Design value of the punching shear
resistance without punching shear reinforcement
v
Rd,c
Design value of the punching shear stress
resistance without punching shear reinforcement
v
Rd,max
Design value of the maximum punching shear
resistance along the control section considered
x Depth to neutral axis (d – z)/0.4
x
max
Limiting value for depth to neutral axis (d – 0.4)d where d ≤1.0
z Lever arm
a
cc
Coefficient taking account of long term 0.85 for flexure and
effects on compressive strength and of axial loads, 1.0 for
unfavourable effects resulting from the way other phenomena
load is applied (From UK National Annex)
b Factor for determining punching shear stress
d Ratio of the redistributed moment to the elastic
bending moment
g
m
Partial factor for material properties
r
0
Reference reinforcement ratio f
ck
/1000
r
l
Required tension reinforcement at midspan A
s
l bd
to resist the moment due to the design
loads (or at support for cantilevers)
c
0
Factor for combination value of a variable action
c
1
Factor for frequent value of a variable action
c
2
Factor for quasipermanent value of a variable action
Selected symbols
50
References
1 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. BS EN 1997: Eurocode 7: Geotechnical design. BSI (2 parts).
2 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. BS 5930: Code of practice for site investigation. BSI, 1999.
3 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. BS 8002: Code of practice for earth retaining structures. BSI, 1994.
4 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. BS 8004: Code of practice for foundations. BSI, 1986.
5 NARAYANAN, R S & BROOKER, O. How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2: Introduction to Eurocodes. The Concrete Centre, 2005.
6 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. BS EN 1992–1–1, Eurocode 2: Design of concrete structures. General rules and rules for buildings. BSI, 2004.
7 GOODCHILD, C H & WEBSTER R M. Spreadsheets for concrete design to BS 8110 and Eurocode 2, version 3. The Concrete Centre, 2006.
8 MOSS, R M & BROOKER, O. How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2: Beams. The Concrete Centre, 2006.
9 BROOKER, O. How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2: Getting started. The Concrete Centre, 2005.
6. Foundations
Designing to Eurocode 2
This chapter covers the analysis and design of concrete flat slabs to Eurocode
2
1
, a process which is essentially the same as when using BS 8110
2
. However,
the layout and content of Eurocode 2 may appear unusual to designers
familiar with BS 8110. Eurocode 2 does not contain the derived formulae or
specific guidance on determining moments and shear forces. This has arisen
because it has been European practice to give principles in the codes and for
the detailed application to be presented in other sources such as textbooks.
Chapter 1, originally published as Introduction to Eurocodes
3
, highlighted the
key differences between Eurocode 2 and BS 8110, including terminology.
It should be noted that values from the UK National Annex (NA) have been
used throughout this publication, including values that are embedded in
derived formulae (derivations can be found at www.eurocode2.info). A list of
symbols related to flat slab design is given at the end of this chapter.
Analysis
Using Eurocode 2 for the analysis of flat slabs is similar to using BS 8110. The
following methods may be used:
■ Equivalent frame method
■ Finite element analysis
■ Yield line analysis
■ Grillage analogy
The Eurocode gives further advice on the equivalent frame method in
Annex I and designers used to BS 8110 will find this very familiar. Once the
bending moments and shear forces have been determined, the following
guidance can be used for the design of flat slabs.
Design procedure
A procedure for carrying out the detailed design of flat slabs is shown in Table 1.
This assumes that the slab thickness has previously been determined during
conceptual design. Concept designs prepared assuming detailed design would
be to BS 8110 may be continued through to detailed design using Eurocode 2.
More detailed advice on determining design life, loading, material properties,
methods of analysis, minimum concrete cover for durability and bond, and
control of crack widths can be found in Chapter 2, originally published as
Getting started
4
.
How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2
7. Flat slabs
R Moss BSc, PhD, DIC, CEng, MICE, MIStructE O Brooker BEng, CEng, MICE, MIStructE
52
How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2
Table 1
Flat slab design procedure
Step Task Further guidance
Chapter in this publication Standard
1 Determine design life 2: Getting started NA to BS EN 1990 Table NA.2.1
2 Assess actions on the slab 2: Getting started BS EN 1991 (10 parts) and National Annexes
3 Determine which combinations of actions apply 1: Introduction to Eurocodes NA to BS EN 1990 Tables NA.A1.1 and NA.A1.2 (B)
4 Determine loading arrangements 2: Getting started NA to BS EN 1992–1–1
5 Assess durability requirements and determine concrete strength 2: Getting started BS 8500: 2002
6 Check cover requirements for appropriate fire resistance period 2: Getting started and Table 2 Approved Document B. BS EN 1992–1–1: Section 5
7 Calculate min. cover for durability, fire and bond requirements 2: Getting started BS EN 1992–1–1 Cl 4.4.1
8 Analyse structure to obtain critical moments and shear forces 2: Getting started and Table 3 BS EN 1992–1–1 Section 5
9 Design flexural reinforcement See Figure 1 BS EN 1992–1–1 Section 6.1
10 Check deflection See Figure 3 BS EN 1992–1–1 Section 7.4
11 Check punching shear capacity See Figure 6 BS EN 1992–1–1 Section 6.4
12 Check spacing of bars 2: Getting started BS EN 1992–1–1 Section 7.3
13 Check resistance to moment transfer from column to slab – BS EN 1992–1–1 Annex I 1.2(5)
Note
NA = National Annex
Table 2
Minimum dimensions and axis distances for reinforced concrete slabs
Standard fire resistance Minimum dimensions (mm)
Slab thickness, h
s
Axis distance, a
REI 60 180 15
a
REI 90 200 25
REI 120 200 35
REI 240 200 50
Notes
1 This table is taken from BS EN 1992–1–2 Table 5.9.
2 The axis distance is to the centre of the outer layer of reinforcement.
3 The table is valid only if the detailing requirements (see note 4) are observed and, in the normal temperature design, redistribution of bending moments does not exceed 15%.
4 For fire resistance of R90 and above, at least 20% of the total top reinforcement in each direction over intermediate supports required by BS EN 1992–1–1 should be continuous over
the full span. This reinforcement should be placed in the column strip.
5 There are three standard fire exposure conditions that may need to be satisfied:
R Mechanical resistance for load bearing
E Integrity of separation
I Insulation
Key
a Normally the requirements of BS EN 1992–1–1 will determine the cover.
Fire resistance
Eurocode 2, Part 1–2: Structural fire design
5
, gives a choice of advanced,
simplified or tabular methods for determining the fire resistance. Using
tables is the fastest method for determining the minimum dimensions
and cover for flat slabs. There are, however, some restrictions and if these
apply further guidance can be obtained from specialist literature
6
.
Rather than giving a minimum cover, the tabular method is based
on nominal axis distance, a. This is the distance from the centre of
the reinforcing bar to the surface of the member. It is a nominal
(not minimum) dimension, so the designer should ensure that
a ≥ c
nom
+ f
link
+ f
bar
/2
The requirements for flat slabs are given in Table 2.
Flexure
The design procedure for flexural design is given in Figure 1; this
includes derived formulae based on the simplified rectangular stress
block from Eurocode 2. Where appropriate Table 3 may be used to
determine bending moments for flat slabs.
53
7. Flat slabs
Whichever method of analysis is used, Cl. 9.4.1 requires the designer
to concentrate the reinforcement over the columns. Annex I of the
Eurocode gives recommendations for the equivalent frame method on
how to apportion the total bending moment across a bay width into
column and middle strips to comply with Cl. 9.4.1. Designers using
grillage, finite element or yield line methods may also choose to follow
the advice in Annex I to meet this requirement.
Eurocode 2 offers various methods for determining the stressstrain
relationship of concrete. For simplicity and familiarity the method
presented here is the simplified rectangular stress block (see Figure 2),
which is similar to that found in BS 8110.
The Eurocode gives recommendations for the design of concrete up
to class C90/105. However, for concrete strength greater than class
C50/60, the stress block is modified. It is important to note that
concrete strength is based on the cylinder strength and not the cube
strength (i.e. for class C28/35 the cylinder strength is 28 MPa, whereas
the cube strength is 35 MPa).
Table 4
Values for K’
% redistribution d (redistribution ratio) K’
0 1.00 0.208
a
10 0.90 0.182
a
15 0.85 0.168
20 0.80 0.153
25 0.75 0.137
30 0.70 0.120
Key
a It is often recommended in the UK that K´ should be llimited to 0.168 to ensure
ductile failure
Table 5
z/d for singly reinforced rectangular sections
K z/d K z/d
≤ 0.05 0.950
a
0.13 0.868
0.06 0.944 0.14 0.856
0.07 0.934 0.15 0.843
0.08 0.924 0.16 0.830
0.09 0.913 0.17 0.816
0.10 0.902 0.18 0.802
0.11 0.891 0.19 0.787
0.12 0.880 0.20 0.771
Key
a Limiting z to 0.95d is not a requirement of Eurocode 2, but is considered to be good practice
Table 6
Minimum percentage of reinforcement required
f
ck
f
ctm
Minimum % (0.26 f
ctm
/f
yk
a
)
25 2.6 0.13%
28 2.8 0.14%
30 2.9 0.15%
32 3.0 0.16%
35 3.2 0.17%
40 3.5 0.18%
45 3.8 0.20%
50 4.1 0.21%
Key
a Where f
yk
= 500 MPa
Figure 1
Procedure for determining flexural reinforcement
Table 3
Bending moment coefficients for flat slabs
End support/slab connection First
interior
support
Interior
spans
Interior
supports
Pinned Continuous
End
support
End
span
End
support
End
span
Moment 0 0.086Fl –0.04Fl 0.075Fl –0.086Fl 0.063Fl – 0.063Fl
Notes
1 Applicable to slabs where the area of each bay exceeds 30 m
2
,
Q
k,
≤
1.25 G
k
and q
k
≤ 5 kN/m
2
2 F is the total design ultimate load, l is the effective span
3 Minimum span > 0.85 longest span, minimum 3 spans
4 Based on 20% redistribution at supports and no decrease in span moments
Carry out analysis of slab to determine design moments
(M) (Where appropriate use coefficients from Table 3).
No compression reinforcement required
Check maximum reinforcement requirements.
A
s, max
= 0.04 A
c
for tension or compression
reinforcement outside lap locations
Determine K’ from Table 4 or
K’ = 0.60d – 0.18d
2
– 0.21 where d ≤ 1.0
START
Yes
Yes
Outside scope of
this publication
Concrete class
≤C50/60?
No
Compression
reinforcement
required – not
recommended for
typical slabs
Is K ≤ K’ ?
No
Determine K from: K =
Determine K from: K =
bd
2
f
ck
M
Obtain lever arm z from Table 5 or
1 + ≤ 0.95d z =
2
d
1 – 3.53K
[ ]
Calculate tension reinforcement required from
A
s
=
f
yd
z
M
Check minimum reinforcement requirements (see Table 6)
A
s, min
= where f
yk
≥ 25
f
yk
0.26 f
ctm
b
t
d
54
How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2
Deflection
Eurocode 2 has two alternative methods of designing for deflection;
either by limiting spantodepth ratio or by assessing the theoretical
deflection using the Expressions given in the Eurocode. The latter is
dealt with in detail in Chapter 8, originally published as Deflection
calculations
7
.
The spantodepth ratios should ensure that deflection is limited
to span/250 and this is the procedure presented in Figure 3. The
Background paper to the UK National Annex
8
notes that the spanto
depth ratios are appropriate where the structure remains propped
during construction or until the concrete attains sufficient strength to
support the construction loads. It can generally be assumed that early
striking of formwork will not significantly affect the deflection after
installing the cladding and/or partitions
9
.
Punching shear
The design value of the punching shear force, V
Ed
, will usually be the
support reaction at the ultimate limit state. In principle the design
for punching shear in Eurocode 2 and BS 8110 is similar. The main
differences are as follows.
■ Standard factors for edge and corner columns that allow for
moment transfer (b) are greater in Eurocode 2. However, b can
be calculated directly from Expressions (6.38) to (6.46) of the
Eurocode to give more efficient designs.
Figure 2
Simplified rectangular stress block for concrete up to class C50/60
from Eurocode 2
Figure 4
Basic spantoeffectivedepth ratios for flat slabs
Figure 3
Procedure for assessing deflection
Is basic l/d x F1 x F2 x F3 ≥ Actual l/d ?
Increase
A
s,prov
Determine Factor 3 (F3)
F3 = 310/s
s
Where s
s
= Stress in reinforcement at serviceability
limit state (see Figure 5)
s
s
may be assumed to be 310 MPa (i.e. F3 = 1.0)
Note: A
s,prov
≤ 1.5 A
s,req’d
(UK National Annex)
Determine basic l/d from Figure 4
Check complete
Determine Factor 1 (F1)
For ribbed or waffle slabs
F1 = 1 – 0.1 ((b
f
/b
w
) – 1) ≥ 0.8
†
(b
f
is flange breadth and b
w
is rib breadth)
Otherwise F1 = 1.0
Determine Factor 2 (F2)
Where the slab span exceeds 8.5 m and it supports
brittle partitions, F2 = 8.5/l
eff
Otherwise F2 = 1.0
No
Yes
START
†
The Eurocode is ambiguous regarding linear interpolation. It is understood that this
was the intention of the drafting committee and is in line with current UK practice.
Notes
1 This graph assumes a simply supported flat slab (K = 1.2).
2 Compression reinforcement, r’, has been taken as 0.
3 Curves based on the following expressions:
where r ≤ r
0
and
where r > r
0
. 11+ + = K
d
l
(
r – r
’)
f
ck
r
0
1.5
12
f
ck
r
0
r
’
[ ]
11+ + 3.2 – 1 = K
d
l
r
f
ck
r
0
1.5
f
ck
r
r
0
[ ( ) ]
1.5
f
ck
= 50
f
ck
= 45
f
ck
= 40
f
ck
= 35
f
ck
= 32
f
ck
= 30
f
ck
= 28
f
ck
= 25
f
ck
= 20
Percentage of tension reinforcement (A
s
/bd)
39
37
35
33
31
29
27
25
23
21
19
17
15
0.40% 0.60% 0.80% 1.20% 1.80%
S
p
a
n

t
o

e
f
f
e
c
t
i
v
e

d
e
p
t
h
r
a
t
i
o
(
l
/
d
)
1.00% 1.40% 1.60% 2.00%
55
7. Flat slabs
■ In Eurocode 2 the maximum value of shear at the column face is
not limited to 5 MPa, and depends on the concrete strength used.
■ With Eurocode 2 the permissible shear resistance when using shear
links is higher, although such designs may not be economic or
desirable.
■ The control perimeters for rectangular columns in Eurocode 2 have
rounded corners.
■ Where shear reinforcement is required the procedure in Eurocode 2
is simpler; the point at which no shear reinforcement is required can
be calculated directly and then used to determine the extent of the
area over which shear reinforcement is required.
■ It is assumed that the reinforcement will be in a radial arrangement.
However, the reinforcement can be laid on a grid provided the
spacing rules are followed.
The procedure for determining the punching shear requirements is
shown in Figure 6.
As an alternative to using shear links, proprietary shear stud rails
may be used. Eurocode 2 (Figure 6.22) allows them to be laid out
in a radial or cruciform pattern and gives spacing requirements for
both. Other techniques are available for increasing punching shear
resistance and these are covered in a best practice guide
10
.
Figure 5
Determination of steel stress
Figure 6
Procedure for determining punching shear capacity
START
Determine value of factor β
(refer to Figure 7 or Expressions (6.38) to (6.46)
of the Eurocode)
Determine value of vEd,max
(design shear stress at face of column) from:
vEd,max = β VEd /(ui deff)
where ui is perimeter of column
deff = (dy + dz)/2 (dy and dz
are the effective depths in orthogonal directions)
Determine value of vRd,max from Table 7
Determine value of vEd, (design shear stress) from:
vEd,max = β VEd /(ui deff)
where u1 is length of control perimeter (see Figure 8)
Yes
Redesign slab Is vEd,max ≤ vRd, max?
No
Determine concrete punching shear capacity
(without shear reinforcement), vRD,c from Table 8
where rl = (rly rlz)
0.5
(rly, rlz are the reinforcement ratios in two orthogonal
directions for fully bonded tension steel, taken over a
width equal to column width plus 3d each side.)
Is vEd > v
Rd,c
?
Yes
Punching shear
reinforcement not
required
No
Determine area of punching shear reinforcement per perimeter
from:
Asw = (vEd – 0.75vRd,c)sr u1/(1.5 fywd,ef)
where
sr is the radial spacing of shear reinforcement (see Figure 9)
fywd,ef = 250 + 0.25 deff ≤ fywd (see Table 9)
Determine the length of the outer perimeter where shear
reinforcement not required from:
uout,ef = b VEd/(vRd,c d)
Determine layout of punching shear reinforcement
(see ‘Spacing of punching shear reinforcement’
Section and Figure 9).
To determine stress in the reinforcement (s
s
), calculate the ratio G
k
/Q
k
, read
up the graph to the appropriate curve and read across to determine s
su
.
s
s
can be calculated from the expression: s
s
= s
su
A
s,req
A
s,prov
1
d
( ) )
Ratio G
k
/Q
k
U
n
m
o
d
i
f
i
e
d
s
t
e
e
l
s
t
r
e
s
s
,
s
s
u
180
200
220
240
260
280
300
320
1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0
c
2
= 0.8, g
G
= 1.35
c
2
= 0.6, g
G
= 1.35
c
2
= 0.3, g
G
= 1.35
c
2
= 0.2, g
G
= 1.35
c
2
= 0.6, g
G
= 1.25
c
2
= 0.3, g
G
= 1.25
c
2
= 0.2, g
G
= 1.25
(
c
2
is the factor for quasipermanent value of a variable action. For further
explanation refer to How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2:
Introduction to Eurocodes
3
.
56
How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2
Rules for spacing and
quantity of reinforcement
Minimum area of reinforcement
The minimum area of longitudinal reinforcement in the main direction
is A
s,min
= 0.26 f
ctm
b
t
d/f
yk
but not less than 0.0013b d (see Table 6).
The minimum area of a link leg for vertical punching shear
reinforcement is
1.5A
sw,min
/(s
r
.s
t
) ≥ 0.08f
ck
½
/f
yk
which can be rearranged as
A
sw,min
≥ (s
r
.s
t
)/F
where
s
r
= the spacing of the links in the radial direction
s
t
= the spacing of the links in the tangential direction
F can be obtained from Table 10
Maximum area of reinforcement
Outside lap locations, the maximum area of tension or compression
reinforcement should not exceed A
s,max
= 0.4 A
c
Minimum spacing of reinforcement
The minimum spacing of bars should be the greater of:
■ Bar diameter
■ Aggregate size plus 5 mm
■ 20 mm
Maximum spacing of main reinforcement
For slabs less than 200 mm thick the following maximum spacing rules apply:
■ For the principal reinforcement: 3h but not more than 400 mm
■ For the secondary reinforcement: 3.5h but not more than 450 mm
The exception is in areas with concentrated loads or areas of maximum
b = 1.5
b = 1.4
b = 1.15
Internal column
Corner column
Edge column
Figure 7
Recommended standard values for b
Table 8
v
Rd,c
resistance of members without shear reinforcement, MPa
r
I
Effective depth, d (mm)
≤200 225 250 275 300 350 400 450 500 600 750
0.25% 0.54 0.52 0.50 0.48 0.47 0.45 0.43 0.41 0.40 0.38 0.36
0.50% 0.59 0.57 0.56 0.55 0.54 0.52 0.51 0.49 0.48 0.47 0.45
0.75% 0.68 0.66 0.64 0.63 0.62 0.59 0.58 0.56 0.55 0.53 0.51
1.00% 0.75 0.72 0.71 0.69 0.68 0.65 0.64 0.62 0.61 0.59 0.57
1.25% 0.80 0.78 0.76 0.74 0.73 0.71 0.69 0.67 0.66 0.63 0.61
1.50% 0.85 0.83 0.81 0.79 0.78 0.75 0.73 0.71 0.70 0.67 0.65
1.75% 0.90 0.87 0.85 0.83 0.82 0.79 0.77 0.75 0.73 0.71 0.68
≥ 2.00% 0.94 0.91 0.89 0.87 0.85 0.82 0.80 0.78 0.77 0.74 0.71
k 2.000 1.943 1.894 1.853 1.816 1.756 1.707 1.667 1.632 1.577 1.516
Notes
1 Table derived from: v
Rd,c
= 0.12 k (100r
I
f
ck
)
1/3
≥ 0.035 k
1.5
f
ck
0.5
where
k = 1 + R(200/d) ≤ 2 and r
I
= R(r
ly
+ r
lz
) ≤ 0.02, r
ly
= A
sy
/(bd) and r
lz
= A
sz
/(bd)
2 This table has been prepared for f
ck
= 30;
Where r
I
exceeds 0.40% the following factors may be used:
f
ck
25 28 32 35 40 45 50
Factor 0.94 0.98 1.02 1.05 1.10 1.14 1.19
Figure 8
Typical basic control perimeters around loaded areas
b
z
2d
2d
b
y
u
1
u
1
Table 7
Values for v
Rd, max
Table 9
Values for f
ywd,ef
f
ck
v
Rd, max
d
eff
f
ywd,ef
20 3.31 150 288
25 4.05 175 294
28 4.48 200 300
30 4.75 225 306
32 5.02 250 313
35 5.42 275 319
40 6.05 300 325
45 6.64 325 331
50 7.20 350 338
57
7. Flat slabs
Table 10
Factor, F, for determining A
sw, min
f
ck
Factor, F
25 1875
28 1772
30 1712
32 1657
35 1585
40 1482
45 1398
50 1326
Note
f
ck
has been taken as 500 MPa
moment where the following applies:
■ For the principal reinforcement: 2h but not more than 250 mm
■ For the secondary reinforcement: 3h but not more than 400 mm
Where h is the depth of the slab.
For slabs 200 mm thick or greater, the bar size and spacing should be
limited to control the crack width and reference should be made to
Section 7.3.3 of the Eurocode or Chapter 2, originally published as
Getting started.
4
Spacing of punching shear reinforcement
Where punching shear reinforcement is required the following rules
should be observed.
■ It should be provided between the face of the column and kd
inside the outer perimeter where shear reinforcement is no longer
required. k is 1.5, unless the perimeter at which reinforcement is no
longer required is less than 3d from the face of the column. In this
case the reinforcement should be placed in the zone 0.3d to 1.5d
from the face of the column.
■ There should be at least two perimeters of shear links.
■ The radial spacing of the links should not exceed 0.75d
(see Figure 9).
■ The tangential spacing of the links should not exceed 1.5d within
2d of the column face.
■ The tangential spacing of the links should not exceed 2d for any
other perimeter.
■ The distance between the face of the column and the nearest shear
reinforcement should be less than 0.5d.
Symbol Definition Value
A
c
Cross sectional area of concrete bh
A
s
Area of tension steel
A
s2
Area of compression steel
A
s, prov
Area of tension steel provided
A
s, req’d
Area of tension steel required
b Width of slab
d Effective depth
d
2
Effective depth to compression reinforcement
f
cd
Design value of concrete compressive strength a
cc
f
ck
/g
c
f
ck
Characteristic cylinder strength of concrete
f
ctm
Mean value of axial tensile strength 0.30 f
ck
2/3
for f
ck
≤ C50/60
(from Table 3.1, Eurocode 2)
h
s
Slab thickness
K Factor to take account of the different See Table N 7.4 in
structural systems UK National Annex
l
eff
Effective span of member See Section 5.3.2.2 (1)
l/d Limiting spantodepth ratio
M Design moment at the ULS
x Depth to neutral axis (d – z)/0.4
x
max
Limiting value for depth to neutral axis (d – 0.4)d where d ≤1.0
z Lever arm
a
cc
Coefficient taking account of long term 0.85 for flexure and
effects on compressive strength and of axial loads.
unfavourable effects resulting from the 1.0 for other phenomena
way load is applied (From UK National Annex)
d Ratio of the redistributed moment to the
elastic bending moment
g
m
Partial factor for material properties 1.15 for reinforcement (g
s
)
1.5 for concrete (g
c
)
r
0
Reference reinforcement ratio Rf
ck
/1000
r Required tension reinforcement at midspan A
s
/bd
to resist the moment due to the design
loads (or at support for cantilevers)
r’ Required compression reinforcement at A
s2
/bd
midspan to resist the moment due to the
design loads (or at support for cantilevers)
Selected symbols
Figure 9
Punching shear layout
s
r
Outer control
perimeter
s 0.75
r
≤ d
≤ 0.5 d
kd
Section A  A
s
t
Outer perimeter of shear
reinforcement
Outer control
perimeter
u
out
0.5 d
≤ 0.75d
≤1.5
(2 if > 2
from column)
d
d d
A
A
≤1.5d
58
References
1 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. BS EN 1992–1–1, Eurocode 2: Design of concrete structures – General rules and rules for buildings. BSI, 2004.
2 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. BS 8110–1: The structural use of concrete – Part 1, Code of practice for design and construction. BSI, 1997.
3 NARAYANAN, R S & BROOKER, O. How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2: Introduction to Eurocodes. The Concrete Centre, 2005.
4 BROOKER, O. How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2: Getting started. The Concrete Centre, 2005.
5 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. BS EN 1992–1–2, Eurocode 2: Design of concrete structures. General rules – structural fire design. BSI, 2004.
6 DEPARTMENT OF COMMUNITIES AND LOCAL GOVERNMENT. Handbook to BS EN 1992–1–2. DCLG, due 2006.
7 WEBSTER, R & BROOKER, O. How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2: Deflection calculations. The Concrete Centre, 2006.
8 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. Background paper to the UK National Annex to BS EN 1992–1–1 and BS EN 1992–1–2. BSI, 2006.
9 PALLETT, P. Guide to flat slab formwork and falsework. Construct, 2003.
10 BRITISH CEMENT ASSOCIATION. Prefabricated punching shear reinforcement for reinforced concrete flat slabs. BCA, 2001.
7. Flat slabs
Methods for checking deflection
This chapter describes the use of Eurocode 2
1
to check deflection by
calculation. The alternative method for complying with the code requirements
is to use the deemedtosatisfy spantoeffectivedepth ratios, which are
appropriate and economic for the vast majority of designs. Further guidance
on the spantoeffectivedepth method is given in Chapters 3, 4 and 7,
originally published as Beams
2
, Slabs
3
and Flat slabs
4
. However, there are
situations where direct calculation of deflection is necessary, as listed below:
■ When an estimate of the deflection is required.
■ When deflection limits of span/250 for quasipermanent actions (see
reference 5 for Eurocode terminology) or span/500 for partition and/or
cladding loads are not appropriate.
■ When the design requires a particularly shallow member, direct calculation
of deflection may provide a more economic solution.
■ To determine the effect on deflection of early striking of formwork or of
temporary loading during construction.
Overview
In the past structures tended to be stiff with relatively short spans. As
technology and practice have advanced, more flexible structures have resulted.
There are a number of reasons for this, including:
■ The increase in reinforcement strength leading to less reinforcement being
required for the ultimate limit state (ULS) and resulting in higher service
stresses in the reinforcement.
■ Increases in concrete strength resulting from the need to improve both
durability and construction time, and leading to concrete that is more stiff
and with higher service stresses.
What affects deflection?
There are numerous factors
that affect deflection. These
factors are also often time
related and interdependent,
which makes the prediction
of deflection difficult.
The main factors are:
• Concrete tensile strength
• Creep
• Elastic modulus
Other factors include:
• Degree of restraint
• Magnitude of loading
• Time of loading
• Duration of loading
• Cracking of the concrete
• Shrinkage
• Ambient conditions
• Secondary loadpaths
• Stiffening by other elements
How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2
8. Deflection calculations
R Webster CEng, FIStructE O Brooker BEng, CEng, MICE, MIStructE
60
How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2
■ A greater understanding of structural behaviour and the ability to
analyse that behaviour quickly by computer.
■ The requirement to produce economic designs for slabs whose
thicknesses are typically determined by the serviceability limit state
(SLS) and which constitute 80% to 90% of the superstructure costs.
■ Client requirements for longer spans and greater operational
flexibility from their structures.
Factors affecting deflection
An accurate assessment of deflection can only be achieved if
consideration is given to the factors that affect it. The more important
factors are discussed in detail below.
Tensile strength
The tensile strength of concrete is an important property because
the slab will crack when the tensile stress in the extreme fibre is
exceeded. In Eurocode 2 the concrete tensile strength, f
ctm,
is a mean
value (which is appropriate for deflection calculations) and increases
as the compressive strength increases. This is an advancement when
compared with BS 8110 where the tensile strength is fixed for all
concrete strengths.
The degree of restraint to shrinkage movements will influence the
effective tensile strength of the concrete. A layout of walls with high
restraint will decrease the effective tensile strength. Typical examples
of wall layouts are given in Figure 1. For a low restraint layout the
following expression may be used for the concrete tensile strength:
f
ctm,fl
= (1.6 – h/1000)f
ctm
> f
ctm
where
f
ctm,fl
= Mean flexural tensile strength of reinforced concrete
f
ctm
= Mean tensile strength of concrete
It is often recommended that the design value of the concrete
tensile strength for a low restraint layout is taken as the average
of f
ctm,fl
and f
ctm
, to allow for unintentional restraint. For high restraint
f
ctm
should be used.
Creep
Creep is the timedependant increase in compressive strain in a
concrete element under constant compressive stress. Creep is usually
considered in the design by modifying the elastic modulus using a
creep coefficient, h, which depends on the age at loading, size of
the member and ambient conditions, in particular relative humidity.
Eurocode 2 gives advice on the calculation of creep coefficients in
detail in Annex B. It also advises on the appropriate relative humidity
to use in Figure 3.1.
The cement strength class is required in the assessment of creep,
however, at the design stage it is often not clear which class should
be used. Generally, Class R should be assumed. Where the ground
granulated blastfurnace slag (ggbs) content exceeds 35% of the
cement combination or where fly ash (pfa) exceeds 20% of the
cement combination, Class N may be assumed. Where ggbs exceeds
65% or where pfa exceeds 35% Class S may be assumed.
Elastic modulus
The elastic modulus of concrete is influenced by aggregate type,
workmanship and curing conditions. The effective elastic modulus
under sustained loading will be reduced over time due to the effect
of creep. These factors mean that some judgement is required
to determine an appropriate elastic modulus. Eurocode 2 gives
recommended values for the 28day secant modulus, E
cm
, (in Table 3.1)
and makes recommendations for adjustments to these values to
account for different types of aggregate. The longterm elastic modulus
should be taken as:
Figure 1
Typical floor layouts
a) Favourable layout of restraining walls (low restraint)
b) Unfavourable layout of restraining walls (high restraint)
61
8. Deflection calculations
Commercial pressures often lead to a requirement to strike the formwork
as soon as possible and move on to subsequent floors, with the minimum
of propping. Tests on flat slabs have demonstrated that as much as 70%
of the loads from a newly cast floor (formwork, wet concrete, construction
loads) may be carried by the suspended floor below
7
. It can generally
be assumed that early striking of formwork will not greatly affect the
deflection after installing the cladding and/or partitions. This is because the
deflection affecting partitions will be smaller if the slab becomes ‘cracked’
before, rather than after, the installation of the cladding and/or partitions.
Cracking
Deflection of concrete sections is closely linked to the extent of
cracking and the degree to which cracking capacity is exceeded. The
point at which cracking occurs is determined by the moments induced
in the slab and the tensile strength of the concrete, which increases
with age. Often the critical situation is when the slab is struck, or when
the load of the slab above is applied. Once the slab has cracked its
stiffness is permanently reduced.
It is therefore necessary to find the critical loading stage at which
cracking first occurs. This critical loading stage corresponds with the
minimum value of K, where:
K f W
ctm
= 0.5
^ h
where
W = The serviceability loading applied up to that stage
f
ctm
= The concrete tensile strength at that stage
Where the frequent combination is the critical load stage, then
the degree of cracking (z) calculated for the frequent combination
should also be used for the quasipermanent combination, but not for
E
c,LT
= E
c28
/(1 + h)
where
E
c28
= 28day tangent modulus = 1.05 E
cm
h = Creep factor. (Note that with Eurocode 2, h relates to a 28day
shortterm elastic modulus, whereas a ‘true’ creep factor would
be associated with the modulus at the age of loading.)
The assessment of the longterm Evalue can be carried out more
accurately after the contractor has been appointed because they should be
able to identify the concrete supplier (and hence the type of aggregates)
and also the construction sequence (and hence the age at first loading).
Loading sequence
The loading sequence and timing may be critical in determining
the deflection of a suspended slab because it will influence the point
at which the slab will crack (if at all) and is used to calculate the creep
factors for the slab. A loading sequence is shown in Figure 2, which
shows that in the early stages relatively high loads are imposed while
casting the slab above. The loading sequence may vary, depending on
the construction method.
Smaller loads are imposed when further slabs are cast above. The loads
are then increased permanently by the application of the floor finishes
and erection of the partitions. Finally, the variable actions are applied
to the structure and, for the purpose of deflection calculation, the
quasipermanent combination should be used. (See Chapter 1,
originally published as Introduction to Eurocodes
5
for further
information on combinations of actions.) However, it is likely that the
quasipermanent combination will be exceeded during the lifetime
of the building and, for the purpose of determining whether the slab
might have cracked, the frequent combination may be critical.
Figure 2
Loading history for a slab – an example
0
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
0 50 100 150 200 250 300
Duration (days)
L
o
a
d
(
k
N
/
m
)
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
Loading sequence
a Slab struck
b 1st slab above cast
c 2nd slab above cast
d 3rd slab above cast
e Floor finishes applied
f
g Quasipermanent variable actions
h Frequent variable actions
Partitions erected
62
How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2
any of the earlier load stages. If, however, an earlier stage
proves critical, the z value at that stage should be carried
forward to all subsequent stages.
Further information can be found in the best practice
guide Early striking and improved backpropping
6.
Shrinkage curvature
Shrinkage depends on the water/cement ratio, relative
humidity and the size and shape of the member. The effect
of shrinkage in an asymmetrically reinforced section is to
induce a curvature that can lead to significant deflection in
shallow members. This effect should be considered in the
deflection calculations.
Methods for
calculating deflections
Two methods for calculating deflection are presented
below, and these are based on the advice in TR58
Deflections in concrete slabs and beams
8
.
Rigorous method
The rigorous method for calculating deflections is the
most appropriate method for determining a realistic
estimate of deflection. However, it is only suitable for
use with computer software. The Concrete Centre has
produced a number of spreadsheets that use this method
to carry out deflection calculations for a variety of slabs
and beams
9
. These offer a costeffective way to carry
out detailed deflection calculations, and they include the
ability to consider the effect of early age loading of the
concrete. Figure 3 illustrates the principles of the method
and shows how the factors affecting deflection are
considered in the rigorous deflection calculations.
Finite element analysis may also be used to obtain
estimates of deflection. In this case the principles
in Figure 3 should be applied if credible results are to
be obtained.
Panel 1
Determining long term elastic modulus of elasticity
Calculate longterm elastic modulus, E
LT
from:
E
E
W
E
W
E
W
E
W
E
W
eff,1
1
eff, 2
2
eff, 3
3
eff, 4
4
eff, 5
5
LT
= + + + + RW c m
where
E
eff
= E
c28
/(1+h)
W
n
= Serviceability load at stage n
h = Creep coefficient at relevant loading time
and duration
Figure 3
Outline of rigorous method for calculating deflection
Collate input data
■ Element dimensions and reinforcement details and arrangements from the
ultimate limit state design
■ Loading sequence e.g.
• Striking the formwork
• Casting the floor above
• Erection of the partitions and/or cladding
• Application of finishes
The sequence will vary from project to project
■ Concrete properties (see Table 1)
• Mean compressive strength (f
cm
)
• Mean tensile strength (f
ctm
or f
ctm,fl
)
• Elastic modulus (E
c28
) = 1.05 E
cm
■ Critical arrangement of actions
(or repeat the calculations for each arrangement to determine the critical case)
Determine the curvature of the slab
Assess whether the element has flexural cracking
■ Determine the critical load stage at which cracking first occurs.
(See ‘Cracking’ on page 3)
■ Calculate the following properties:
• Creep coefficients, h (Annex B of Eurocode 2 or Figure 4)
• Long term elastic modulus, E
LT
(see Panel 1)
• Effective modulus ratio, a
e
from: a
e
= E
s
/E
LT
• Neutral axis depth for uncracked condition, x
u
(see Panel 2)
• Second moment of area for uncracked condition, I
u
(see Panel 2)
• Calculate cracking moment, M
cr
from:
M
cr
= f
ctm
I
u
/(h – x
u
), using appropriate value for f
ctm
.
■ Does the moment at the critical load stage exceed the cracking moment?
• If yes, the element is cracked at all subsequent stages.
z = 1 – 0.5(M
cr
/M)
2
[z = 0 for uncracked situation]
Use these critical values of f
ctm
and z for subsequent stages.
• If no, the element will not crack at any stage.
■ When the slab is cracked calculate the following properties at the load stage
being considered, using appropriate values for f
ctm
, z and E
LT
:
• Neutral axis depth for cracked section, x
c
(see Panel 2)
• Second moment of area for cracked condition, I
c
(see Panel 2)
■ Calculate the flexural curvature:
] g 1
1
r E I
M
fl e c
E I
e u
QP
M
QP
– = + g g
■ Calculate the curvature due to shrinkage strain 1/r
cs
(see Panel 2)
■ Calculate the total curvature, 1/r
t
= 1/r
fl
+ 1/r
cs
If deflection affecting cladding and/or partitions is required, repeat calculations
for frequent combination and for loading at time of installation of partitions
and/or cladding.
Repeat the calculations at frequent intervals (say at 1/20 points) and integrate
twice to obtain the overall deflection.
Estimate deflections:
■ Overall deflection (quasipermanent combination)
■ Deflection affecting partitions/cladding (Frequent combination deflection
less deflection at time of installation)
R
e
p
e
a
t
a
t
1
/
2
0
p
o
i
n
t
s
f
o
r
a
l
l
t
h
r
e
e
l
o
a
d
i
n
g
s
t
a
g
e
s
63
8. Deflection calculations
Table 1
Concrete properties
f
ck
MPa 320 325 328 330 332 335 340 350
f
cm =
(f
ck
+ 8) MPa 328 333 336 338 340 343 348 358
f
ctm =
(0.3 f
ck
(2/3)
≤ C50/60 or 2.12 ln(1 + (f
cm
/10)) > C50/60) MPa 332.21 332.56 332.77 332.90 333.02 333.21 333.51 334.07
f
ctm
*
=
(0.3 f
cm
(2/3)
≤ C50/60 or 1.08 ln(f
cm
) + 0.1 > C50/60)
a
MPa 332.77 333.09 333.27 333.39 333.51 333.68 333.96 334.50
E
cm =
(22 [(f
cm
)/10]
0.3
GPa 330.0 331.5 332.3 332.8 333.3 334.1 335.2 337.3
E
c28 =
(1.05 E
cm
) GPa 331.5 333.0 333.9 334.5 335.0 335.8 337.0 339.1
e
cd,0
CEM class R, RH = 50% microstrain 746 706 683 668 653 632 598 536
e
cd,0
CEM class R, RH = 80% microstrain 416 394 381 372 364 353 334 299
e
cd,0
CEM class N, RH = 50% microstrain 544 512 494 482 471 454 428 379
e
cd,0
CEM class N, RH = 80% microstrain 303 286 275 269 263 253 239 212
e
cd,0
CEM class S, RH = 50% microstrain 441 413 397 387 377 363 340 298
e
cd,0
CEM class S, RH = 80% microstrain 246 230 221 216 210 202 189 166
e
ca
(∞) microstrain 325 338 345 350 355 363 375 100
Key
a f
ctm
* may be used when striking at less than 7 days or where construction overload is taken into account.
Panel 2
Useful Expressions for a rectangular section
2
1
x
bh
A d d A
s e s2 2
2
u
=
+  + a ] ] g
1 bh A A
e s s2
 + a ] ] g g
g
+
bh + + + x  1
I
12
bh
2
h
A d x x d
u
3
u u
2
s
A
e 2 u s2 =
   a a ] ] ] k g g
2 2
g 6 @
1 2 A b A d d b
s 2 s2
x A
s2
A
s2
A
c e
2
s e
0.5
= + +  + a A
s e
a
e
a a ] 1 
e
a ] ^ ^ ^ g 1   +
e
a ] h g h g h 7 A # 
g g g
3
1 I
bx
A d x
c
c
3
e s
A
s2
d
2
2 2
c
x
c
= +    + a
e
a ^ ^ ^
1
r
I
S
cs
cs e
u
u
= +  1 g g f a
cs e
f a ^ h
I
S
c
c
where
A
s
= Area of tension reinforcement
A
s2
= Area of compression reinforcement
b = Breadth of section
d = Effective depth to tension
reinforcement
d
2
= Depth to compression reinforcement
h = Overall depth of section
a
e
= Modular ratio
S
u
= A
s
(d – x
u
) – A
s2
(x
u
– d
2
)
S
c
= A
s
(d – x
c
) – A
s2
(x
c
– d
2
)
100 300 500 700 900 1100 1300
h
o
(mm) h ? ( , ) t
0
C20/25
C25/30
C30/37
C35/45
C40/50
C45/55
C50/60
100 500 900 1300
h
0
(mm) h
100 100
N N R R S S
t
0
t
0
1 1
2 2
3 3
5 5
10 10
20 20
50 50
30 30
7.0 7.0 6.0 6.0 5.0 5.0 4.0 4.0 3.0 3.0 2.0 2.0 1.0 1.0 0 0
( , ? t )
0
A
E
B
D
C
a) Inside conditions  RH = 50% b) Outside conditions  RH = 80%
1100 700 300
Notes
1
2
3 Intersection point between lines D & E can also be above point A
4 For t
0
> 100 it is sufficiently accurate to assume t = 100
t
0
= age of concrete at time of loading
h
0
= 2A
c
/u
Key
How to use Nonogram
Figure 4
Method for determining creep coefficient h(∞,t
0
)
64
How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2
8
Loading Bending moment diagram
M M
M
M
al
W
l
0.125
M Wa a l = (1 )
0.0625
al
al
W/2 W/2
0.104
0.102
M =
Wal
2
q
ql
q
q
q
0.125
3 4a
48 (1a)
If a = , K =
M
A
M
A
M
C
M
C
M
C M
C
M
B
M
B
Wal W
al
al
al al
a a (4 )
if = =0.25 a l , K
K = 0.083 (1 )
b =
1
80 Wl
2
24
(3 4 ) a
2
qa l
2 2
2
K = 0.104 (1 )
b =
M M
A
+
B
2
15.6
ql
2
K
a
6
1
12
1
2
2
2
End deflection
(3 ) a a
6
load at end = 0.333 K
12
b
4
M +M
A B
(5 4 ) a
3 4a
2 2
=
b
10
Simplified method
A simplified method for calculating deflection is presented in Figure 5.
It is feasible to carry out these calculations by hand, and they could be
used to roughly verify deflection results from computer software, or
used where a computer is not available.
The major simplification is that the effects of early age loading are not
considered explicitly; rather an allowance is made for their effect when
calculating the cracking moment. Simplified creep factors are used and
deflection from the curvature of the slab is approximated using a factor.
Figure 5
Simplified method for calculating deflection
Figure 6
Values for K for various bending moment diagrams
Calculate the moment, M
QP
, due to quasipermanent actions at
the critical section (i.e. midspan or at support for cantilever)
Calculate creep coefficient, h(∞,t0), using either Figure 4
or Annex B (in which case lookup f
cm
in Table 1)
START
Calculate flexural curvature 1
r E I
M
1
n eff c
E I
eff u
QP
M
QP
= + – g g ^ h
Obtain concrete properties, f
ctm
, and E
c28
from Table 1
1 Calculate long term elastic modulus, E
eff
from: E
eff
= E
c28
/[1+h (∞,t0)]
2 Calculate effective modulus ratio, ae from ae = Es/Eeff, where Es is
elastic modulus for reinforcement (200 GPa)
3 Calculate depth to neutral axis for uncracked condition, xu
4 Calculate second moment of area for uncracked condition, Iu
Calculate depth to neutral axis for cracked
condition, x
c
and calculate second moment of area
for cracked condition, I
c
Yes
Finish
No
Calculate the deflection that will occur at the time of application of
the load due to partitions and/or cladding.
1 Calculate the creep coefficient h(t,t0), where t is the age when
partition/cladding loads are applied and t0 is the age of striking.
h(t,t0) ≈ h(∞,t0) bc(t,t0). For bc(t,t0) refer to Figure 7, alternatively
refer to Annex B of Eurocode 2.
2 Calculate the moment due to selfweight, partitions/cladding and any
other loads which have been applied prior to the installation of the
cladding/partition, Mpar and use in place of M
QP
3 Recalculate the section properties, curvature and hence deflection,
dpar, using h(t,t0) or equivalent instead of h(∞,t0)
4 The approximate deflection affecting cladding and partitions is
d = dQP – dpar
Calculate cracking moment, M
cr
from:
0.9
M
h
f I
cr
x
u
ctm u
=
–
(Note the factor 0.9 has been introduced into this method
because the loading sequence is not considered)
Yes
No
Section is uncracked
z = 0
Is Mcr > MQP?
Section is cracked
z = 1 – 0.5(Mcr/MQP)
2
Calculate total shrinkage strain ecs from ecs = ecd + eca where:
ecd = kh ecd,0 = Drying shrinkage strain
kh = Coefficient based on notional size, see Table 2
ecd,0 = Nominal unrestrained drying shrinkage, see Table 1
eca = bas(t) eca(∞) = eca(∞) for longterm deflection, see Table 1
Calculate curvature due to shrinkage strain 1/rcs (see Panel 2)
Calculate total curvature = +
1
r
t, cs n QP
1 1
r r
Calculate quasipermanent deflection from
1
KL
QP
2
= d
r
t,QP
where K can be obtained from Figure 6 and L is the span.
Do you need
to calculate deflection
due to cladding and
partitions?
65
100 300 500 700 900
0.25
0.30
0.35
0.40
0.45
0.50
0.55
0.60
C
o
e
f
f
i
c
i
e
n
t
,
b
c
(
t
,
t
0
)
h
0
(mm)
t = 90, t0 = 7
t = 60, t0 = 7
t = 28, t0 = 7
t = 90, t0 = 3
t = 60, t0 = 3
t = 28, t0 = 3
8. Deflection calculations
Precamber
A slab or beam can be precambered to reduce the effect of deflection
below the horizontal (see Figure 8). However, in practice too much
precamber is generally used and the slab remains permanently
cambered. This is because of the difficulty in accurately calculating
deflection. A precamber of up to half the quasipermanent
combination deflection could be used, but a lower figure is
recommended. Precamber does not reduce the deflections affecting
partitions or cladding.
Flat slabs
Flat slabs are very popular and efficient floor systems. However,
because they span in two directions, it can be difficult to calculate their
deflection. TR58
8
gives several suitable methods for assessing flat slab
deflection. Of these, a popular method is to take the average deflection
of two parallel column strips and to add the deflection of the middle
strip spanning orthogonally to get an approximation of the maximum
deflection in the centre of the slab.
The recommended acceptance criteria for a flat slab are shown in Figure 9.
Accuracy
The calculation of deflection in Eurocode 2 using the rigorous method
presented here is more advanced than that in BS 8110
10
. It can be
used to take account of earlyage construction loading by considering
reduced early concrete tensile strengths.
However, the following influences on deflections cannot be accurately
assessed:
■ Tensile strength, which determines the cracking moment.
■ Construction loading.
■ Elastic modulus.
Therefore any calculation of deflection is only an estimate, and even the
most sophisticated analysis can still result in +15% to 30% error. It is
advisable to give a suitable caveat with any estimate of deflection that
others are relying on.
Figure 7
Coefficient for development of creep with time after loading
Table 2
Values for K
h
h
0 k
h
>100 1.0
>200 0.85
>300 0.75
>500 0.70
Notes
h0 is the notional size (mm) of the crosssection = 2A
c
/u
where
Ac = Concrete crosssectional area
u = Perimeter of that part of the cross section which is exposed to drying
Notes
t = Age of concrete when partitions/cladding applied
t0 = Age of concrete when struck
fck = 30 (fcm = 38), however the coefficient is not particularly sensitive to concrete class
Figure 8
Precambering of slabs
Deflection affecting partitions
Just before installation
of partitions Precamber
Deflection due to
frequent combination
Deflection due to
quasipermanent
combination
Figure 9
Recommended acceptance criteria for flat slabs
a
X
Notes
If maximum permitted d = L/n and
X is the position of maximum d
where
L = Span
n = Limiting spantodepth ratio,
e.g. 250
then the deflection at X should not be
greater than 2a/n.
(Maximum deflection on gridlines
may be more critical.)
66
References
1 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. BS EN 1992–1–1, Eurocode 2: Design of concrete structures. General rules and rules for building. BSI, 2004.
2 MOSS, R M & BROOKER, O. How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2: Beams. The Concrete Centre, 2006.
3 MOSS, R M & BROOKER, O. How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2: Slabs. The Concrete Centre, 2006.
4 MOSS, R M & BROOKER, O. How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2: Flat slabs. The Concrete Centre, 2006.
5 NARAYANAN, R S & BROOKER, O. How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2: Introduction to Eurocodes. The Concrete Centre, 2005
6 BRITISH CEMENT ASSOCIATION. Early striking and improved backpropping. BCA, 2001. (Available from www.concretecentre.com)
7 PALLETT, P. Guide to flat slab formwork and falsework. Construct, 2003
8 THE CONCRETE SOCIETY. Technical report No. 58 Deflections in concrete slabs and beams. The Concrete Society, 2005.
9 GOODCHILD, C H & WEBSTER, R M. Spreadsheets for concrete design to BS 8110 and EC2, version 3. The Concrete Centre, 2006.
10 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. BS 8110–1. Structural use of concrete – Code of practice for design and construction. BSI, 1997.
Cladding tolerances
Deflection may affect cladding or glazing in the following ways:
■ When a slab deflects, the load on the central fixings will be relieved
and shed to outer fixings.
■ Manufacturers may say that their glazed systems can only
accommodate deflection as low as 5 mm.
There should be open discussions between the designers for the various
elements to determine the most costeffective way of dealing with the
interaction of the structure and cladding.
8. Deflection calculations
Introduction
This chapter covers the analysis and design of reinforced concrete retaining
walls to Eurocodes 2
1
and 7
2
. It considers retaining walls up to 3 m high and
propped basement walls up to two storeys high (7 m). These limits have been
chosen so that simplifications can be made in the geotechnical design. The
selfweight of these walls, including the selfweight of backfill on them, plays a
significant role in supporting the retained material. The chapter does not cover
the analysis and design of embedded retaining walls, which rely primarily on
passive earth pressure and flexural resistance to support the retained material.
Prior to the publication of the structural Eurocodes, the geotechnical design of
retaining walls was covered by BS 8002
3
. Although certain provisions of this
code are superseded by Eurocode 7, the former still contains useful qualitative
information regarding the design of reinforced concrete walls.
A more general introduction to the Eurocodes is given in Chapters 1 and 2
originally published as Introduction to Eurocodes
4
and Getting started
5
. The
essential features of Eurocode 7 Part 1 are covered in Chapter 6, Foundations
6
,
which includes a discussion of limit states, Geotechnical Categories,
methods of design, and the Geotechnical Design Report. It should be read in
conjunction with this chapter.
Essential features of Eurocode 7 are presented, along with theoretical models
for the analysis of retaining walls. A procedure for analysis and design is given
on page 70.
Geotechnical Categories
Eurocode 7 Part 1 defines three Geotechnical Categories that can be used to
establish geotechnical design requirements. Simple structures with negliable
risk belong in Geotechnical Category 1. Walls that retain soil or water and do
not involve exceptional risk or difficult soil or loading conditions belong in
Geotechnical Category 2, for which routine procedures for field and laboratory
testing and for design and execution may be used. The design of such
structures requires quantitative geotechnical data and analysis.
Walls that involve abnormal risk or where there is unusual or exceptionally
difficult soil or loading conditions belong in Geotechnical Category 3, for
which alternative provisions and rules to those given in Eurocode 7 may be
needed; they are outside the scope of this publication.
Limit states
The design of reinforced concrete retaining walls requires verification that the
How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2
9. Retaining walls
A J Bond MA, MSc, PhD, DIC, MICE, CEng O Brooker BEng, CEng, MICE, MIStructE A J Harris BSc, MSc, DIC, MICE, CEng, FGS
68 2
Although Eurocode 7 provides three Design Approaches, the UK
National Annex permits only Design Approach 1 to be used in the
UK. In this approach, two calculations must be performed with different
combinations of partial factors for the STR/GEO limit state (see Table 1).
In calculations for Combination 1, partial factors greater than 1 are
applied to actions and structural materials only: to the selfweight of
the wall and backfill (treated as permanent actions); to any imposed
loads or surcharges at the top of the wall (permanent or variable
actions, as appropriate); and to the earth and pore water pressures
acting on the wall’s boundary (permanent actions).
In calculations for Combination 2, partial factors greater than 1 are
applied to variable actions only and to the strength of the ground
and structure: to the soil’s undrained strength in shortterm (i.e.
undrained) situations; and to the soil’s angle of shearing resistance
and effective cohesion in longterm (drained) situations.
The design value, F
d
, of an action can be expressed as: F
d
= g
F
c F
k
where
g
F
= partial factor for the action
F
k
= characteristic value of the action
c = either 1.0, c
0
, c
1
or c
2
(see Chapters 1 and 6)
Similarly the design value, X
d
, of an action can be expressed as:
X
d
= X
k
/ g
M
where
g
M
= partial factor for the action
X
k
= characteristic value of the action
It is important to note that the partial factor for h´ applies to tan h´,
i.e. tan h´
d
= (tan h´
k
)/g
h
.
Calculation models for
strength limit states
The mechanical behaviour of reinforced concrete cantilever walls is
commonly analysed using one of two assumed calculation models,
which are explained below.
It is assumed that soils have negligible effective cohesion c’, which
greatly simplifies the mathematics involved. This is a safe assumption
but, in the interests of economy, the effects of effective cohesion
may be included in the design.
The beneficial effect of passive earth pressures in front of the wall
is ignored in this publication, because its contribution to resistance
is often small for reinforced concrete walls and is only mobilized
after considerable movement of the wall. Furthermore, Eurocode 7
requires allowance to be made for unplanned excavations in front
of retaining walls, which further reduces the effects of passive
earth pressures.
In the expressions used here, the selfweights of the wall stem,
wall base, and backfill are favourable actions when sliding and
toppling are considered, but are typically unfavourable actions for
bearing (but since they reduce the inclination and eccentricity of
following ultimate limit states are not exceeded (see Figure 1):
Overall failure of the ground containing the wall.
Failure of the wall by sliding.
Failure of the wall by toppling (usually only relevant to walls
founded on rock).
Bearing failure of the ground beneath the wall (which may
involve settlement and rotation of the wall).
Structural failure of the wall.
The resistance available in finegrained soils, such as clays and silts,
depends greatly on how quickly excess pore water pressures in the
ground dissipate after loading. The limit states above therefore need
to be checked both for shortterm (i.e. undrained) behaviour of the
ground and for longterm (i.e. drained) behaviour.
■
■
■
■
■
Figure 1
Ultimate limit states for reinforced concrete retaining walls
a) Overall stability
b) Sliding c) Toppling
d) Bearing e) Structural failure
Table 1
Partial factors to be used for retaining wall design according to
design approach 1 (UK National Annex)
Combin
ation
Partial factors on
actions
Partial factors on material
properties of soil
gG
a
gG,fav gQ gϕ
b
gc gcu gγ
1 1.35 1.0 1.5 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0
2 1.0 1.0 1.3 1.25 1.25 1.4 1.0
Key
a g
G
is applied to unfavourable permanent actions
b g
h
is applied to tan h’
k
68
How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2
693
the total action, they may be favourable – both situations should
be checked). In the design calculations, favourable actions are
multiplied by different partial factors to unfavourable actions – see
Table 1.
Calculation model A
In the first calculation model (see Figure 2), the wall including
backfill in block ABCD resists sliding and toppling caused by the
earth pressures acting on the vertical ‘virtual’ plane, BF. The ground
beneath the wall base must also be strong enough to carry the wall’s
selfweight and any tractions (vertical components of force) on the
virtual plane.
An attractive feature of this model is that, provided the wall heel
CD is large enough, the earth thrust P
a
(see Figure 2b) is inclined at
an angle to the horizontal equal to the ground slope at the top of
the wall (i.e. c = b), provided always that c ≤ h’. The test for the
model’s applicability is b
h
≥ h
a
tan (45 – h’
d
/2), which (if met) means
that a Rankine active zone forms within the confines of block ABCD
Figure 2
Calculation model A
h
a
Figure 3
Calculation model B
h
and the earth pressure coefficient used to calculate the thrust is
given by Rankine’s formula.
If b
h
is too small, then the wall stem interferes with the Rankine zone
and c should be reduced to c ≤ (h’/3 to 2h’/3) – although strictly
Rankine’s theory is no longer applicable and calculation model B
should be used instead.
For sliding and toppling, the most unfavourable location of any
imposed surcharge is as shown in Figure 2a), with the edge of the
surcharge coincident with point B. In that position it increases
unfavourable earth pressures acting on the virtual plane BF but does
not increase favourable vertical forces acting on the wall heel, DC.
For bearing, the most unfavourable location of the surcharge is when
it extends to the back of the wall, point A.
Calculation model B
In the second calculation model (see Figure 3), the wall including
backfill in block ACD resists sliding and toppling caused by earth
69
9. Retaining walls
70 4
pressures acting on the inclined ‘virtual’ plane, AF. The earth
thrust P
a
(Figure 3b) is inclined at an angle y + d to the horizontal.
(The same model is used to analyse plain concrete gravity walls.) The
ground beneath the wall base must also be strong enough to carry
the wall’s selfweight and the downwards component of the earth
thrust on the virtual plane.
A key theoretical advantage of this model is that it can be used
consistently for walls of all shapes and sizes. However, its main
disadvantage is that it involves careful consideration of trigonometry,
with the angle y playing a significant role, leading to a complicated
expression for K
a
and values are not so readily obtained from
published charts. To prevent the mathematics becoming too involved,
various simplifications about the wall’s geometry and that of the
enclosed backfill are usually made.
Except for situations where b
h
is very small, it is reasonable to
assume that the angle of friction d mobilized along the virtual plane
AF is equal to the angle of shearing resistance of the soil, h'.
The most unfavourable location of any imposed surcharge is typically
when it extends to the back of the wall, point A (as shown in Figure 3a).
However, since the surcharge also reduces the inclination and eccentricity
of the total action, situations with it distant from the wall should also
be considered.
Figure 4
Overall design procedure
Design procedure
The overall procedure for the design of reinforced concrete retaining
walls is given in Figure 4 and explained in more detail over the next
few pages.
Since the sizing of reinforced concrete walls is often controlled by
sliding with partial factors from Combination 2, it is sensible to
undertake that verification first. The other checks should also be
performed for both combinations. Bearing can also control the
design (depending on the wall geometry and soil properties).
Overall stability of the site
An essential part of the geotechnical design of retaining structures
is checking the stability of the site against overall rotational failure
(see Figure 1a) and other forms of overall ground failure. Guidance
on how to perform the necessary verifications is outside the scope of
this document, but can be found elsewhere, e.g. reference 7.
Initial sizing
The base width B of a reinforced concrete cantilever retaining wall is
usually between 0.5 and 0.7 times its overall height
8
, h (see Figure 5).
The breadth of the wall stem b
s
is normally h/15 to h/10 , as is
the thickness of the wall base t
b
. The breadth of the wall toe b
t
is
typically equal to B/4 to B/3.
For basement walls in most structures, the thickness will normally
be determined by the waterproofing requirements; often a minimum
thickness of 300 mm is used.
For simplicity, it is assumed that adequate drainage systems will be
installed behind the retaining wall so that pore water pressures need
not be considered. Since this is a potentially unsafe assumption, the
expressions given here need to be adjusted if this is not the case.
Figure 5
Symbols for initial sizing
Sufficient capacity?
Design against bearing
failure (see Figure 10)
Structural design (see
Figure 13)
Design against sliding
(see Figure 7)
Design against toppling
(see Figure 9)
Check overall stability of the site
Carry out initial sizing of the wall
Determine characteristic material properties (see Figure 6)
Calculate the characteristic value of actions (see Figure 6)
Calculate the design value of actions (see Figure 6)
Design complete
Yes
N
o
,
r
e
v
i
s
e
g
e
o
m
e
t
r
y
C
a
r
r
y
o
u
t
s
e
p
a
r
a
t
e
l
y
f
o
r
b
o
t
h
C
o
m
b
i
n
a
t
i
o
n
s
1
a
n
d
2
Start
70
How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2
715
Material properties
The characteristic value of a geotechnical parameter is defined in
BS EN 1997–1 Cl. 2.4.5.2(2)P as “a cautious estimate of the value
affecting the occurrence of the limit state”, determined on the
basis of laboratory and field test results complemented by well
established experience and taking account of the zone of soil involved.
Characteristic geotechnical parameters should be determined by an
experienced geotechnical engineer and recorded in the Geotechnical
Design Report.
The properties chosen for the backfill behind the retaining wall are
critical to the geotechnical design of the wall and should be selected
carefully (see Figure 6). These include its weight density, g, angle of
shearing resistance, h, and (if cohesive) undrained strength, c
u
. It is
uncommon for retaining walls to retain cohesive fills, since this can
lead to the retention of water (which should be avoided). Further,
considering cohesion reduces the calculated earth pressures, which
is not conservative. For granular backfill the characteristic angle of
shearing resistance is normally taken between 30˚ and 35˚.
The foundation beneath the wall base is critical to the wall’s sliding
Figure 6
Procedure for determining material properties, geometry and actions
From Figure 4
Determine characteristic material properties
• Weight density (g
k,f
) and angle of shearing resistance (h’
k,f
)
of backfill
• Weight density (g
k,fdn
), undrained strength (c
uk,fdn
), and angle
of shearing resistance (h’
k,fdn
) of foundation soil
• Weight density (g
k,c
) and cylinder strength (f
ck
) of concrete
Determine initial geometry and actions (see Panel 1)
1 Determine initial geometry (see Figure 5)
• For calculation model B find inclination of virtual plane (y)
2 Determine lever arms (see Figures 2c or 3c)
3 Calculate forces
• Characteristic selfweights (W
k,s
, W
k,b
, W
k,f
)
• Total weight ΣW
k,i
= W
k,s
+ W
k,b
+ W
k,f
• Total moment Σ(W
k,i
L
i
) = (W
k,s
L
s
) + (W
k,b
L
b
) + (W
k,f
L
f
)
Carry out separately for both Combinations 1 and 2
Determine design material properties and earth
pressures (see Panel 2)
1 Apply partial material factors to obtain design material
properties
• Weight density g
d
= g
k
/ g
g
= g
k
since g
γ
= 1
• Angle of shearing resistance h’
d
= tan
1
(tan h’
k
/ g
φ’
)
• Undrained strength c
ud
= c
uk
/ g
cu
2 Determine earth pressure
• Earth pressure coefficient K
ad
= function of h’
d,f
and b
(depending on calculation model used)
• Earth pressure is function of vertical load and K
ad
To Figure 4
Panel 1
General expressions for geometry and actions
W
k,s
= b
s
H g
k,c
W
k,b
= t
b
B g
k,c
b
h
= B – b
s
– b
t
L
s
= b
t
+
L
b
=
For calculation model A:
h = t
b
+ H + b
h
tan b
W
k,f
= b
h
H + g
k,f
L
f
& b
t
+ b
s
+
For calculation model B:
h
b
= t
b
+ H
W
k,f
& g
k,f
L
f
= b
t
+ b
s
+
y = tan
1
b
s
2
B
2
b
h
tan b
2
b
h
2
b
h
H
2
b
h
3
b
h
h
b
L
vp
= B
W
= b
W
= y
L
vp
= L
t
+ L
s
+
L
f
3
Panel 2
General expressions for material properties and earth pressures
For calculation model A:
K
ad
=
cos b + R sin
2
h
d,f
– sin
2
b
cos b – R sin
2
h
d,f
– sin
2
b
cos b
g
k,f
h
2
2
P
ad
= K
ad
g
G
+
g
Q
q
k
h
For calculation model B:
m
t
= cos
1
+ h’
d,f
– b
1
2
sin b
sin h’
d,f
K
n
= e
1 + sin h’
d,f
sin (2m
t
– h
d,f
)
1 – sin h’
d,f
– 2 ( m
t
+ b – h’
d,f
– y ) tan h’
d,f
K
q
= K
n
cos
2
b
K
g
= K
n
cos b cos (b – y )
P
ad
= g
G
K
g
+ g
Q
K
q
q
k
h
g
k,f
h
2
2
71
9. Retaining walls
72 6
and bearing resistance and its properties should be chosen carefully.
These include its weight density, angle of shearing resistance, and (if
cohesive) undrained strength. For consideration of sliding, it is the
properties of the soil/concrete interface that are required unless a
shear key is provided. For bearing resistance a conservative estimate
of the properties of the foundation soils is required.
The weight density of concrete determines part of the wall’s
selfweight and should be taken as g
k,c
= 25 kN/m
3
for reinforced
concrete in accordance with Eurocode 1
9
.
Design against sliding
The procedure for designing reinforced concrete retaining walls
against sliding is given in Figure 7.
In the shortterm (i.e. under undrained conditions), the horizontal
component of the thrust on the virtual plane must be resisted by
adhesion on the underside of the wall base, H
Ed
≤ H
Rd
, and by friction
in the longterm (under drained conditions), H
Ed
≤ H’
Rd
.
Figure 7
Procedure for design against sliding
From Figure 4
Determine horizontal thrust on virtual plane (see Panel 2)
• H
Ed
= P
ad
cos Ω
If appropriate determine undrained sliding resistance on
underside of wall base
• H
Rd
= c
ud,fdn
B
Determine drained sliding resistance on underside of wall base
• Calculate vertical action V
d
= g
a
S
i
W
k,i
• Calculate vertical traction from P
ad
(Panel 2)
• Calculate drainned sliding resistance, H’
Rd
(Panel 3)
Verify H
Ed
≤ H
Rd
(if appropriate) and H
Ed
≤ H’
Rd
If necessary, repeat the above with a shear key
To Figure 4
Panel 3
Expressions for drained sliding resistance
Undrained sliding resistance:
H
Rd
= c
ud,fdn
B
Drained sliding resistance:
d
d,fdn
= h
cvd,fdn
H’
Rd
= V
d
tan d
d,fdn
= g
G,fav
/ W
k,i
tan h
cvd,fdn
With a shear key:
H’
Rd
& g
G,fav
/ W
k,i
tan h’
d,fdn
R
1+
Dt
0
B
2
i
i
If air can reach the interface between the base and a clay foundation,
then the undrained resistance should be limited to H
Rd
≤ 0.4V
d
– see BS EN 1997–1 Cl.6.5.3(12)P. If drainage occurs at the interface,
drained conditions may apply even for shortterm loading.
The thrust depends largely on the strength properties of the backfill.
If necessary, its magnitude can be reduced by using backfill with a
greater angle of shearing resistance.
The resistance depends largely on the properties of the soil/structure
interface between the wall base and the foundation soil. It is usual
to assume full adhesion in calculations for the undrained condition
based on total stresses (i.e. to use full c
u
) and reduced friction in
calculations for the drained condition based on effective stresses
(i.e. to use d
fdn
≤
f
fdn
). For concrete cast against soil, BS EN 1997–1
Cl. 6.5.3(10) recommends d
fdn
= f
cv, fdn
≤ f
fdn
, where f
cv, fdn
is the
constant volume angle of shearing resistance of the foundation soil.
Values of f
cv, fdn
are independent of the soil’s relative density and
typically range from 27˚ to 33˚ for granular soils. For cohesive soils
the undrained situation will be critical.
If necessary, a shear key can be used to improve the wall’s resistance
to sliding (Figure 8). The key has three benefits:
It moves the failure surface away from the interface between the
wall and the foundation, so that an improved value of
d
fdn
= f
fdn
may be assumed.
It lengthens the failure surface, from B to&R B
2
+ Dt
b
2
.
It potentially increases the passive resistance in front of the wall,
which is not considered here.
Design against toppling
The procedure for designing reinforced concrete retaining walls
against toppling is given in Figure 9. Generally this check is only
needed when the retaining wall is founded on rock or very hard soil.
The destabilising moment about the wall toe (point E in Figures 2a
and 3a) arising from the thrust on the virtual plane must be resisted
Figure 9
Procedure for design against toppling
From Figure 4
Determine destabilising moment M
Ed
about point E.
(see Panels 1 and 2) M
Ed
= P
ad
cos W h/3
Determine stabilising moments about point E
• Wall stem M
d,s
= W
d,s
L
s
• Wall base M
d,b
= W
d,b
L
b
• Backfill M
d,f
= W
d,f
L
f
• From active thrust, M
d,vp
= P
ad
sin W L
vp
• M
Rd
= M
d,s
+ M
d,b
+ M
d,f
+ M
d,vp
Verify M
Ed
≤ M
Rd
To Figure 4
■
■
■
C
a
r
r
y
o
u
t
s
e
p
a
r
a
t
e
l
y
f
o
r
b
o
t
h
C
o
m
b
i
n
a
t
i
o
n
s
1
a
n
d
2
C
a
r
r
y
o
u
t
s
e
p
a
r
a
t
e
l
y
f
o
r
b
o
t
h
C
o
m
b
i
n
a
t
i
o
n
s
1
a
n
d
2
72
How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2
737
Figure 8
Effects of shear key
0
Panel 4
Expressions for bearing resistance
e = –
B’ = B – 2 e
B
2
g
G
/ (W
k,i
L
i
) + (P
ad
sin W L
vp
) – P
ad
cos W
h
3
V
d
+ (P
ad
sin W)
Undrained bearing resistance:
q
Rd
= c
ud,fdn
N
c
i
c
+
q
d
,
where N
c
= p + 2
i
c
= 1 +
1
2
R
1–
P
ad
cos W
B’ c
ud,fdn
Drained bearing resistance:
q’
Rd
=
q’
d
N
q
i
q
+ ( g
d,fdn
–
g
w
) N
g
i
g
B’
2
i
q
= 1 –
P
ad
cos W
g
G
/ W
k,i
+ (P
ad
sin W)
2
i
i
g q
1.5
Values for N
c
, N
g
and N
q
can be obtained from Figure 11
Figure 11
Bearing capacity factors, N, from ground properties
Angle
g
c
,
B
e
a
r
i
n
g
c
a
p
a
c
i
t
y
f
a
c
t
o
r
,
N
by the stabilising moment about the same point arising from the
wall’s selfweight, i.e. M
Ed
≤ M
Rd
.
The destabilising moment depends largely on the strength properties
of the backfill. If necessary, its magnitude can be reduced by using a
backfill with a greater angle of shearing resistance.
The stabilising moment depends largely on the wall’s selfweight,
including the backfill.
(Somewhat counterintuitively, the stability of a reinforced concrete
retaining wall supporting soil is not governed by limit state EQU,
defined in Eurocode 7 as “loss of stability of the structure or the
ground, considered as a rigid body”, because the strength of the
ground is significant in providing resistance. Instead, toppling is
usually governed by limit state GEO.)
Typically, if the retaining wall has been sized appropriately for sliding,
then toppling will not be critical to the design.
Design against bearing failure
The procedure for designing reinforced concrete retaining walls
against bearing failure is given in Figure 10.
The bearing pressure acting beneath the wall base must be less than
both the foundation’s shortterm (undrained) bearing capacity,
q
Ed
≤ q
Rd
, and its longterm (drained) value, q
Ed
≤ q’
Rd
.
The bearing pressure depends on the wall’s selfweight, including
backfill, and any downwards traction on the virtual plane. Since the
centre of action of the resultant bearing force is almost inevitably
eccentric to the centre of the wall base, the bearing pressure must be
calculated over an effective width B’ (see Figure 12).
The bearing capacity depends largely on the strength of the
foundation soil. Eurocode 7 gives simple analytical methods for
bearing resistance calculations, based on classical bearing capacity
theory. Since the resultant bearing force is almost inevitably inclined,
dimensionless factors reducing the standard bearing capacity factors
Figure 10
Procedure for design against bearing failure
From Figure 4
Determine bearing pressure (see Panels 1 and 2)
q
Ed
= (V
d
+ P
ad
sin Ω) / B’
Determine undrained bearing capacity, q
Rd
(if appropriate, see Panel 4)
Determine drained bearing capacity q’
Rd
(see Panel 4)
Verify q
Ed
≤ q
Rd
(if appropriate) and q
Ed
≤ q’
Rd
To Figure 4
C
a
r
r
y
o
u
t
s
e
p
a
r
a
t
e
l
y
f
o
r
b
o
t
h
C
o
m
b
i
n
a
t
i
o
n
s
1
a
n
d
2
73
9. Retaining walls
74 8
are needed. The formulation for the drained bearing capacity given in
Figure 10 and Panel 4 assumes that the groundwater level is at the
underside of the base of the retaining wall. This will be conservative
for situations where groundwater can be guaranteed to be a distance
≥ B below the wall base. Note that the overburden pressure used in
the expression for bearing capacity is that due to backfill above the
wall’s toe (and is likely to be a small value).
Structural design
A retaining wall is likely to be much stiffer than the ground it
supports, and therefore the stem of a reinforced concrete cantilever
wall must be designed to withstand earth pressures greater than
the active pressures assumed in the calculations of sliding, toppling,
and bearing resistance. Depending on how the wall is constructed it
should either be designed for ‘compaction pressures’
10
or for ‘atrest’
pressures.
As with sliding, toppling, and bearing resistance there are two
combinations of partial factors to check at the ultimate limit state.
The design procedure is given in Figure 13.
Compaction earth pressures
Walls that are constructed before the placement of backfill should be
designed to withstand the compaction earth pressures (see Figure 14).
The wall should be constructed with adequate drainage so that water
pressures will not build up against the stem in the longterm and so do
not need to be considered in the design.
Panel 5 gives the earth pressure s
h
acting at depth z down the wall
stem AD owing to the characteristic compaction line load P
k
. For
static rollers, the line load should be taken as the roller’s selfweight.
For vibrating compaction equipment, the sum of the selfweight and
the centrifugal vibrator force should be used. If the centrifugal force
is unknown, then for a vibrating roller twice the selfweight may be
used instead. This rule of thumb should be used with caution and is
not appropriate for use with vibrating plate compactors. All forces
should be entered per unit length along the wall. Details of typical
compaction equipment are given in Table 2
Figure 12
Effective base width, B’
This method for compaction earth pressure calculation assumes
that the fill is placed using a vibrating roller that is prevented from
coming up to the face of the wall AD. If the roller is allowed to reach
AD then the depth z
j
will be greater than that given in Panel 6, owing
to wall yield. Since the wall is not perfectly rigid, the equations given
in Panel 6 are conservative.
Atrest earth pressures
Many basement walls are constructed to retain existing ground;
they should be designed to withstand the atrest earth pressures
illustrated in Figure 16.
The earth pressure coefficient used to determine the horizontal
pressures acting on the wall is given in BS EN 1997–1 Cl. 9.5.2(3)
and (4) as: K
0
= (1 – sin h’) ROCR (1 + sin b ) where OCR is the
overconsolidation ratio of the retained soil and b is the angle of
Figure 13
Design procedure for structural design
From Figure 4
Check the stem of the retaining wall for compaction
pressures or atrest conditions as appropriate:
• Maximum design moment = M
s
(see Panel 5 or 6)
• Maximum design shear force = V
s
• Refer to Chapter 3, originally published as Slabs
11
for the
design expressions to use to check bending, shear and
deflection
Check the toe and heel of the wall in bending and shear
using the expressions in Panel 5 to determine applied
forces and the design expressions from Chapter 3 to
check bending, shear and deflection
To Figure 4
Figure 14
Compaction earth pressures for structural design of cantilever
retaining walls
z
J
z
K
z
D
C
a
r
r
y
o
u
t
s
e
p
a
r
a
t
e
l
y
f
o
r
b
o
t
h
C
o
m
b
i
n
a
t
i
o
n
s
1
a
n
d
2
74
How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2
759
Figure 15
Pressure diagram for design of reinforced concrete base
Panel 5
General expressions for designing walls for compaction pressures
Forces for stem design (see Figure 14)
Moment, M
s
=
σ
hd,J
z
J
z
D
–
2z
J
+
σ
hd,J
(z
D
– z
J
)
2
+
(σ
hd,D
– σ
hd,K
)(z
D
– z
K
)
2
2 3 2 6
Shear, V
s
=
σ
hd,J
z
J
+ σ
hd,J
(z
D
– z
J
) + (σ
hd,D
– σ
hd,K
)(z
D
– z
K
)/2
2
where
σ
hd,J
= σ
hd
at J etc.
Forces for heel design (see Figure 15b)
Moment, M
h
&
γ
G
W
K,f
b
h
–
q
Ed
(b
h
– B + B’)
2
2 2
Shear, V
h
& γ
G
W
K,f
– q
Ed
(b
h
– B + B’)
Forces for toe design (see Figure 15a)
Moment, M
t
=
q
Ed
b
t
2
2
Shear, V
t
= q
Ed
b
t
Design line load (in units of kN/m), P
d
= g
Q
P
k
Depth of point J in Figure 13, z
J
= K
pd
R
Depth of point K, z
K
= K
ad
R
Between A and J, horizonal stress (in units of kPa)
s
hd
= K
pd
g
k,f
z
Between J and K
s
hd
=
R
Betwwen K and D
s
hd
= K
ad
g
k,f
z
2P
d
pg
K,f
2P
d
pg
K,f
2P
d
g
K,f
p
K
ad
=
cos b + R sin
2
h’
d,f
– sin
2
b
cos b – R sin
2
h’
d,f
– sin
2
b
cos b
K
pd
=
cos b – R sin
2
h’
d,f
– sin
2
b
cos b + R sin
2
h’
d,f
– sin
2
b
cos b
ground surface. The OCR is the ratio of maximum past level of
vertical stress to the current level of vertical effective stress.
OCR is typically obtained from an oedometer test and/or knowledge
of the geological history of the site. It is not conservative to ignore it.
Many basements involve one or two levels of propping and so
verification of sliding and toppling resistance is unnecessary (at least
for persistent design situations – they may still be relevant while the
wall is being constructed).
Verification of the structural resistance of basement walls follows
the same procedure as that for cantilever walls (see Figure 13), with
suitable allowance for any water pressures that may build up on the
back of the wall AD, especially if no provision is made for drainage.
Table 2
Typical compaction equipment
12
Description of compaction
equipment
Mass (kg) Centrifugal
vibrator
force (kN)
Design
force (kN)
80 kg vibrating plate compactor 80 14 14.3
180 kg vibrating plate compactor 180 80 81.8
350 kg pedestrianoperated
vibrating roller
350 12 15.4
670 kg vibrating plate compactor 670 96 102.6
1.5 t pedestrianoperated
vibrating roller
1530 58 73.0
2.8 t smooth wheeled roller 2800 N/A 27.5
6.9 t double vibrating roller 6900 118 185.7
8.6 t smooth wheeled roller 8600 N/A 84.4
Panel 6
Expressions for the structural design of basement walls for ‘atrest’
pressures
K
0d
= (1 – sin h’
d,f
) ROCR (1 + sin b )
s
v,d
= g
d,f
z + q
d
Between A and W
u
d
= 0
s
h,d
= s’
h,d
= K
0d
s
v,d
Between W and D
u
d
= g
w
(z
D
– z
w
)
s’
h,d
= K
0d
(s
v,d
– u
d
)
s
h,d
= s’
h,d
+ u
d
Forces for stem design
Moment, M
s
=
σ
hd,A
z
w
z
D
–
z
W
+
σ
hd,W
Z
W
z
D
–
2z
W
+
2 3 2 3
2σ
hd,W
(z
D
– z
W
)
2
+
σ
hd,D
(z
D
– z
W
)
2
6 6
Shear, V
s
=
σ
hd,A
z
W
+
σ
hd,W
z
W
+
σ
hd,W
(z
D
– z
W
)
+
σ
hd,D
(z
D
– z
W
)
2 2 2 2
See Panel 5 for forces for base design.
75
9. Retaining walls
76 10
When the structure retains:
Sands and gravels (i.e. high permeability soils) without a reliable
drainage system installed, or
Silts and clays (i.e. low permeability soils)
then BS EN 1997–1 Cl. 2.4.6.1(11) requires the water table to be
taken at the “maximum possible level, which may be the ground
surface ... unless the adequacy of the drainage system can be
demonstrated and its maintenance ensured”.
The relevant expressions for the total earth pressure s
h
(= effective
earth pressure, s’
h
+ pore water pressure, u) acting at depth z down
the wall AD are given in Panel 6 for a water table at depth d
w
below
the top of the wall. These expressions assume that the wall is rigid
(owing to the propping) and no stress relief occurs during wall
installation. Both of these assumptions are conservative.
Detailing
Control of cracking
It may be necessary to control the cracking of a reinforced concrete
wall, e.g. for aesthetic reasons or to minimise water ingress for a
basement wall. For the latter, detailed guidance on the design of water
resisting basements is given in CIRIA Report 139
13
. Strictly, this report
has been written for use alongside BS 8110 and BS 8007
14
, but the
principles can be used with BS EN 1992–1–1 and BS EN 1992–3
3
.
Control of cracking may either be assessed by using the deemedto
satisfy method, which is presented here, or by calculating the crack
widths directly (refer to Cl 7.3.4 of BS EN 1992–1–1).
Cracks may be limited to acceptable widths by the following measures:
Provide a minimum amount of reinforcement, A
s,min
; so that the
reinforcement does not yield immediately upon formation of the
first crack.
Where restraint is the main cause of cracking, limit the bar
diameter to that shown in Table 3. In this case any level of steel
Figure 16
Earth and pore water pressures for structural design of retaining
walls subject to 'atrest' conditions
z
W
z
D
W
■
■
■
■
stress may be chosen but the selected value must then be used
in the calculation of A
s,min
and the size of the bar should be
limited as shown.
Where loading is the main cause of cracking, limit the bar
diameter or the bar spacing to that shown in Table 3.
In the absence of specific requirements (e.g. watertightness), the
limiting calculated crack width w
max
may be restricted to 0.3 mm in
all exposure classes under quasipermanent load combinations (see
Chapter 1).
The minimum area of reinforcement in tensile zones to control
cracking should be calculated for each part of the member as follows:
A
s,min
= k
c
k f
ct,eff
A
ct
/s
s
where
k
c
= 1.0 for pure tension and 0.4 for pure bending (allows for
the nature of the stress distribution within the section
immediately prior to cracking and for the change of the lever
arm as a result of cracking)
k = 1.0 where the wall is less than 300 mm and K = 0.65 where
it exceeds 800 mm thick. For intermediate conditions
interpolation may be used. Factor allows for the effect of
nonuniform selfequilibrating stresses, which lead to a
reduction of restraint forces
f
ct,eff
= mean value of the tensile strength of concrete effective
at the time cracks may be first expected to occur at the
appropriate age f
ct,eff
= f
ct,m
(see table 3.1 of BS EN 199211
1
)
A
ct
= area of concrete in that part of the section which is
calculated to be in the tension zone i.e. in tension just before
the formation of the first crack
Table 3
Maximum bar size or spacing to lmit crack width (mm)
Steel
stress
(s
s
)
MPa
W
max
= 0.3 W
max
= 0.2
Maximum
bar size
(mm)
OR
Maximum
bar spacing
(mm)
Maximum
bar size
(mm)
OR
Maximum
bar spacing
(mm)
160 32 300 25 200
200 25 250 16 150
240 16 200 12 100
280 12 150 8 50
320 10 100 6 –
360 8 50 5 –
Note
The steel stress may be estimated from the expression below
s
s
=
f
yk
mA
s,req
g
ms
nA
s,prov
d
where:
f
yk
= the characteristic reinforcement yields stress
g
ms
= the partial factor for reinforcement steel
m = the total load from quasipermanent combination
n
= the total load from ULS combination
A
s,req
= the area of reinforcement at the ULS
A
s,prov
= the area of reinforcement provided
d = the ratio of redistribution moment to elastic moment
■
76
How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2
77 11
s
s
= absolute value of the maximum stress permitted in the
reinforcement immediately after the formation of the crack.
The value should be chosen bearing in mind the limits on bar
size and spacing indicated in Table 3
Large radius bends
It is often necessary to provide large radius bends to the main
reinforcement at the base of the stem because of the high tensile
forces in the bars. The minimum mandrel diameter, f
m.min
should be
assessed as follows:
f
m.min
≥ F
bt
(1/a
b
+1/(2f))/f
cd
where
F
bt
= tensile force from ultimate loads in a bar at the start of
the bend
a
b
= half the pitch of the bars or nominal cover plus f/2
f = bar diameter
f
cd
= design value of concrete compressive strength
The Standard method of detailing structural concrete
15
, appendix B,
contains some useful tables that will assist in determining the
minimum mandrel size.
Rules for spacing and quantity of
reinforcement
Vertical reinforcement
Where axial forces dominate, the minimum area of vertical
reinforcement is 0.002A
c
; half this area should be placed in each
face. Otherwise, the minimum percentage of reinforcement can
be obtained from Table 6 of Chapter 3. Outside lap locations, the
maximum area of vertical reinforcement is 0.04A
c;
; this may be
doubled at lap locations.
The distance between two adjacent vertical bars should not exceed
the lesser of either three times the wall thickness or 400 mm.
Figure 17
Typical drainage layout for a retaining wall
300 mm wide
granular backfill
Weep hole
Drainage pipe
Large radius bend
if required
For walls with a high axial load (eg basement walls), the main
reinforcement placed nearest to the wall faces should have transverse
reinforcement in the form of links with at least four per m
2
of wall
area. Where welded mesh and bars of diameter f ≤ 16 mm are used
with cover larger than 2f, transverse reinforcement is not required.
Horizontal reinforcement
The minimum area of horizontal reinforcement is the greater of
either 25% of vertical reinforcement or 0.001 A
c
. However, where
crack control is important, early age thermal and shrinkage effects
should be considered.
Where flexural forces dominate, these requirements may be relaxed
to 20% of the vertical reinforcement area.
Practical issues
Design for movement
Concrete shrinks due to early thermal effects immediately after
casting. The base of a retaining structure is usually restrained by the
soil on which it is bearing, which induces strains in the concrete.
Therefore, the reinforcement detailing, pour size and sequence of
construction should be planned to control the resultant cracking.
Typically pour sizes are up to one storey high, to limit hydrostatic
pressures on formwork. The National structural concrete specification
16
recommends pour sizes with a maximum area of 25 m
2
and
maximum dimension 5 m for waterresisting walls. The contractor
will seek to use the largest pour size possible and will want to ensure
that the minimum volume of concrete for a pour is 6 m
3
(i.e. a full
load of a readymixed concrete). It is usual to cast alternate bays
in a wall to reduce the effects of early shrinkage. Further advice on
calculating strains and crack widths for restrained walls can be found
in appendices L and M of BS EN 1992–3
1
.
For long lengths of retaining walls, it is generally accepted practice
to have expansion joints every 20 – 30 m; even so the base of the
wall will still be restrained. For a temperature range of 40°C, the joint
should allow for 10 mm of movement for every 10 m length of wall.
Drainage
To prevent pore water pressures from building up, it is important
to provide drainage material behind a retaining wall. The zone
immediately behind the wall should be of a freedraining granular
material, which should be protected to prevent it becoming blocked
with fines. A drainage pipe, laid to falls, should be provided at the
base of the freedraining material. The system should be designed for
the anticipated rainfall, and rodding points provided for maintenance
of the drainage systems. Weepholes should be provided as a backup
as they act as an overflow and as a visual warning that maintenance
is required should the primary system become blocked. A typical
drainage system is illustrated in Figure 17.
77
9. Retaining walls
78
Construction
It is particularly important when designing retaining walls to consider
how they will be constructed. Often some form of temporary works
is required and these may impact on the design. The simplest form of
construction is in an open excavation with the sides battered back to
a safe angle to allow the construction of the wall. In this case there
is little impact on the design, although the loads imposed during
compaction of the backfill may be onerous.
Where there is insufficient space for opening an excavation, either a
king post wall or sheet pile wall will be used as temporary supports,
and these may require propping, especially for a twostorey basement.
The designer should ensure there is sufficient space to install the
temporary works. It is possible to use contiguous piles, secant piles
or diaphragm walling as temporary supports but it is more usual for
these to be installed as part of the permanent works.
The designer should consider how the temporary works will
affect the installation of the waterproofing for a basement wall.
For instance, a sheet pile wall may be used to affix an external
waterproofing system, but this would prevent the sheet piles
from being removed at the end of construction. Similarly, external
waterproofing should not be used where temporary propping
would penetrate it, because it will not be possible to complete the
waterproofing when the props are removed.
The temporary works may affect the soil pressures acting on the
wall and the construction sequence could give rise to temporary
actions that exceed the permanent actions imposed on the wall.
The designer should consider this aspect and prepare a method
statement indicating the assumptions made so the temporary works
designer can work to the assumptions made or make alternative
proposals.
References
1 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION, BS EN 1992, Eurocode 2: Design of concrete structures. BSI (4 parts).
2 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION, BS EN 1997, Eurocode 7: Geotechnical design. BSI (2 parts).
3 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION, BS 8002: Code of practice for earth retaining structures. BSI, 1994.
4 NARAYANAN, R S & BROOKER, O. How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2: Introduction to Eurocodes. The Concrete Centre, 2005.
5 BROOKER, O. How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2: Getting started. The Concrete Centre, 2005.
6 WEBSTER, R & BROOKER, O. How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2: Foundations. The Concrete Centre, 2006.
7 FRANK, R, BAUDUIN, C, DRISCOLL, R, KAVVADAS, M, KREBS OVESEN, N, ORR, T & SCHUPPENER, B. Designers’ guide to BS EN 1997–1, Eurocode 7:
Geotechnical design – General rules. Thomas Telford Publishing, 2004.
8 CLAYTON, C R I & MILITITSKY, J. Earth pressure and earthretaining structures. Blackie & Son Ltd, Glasgow, 1986.
9 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. BS EN 1991–1–1: General actions – Densities, selfweight, imposed loads for buildings. BSI, 2002.
10 INGOLD, T S. The effects of compaction on retaining walls, Geotechnique 29(3), pp. 265–283, 1979.
11 MOSS, R M & BROOKER, O. How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2: Slabs. The Concrete Centre, 2006.
12 PARSONS, A W. Compaction of soils and granular materials. Transport Research Laboratory, 1992.
13 CIRIA. Report 139, Waterresisting basements. CIRIA, 1995.
14 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. BS 8007: Code of practice for design of structures for retaining aqueous liquids. BSI, 1987.
15 INSTITUTION OF STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS/THE CONCRETE SOCIETY. Standard method of detailing structural concrete. IStructE/The Concrete
Society, 2006.
16 CONSTRUCT. National structural concrete specification (third edition). The Concrete Society, 2004.
12 78
9. Retaining walls
Introduction
This chapter is intended for use by detailers to prepare reinforcement drawings
for projects that have been designed using Eurocode 2
1
. It provides a summary
of the requirements of the Eurocode and simplifies them where appropriate.
To pave the way for the introduction of Eurocode 2, other supporting
standards have been introduced or revised, including:
BS 8500: Concrete – Complementary standard to BS EN 206–1
2,
which
replaced BS 5328: Concrete on 1 December 2003 and should already be
familiar.
BS 4449: Specification for carbon steel bars for the reinforcement of
concrete
3
was revised in 2005 so that it became a complementary
standard to BS EN 10080: Steel for the reinforcement of concrete
4
and
Normative Annex C of Eurocode 2.
BS 8666: 2005, Scheduling, dimensioning, bending and cutting of steel
reinforcement for concrete – specification
5
has also been revised,
introducing Eurocode 2 requirements and a greater range of shape codes.
In this publication a number of assumptions have been made. Many of the
derived expressions and figures assume UK values for the National Determined
Parameters (NDPs). It is assumed that bars sizes are 40 mm or less and that
the bars will not be bundled together. It is also assumed that the concrete
class will not exceed C50/60. For additional requirements outside these limits,
reference should be made to Eurocode 2.
This chapter focuses on detailing the reinforcement to comply with Eurocode 2;
guidance on procedures, responsibilities and preparation of drawings can be
found in other documents
6
,
7
,
8.
Type and grade of reinforcement
The 2005 revision of BS 4449 introduced a characteristic yield strength
of 500 MPa. There are now three grades of reinforcement, A, B and C (see
Table 1), which offer increasing ductility. It is expected that for the design of
UK buildings all three grades A, B or C will be appropriate and in this case the
bar size can be prefixed with an H (e.g. H12). Grade A is not suitable for use
where redistribution above 20% has been assumed in the design and a
grade B bar should be specified in these circumstances (e.g. B12). Grade C is
for seismic conditions or where additional ductility is required.
■
■
■
How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2
10. Detailing
O Brooker BEng, CEng, MICE, MIStructE
80
How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2
Table 1
Notation for steel reinforcement
Type of steel reinforcement Notation
Grade B500A, Grade B500B or Grade B500C conforming to
BS 4449:2005
H
Grade B500A conforming to BS 4449: 2005 A
Grade B500B or Grade B500C conforming to BS 4449: 2005 B
Grade B500C conforming to BS 4449: 2005 C
Reinforcement of a type not included in the above list having
material properties that are defined in the design or contract
specification.
X
Note
In the Grade description B500A, etc., ’B’ indicates reinforcing steel.
Figure 1
Description of bond conditions
a) 45º < a < 90º
Direction of concreting
Direction of concreting
Direction of concreting
Direction of concreting
Key
b) h < 250 mm d) h > 600 mm
h h
≥ 300
c) h > 250 mm
250
a
‘Good’ bond conditions ‘Poor’ bond conditions
Cover
The nominal cover should generally be specified by the designer and
full details of how to determine this are given in Chapter 2, originally
published as, Getting started
9
. The nominal cover should be shown
on the drawings and should refer to the reinforcement nearest to the
surface of the concrete e.g. the links in a beam.
Also, the cover to the main bar should be at least equal to the size of
that bar, plus the allowance for deviations, Dc
dev
. Where there are no
links the nominal cover should be at least equal to the size of the bar
plus Dc
dev
, this may be significant for bar diameters greater than
12 mm. Dc
dev
may be 5 or 10 mm depending on the quality assurance
system assumed for the project. If the cover needs to be increased to
meet these requirements, the detailer should consult with the designer.
Anchorage and lap lengths
Eurocode 2 introduces a range of factors (a
1
to a
6
) for use when
calculating the appropriate anchorage and lap lengths. A number of
assumptions can be made that enable Table 2 to be developed for
anchorage and lap lengths. If the conditions noted in the table are not
met then reference should be made to Eurocode 2. Lap lengths for
unequal size bars may be based on the smaller bar, although this is not
stated in the Code.
Anchorage of bars and links
All reinforcement should be anchored so that the forces in it are safely
transmitted to the surrounding concrete by bond without causing
Table 2
Anchorage and lap lengths for concrete class C25/30 (mm)
Bond
condition,
(see Figure 1)
Reinforcement in tension, bar diameter, f (mm)
Reinforce
ment in
compres
8 10 12 16 20 25 32 40
Anchorage
length, l
bd
Straight bars only
Good 230 320 410 600 780 1010 1300 1760 40f
Poor 330 450 580 850 1120 1450 1850 2510 58f
Other bars
Good 320 410 490 650 810 1010 1300 1760 40f
Poor 460 580 700 930 1160 1450 1850 2510 58f
Lap length,
l
0
50% lapped in one location (a
6
= 1.4)
Good 320 440 570 830 1090 1420 1810 2460 57f
Poor 460 630 820 1190 1560 2020 2590 3520 81f
100% lapped in one location (a
6
= 1.15)
Good 340 470 610 890 1170 1520 1940 2640 61f
Poor 490 680 870 1270 1670 2170 2770 3770 87f
Notes
1 Nominal cover to all sides and distance between bars ≥ 25 mm (i.e. a
2
< 1).
2 a
1
= a
3
= a
4
= a
5
= 1.0.
3 Design stress has been taken as 435 MPa. Where the design stress in the bar at the position from where the anchorage is measured, s
sd
, is less than 435 MPa the figures in this
table can be factored by s
sd
/435. The minimum lap length is given in cl 8.7.3 of Eurocode 2.
4 The anchorage and lap lengths have been rounded up to the nearest 10 mm.
5 Where 33% of bars are lapped in one location, decrease the lap lengths for ‘50% lapped in one location’ by a factor of 0.82.
6 The figures in this table have been prepared for concrete class C25/30; refer to Table 13 for other classes or use the following factors for other concrete classes.
Concrete class C20/25 C28/35 C30/37 C32/40 C35/45 C40/50 C45/55 C50/60
Factor 1.16 0.93 0.89 0.85 0.80 0.73 0.68 0.63
81
10. Detailing
Bars in compression
In addition to the rules for bars in tension (Figure 6a), one bar of the
transverse reinforcement should be placed outside each end of the lap
length of bars in compression and within 4f of the ends of the lap
length (see Figure 6b).
Figure 2
Design anchorage length l
bd
, for any shape measured along the
centreline
f l
bd
Figure 3
Anchorage of links
a) Bend angle > 150º b) Bend angle ≤ 150º
f f
5f, but
≥ 50 mm
10f, but
≥ 70 mm
Figure 4
Percentage of lapped bars in one lapped section
l
0
0.65l
0
Section considered
bar 1
bar 2
bar 3
bar 4
0.65l
0
Example: bars 2 and 3 are
outside the section being
considered.
Therefore a
6
= 1.4
Figure 5
Arranging adjacent lapping bars
F
s
F
s
F
s
F
s
F
s
F
s
l
0
≥ 0.3l
0
f
a
≤ 50 mm
≥ 20 mm
≤ 4f
≥ 2f
cracking or spalling. The design anchorage length, l
bd
, (which can be
obtained from Table 2) is measured along the centreline of the bar
(see Figure 2). The anchorage of links is shown in Figure 3.
Arrangement of laps
Where possible laps in a member should be staggered (see Figure 4)
and not located in areas of high stress. The arrangement of lapped bars
should comply with Figure 5, as set out below:
1. The clear distance between lapped bars should not be greater than
4f or 50 mm, otherwise the lap length should be increased by a
length equal to the clear distance.
2. The longitudinal distance between two adjacent laps should not be
less than 0.3 times the lap length, l
0
. Where this is not the case, the
bars should be considered as being lapped in one section.
3. In case of adjacent laps, the clear distance between adjacent bars
should not be less than 2f or 20 mm.
When the provisions comply with 1 and 3 above, the permissible
percentage of lapped bars in tension may be 100% where the bars are
all in one layer. In this case the design lap length, l
0
, from Table 2, must
be increased (see note 5). Where the bars are in several layers no more
than 50% should be lapped in any one layer.
All bars in compression and secondary (distribution) reinforcement may
be lapped in the same location.
Transverse reinforcement
Bars in tension
Transverse tensile stresses occur at the ends of lapped bars. Where the
diameter, f, of the lapped bars is less than 20 mm, or the percentage
of lapped bars in any section is less than 25%, then any transverse
reinforcement or links necessary for other reasons may be assumed
sufficient for the transverse tensile forces without further justification.
Where the diameter, f, of the lapped bars is greater than or equal
to 20 mm, the transverse reinforcement should have a total area, A
st
(sum of all legs parallel to the layer of the spliced reinforcement – see
Figure 6a) of not less than the area A
s
of one lapped bar (ΣA
st
≥ 1.0A
s
).
The transverse bar should be placed perpendicular to the direction of
the lapped reinforcement and between that and the surface of the
concrete. Table 3 gives recommended minimum areas for transverse
reinforcement. Where the lapped bars in a slab are located in an
area of low stress, e.g. near the point of contraflexure, it is generally
acceptable to assume that transverse reinforcement is not required.
If more than 50% of the bars are lapped in one location and the
distance, a, between adjacent laps at a section is ≤ 10f (see Figure 5)
transverse reinforcement should be formed by links or Ubars anchored
into the body of the section.
82
How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2
Beams
Curtailment
Unless the additional tensile force in the longitudinal reinforcement
due to shear has been calculated, the curtailment length of the
longitudinal reinforcement should be extended beyond the point at
which it is required for flexural strength (this is known as the ‘shift
rule’) using the following expression (see also Figure 7):
a
l
= z cot y /2 for vertical shear reinforcement.
where
z = lever arm
y = angle of compression strut
This can conservatively be taken as:
a
l
= 1.125d
For beams designed using the coefficients given in Table 3 of Chapter 4,
originally published as Beams,
10
the simplified rules shown in Figure 8
may be used. However, the simplifications are conservative and economies
can be achieved by curtailing bars to suit the actual moments.
Figure 6
Transverse reinforcement for lapped splices
a) Bars in tension
b) Bars in compression
F
s
F
s
F
s
F
s
l
0
l
0
l
0
/3 l
0
/3
l
0
/3
l
0
/3
A
st
/2 A
st
/2
A
st
/2 A
st
/2
4f 4f
≤ 150 mm
≤ 150 mm
Table 3
Bar sizes for transverse reinforcement
Lap length
(mm), for
transverse
bars at 150
mm centres
a
Number
of bars
at each
lap
Bar size (mm)
20 25 32 40
A
s
= 314 A
s
= 491 A
s
= 804 A
s
= 1260
≤450 2 10 16 16 25
451 – 900 3 10 12 16 20
901 – 1350 4 8 10 12 16
1351 – 1800 5 8 8 12 16
1801 – 2250 6 8 8 10 12
2251 – 2700 7 N/A 8 10 12
Key
a For transverse bars at less than 150 mm centres use the following expression to
calculate the required number of bars and hence the required transverse bar diameter:
Number of bars required = 1 + l
0
/(3s) where s = spacing of the transverse bars.
Figure 7
Illustration of curtailment of longitudinal reinforcement
Hogging reinforcement
Envelope of M
Ed
/z + N
Ed
Acting tensile force F
s
Resisting tensile force F
Rs
Sagging reinforcement
l
bd
l
bd
l
bd
l
bd
l
bd
l
bd
l
bd
l
bd
a
l
a
l
DF
td
DF
td
Figure 8
Simplified detailing rules for beams
*reduce to 25%
for equal spans
a) Continuous member, top reinforcement
Reinforcement for
maximum hogging moment
0.15l + a
l
≥ l
bd
0.30l + a
l
100%
60%
35%*
Face of support
b) Continuous member, bottom reinforcement
Reinforcement for maximum sagging moment
0.30l – a
l
100%
30%
Position of
effective
support
l
bd
100%
25%
Position of
effective support
c) Simple support, bottom reinforcement
0.08l
Notes
1 l is the effective length.
2 a
l
is the distance to allow for tensile force due to shear force.
3 l
bd
is the design anchorage length.
4 Q
k
≤ G
k.
5 Minimum of two spans required.
6 Applies to uniformly distributed loads only.
7 The shortest span must be greater than or equal to 0.85 times the longest span.
8 Applies where 15% redistribution has been used.
83
10. Detailing
Reinforcement in end supports
In monolithic construction, even when simple supports have been
assumed in design, the section at supports (top reinforcement) should
be designed for a bending moment arising from partial fixity of at
least 25% of the maximum bending moment in the span (i.e. provide
25% of midspan bottom reinforcement).
The area of bottom reinforcement provided at supports with little or no
end fixity assumed in design, should be at least 25% of the area of steel
provided in the span. The bars should be anchored to resist a force , F
E
.
F
E
= (V
Ed
 a
l
/ z) + N
Ed
where
V
Ed
 = absolute value of shear force
N
Ed
= the axial force if present
The anchorage, l
bd
, should be measured beyond the line of contact
between the beam and support.
Provided s
sd
is taken as 435 MPa in the calculation of the anchorage
length (which is assumed in Tables 2 and 13) then it should not be
necesary to calculate F
E
.
Flanged beams
At supports the tension reinforcement to resist hogging moments
should be distributed across the full width of the effective flange as
shown in Figure 9; part of it may be concentrated over the web.
Minimum area of longitudinal reinforcement
The minimum area of reinforcement is A
s,min
= 0.26 f
ctm
b
t
d/f
yk
but
not less than 0.0013b
t
d, where b
t
is the mean width of the tension
zone (see Table 4). For a Tbeam with the flange in compression, only
the width of the web is taken into account in calculating the value
of b
t
.
Maximum area of longitudinal reinforcement
Outside lap locations, the maximum area of tension or compression
reinforcement should not exceed A
s,max
= 0.04 A
c
.
Figure 9
Placing of tension reinforcement in flanged cross section
b
eff
b
eff1
b
eff2
A
s
b
w
h
f
Minimum spacing of reinforcement
The minimum clear distance between bars should be the greater of:
Bar diameter
Aggregate size plus 5 mm
20 mm
Shear reinforcement
The longitudinal spacing of vertical shear reinforcement should not
exceed 0.75d. Note the requirement for a maximum spacing of
150 mm where the shear reinforcement acts as a transverse
reinforcement at laps in the longitudinal bars. The transverse spacing
of the legs in a series of shear links should not exceed:
s
t,max
= 0.75d ≤ 600 mm
The minimum area of shear reinforcement in beams, A
sw,min
should be
calculated from:
A
sw
s b
w
≥ r
w,min where rw,min can be obtained from Table 4.
Slabs
Curtailment
The curtailment rules for beams should be followed, except that a
value of a
l
= d may be used.
For slabs designed using the coefficients given in Table 3 of Chapter 3,
originally published as Slabs
11
, the simplified rules shown in Figure 10
may be used.
Reinforcement in end supports
In simply supported slabs, the area of reinforcement may be reduced
to half the calculated span reinforcement and continued up to the
support, otherwise 100% of the reinforcement may be continued
to the support. Beyond the face of the support 15% of the area of
maximum reinforcement should be provided (see Figure 10c). The
bars should be anchored to resist a force, F
E
, as given in the section
on beams.
Table 4
Minimum percentage of reinforcement required
f
ck
f
ctm
Minimim percentage
(0.26 f
ctm
/ f
yk
2
)
r
w, min
x 10
3
25 2.6 0.13% 0.80
28 2.8 0.14% 0.85
30 2.9 0.15% 0.88
32 3.0 0.16% 0.91
35 3.2 0.17% 0.95
40 3.5 0.18% 1.01
45 3.8 0.20% 1.07
50 4.1 0.21% 1.13
Key
a Assuming f
yk
= 500 MPa
■
■
■
84
How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2
Minimum spacing requirements
The minimum clear distance between bars (horizontal or vertical)
should not be less than the bar size, b, (d
g
+ 5 mm), or 20 mm, where
d
g
is the maximum size of aggregate.
Maximum spacing of reinforcement
For slabs less than 200 mm thick the following maximum spacing
rules apply (h is the depth of the slab):
For the principal reinforcement: 3h but not more than 400 mm.
For the secondary reinforcement: 3.5h but not more than 450 mm.
The exception is in areas with concentrated loads or areas of
maximum moment where the following applies:
For the principal reinforcement: 2h but not more than 250 mm.
For the secondary reinforcement: 3h but not more than 400 mm.
For slabs 200 mm thick or greater, the spacing requirements are given
in Table 5. Where the designer has not specified the required spacing
or provided the steel stress, s
s
, it can generally be assumed that s
s
will
not exceed 320 MPa for a typical slab. Where the slab supports office
or residential areas it is unlikely that s
s
will exceed 280 MPa.
Figure 10
Simplified detailing rules for slabs
a) Continuous member, top reinforcement
Reinforcement for
maximum hogging moment
0.15l ≥ l
bd
0.30l
100%
50%
Face of support
b) Continuous member, bottom reinforcement
Reinforcement for
maximum sagging moment
0.2l
100%
40%
Position of
effective
support
c) Simple support, bottom reinforcement
100%
15%
l
bd
Face of
support
Notes
1 l is the effective length.
2 l
bd
is the design anchorage length.
3 Q
k
≤ 1.25 G
k
and q
k
≤ 5kN/m
2
.
4 Minimum of two spans required.
5 Applies to uniformly distributed loads only.
6 The shortest span must be greater than or equal to 0.85 times the longest span.
7 Applies where 20% redistribution has been used.
■
■
■
■
Minimum areas of reinforcement
The minimum area of reinforcement to be provided varies with the
concrete strength (see Table 4).
Maximum area of longitudinal reinforcement
Outside lap locations, the maximum area of tension or compression
reinforcement, should not exceed A
s,max
= 0.04A
c
. At lap locations
A
s,max
= 0.08A
c
.
Edge reinforcement
Along a free (unsupported) edge, a slab should normally contain longitudinal
and transverse reinforcement, generally arranged as shown in Figure 11.
Flat slabs
A flat slab should be divided into column and middle strips (see
Figure 12); the division of the moments between the column and
middle strips is given in Table 6.
Figure 11
Edge reinforcement for slab
≥ 2h
h
Table 5
Values for r
w,min
Steel
stress
(e
s
) MPa
w
max
= 0.4 mm w
max
= 0.3 mm
Maximum
bar size
(mm)
OR
Maximum
bar spacing
(mm)
Maximum
bar size
(mm)
OR
Maximum
bar spacing
(mm)
160 40 300 32 300
200 32 300 25 250
240 20 250 16 200
280 16 200 12 150
320 12 150 10 100
360 10 100 8 50
Table 6
Apportionment of bending moments in flat slabs – equivalent frame method
Location Negative moments Positive moments
Column strip 60% – 80% 50% – 70%
Middle strip 40% – 20% 50% – 30%
Notes
The total negative and positive moments to be resisted by the column and middle
strips together should always add up to 100%
85
10. Detailing
Figure 12
Division of panels in flat slabs
l
x
> l
y
l
y
/4 l
y
/4
l
y
l
y
/4
l
y
/4
Middle strip = l
x
– l
y
/2
Middle strip = l
y
/2
Column strip = l
y
/2
At internal columns, unless rigorous serviceability calculations are
carried out, top reinforcement of area 0.5 A
t
should be placed in a
width equal to the sum of 0.125 times the panel width on either side
of the column. A
t
represents the area of reinforcement required to
resist the full negative moment from the sum of the two half panels
each side of the column. It is also advisable to apply this requirement
to perimeter columns as far as is possible.
At internal columns at least two bars of bottom reinforcement in each
orthogonal direction should be provided and they should pass between
the column reinforcement. Whilst it is not a code requirement it is
considered good practice to provide two bars running parallel to the
slab edge between the reinforcement of an external column.
Reinforcement perpendicular to a free edge required to transmit
bending moments from the slab to an edge or corner column should
be placed within the effective width, b
e
, shown in Figure 13.
Punching shear reinforcement
Where punching shear reinforcement is required the following rules
should be observed.
It should be provided between the face of the column and kd
inside the outer perimeter where shear reinforcement is no longer
required. k is 1.5, unless the perimeter at which reinforcement is no
longer required is less than 3d from the face of the column. In this
case the reinforcement should be placed in the zone 0.3d to 1.5d
from the face of the column.
There should be at least two perimeters of shear links.
The radial spacing of the links, s
r
should not exceed 0.75d (see Figure 14).
The tangential spacing of the links, s
d
should not exceed 1.5d
within 2d of the column face.
The tangential spacing of the links should not exceed 2d for any
other perimeter.
The distance between the face of the column and the nearest shear
reinforcement should be between 0.3d and 0.5d
■
■
■
■
■
■
The intention is to provide an even distribution/density of punching
shear reinforcement within the zone where it is required. One
simplication to enable rectangular perimeters of sheer reinforcement is
to use an intensity of A
sw
/u
1
around rectangluar perimeters.
The minimum area of a link leg for vertical punching shear reinforcement is
1.5A
sw,min
/(s
r
s
t
) ≥ 0.08√f
ck
f
yk
which can be rearranged as:
A
sw,min
≥ (s
r
s
t
)/F
where
s
r
= the spacing of the links in the radial direction
s
t
= the spacing of the links in the tangential direction
F = factor obtained from Table 7
Figure 13
Effective width, b
e
of a flat slab
a) Edge column b) Corner column
Note
y is the distance from the edge of the slab to the innermost face of the column
Slab edge
Slab edge
Slab edge
y can be > c
y
z can be > c
x
and y can be > c
y
b
e
= c
x
+ y
b
e
= z + y/2
c
y
c
y
c
x c
x
y
y
z
Figure 14
Punching shear layout
s
r
Outer control
perimeter
s 0.75
r
≤ d
≤0.5d
kd
Section A  A
s
t
Outer perimeter of
shear reinforcement
Outer control
perimeter
u
out
0.5d
≤ 0.75d
≤1.5d
A A
≤1.5d
(2d if > 2d
from column)
86
Columns and walls
Maximum areas of reinforcement
In Eurocode 2 the maximum nominal reinforcement area for columns
and walls outside laps is 4% compared with 6% in BS 8110. However,
this area can be increased provided that the concrete can be placed
and compacted sufficiently. Selfcompacting concrete may be used
for particularly congested situations, where the reinforcing bars should
be spaced to ensure that the concrete can flow around them. Further
guidance can be found in Selfcompacting concrete
12
.
Minimum reinforcement requirements
The recommended minimum diameter of longitudinal reinforcement
in columns is 12 mm. The minimum area of longitudinal reinforcement
in columns is given by: A
s,min
= 0.10 N
Ed
/f
yd
≥ 0.002A
c
. The diameter
of the transverse reinforcement (link) should not be less than 6 mm
or one quarter of the maximum diameter of the longitudinal bars (see
Table 8). No longitudinal bar should be more than 150 mm from a
transverse bar.
Particular requirements for walls
The minimum area of vertical reinforcement in walls is given by:
A
s,vmin
= 0.002A
c
(see also Table 9). Half the area should be provided in
each face.
The distance between two adjacent vertical bars should not exceed
the lesser of either three times the wall thickness or 400 mm.
The minimum area of horizontal reinforcement in each face of a wall
is the greater of either 25% of vertical reinforcement or 0.001A
c
.
However, where crack control is important, early age thermal and
shrinkage effects should be considered.
There is no advice given in the Code on provision of reinforcement
to control cracking in plain walls, but reinforcement may be provided
if required.
Table 7
Factor, F, for determining A
sw, min
f
ck
25 28 30 32 35 40 45 50
Factor, F 1875 1772 1712 1657 1585 1482 1398 1326
Note
f
yk
has been taken as 500 MPa
Table 8
Requirements for column reinforcement
Bar dia. (mm) 12 16 20 25 32 40
Max spacing
a
(mm) 144
b
192
b
240
b
240
b
240
b
240
b
Min link dia. (mm) 6
c
6
c
6
c
8 8 10
Key
a At a distance greater than the larger dimension of the column above or below a
beam or slab, dimensions can be increased by a factor of 1.67.
b But not greater than minimum dimension of the column.
c 6 mm bars are not readily available in the UK.
Lapping fabric
Unless ‘flying end’ fabric is being specified, laps of fabric should be
arranged as shown in Figure 15. When fabric reinforcement is lapped
by layering, the following should be noted:
Permissible percentage of fabric main reinforcement that may be
lapped in any section is 100% if (A
s
/s) ≤ 1200 mm
2
/m (where s is
the spacing of bars) and 60% if A
s
/s> 1200 mm
2
/m.
All secondary reinforcement may be lapped at the same location
and the minimum lap length l
0,min
for layered fabric is as follows:
≥ 150 mm for f ≤ 6 mm
≥ 250 mm for 6 mm < f ≤ 8.5 mm
≥ 350 mm for 8.5 mm < f ≤ 12 mm
There should generally be at least two bar pitches within the lap
length. This could be reduced to one bar pitch for f ≤ 6 mm.
Tolerances
The tolerances for cutting and/or bending dimensions are given in Table 10
and should be taken into account when completing the bar schedule.
Where the reinforcement is required to fit between two concrete faces
(e.g. links) then an allowance should be made for deviations in the member
size and bending tolerances. There is no guidance given in Eurocode 2, but
Table 11 gives guidance on the deductions to be made for deviations.
Table 9
Minimum area of vertical reinforcement in walls (half in each face)
Wall thickness (mm) A
s,min
/m length of wall (mm
2
)
200 400
250 500
300 600
350 700
400 800
Table 10
Tolerance
Cutting and bending processes Tolerance (mm)
Cutting of straight lengths
(including reinforcement for
subsequent bending)
+25, –25
Bending:
≤ 1000 mm +5, –5
> 1000 mm to ≤ 2000 mm +5, –10
> 2000 mm +5, –25
Table 11
Deductions to bar dimensions to allow for deviations between two
concrete faces
Distance between
concrete faces (mm)
Type of bar Total deduction
(mm)
0 – 1000 Links and other bent bars 10
1000 – 2000 Links and other bent bars 15
Over 2000 Links and other bent bars 20
Any length Straight bars 40
■
■
How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2
87
Figure 15
Lapping of welded fabric
a) Intermeshed fabric (longitudinal section)
b) Layered fabric (longitudinal section)
F
s
F
s
F
s
F
s
l
0
l
0
Tying requirements
At each floor and roof level an effectively continuous peripheral tie
should be provided within 1.2 m from the edge; this need not be
additional reinforcement. In practice, for most buildings the tie should
resist a tensile force of 60 kN. An area of reinforcement of 138 mm
2
is
sufficient to resist this force.
Internal ties should be provided at each floor and roof level in two
directions approximately at right angles. They should be effectively
continuous throughout their length and should be anchored to the
peripheral ties at each end, unless continuing as horizontal ties to columns
or walls. The internal ties may, in whole or in part, be spread evenly in
the slabs or may be grouped at or in beams, walls or other appropriate
positions. In walls they should be within 0.5 m from the top or bottom of
floor slabs. In each direction, internal ties should be capable of resisting a
design value of tensile force F
tie,int
(in kN per metre width):
F
tie,int
= [(q
k
+ g
k
)/7.5](l
r
/5)(F
t
) ≥ F
t
kN/m
where
(q
k
+ g
k
) = sum of the average permanent and variable floor loads
(in kN/m
2
)
l
r
= the greater of the distances (in m) between the centres of the
columns, frames or walls supporting any two adjacent floor
spans in the direction of the tie under consideration
F
t
= (20 + 4n
0
) ≤ 60 kN (n
0
is the number of storeys)
The maximum spacing of internal ties is 1.5l
r
.
Minimum radii and end
projections
The minimum radii for bends and length of end projections are given
in Table 12.
Table 12
Minimum scheduling radii and bend allowances
r P
≥ 5d
Nominal
size of bar,
d (mm)
Minimum
radius for
scheduling,
r (mm)
Mimimum end projection, P
General (min 5d
straight), including
links where bend >
150° (mm)
Links where bend
< 150° (min 10d
straight) (mm)
8 16 115
a
115
a
10 20 120
a
130
12 24 125
a
160
16 32 130 210
20 70 190 290
25 87 240 365
32 112 305 465
40 140 580
Key
a The minimum end projections for smaller bars is governed by the practicalities of
bending bars.
References
1 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. BS EN 1992, Eurocode 2: Design of concrete structures. BSI (4 parts).
2 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. BS 8500: Concrete – Complementary standard to BS EN 206–1. BS1, 2002.
3 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. BS 4449: Specification for carbon steel bars for the reinforcement of concrete. BSI, 2005.
4 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. BS EN 10080: Steel for the reinforcement of concrete – Weldable reinforcing steel – General. BSI, 2005.
5 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. BS 8666: Scheduling, dimensioning, bending and cutting of steel reinforcement for concrete – Specification. BSI, 2005.
6 INSTITUTION OF STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS/CONCRETE SOCIETY. Standard method of detailing structural concrete. ISE/CS, 2006.
7 CONSTRUCT. National structural concrete specification (third edition). BCA, 2004.
8 CONSTRUCT. A guide to contractor detailing of reinforcement in concrete. BCA, 1997.
9 BROOKER, O. How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2: Getting started. The Concrete Centre, 2006.
10 MOSS, R M & BROOKER, O. How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2: Beams. The Concrete Centre, 2006.
11 MOSS, R M & BROOKER, O. How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2: Slabs. The Concrete Centre, 2006.
12 THE CONCRETE SOCIETY. Technical report 62: Selfcompacting concrete. CCIP–001. The Concrete Society, 2005.
13 QUEENS PRINTER OF ACTS OF PARLIAMENT. The Construction (Design and Management) Regulations. 1994. QPOAP, 1994.
10. Detailing
88
Table 13
Anchorage and lap lengths
Bond condition
(see Figure 1)
Reinforcement in tension, bar diameter, f (mm) Reinforcement
in compression
8 10 12 16 20 25 32 40
Concrete class C20/25
Anchorage
length, l
bd
Straight bars only
Good 270 370 480 690 910 1180 1500 2040 47f
Poor 380 520 680 990 1290 1680 2150 2920 67f
Other bars
Good 370 470 570 750 940 1180 1500 2040 47f
Poor 530 670 810 1080 1340 1680 2150 2920 67f
Lap length,
l
0
50% lapped in one
location (a
6
= 1.4)
Good 370 510 660 970 1270 1640 2100 2860 66f
Poor 530 730 950 1380 1810 2350 3000 4080 94f
100% lapped
in one location (a
6
= 1.5)
Good 400 550 710 1030 1360 1760 2250 3060 70f
Poor 510 790 1010 1480 1940 2320 3220 4370 100f
Concrete class C25/30
Anchorage
length, l
bd
Straight bars only
Good 230 320 410 600 780 1010 1300 1760 40f
Poor 330 450 580 850 1120 1450 1850 2510 58f
Other bars
Good 320 410 490 650 810 1010 1300 1760 40f
Poor 460 580 700 930 1160 1450 1850 2510 58f
Lap length,
l
0
50% lapped in one
location (a
6
= 1.4)
Good 320 440 570 830 1090 1420 1810 2460 57f
Poor 460 630 820 1190 1560 2020 2590 3520 81f
100% lapped
in one location (a
6
= 1.5)
Good 340 470 610 890 1170 1520 1940 2640 61f
Poor 490 680 870 1270 1670 2170 2770 3770 87f
Concrete class C28/35
Anchorage
length, l
bd
Straight bars only
Good 210 300 380 550 730 940 1200 1630 37f
Poor 300 420 540 790 1030 1340 1720 2330 53f
Other bars
Good 300 380 450 600 750 940 1200 1630 37f
Poor 420 540 650 860 1070 1340 1720 2330 53f
Lap length,
l
0
50% lapped in one
location (a
6
= 1.4)
Good 300 410 530 770 1010 1320 1680 2280 52f
Poor 420 590 760 1100 1450 1880 2400 3260 75f
100% lapped
in one location (a
6
= 1.5)
Good 320 440 570 830 1090 1410 1800 2450 56f
Poor 450 630 810 1180 1550 2010 2570 3470 80f
Concrete class C30/37
Anchorage
length, l
bd
Straight bars only
Good 210 280 360 530 690 900 1150 1560 36f
Poor 290 400 520 750 990 1280 1640 2230 51f
Other bars
Good 290 360 430 580 720 900 1150 1560 36f
Poor 410 520 620 820 1030 1280 1640 2230 51f
Lap length,
l
0
50% lapped in one
location (a
6
= 1.4)
Good 290 390 510 740 970 1260 1610 2180 50f
Poor 410 560 720 1050 1380 1790 2290 3110 72f
100% lapped
in one location (a
6
= 1.5)
Good 310 420 540 790 1040 1350 1720 2340 54f
Poor 430 600 780 1130 1480 1920 2460 3340 77f
Concrete class C32/40
Anchorage
length, l
bd
Straight bars only
Good 200 270 350 510 660 860 1100 1490 34f
Poor 280 380 500 720 950 1230 1570 2130 49f
Other bars
Good 270 350 420 550 690 860 1100 1490 34f
Poor 390 490 590 790 980 1230 1570 2130 49f
Lap length,
l
0
50% lapped in one
location (a
6
= 1.4)
Good 270 380 490 710 930 1200 1540 2090 48f
Poor 390 540 690 1010 1320 1720 2200 2980 69f
100% lapped
in one location (a
6
= 1.5)
Good 290 400 520 760 990 1290 1650 2240 51f
Poor 420 570 740 1080 1420 1840 2350 3200 73f
How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2
89
10. Detailing
Bond condition
(see Figure 1)
Reinforcement in tension, bar diameter, f (mm) Reinforcement
in compression
8 10 12 16 20 25 32 40
Concrete class C35/45
Anchorage
length, l
bd
Straight bars only
Good 190 260 330 480 630 810 1040 1410 32f
Poor 260 360 470 680 890 1160 1480 2010 46f
Other bars
Good 260 330 390 520 650 810 1040 1410 32f
Poor 370 470 560 740 930 1160 1480 2010 46f
Lap length,
l
0
50% lapped in one
location (a
6
= 1.4)
Good 260 360 460 670 870 1130 1450 1970 45f
Poor 370 510 650 950 1250 1620 2070 2810 65f
100% lapped
in one location (a
6
= 1.5)
Good 280 380 490 710 940 1210 1550 2110 48f
Poor 390 540 700 1020 1340 1730 2220 3010 69f
Concrete class C40/50
Anchorage
length, l
bd
Straight bars only
Good 170 230 300 440 570 740 950 1290 30f
Poor 240 330 430 620 820 1060 1350 1840 42f
Other bars
Good 240 300 360 480 600 740 950 1290 30f
Poor 340 430 510 680 850 1060 1350 1840 42f
Lap length,
l
0
50% lapped in one
location (a
6
= 1.4)
Good 240 330 420 610 800 1040 1330 1800 41f
Poor 340 460 600 870 1140 1480 1890 2570 59f
100% lapped
in one location (a
6
= 1.5)
Good 250 350 450 650 860 1110 1420 1930 44f
Poor 360 500 640 930 1220 1590 2030 2760 63f
Concrete class C45/55
Anchorage
length, l
bd
Straight bars only
Good 160 220 280 400 530 690 880 1190 27f
Poor 220 310 400 580 760 980 1250 1700 39f
Other bars
Good 220 280 330 440 550 690 880 1190 27f
Poor 310 390 470 630 780 980 1250 1700 39f
Lap length,
l
0
50% lapped in one
location (a
6
= 1.4)
Good 220 300 390 560 740 960 1230 1670 38f
Poor 310 430 550 800 1060 1370 1750 2380 55f
100% lapped
in one location (a
6
= 1.5)
Good 230 320 420 600 790 1030 1310 1780 41f
Poor 330 460 590 860 1130 1470 1880 2550 58f
Concrete class C50/60
Anchorage
length, l
bd
Straight bars only
Good 150 200 260 380 490 640 820 1110 25f
Poor 210 290 370 540 700 910 1170 1580 36f
Other bars
Good 220 280 330 440 550 690 880 1190 27f
Poor 310 390 470 630 780 980 1250 1700 39f
Lap length,
l
0
50% lapped in one
location (a
6
= 1.4)
Good 220 300 390 560 740 960 1230 1670 38f
Poor 310 430 550 800 1060 1370 1750 2380 55f
100% lapped
in one location (a
6
= 1.5)
Good 230 320 420 600 790 1030 1310 1780 41f
Poor 330 460 590 860 1130 1470 1880 2550 58f
Notes
1 Cover to all sides and distance between bars ≥ 25 mm (i.e. a
2
< 1).
2 a
1
= a
3
= a
4
= a
5
= 1.0.
3 Design stress has been taken at 435 MPa. Where the design stress in the bar at the position from where the anchorage is measured, s
sd
, is less than 435 MPa the figures in this
table can be factored by s
sd
/435. The mimimum lap length id given in cl 8.7.3 of Eurocode 2.
4 The anchorage and lap lengths have been rounded up to the nearest 10 mm.
5 Where 33% of bars are lapped in one location, decrease the lap lengths for '50% lapped in one location' by a factor of 0.82.
90 90
Table 14
Sectional areas of groups of bars (mm
2
)
Bar size
(mm)
Number of bars
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
8 50.3 101 151 201 251 302 352 402 452 503
10 78.5 157 236 314 393 471 550 628 707 785
12 113 226 339 452 565 679 792 905 1020 1130
16 201 402 603 804 1010 1210 1410 1610 1810 2010
20 314 628 942 1260 1570 1880 2200 2510 2830 3140
25 491 982 1470 1960 2450 2950 3440 3930 4420 4910
32 804 1610 2410 3220 4020 4830 5630 6430 7240 8040
40 1260 2510 3770 5030 6280 7540 8800 10100 11300 12600
Table 15
Sectional areas per metre width for various spacings of bars (mm
2
)
Bar size
(mm)
Spacing of bars (mm)
75 100 125 150 175 200 225 250 275 300
8 670 503 402 335 287 251 223 201 183 168
10 1050 785 628 524 449 393 349 314 286 262
12 1510 1130 905 754 646 565 503 452 411 377
16 2680 2010 1610 1340 1150 1010 894 804 731 670
20 4190 3140 2510 2090 1800 1570 1400 1260 1140 1050
25 6540 4910 3930 3270 2800 2450 2180 1960 1780 1640
32 10700 8040 6430 5360 4600 4020 3570 3220 2920 2680
40 16800 12600 10100 8380 7180 6280 5590 5030 4570 4190
Table 16
Mass of groups of bars (kg per metre run)
Bar size
(mm)
Number of bars
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
8 0.395 0.789 1.184 1.578 1.973 2.368 2.762 3.157 3.551 3.946
10 0.617 1.233 1.850 2.466 3.083 3.699 4.316 4.932 5.549 6.165
12 0.888 1.776 2.663 3.551 4.439 5.327 6.215 7.103 7.990 8.878
16 1.578 3.157 4.735 6.313 7.892 9.470 11.048 12.627 14.205 15.783
20 2.466 4.932 7.398 9.865 12.331 14.797 17.263 19.729 22.195 24.662
25 3.853 7.707 11.560 15.413 19.267 23.120 26.974 30.827 34.680 38.534
32 6.313 12.627 18.940 25.253 31.567 37.880 44.193 50.507 56.820 63.133
40 9.865 19.729 29.594 39.458 49.323 59.188 69.052 78.917 88.781 98.646
Table 17
Mass in kg per square metre for various spacings of bars (kg per m
2
)
Bar size
(mm)
Spacing of bars (mm)
75 100 125 150 175 200 225 250 275 300
8 5.261 3.946 3.157 2.631 2.255 1.973 1.754 1.578 1.435 1.315
10 8.221 6.165 4.932 4.110 3.523 3.083 2.740 2.466 2.242 2.055
12 11.838 8.878 7.103 5.919 5.073 4.439 3.946 3.551 3.228 2.959
16 21.044 15.783 12.627 10.522 9.019 7.892 7.015 6.313 5.739 5.261
20 32.882 24.662 19.729 16.441 14.092 12.331 10.961 9.865 8.968 8.221
25 51.378 38.534 30.827 25.689 22.019 19.267 17.126 15.413 14.012 12.845
32 84.178 63.133 50.507 42.089 36.076 31.567 28.059 25.253 22.958 21.044
40 131.528 98.646 78.917 65.764 56.369 49.323 43.843 39.458 35.871 32.882
10. Detailing
911
How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2
11. BS 8500 for building structures
Introduction
BS 8500 Concrete – Complementary British Standard to BS EN 206–1
1
was revised
in December 2006 principally to reflect changes to Special Digest 1
2
and bring it
into line with other standards.
The guidelines given in BS 8500 for durability are based on the latest research
and recommends strength, cover, cement content and water/cement ratios for
various exposure conditions.
Concrete design information
Exposure classification
Initially the relevant exposure condition(s) should be identified. In BS 8500
exposure classification is related to the deterioration processes of carbonation,
ingress of chlorides, chemical attack from aggressive ground and freeze/thaw
(see Table 1). All of these deterioration processes are subdivided. The
recommendations for XD and XS exposure classes are sufficient for exposure
class XC and it is only necessary to check each face of the concrete element
for either XC, XD or XS exposure class.
Selecting concrete strength and cover
Having identified the relevant exposure condition(s), a recommended strength
class and cover should be chosen. Table 2 indicates the minimum cover and
strengths required to meet common exposure conditions for a 50year working
life; further explanation is given below. Table 2 is not intended to cover all
concrete exposure situations and reference should be made to BS 8500 for
those cases not included, and where a 100year working life is required.
Compressive strength
BS 8500 uses ‘compressive strength class’ to define concrete strengths; the
notation used gives the cylinder strength as well as the cube strength (see
Table 3). It is important to quote the compressive strength class in full to
avoid confusion.
Cover to reinforcement
The durability guidance given in BS 8500 is based on the assumption that the
minimum cover for durability is achieved. An allowance should be made in the
design for deviations from the minimum cover (Δc
dev
). This should be added to
the minimum cover to obtain the nominal cover.
T A Harrison BSc, PhD, CEng, MICE, FICT O Brooker BEng, CEng, MICE, MIStructE
Continues page 94
92
Table 1
Exposure Classes
Class
X0
XC1
XC2
XC3 &
XC4
XD1
XD2
XD3
XS1
XS2
XS3
XF1
XF2
XF3
XF4
Class description
For concrete without reinforcement or
embedded metal where there is no significant
freeze/thaw, abrasion or chemical attack.
Dry or permanently wet.
Wet, rarely dry.
Moderate humidity or cyclic wet and dry.
Moderate humidity.
Wet, rarely dry.
Cyclic wet and dry.
Exposed to airborne salt but not in direct
contact with sea water.
Permanently submerged.
Tidal, splash and spray zones.
Moderate water saturation without
deicing agent.
Moderate water saturation with deicing agent.
High water saturation without deicing agent.
High water saturation with deicing agent
or sea water
d
.
Informative example applicable to the United Kingdom
Unreinforced concrete surfaces inside structures. Unreinforced concrete completely buried in soil
classed as AC1 and with hydraulic gradiant not greater than 5. Unreinforced concrete permanently
submerged in nonaggressive water. Unreinforced concrete in cyclic wet and dry conditions not
subject to abrasion, freezing or chemical attack.
NOTE: For reinforced concrete, use at least XC1.
Reinforced and prestressed concrete surfaces inside enclosed structures except areas of structures
with high humidity. Reinforced and prestressed concrete surfaces permanently submerged in
nonaggressive water.
Reinforced and prestressed concrete completely buried in soil classed as AC1 and with a hydraulic
gradient not greater than 5. For other situations see ‘chemical attack’ section below.
External reinforced and prestressed concrete surfaces sheltered from, or exposed to, direct rain.
Reinforced and prestressed concrete surfaces inside structures with high humidity (e.g. poorly
ventilated, bathrooms, kitchens). Reinforced and prestressed concrete surfaces exposed to alternate
wetting and drying.
Concrete surfaces exposed to airborne chlorides. Parts of structures exposed to occasional or slight
chloride conditions.
Reinforced and prestressed concrete surfaces totally immersed in water containing chlorides
b
.
Reinforced and prestressed concrete surfaces directly affected by deicing salts or spray containing
deicing salts (e.g. walls; abutments and columns within 10 m of the carriageway; parapet edge
beams and buried structures less than 1 m below carriageway level, pavements and car park slabs).
External reinforced and prestressed concrete surfaces in coastal areas.
Reinforced and prestressed concrete completely submerged and remaining saturated,
e.g. concrete below midtide level
b
.
Reinforced and prestressed concrete surfaces in the upper tidal zones and the splash and
spray zones
c
.
Vertical concrete surfaces such as facades and columns exposed to rain and freezing. Nonvertical
concrete surfaces not highly saturated, but exposed to freezing and to rain or water.
Elements such as parts of bridges, which would otherwise be classified as XF1 but which are
exposed to deicing salts either directly or as spray or runoff.
Horizontal concrete surfaces, such as parts of buildings, where water accumulates and which are
exposed to freezing. Elements subjected to frequent splashing with water and exposed to freezing.
Horizontal concrete surfaces, such as roads and pavements, exposed to freezing and to deicing
salts either directly or as spray or runoff. Elements subjected to frequent splashing with water
containing deicing agents and exposed to freezing.
a The moisture condition relates to that in the concrete cover to reinforcement or other embedded
metal but, in many cases, conditions in the concrete cover can be taken as being that of the
surrounding environment. This might not be the case if there is a barrier between the concrete and
its environment.
b Reinforced and prestressed concrete elements, where one surface is immersed in water containing
chlorides and another is exposed to air, are potentially a more severe condition, especially where the
dry side is at a high ambient temperature. Specialist advice should be sought where necessary, to
develop a specification that is appropriate to the actual conditions likely to be encountered.
c Exposure XS3 covers a range of conditions. The most extreme conditions are in the spray zone. The
least extreme is in the tidal zone where conditions can be similar to those in XS2. The
recommendations given take into account the most extreme UK conditions within this class.
d It is not normally necessary to classify in the XF4 exposure class those parts of structures located in
the United Kingdom which are in frequent contact with the sea.
2
Corrosion induced by carbonation (XC classes)
a
(Where concrete containing reinforcement or other embedded metal is exposed to air and moisture.)
Corrosion induced by chlorides other than from sea water (XD classes)
a
(Where concrete containing reinforcement or other embedded metal is subject to contact with water containing chlorides, including deicing salts,
from sources other than from sea water.)
Corrosion induced by chlorides from sea water (XS classes)
a
(Where concrete containing reinforcement or other embedded metal is subject to contact with chlorides from sea water or air carrying salt originating from sea water.)
Freeze/thaw attack (XF classes)
(Where concrete is exposed to significant attack from freeze/thaw cycles whilst wet.)
Chemical attack (ACEC classes)
(Where concrete is exposed to chemical attack.) Note: BS 85001 refers to ACEC classes rather than XA classes used in BS EN 2061
No risk of corrosion or attack (XO class)
Key
92
How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2
933
Table 2
Selected
a
recommendations for normalweight reinforced concrete quality for combined exposure classes and cover to reinforcement for at least a
50year intended working life and 20 mm maximum aggregate size
Exposure conditions Cement/
combination
designations
b
Nominal cover to reinforcement
d
Typical example Primary Secondary
15 +Dc
dev
20 +Dc
dev
25 +Dc
dev
30 +Dc
dev
35 +Dc
dev
40 +Dc
dev
45 +Dc
dev
50 +Dc
dev
Strength class
c
, maximum w/c ratio, minimum cement or combination
content (kg/m
3
), and equivalent designated concrete (where applicable)
Recommended that this exposure is not applied to reinforced concrete
Internal mass
concrete
Internal elements
(except humid
locations)
Buried concrete
in AC1 ground
conditions
e
Vertical surface
protected from
direct rainfall
Exposed vertical
surfaces
Exposed horizontal
surfaces
Elements subject
to airborne
chlorides
Car park decks and
areas subject to
deicing spray
Vertical elements
subject to deicing
spray and freezing
Car park decks,
ramps and external
areas subject to
freezing and
deicing salts
Exposed vertical
surfaces near coast
Exposed horizontal
surfaces near coast
X0
___
XC1
XC2
XC3
&
XC4
XD1
f
XD3
f
XS1
f
___
AC1
___
XF1
XF3
___
___
XF2
XF4
XF4 (air
entrained)
XF4
XF1
XF3 (air
entrained)
All
All
All
All except IVB
All except IVB
All except IVB
All except IVB
All
IIBV, IIIA
CEM I, IIA,
IIBS, SRPC
IIIB, IVBV
IIBV, IIIA
CEM I, IIA,
IIBS, SRPC
IIIB, IVBV
CEM I, IIA,
IIBS, SRPC
IIBV, IIIA, IIIB
CEM I, IIA,
IIBS, SRPC
IIBV, IIIA
IIIB
CEM I, IIA,
IIBS, SRPC
C20/25,
0.70, 240 or
RC20/25
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
<<<
___
C40/50,
0.45, 340 or
RC40/50
C40/50,
0.45, 340 or
RC40/50
C40/50,0.45,
340
g
or
RC40/50XF
g
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
<<<
C25/30,
0.65, 260 or
RC25/30
C30/37,
0.55, 300
or RC30/37
C30/37,
0.55, 300
or RC30/37
<<<
C32/40,
0.55, 300
plus air
g,h
C40/50,
0.45, 360
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
<<<
<<<
C28/35,
0.60, 280 or
RC28/35
C28/35,
0.60, 280 or
RC28/35
<<<
C28/35,
0.60, 280
plus air
g,h
or PAV2
C32/40,
0.55, 320
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
See
BS 8500
See
BS 8500
C32/40,
0.40, 380
See
BS 8500
<<<
<<<
C25/30,
0.65, 260 or
RC25/30
<<<
<<<
C25/30,
0.60, 280
plus air
g, h, j
or PAV1
C28/35,
0.60, 300
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
___
C35/45,
0.45, 360
C32/40,
0.45, 360
C25/30,
0.50, 340
C40/50,
0.45, 360
g
<<<
<<<
<<<
<<<
<<<
<<<
<<<
C35/45,
0.40, 380
See
BS 8500
C32/40,
0.40, 380
C35/45,
0.40, 380
See
BS 8500
C32/40,
0.40, 380
See
BS 8500
C28/35,
0.40, 380
g, h
C32/40,
0.50, 340
C28/35,
0.50, 340
C25/30,
0.50, 340
<<<
<<<
<<<
<<<
<<<
<<<
<<<
<<<
C32/40,
0.45, 360
C40/50,
0.40, 380
C28/35,
0.45, 360
C32/40,
0.45, 360
C40/50,
0.40, 380
C32/40
0.45, 360
C40/50,
0.40, 380
g
C28/35
0.45, 360
g, h
<<<
C25/30,
0.55, 320
C25/30,
0.55, 320
<<<
<<<
<<<
<<<
<<<
<<<
<<<
<<<
C28/35,
0.50, 340
C35/45,
0.45, 360
C25/30,
0.50, 340
C32/40,
0.50, 340
C35/45,
0.45, 360
C32/40,
0.50, 340
<<<
C28/35,
0.50, 340
g, h
<<<
<<<
<<<
<<<
___
Not recommended
<<< Indicates that concrete
quality in cell to the left
should not be reduced
Key
a This table comprises a selection of common exposure class combinations.
Requirements for other sets of exposure classes, e.g. XD2, XS2 and XS3 should
be derived from BS 85001: 2006, Annex A.
b See BS 85002, Table 1. (CEM I is Portland cement, IIA to IVB are cement combinations.)
c For prestressed concrete the minimum strength class should be C28/35.
d Dc
dev
is an allowance for deviations.
e For sections less than 140 mm thick refer to BS 8500.
f Also adequate for exposure class XC3/4.
g Freeze/thaw resisting aggregates should be specified.
h Air entrained concrete is required.
j This option may not be suitable for areas subject to
severe abrasion.
93
BS 8500 for building structures
94
Broad
designation
b
CEM I
SRPC
IIA
IIBS
IIBV
IIB+SR
IIIA
d, e
IIIA+SR
e
IIIB
e, g
IIIB+SR
e
IVBV
Composition
Portland cement
Sulfateresisting Portland cement
Portland cement with 6–20% of fly
ash, ground granulated blastfurnace
slag, limestone, or 6–10% silica
fume
c
Portland cement with 21–35%
ground granulated blastfurnace slag
Portland cement with 25–35% fly ash
Portland cement with 25–35% fly ash
Portland cement with 36–65%
ground granulated blastfurnace slag
Portland cement with 36–65%
ground granulated blastfurnace slag
with additional requirements that
enhance sulfate resistance
Portland cement with 66–80%
ground granulated blastfurnace slag
Portland cement with 66–80%
ground granulated blastfurnace slag
with additional requirements that
enhance sulfate resistance
Portland cement with 36–55% fly ash
Cement/combination
types (BS 8500)
CEM I
SRPC
CEM II/AL, CEM II/ALL,
CIIAL, CIIALL,
CEM II/AS, CIIAS
CEM II/AV, CIIAV
CEM II/A–D
CEM II/BS, CIIBS
CEM II/BV, CIIBV
CEM II/BV+SR,
CIIBV+SR
CEM III/A
,
, CIIIA
CEM III/A+SR
f
,
CIII/A+SR
f
CEM III/B, CIIIB
CEM III/B+SR
f
, CIIIB+SR
f
CEM IV/B(V), CIVB
Table 4
Cement and combination type
a
4
Air content
Where air entrainment is required for exposure classes XF3 and XF4
the minimum air content by volume of 3.0%, 3.5% or 5.5% should
be specified for 40 mm, 20 mm and 10 mm maximum aggregate size
respectively.
Freeze/thaw aggregates
For exposure conditions XF3 and XF4 freeze/thaw resisting
aggregates should be specified. The producer is then obliged to
conform to the requirements given in BS 8500–2: 2006, Cl.4.3.
Aggressive ground
Where plain or reinforced concrete is in contact with the ground
further checks are required to ensure durability. An aggressive
chemical environment for concrete class (ACEC class) should be
assessed for the site. BRE Special Digest 1
2
gives guidance on the
assessment of the ACEC class and this is normally carried out as part
of the interpretive reporting for a ground investigation. Knowing the
ACEC class, a design chemical class (DC class) can be obtained from
Table 5.
For designated concretes, an appropriate foundation concrete (FND
designation) can be selected using Table 6; the cover should be
determined from Table 2 for the applicable exposure classes. A FND
concrete has the strength class of C25/30, therefore, where a higher
strength is required a designed concrete should be specified. For
designed concretes, the concrete producer should be advised of the
DCclass (see section on specification).
C20/25 RC20/25 C25
C25/30 RC25/30 C30
C28/35 RC28/35 C35
C30/37 RC30/37 –
C32/40 RC32/40 C40
C35/45 RC35/45 C45
C40/50 RC40/50 C50
C45/55 – –
C50/60 – C60
NOTE: Refer to BS 85001: 2006, Table A.20 for full list of Compressive strength classes.
Table 3
Compressive strength class for normal and heavyweight concrete
Key
a There are a number of cements and combinations not listed in this table that may be specified for
certain specialist applications. See BRE Special Digest 1
2
. for the sulfateresisting characteristics of other
cements and combinations.
b The use of these broad designations is sufficient for most applications. Where a more limited range of
cement or combinations types is required, select from the notations given in BS 85002:2006, Table 1.
c When IIA or IIAD is specified, CEM I and silica fume may be combined in the concrete mixer using the
kvalue concept; see BS EN 2061:200, 5.2.5.2.3.
d Where IIIA is specified, IIIA+SR may be used.
e Inclusive of low early strength option (see BS EN 1974 and the “L” classes in BS 85002:2006, Table A.1.).
f “+SR” indicates additional restrictions related to sulfate resistance. See BS 85002:2006, Table 1,
footnote D.
g Where IIIB is specified, IIIB+SR may be used.
Explanation of the compressive strength class notation
A Includes heavyweight concrete
B Minimum characteristic 150 mm
diameter by 300 mm cylinder
strength, N/mm2
C Minimum characteristic cube
strength, N/mm2
Example Compressive Designated Previous Grade
strength classes concrete of concrete
(BS 8500) (BS 8500) (BS 5328
3
& BS 8110
5
)
C 40/50
‘C’ for normal
weight
concrete
A
‘LC’ for
lightweight
concrete
Cylinder
strength
B
Cube
strength
C
Eurocode 2
4
recommends that Δc
dev
is taken as 10 mm, unless the
fabrication is subjected to a quality assurance ystem where it is
permitted to reduce Δc
dev
to 5 mm, or 0 mm if the element can be
rejected if it is out of tolerance (e.g. precast elements).
Cement types and minimum cement content
Table 4 may be used to understand the cement/combination
designations. It should be noted from Table 2 that the strength,
water/cement ratio and minimum cement content may vary depending
on the cement type used. In the UK, all cement/combinations are
available (except SRPC), although in most concrete production plants
either ground granulated blastfurnace slag or flyash (pfa) is available; not
both. When using a designated concrete (see section below), it is not
necessary to specify the types of cement/combinations.
94
How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2
955
Fire design
Having selected concrete cover and strength to meet the durability
recommendations of BS 8500, the nominal cover should be checked
in accordance with Eurocode 2
4
, for fire cover.
Concrete cast against uneven surfaces
The nominal cover (i.e. minimum cover plus fixing tolerance) should
be a minimum of 75 mm for concrete cast directly against the earth
and 50 mm for concrete cast against blinding.
Abrasion
BS 8500 does not contain abrasion classes; instead reference should be
made to BS 82042
6
or Concrete Society Technical Report 34
7
. Table 7
summarises the factors that affect the abrasion resistance of floors.
Specification
Method of specifying
There are various methods of specifying concrete to BS 8500
(see Table 8). The most popular are designated and designed.
BS 8500 also introduces a new method ‘proprietary concrete’.
The specifier
Figures 1 and 2 show standard specification forms produced by the
Quarry Products Association for designated and designed concretes
8
.
Similar tables are included in the National Structural Concrete
Specification
9
(NSCS). In BS 8500 the ‘specifier’ is the person or body
responsible for the final compilation of the technical requirements,
called the specification, which is passed to the concrete producer.
This will generally be the contractor, however, the designer will want
to ensure their requirements are incorporated and this will normally
be through their own specification for the works (e.g. with the
NSCS). Figures 1 and 2 have been annotated to indicate which
information is typically provided by the designer and contractor. The
designer should require that any reported nonconformities are
passed to them for assessment.
Consistence
The term ‘workability’ has been replaced by the term ‘consistence’ and a
series of consistence classes has been introduced. Table 9 gives the
slump and flow classes and the likely target slump/flow.
Chloride Class
Concrete that is to be prestressed, pretensioned or heat cured
should normally be specified as chloride class Cl0,10. Reinforced
concrete should be specified as class Cl0,40 except for concrete
made with cement conforming to BS 4027
10
(SRPC), which should be
specified as class Cl0,20. Posttensioned elements in an internal
building environment may also be specifed as class Cl0,10.
Continues page 98
AC1s, AC1 DC1 DC1
AC2s, ACZ DC2 DC2
AC2z DC2z DC2z
AC3s DC3 DC3
AC3z DC3z DC3z
AC3 DC3 Refer to BS 8500
AC4s DC4 DC4
AC4z DC4z DC4z
AC4 DC4 Refer to BS 8500
AC4ms DC4m DC4m
AC4m DC4m Refer to BS 8500
AC5 DC4
f
DC4
f
AC5z DC4z
f
DC4z/1
f
AC5m DC4m
f
DC4m
f
Key
a Where the hydrostatic head of groundwater is greater than five times the section width, refer to BS 8500.
b For guidance on precast products see Special Digest 1
2
.
c For structural performance outside these values refer to BS 8500.
d For section widths < 140 mm refer to BS 8500.
e Where any surface attack is not acceptable e.g. with friction piles, refer to BS 8500.
f This should include APM3 (surface protection), where practicable, as one of the APMs; refer to BS 8500.
Table 5
Selection of the DCclass and the number of Addition Protection
Measures (APMs) where the hydrostatic head of groundwater is not more
than five times the section width
a, b, c, d, e
ACECclass
(Aggressive
Chemical
Environment for
Concrete class)
DCclass
Intended working life
At least 100 years At least 50 years
DC1 RC 25/30
DC2 FND2
DC2z FND2z
DC3 FND3
DC3z FND3z
DC4 FND4
DC4z FND4z
DC4m FND4m
NOTE
Strength class for all FND concrete is C25/30.
Table 6
Guidance on selecting designated concrete for reinforced concrete
foundations
DCClass Appropriate Designated Concrete
95
BS 8500 for building structures
96 6
Factor Effect
Power floating Power finishing and, in particular, repeated power trowelling is a significant factor in creating abrasion
resistance, however, excessive repetitions of the process do not necessarily further enhance performance.
Curing Prompt and efficient curing is essential in order to retain sufficient water in the surface zone to complete
hydration and the development of concrete strength at and close to the surface.
Cement content Cement content should not be less than 325 kg/m
3
. Cement contents above 360 kg/m
3
are unlikely to
enhance abrasion resistance and excessive cement content can impair the power finishing process.
Water/cement ratio Water/cement ratio is of great importance. It should not exceed 0.55. Reducing to 0.50 is likely to increase
abrasion resistance but lowering further is unlikely to give further enhancement.
Aggregates Coarse aggregate usually has no direct effect on abrasion resistance, except in floors in very aggressive
environments where the surface is expected to be worn away. Coarse and fine aggregates should not contain
soft or friable materials.
Dry shake finishes Dry shake finishes can be used to enhance the surface properties in high abrasion locations.
Table 7
Factors affecting the abrasion resistance of concrete floors
BS 85001 reference
4.2.2a)
4.2.2b)
4.2.2c)
4.2.2d)
4.2.3
Exchange of information
BS EN 2061, 7.1
5.1a)
5.1b)
5.1 & BS EN 2061, 7.1
5.2 & BS EN 2061, 7.2
Requirement
Concrete designation
Maximum aggregate size when other
than 20 mm
Consistence
(Ring the class required when other than
the default classes of S3 for the GEN, FND
and RC series and S2 for the PAV series. Use
a separate column for different consistence
with the same designated concrete)
Other (specify)
Additional requirements
Total volume required
Anticipated peak delivery rate
Any access limitations
Intended method of placing,
e.g. pumping, and finishing, e.g. power
floating, the concrete
Where identity testing is routine:
Type of test
Volume of concrete in assessment
Number of tests on this volume
Whether a nonaccredited laboratory
will be used
Other information from the specifier
to the producer
Information required from
the producer
Schedule
FND2z
––
S1, S2, S3, S4
F2, F3, F4, F5
––
48 m
3
6 m
3
/day
Skip +
tamped
N/A
––
––
RC25/30
––
S1, S2, S3, S4
F2, F3, F4, F5
––
1200 m
3
18 m
3
/hr
Pumping
+ float
N/A
––
––
RC32/40
10
S1, S2, S3, S4
F2, F3, F4, F5
––
72 m
3
6 m
3
/day
Skip +
tamped
N/A
––
––
S1, S2, S3, S4
F2, F3, F4, F5
Schedule for the specification requirements of designated concretes for use on contract
Contract Title: New Office
Contract period: June  Dec ‘04
Figure 1
Example specification of Designated Concrete
A There is no need to cite BS EN 2061 as BS 85002 has a clause that requires conformity to BS EN 2061.
D
D
D C
C
C
C
C
C
C
D
D
D C
C
C
C
C
C
C
O
The concretes below shall be supplied as Designated Concretes in accordance with
this specification and the relevant clauses of BS 85002
A
Designer specifies
concrete designation,
maximum aggregate
size and any
additional
requirements
Contractor specifies
consistence, any
additional
requirements and
completes exchange
of information
section
Red text
Example
specification
KEY
D
C
96
How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2
977
Figure 2
Example specification of Designed Concrete
Table 8
Methods of specifying concrete
BS 85001
reference
4.3.2a)
4.3.2b)
4.3.2c)
4.3.2d) &
4.3.3a)
4.3.2e)
4.3.2f)
4.3.2g) & h)
4.3.2i)
4.3.2
Note 2
4.3.3b)
to n)
BS EN
2061, 7.1
5.1a)
5.1b)
5.1 & BS EN
2061, 7.1
5.2 & BS EN
206
1, 7.2
Requirement
Concrete reference, if any
Compressive strength class
For sulfate resisting concrete, design chemical class
For other concretes, limiting values of composition:
Maximum w/c ratio
Minimum cement/combination content, kg/m
3
Cement or combination types
(delete those not permitted)
Other special property, e.g. white, low heat, +SR
(specify)
Maximum aggregate size, mm
Chloride class (ring the one required)
Prestressed or heat cured reinforced concrete
Reinforced
B
Unreinforced with no embedded metal
For lightweight and heavyweight concrete,
target density
Consistence (Ring the class required.
Use separate columns for the same basic
concretes with different consistence)
Other (specify)
UKAS or equivalent accredited third party product
conformity certification (delete if not required)
Additional requirements
Volume required
Anticipated peak delivery rate
Any access limitations
Intended method of placing, e.g. pumping, and
finishing, e.g. power floating, the concrete
Where identity testing is routine:
Type of test
Volume of concrete in assessment
Number of tests on this volume
Whether a nonaccredited laboratory will be used
Other information from the specifier to the
producer
Information required from the producer
Schedule
Pads
C28/35
DC
2z
CEM 1, SRPC,
IIA, IIB
IIIA, IIIB, IVB
20
Cl 0,10
RC
Cl 1,0
S1, S2, S3, S4
F2, F3, F4, F5
Yes
48 m
3
6 m
3
/day
Skip +
tamped
N/A
––
––
Slab
C25/30
DC
0.70
240
CEM 1, SRPC,
IIA, IIB
IIIA, IIIB, IVB
20
Cl 0,10
RC
Cl 1,0
S1, S2, S3, S4
F2, F3, F4, F5
Yes
1200 m
3
18 m
3
/hr
Pumping
+ float
N/A
––
––
Cols
C32/40
DC
0.55
300
CEM 1, SRPC,
IIA, IIB
IIIA, IIIB, IVB
10
Cl 0,10
RC
Cl 1,0
S1, S2, S3, S4
F2, F3, F4, F5
Yes
72 m
3
6 m
3
/day
Skip +
tamped
N/A
––
––
DC
CEM 1, SRPC,
IIA, IIB
IIIA, IIIB, IVB
Cl 0,10
RC
Cl 1,0
S1, S2, S3, S4
F2, F3, F4, F5
Yes
Schedule for the specification requirements of designed concretes for use on contract
Contract Title: New Office
Contract period: June  Dec ‘04
The concretes below shall be supplied as designed concretes in accordance with this specification
and the relevant clauses of BS 85002
A
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
C
D C
C
C
C
C
C
A There is no need to cite BS EN 2061 as BS 85002 has a clause that requires conformity to BS EN 2061.
B Where RC is ringed, the chloride class shall be Cl 0.40 except where SRPC is used. In this case the chloride class shall be Cl 0,20.
Exchange of information
O
O O O
O
x x x x
O
BS 8500 BS 5328 (superseded by BS 8500 1 Dec 2003)
Designated concrete Designated mix
Designed concrete Designed mix
Prescribed concrete Prescribed mix
Standardized prescribed concrete Standard mix
Proprietary concrete No equivalent
Designer specifies
compressive strength
class, design chemical
class, maximum
water/cement ratio,
minimum cement
content, cement or
combination types
(unless design
chemical class is
specified), maximum
aggregate size,
chloride class, target
density (excluding
normal weight
concrete),
requirement for
third party product
conformity
certification
(recommended)
and any additional
requirements
Contractor specifies
consistence,
any additional
requirements and
completes exchange
of information
section
Red text
Example
Specification
KEY
D
C
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
C
D C
C
C
C
C
C
97
BS 8500 for building structures
98
Conformity
Under BS 8500, the concrete producer is now required to follow a
formal procedure called ‘conformity’ to verify that the concrete is in
accordance with the specification. It is, therefore, recommended
that the concrete supplier should have third party certification.
Where this is not adopted, the specifier is advised to adopt
adequate identity testing to ensure the concrete is as specified.
Identity testing
The specifier is responsible for organising any identity testing, which
is in all but in name acceptance testing. Identity testing can include
strength, consistence and air content. There are a number of
situations where it is recommended:
■ where the producer does not hold third party certification
■ in cases of doubt
■ for critical elements, e.g. high strength columns
■ for spot checks on the producer.
Exchange of information
To enable the concrete producer to design and produce a suitable
concrete, certain information must be provided in addition to the
specification, e.g. where the concrete needs to be pumped or a high
quality finish is required.
References
1 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. BS 8500: Concrete – Complementary British Standard to BS EN 206–1. BS1, 2006.
2 BUILDING RESEARCH ESTABLISHMENT. BRE Special Digest 1 – Concrete in aggressive ground (3rd edition). BRE, 2005.
3 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. BS 5328: Concrete, BSI. (Withdrawn by BSI on 1 December 2003).
4 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. BS EN 1992, Eurocode 2: Design of concrete structures. BSI (4 parts).
5 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. BS 81101: The structural use of concrete – Part 1: Code of practice for design and construction. BSI, 1997.
6 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. BS 82042: Screeds, bases and insitu floorings, Part 2: Concrete wearing surfaces – Code of practice. BSI, 1999.
7 THE CONCRETE SOCIETY. Technical report 34: Concrete industrial ground floors. The Concrete Society, 2003.
8 QUARRY PRODUCTS ASSOCIATION. Visit the Webpage www.qpa.org/pro_rea.
9 CONSTRUCT. National structural concrete specification for building construction. Construct, 2004.
10 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. BS 4027: Specification for sulfate–resisting Portland cement. BSI, 1996.
Flow class Target flow (mm)
F2 380
F3 450
F4 520
F5 590
Table 9b
Consistence flow classes and likely target values
Slump class Target slump (mm)
S1 20
S2 70
S3 130
S4 190
Table 9a
Consistence slump classes and likely target values
98
BS 8500 for building structures
Members of the Steering Group
John Mason Alan Baxter & Associates (Chairman)
Stuart Alexander WSP Group plc
Pal Chana British Cement Association
Charles Goodchild The Concrete Centre
Tony Jones Arup
Andy Lyle NRM Consultants
Richard Moss Formerly of Powell Tolner Associates
Nary Narayanan Clark Smith Partnership
Richard Shipman DCLG
Robert Vollum Imperial College, University of London
Russ Wolstenholme WS Atkins & DTI Project Ofﬁcer
Rod Webster Concrete Innovation and Design
Members of the Concrete Industry Eurocode 2 Group (CIEG)
John Moore Consultant (Chairman)
Clive Budge British Precast Concrete Federation
Pal Chana British Cement Association
John Clarke The Concrete Society
Colin Cleverly Construct
Charles Goodchild The Concrete Centre
Haig Gulvanessian BRE
Geoff Harding DCLG
Tom Harrison Quarry Products Association
Tony Jones Arup
John Mason Alan Baxter & Associates
Richard Moss Formerly of Powell Tolner Associates
Nary Narayanan Clark Smith Partnership
Richard Shipman DCLG
Martin Southcott Consultant
Russ Wolstenholme W S Atkins
Rod Webster Concrete Innovation and Design
CCIP006
Published December 2006
ISBN 1984818471
Price Group P
© The Concrete Centre
Riverside House, 4 Meadows Business Park,
Station Approach, Blackwater, Camberley, Surrey, GU17 9AB
Tel: +44 (0)1276 606800 Fax: +44 (0)1276 606801
www.concretecentre.com
CI/Sfb
UDC
624.012.4.001.63
How to Design Concrete Structures using Eurocode 2
Dr Andrew Bond is a UK delegate on the CEN/TC 250/SC7
committee responsible for Eurocode 7, the geotechnical Eurocode,
and is the ICE’s representative on the National Strategy Committee
for implementation of Eurocodes.
Owen Brooker is Senior Structural Engineer for The Concrete Centre
where he promotes efﬁcient concrete design through guidance
documents, presentations and the national helpline.
Andrew Harris is a former Associate Dean of Kingston University
and has prepared publications and gives presentations on Eurocode 7,
the geotechnical Eurocode.
Prof Tom Harrison is chairman of the BSI concrete committee. He
is technical consultant to the QPA–BRMCA and a visiting industrial
professor at the University of Dundee.
Dr Richard Moss is formerly of Building Research Establishment and
is author of a number of their technical publications.
Prof R S Narayanan in past Chairman of CEN/TC 250/SC2, the
committee responsible for structural Eurocodes on concrete. He is
consultant to Clark Smith Partnership.
Rod Webster of Concrete Innovation and Design is an expert in the
design of tall concrete buildings and in advanced analytical methods.
This publication brings together in one place “How to...”
guidance for the design, speciﬁcation and detailing of a broad
range of concrete elements.
This publication take the practising engineer through the process of
designing to Eurocode 2 and includes commentary, ﬂow charts, data
tables and design aids to enable designers to apply Eurocode 2 quickly
and conﬁdently to the design of concrete structures.
Foreword
The introduction of European standards to UK construction is a signiﬁcant event. The ten design standards, known as the Eurocodes, will affect all design and construction activities as current British Standards for design are due to be withdrawn in 2010 at the latest. BS 8110, however, has an earlier withdrawal date of March 2008. The aim of this publication is to make the transition to Eurocode 2: Design of concrete structures as easy as possible by drawing together in one place key information and commentary required for the design and detailing of typical concrete elements. The cement and concrete industry recognised that a substantial effort was required to ensure that the UK design profession would be able to use Eurocode 2 quickly, effectively, efﬁciently and with conﬁdence. With support from government, consultants and relevant industry bodies, the Concrete Industry Eurocode 2 Group (CIEG) was formed in 1999 and this Group has provided the guidance for a coordinated and collaborative approach to the introduction of Eurocode 2. Part of the output of the CIEG project was the technical content for 7 of the 11 chapters in this publication. The remaining chapters have been developed by The Concrete Centre.
Acknowledgements
The content of Chapters 1 and 3 to 8 were produced as part of the project Eurocode 2: transition from UK to European concrete design standards. This project was part funded by the DTI under the Partners in Innovation scheme. The lead partner was British Cement Association. The work was carried out under the guidance of the Concrete Industry Eurocode 2 Group and overseen by a Steering Group of the CIEG (members are listed on inside back cover). Particular thanks are due to Robin Whittle, technical editor to the CEN/TC 250/SC2 committee (the committee responsible for structural Eurocodes), who has reviewed and commented on the contents. Thanks are also due to John Kelly and Chris Clear who have contributed to individual chapters. Gillian Bond, Issy Harvey, Kevin Smith and the designers at Media and Design Associates and Michael Burbridge Ltd have also made essential contributions to the production of this publication.
Published by The Concrete Centre Riverside House, 4 Meadows Business Park, Station Approach, Blackwater, Camberley, Surrey GU17 9AB Tel: +44 (0)1276 606800 Fax: +44 (0)1276 606801 www.concretecentre.com CCIP–006 Published December 2006 ISBN 190481841 Price Group P © The Concrete Centre. Joint copyright with British Cement Association for Chapters 1 and 3 to 8. Permission to reproduce extracts from British Standards is granted by British Standards Institution. British Standards can be obtained from BSI Customer Services, 389 Chiswick High Road, London W4 4AL. Tel: +44 (0)20 8996 9001 email: cservices@bsiglobal.com CCIP publications are produced on behalf of the Cement and Concrete Industry Publications Forum – an industry initiative to publish technical guidance in support of concrete design and construction. CCIP publications are available from the Concrete Bookshop at www.concrete bookshop.com Tel: +44(0)7004607777
All advice or information from The Concrete Centre (TCC), British Cement Association (BCA) and Quarry Products Association (QPA) is intended for those who will evaluate the signiﬁcance and limitations of its contents and take responsibility for its use and application. No liability (including that for negligence) for any loss resulting from such advice or information is accepted by TCC, BCA and OPA or their subcontractors, suppliers or advisors. Readers should note that publications from TCC, BCA and OPA are subject to revision from time to time and should therefore ensure that they are in possession of the latest version. Part of this publication has been produced following a contract placed by the Department for Trade and Industry (DTI); the views expressed are not necessarily those of the DTI.
Printed by Michael Burbridge Ltd, Maidenhead.
How to Design Concrete Structures using Eurocode 2
Contents
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Introduction to Eurocodes Getting started Slabs Beams Columns Foundations Flat slabs Deﬂection calculations Retaining walls 1 9 17 25 33 43 51 59 67 79 91
10. Detailing 11. BS 8500 for building structures
.
In particular it introduces Eurocode: Basis of structural design2 and Eurocode 1: Actions on structures3 and guides the designer through the process of determining the design values for actions on a structure. MIStructE The Eurocode family This chapter shows how to use Eurocode 21 with the other Eurocodes. . Throughout this publication it is assumed that the UK National Annexes will be used. Eurocode 2 should result in more economic structures than BS 8110. Table 1 details which existing standards relating to concrete design will be replaced by the new Eurocodes. During the implementation period it is recommended that existing standards are considered for use where the European standards have not yet been issued. The Eurocodes are logical and organised to avoid repetition. It also gives a brief overview of the significant differences between the Eurocodes and BS 81104. Each country is required to publish a Eurocode with a national title page and forward but the original text of the Eurocode must appear as produced by CEN as the main body of the document. so what benefits will there be? 1. CEng. 3. The new Eurocodes are claimed to be the most technically advanced codes in the world. The many benefits of using Eurocode 2 are summarised below. The development of the Eurocodes started in 1975. Benefits of using Eurocode 2 Learning to use the new Eurocodes will require time and effort on behalf of the designer. (which will be superseded) and includes a glossary of Eurocode terminology. 2. Eurocode 2 is less restrictive than existing codes.How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2 1. 7. 4. They are produced by the European Committee for Standardization (CEN). and will replace existing national standards in 28 countries. A National Annex (NA) can be included at the back of the document (see Figure 2). Use of the Eurocodes will provide more opportunity for designers to work throughout Europe. MICE. since then they have evolved significantly and are now claimed to be the most technically advanced structural codes in the world. In Europe all public works must allow the Eurocodes to be used. Introduction to Eurocodes R S Narayanan FREng O Brooker BEng. There are ten Eurocodes covering all the main structural materials (see Figure 1). 6. 5. Eurocode 2 is more extensive than existing codes.
Geotechnical design – Ground BS 5930 investigation and testing Design of structures for – earthquake resistance (6 parts) 2 . 2 and 3 BS 8110: Part 1. frequent and quasipermanent. a nominal value may be used. 2. the correct title is Eurocode not Eurocode 0. It establishes principles and requirements for safety. The combination value (c 0 Qk) of an action is intended to take account of the reduced probability of the simultaneous occurrence of two or more variable actions. BS 8006.Table 3. The other representative values are combination. serviceability and durability Eurocode: Basis of structural design This Eurocode underpins all structural design irrespective of the material of construction. (Note. Actions on structures BS EN 1992. Eurocode 2: Concrete BS EN 1993. The frequent value ( c 1 Qk) is such that it should be exceeded only for a short period of time and is used primarily for the serviceability limit states (SLS) and also the accidental ultimate limit state (ULS). 4.g. Identify all realistic actions. where there is insufficient data. Eurocode 1: Actions on structures Structural safety. Eurocode 3: Steel BS EN 1994. It also introduces new definitions (see Glossary) and symbols (see Tables 2a and 2b). which vary depending on the type of imposed load (see Table 3). persistent. which will be used throughout this publication to assist familiarity.2 and BS 8110: Part 2. Identify the design situation (e. There is no equivalent British Standard for Eurocode: Basis of structural design and the corresponding information has traditionally been replicated in each of the material Eurocodes. The quasipermanent value (c 2 Qk) may be exceeded for a considerable period of time. selfweight and imposed loads Actions on structures exposed to fire Snow loads Wind actions Thermal actions Actions during execution Accidental actions Traffic loads on bridges Actions induced by cranes and machinery Silos and tanks General rules for buildings Fire resistance of concrete structures Bridges Liquidretaining and containment structures Geotechnical design – General rules Superseded standards BS 8110: Part 1 – section 2 BS 6399: Part 1 and BS 648 – BS 6399: Part 2 BS 6399: Part 3 – – – BD 37/88 – – BS 8110: Parts 1. The principal representative value is the characteristic value and this can be determined statistically or. BS 8008 & BS 8081 Combinations of actions In the Eurocodes the term ‘combination of actions’ is specifically used for the definition of the magnitude of actions to be used when a limit state is under the influence of different actions. Eurocode 4: Composite BS EN 1995. Eurocode 7: Geotechnical design Design and detailing BS EN 1998. Eurocode 5: Timber BS EN 1996. whilst partial factors for materials are prescribed in their relevant Eurocode. BS 8004.) The Eurocode uses a statistical approach to determine realistic values for actions that occur in combination with each other. A semiprobabilistic method is used to derive the c factors. Arrange the actions to produce the most critical conditions. Eurocode 6: Masonry BS EN 1999. serviceability and durability of structures. c 1 and c 2 respectively (see Figure 3). alternatively it may be considered as an average loading over time. 3. transient. It is used for the longterm affects at the SLS and also accidental and seismic ULS. A B C D D A: National title page B: National Foreword C: CEN title page D: Main text E: Main Annex(es) F: National Annex D D E F Table 1 Concrete related Eurocodes and their equivalent current standards Eurocode BS EN 1990 BS EN 1991–1–1 BS EN 1991–1–2 BS EN 1991–1–3 BS EN 1991–1–4 BS EN 1991–1–5 BS EN 1991–1–6 BS EN 1991–1–7 BS EN 1991–2 BS EN 1991–3 BS EN 1991–4 BS EN 1992–1–1 BS EN 1992–1–2 BS EN 1992–2 BS EN 1992–3 BS EN 1997–1 BS EN 1997–2 BS EN 1998 Title Basis of structural design Densities. section 4 BS 5400: Part 4 BS 8007 BS 6031. Eurocode: Basis of structural design BS EN 1991. Eurocode 8: Seismic design Geotechnical and seismic design Figure 2 Typical Eurocode layout Representative values For each variable action there are four representative values. Determine the partial factors (see below) for each applicable combination of actions. BS 8002. which are concerned with the arrangement of the variable actions to give the most unfavourable conditions and are given in the material Eurocodes. Partial factors for actions are given in this Eurocode. these are obtained by applying to the characteristic value the factors c 0 .How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2 Figure 1 The Eurocodes BS EN 1990. It should not be confused with ‘load cases’. Eurocode 9: Aluminium BS EN 1997. accidental). Further information on derivation of the c factors can be found in Appendix C of the Eurocode. The following process can be used to determine the value of actions used for analysis: 1.
10a) always applies).10b) will give the most structurally economical combination of actions.6 0.6 3 .6 0. with experience the designer will be able to determine this by inspection.7 1.7 Temperature (nonfire) in buildings (see BS EN 1991–1–5) 0. residential areas Category B: office areas Category C: congregation areas Category D: shopping areas Category E: storage areas Category F: traffic area.7 0.5 0 0. Expression (6. Introduction to Eurocodes Table 2a Selected symbols for Eurocode Symbol Gk Qk gG gQ c0 c1 c2 j Definition Characteristic value of permanent action Characteristic value of single variable action Partial factor for permanent action Partial factor for variable action Factor for combination value of a variable action Factor for frequent value of a variable action Factor for quasipermanent value of a variable action Combination factor for permanent actions Where there is only one variable action (e. STR Internal failure or excessive deformation of the structure or structural member.6 0. imposed load) in a combination.3 0. At first sight it appears that there is considerably more calculation required to determine the appropriate load combination. for a typical concrete frame building. Expression (6.10b) will normally apply when the permanent actions are not greater than 4.7 0.2 0.1) and other accompanying actions (Qk. vehicle weight < 30 kN Category H: roofs* Snow loads on buildings (see BS EN 1991–3) For sites located at altitude H > 1000 m above sea level For sites located at altitude H < 1000 m above sea level Wind loads on buildings (see BS EN 1991–1–4) Key *See also 1991–1–1: Clause 3.5 0. (6. Table 3) where Expression (6. frequent and quasipermanent. The accompanying action is always taken as the combination value.10a) and (6.10) or the less favourable of (6. it is necessary to identify the leading action (Qk.7 0.10a) and (6.7 0. For the purpose of this publication only the STR ultimate limit state will be considered.7 0. Expression (6.10b).2 0 0 0 Imposed loads in buildings (see BS EN 1991–1–1) Category A: domestic.5 times the variable actions (except for storage loads). Where there is more than one variable action in a combination.10) is always equal to or more conservative than the less favourable of Expressions (6. deflection is checked using the quasipermanent combination).9 0. GEO Failure due to excessive deformation of the ground. with the representative values that have the same titles.10b). however.2 Serviceability limit state There are three combinations of actions that can be used to check the serviceability limit states (see Tables 6 and 7).10b)) can be used provided the permanent actions are not greater than 4.8 0. the Eurocode defines three possible combinations. The Eurocode gives different combinations for each of these ultimate limit states. Category G: traffic area.5 times the variable actions (except for storage loads (category E.3 0.5 c1 0.1. Care should be taken not to confuse the SLS combinations of characteristic. The designer (for UK buildings) may use either (6.7 0.10a) and (6. 30 kN < vehicle weight < 160 kN 0. Therefore.5 0. Eurocode 2 indicates which combination should be used for which phenomenon (e. the magnitude of the actions can be obtained by multiplying them by the appropriate partial factors. FAT Fatigue failure of the structure or structural members.25 Gk + 1.i).0 0.7 0.5 Qk (derived from (Exp 6.10).5 0.7 0. which are given in Expressions (6. For persistent and transient design situations under the STR limit state.10b) of the Eurocode (see Tables 4 and 5). For members supporting one variable action the combination 1.5 0.3.2 0. Ultimate limit state The ultimate limit states are divided into the following categories: EQU Loss of equilibrium of the structure.3 0 0.g.5 c2 0.7 0.g. Table 2b Selected subscripts Subscript A c d E fi k R w y Definition Accidental situation Concrete Design Effect of action Fire Characteristic Resistance Shear reinforcement Yield strength Figure 3 Representative values of variable actions ⁵ Characteristic value of QK Instantaneous value of Q Combination value of c0 QK Frequent value of c1 QK Quasipermanent value of c2 QK Time Table 3 Action Recommended values of c factors for buildings (from UK National Annex) c0 0.
35 Gk a 0.1 Q k.sup and Gk. ultimate limit state – persistent and transient design situations (table A1.1b Qk 1. sup g G.i b Q k.1 g Q.8b Q k.j.5 c c 0.1 g Q.1 Q k.i c 2 .10b).1 Qk.10) Exp.10) or the less favourable of Expressions (6. inf G k .i g Q. i Qk.i c 2 . (6.1 c 0 .j.1 c 0 .1 b Values of c 2 are taken from UK NA (see Table 3) Gk a Gk a Gk a Key a Where the variation in permanent action is not considered significant Gk.inf Gk. j.35 Gk a 0.1 Q k. Gk.1b Qk 1.i 1.i = 0 d The value of j in the UK National Annex is 0.sup Gk.j.0 Gk a 1.j.10a) and (6. sup Gk .1 c 1.1 c 0 .5c Qk.j.10a) Exp.sup Gk. sup g G .35 Gk a Leading variable action Favourable Accompanying variable actions Main (if any) Others 1.sup and Gk.1 0. j .sup Gk. (6.5 c 0. (6. sup Gk .i b Q k.3 b Q k.0 Gk a 1.5 c c 0.inf may be taken as Gk Table 7 Example design combinations for deflection (quasipermanent) derived for typical UK reinforced concrete design Combination Permanent actions Unfavourable Office Shopping area Storage Variable action Leading 0.j. j.i c Where the accompanying load is favourable. serviceability limit states Combination Permanent actions Unfavourable Characteristic Frequent Quasipermanent Favourable Variable actions Leading Others Example of use in Eurocode 2 Gk.1 Qk.0 Gk a 1.inf may be taken as Gk b The value of c 0 can be obtained from Table NA A1.i g Q. (6.925 d x 1.1 1.10b) 1. derived for UK design. j .35 Gk a 1.inf Qk.j.35 Gk a 1.5 c 0. (6.5 c c 0.j.2 (B) Eurocode) Combination Expression reference Permanent actions Unfavourable Exp.10) Exp.i 1.10b) 1. j. j.0 Gk a 1.10) Exp. j.How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2 Table 4 Design values of actions.1 c 0 .i Note 1 Design for either Expression (6. (6.i Cracking – prestressed concrete Deflection 2 For values of c 0. sup Gk .1 c 2.5c Qk. inf g G .10a) Exp. j .1 Qk. g Q.1 c 0 .1 g Q.1 Qk. j . i Qk.1 Key a Where the variation in permanent action is not considered significant.6b Q k.sup and Gk. j . (6. ultimate limit state – persistent and transient design situations Combination Expression reference Permanent actions Unfavourable Combination of permanent and variable actions Exp.1 of the UK National Annex (reproduced here as Table 3) Table 6 Design values of actions. sup jg G. inf g G .j.j.925 d x 1.10b) Favourable Leading variable action Accompanying variable actions Main (if any) Others g G.5c Qk 1.inf Gk.i b Q k. j .1 0. variable and accompanying variable actions Exp. inf G k .35 Gk a 1. inf G k .j.925 Combination of permanent. Gk.1 Qk.10a) Exp.j. Table 5 Design values of actions.5c Qk 1.0 Gk a 1. (6.inf may be taken as Gk 4 . (6. c 1 and c 2 refer to Table 3 Notes 1 Where the variation in permanent action is not considered significant.0 Gk a 1. i Qk. inf g Q. j.
1. MPa (1 MPa = 1 N/mm2). The partial factor for steel reinforcement is 1. only the details of the stress block are expressed). It is generally selfexplanatory and it is anticipated the actions to be used in the UK (as advised in the UK National Annex) will typically be the same as those in the current British Standards. 7. selfweight and imposed loads Actions on structures exposed to fire Snow loads Wind actions July 2002 November 2002 July 2003 April 2005 March 2004 December 2005 September 2006 October 2003 September 2006 June 2006 National Annex December 2005 Due October 2006a December 2005 Due January 2007a Due December 2006a Due June 2007a Due October 2007a Due December 2006a Due January 2007a Due June 2007a BS EN 1991–1–2 BS EN 1991–1–3 BS EN 1991–1–4 BS EN 1991–1–5 Thermal actions Eurocode 2 There are four parts to Eurocode 2. 3. Currently not all the parts of Eurocode 1 and their National Annexes are available. 8. 2.g. The key differences are listed below to assist in the familiarisation process. BS EN 1991–3 BS EN 1991–4 Key a Planned publication date (correct at time of publication) Source: BSI8 Figure 4 Relationship between Eurocode 2 and other Eurocodes BS EN 1997 EUROCODE 7 Geotechnical design BS EN 1990 EUROCODE Basis of structural design BS EN 1998 EUROCODE 8 Seismic design BS EN 206 Specifying concrete BS EN 1991 EUROCODE 1 Actions on structures BS EN 10080 Reinforcing steels BS 8500 Specifying concrete BS EN 1992 EUROCODE 2 Design of concrete structures Part 1–1: General rules for structures BS 4449 Reinforcing steels BS EN 13670 Execution of structures Part 1–2: Structural fire design BS EN 13369 Precast concrete BS EN 1992 EUROCODE 2 Part 2: Bridges BS EN 1992 Part 3: EUROCODE 2 Liquidretaining structures Precast concrete product standards 5 . For the UK designer there are a number of differences between Eurocode 2 and BS 8110. Design is based on characteristic cylinder strengths not cube strengths. Eurocode 2 is applicable for ribbed reinforcement with characteristic yield strengths of 400 to 600 MPa. for bending. 1. the characteristic yield strength of steel that meets the requirements of BS 4449 will be 500 MPa. It contains within its ten parts (see Table 8) all the information required by the designer to assess the individual actions on a structure. bending. BS EN 1991–1–6 Actions during execution Accidental actions due to impact and explosions Traffic loads on bridges Actions induced by cranes and machinery Actions in silos and tanks BS EN 1991–1–7 BS EN 1991–2 Part 1–1 Eurocode 2.15. 6. Eurocode 2 is generally laid out to give advice on the basis of phenomena (e. in which case it is advised that the loads recommended in the current British Standards are used. Figure 4 indicates how they fit into the Eurocode system. It is expected that UK designers will continue to use a decimal point. Therefore to avoid confusion. The Eurocode does not provide derived formulae (e. Table 8 Eurocode 1. where the application of a Eurocode is expected to be provided in a textbook or similar publication.g. slabs. Introduction to Eurocodes Eurocode 1 Eurocode 1 supersedes BS 6399: Loading for buildings6 and BS 648: Schedule of weights of building materials7. but guidance is given in the background paper to the UK National Annex10. The effects of geometric imperfection (‘notional horizontal loads’) are considered in addition to lateral loads. This is the traditional European approach. The Eurocodes allow for this type of detail to be provided in ‘Noncontradictory complementary information’ (NCCI) (See Glossary).g. so overall the effect is negligible. its parts and dates of publication Reference Title Publication date Eurocode BS EN 1991–1–1 Densities. Part 1–1: General rules and rules for buildings9 is the principal part which is referenced by the three other parts. 4. The most notable exception is the bulk density of reinforced concrete. which will initially make the new Eurocode seem unfamiliar. Eurocode 2 uses a comma for a decimal point. shear etc) rather than by member types as in BS 8110 (e. the comma should not be used for separating multiples of a thousand. which includes other European standards. columns etc). which has been increased to 25 kN/m3. One thousandth is represented by ‰. There is no guidance on plain bar or mild steel reinforcement in the Eurocode. beams. However. 9. Units for stress are mega pascals. 5.
this is taken as 10 mm. The punching shear checks are carried out at 2d from the face of the column and for a rectangular column. 14. Eurocode 2 guidance varies from the rules in BS 8110 Part 2. Although much of the Eurocode is devoted to fire engineering methods. Part 1–2: Structural fire design12. piled foundations. Serviceability checks can still be carried out using ‘deemed to satisfy’ span to effective depth rules similar to BS 8110. In the intervening period the draft background paper to the UK National Annex of Eurocode 2. retaining walls. In addition to the minimum cover an allowance for deviations due to variations in execution (construction) should be included. As a consequence both Part 1–1 and Part 2 will be required to carry out a design of a reinforced concrete bridge. and it is intended that execution (construction) will be covered in a new standard BS EN 13670 Execution of concrete structures24. It is recommended that the nominal cover is stated on the drawings and construction tolerances are given in the specification. Eurocode 7 Eurocode 7: Geotechnical design17 is in two parts and gives guidance on geotechnical design. There is no equivalent guidance in Eurocode 2. which is a significant variation for most geotechnical design. Part 1–2 Eurocode 2. some Expressions in the Eurocode are adjusted for classes above C50/60. Part 3: Liquidretaining and containment structures15 applies the general rules given in Part 1–1 to the liquidretaining structures and supersedes BS 800716. ground investigation and testing. the perimeter is rounded at the corners. Eurocode 2 recommends that. design values for actual structures can be compared with tabulated values. which refers to BS 8110 for workmanship. because the characteristics of higher strength concrete are different. Further advice can be found in Chapter 4. originally published as Beams11.g. The rules for determining the anchorage and lap lengths are more complex than the simple tables in BS 8110. in a precast yard). In areas of low seismicity it is anticipated that detailing structures to Eurocode 2 will ensure compliance with Eurocode 8. Part 3 Eurocode 2. which indicate increasing ductility. This is still in preparation and is not expected to be ready for publication until 2008 at the earliest. Eurocode 2 considers the effects of. Eurocode 8 Eurocode 8: Design of structures for earthquake resistance19 is divided into six parts and gives guidance on all aspects of design for earthquake resistance and covers guidance for the various structural materials for all types of structures. B and C.How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2 10. In practice. BS EN 13670 Part 2 Eurocode 2. It is a complementary standard to BS EN 10080 Steel for the reinforcement of concrete23 and Normative Annex C of Eurocode 2. Higher strengths of concrete are covered by Eurocode 2. 11. the shape of the bar and cover. Part 1110 recommends that designers use the National structural concrete specification for building construction25. It also includes guidance for strengthening and repair of buildings. Part 2: Bridges14 applies the general rules given in Part 1–1 to the design of concrete bridges. There are three classes of reinforcement. Class A is not suitable for use where redistribution of 20% and above has been assumed in the design. amongst other things. 12. gives guidance on design for fire resistance of concrete structures. However. the design for fire resistance may still be carried out by referring to tables for minimum cover and dimensions for various elements. Related Standards BS 8500/BS EN 206 BS 8500: Concrete – Complementary British Standard to BS EN 206–120 replaced BS 5328 in December 2003 and designers should currently be using this to specify concrete. These are given in section 5 of Part 1–2. unless the construction is subject to a quality assurance system in which case it could be reduced to 5 mm or even 0 mm where nonconforming members are rejected (e. A. if a more detailed check is required. The most significant changes are that steel characteristic yield will change to 500 MPa. BS 8110 Part 1 sections 6 and 7 specify the workmanship for concrete construction. 6 . Further advice on using the tabular method is given in Chapter 2. the position of bars during concreting. BS 4449/BS EN 10080 BS 4449: Specification for carbon steel bars for the reinforcement of concrete22 has been revised ready for implementation in January 2006. Further guidance related to simple foundations is given in Chapter 6. The ‘variable strut inclination’ method is used in Eurocode 2 for the assessment of the shear capacity of a section. originally published as How to use BS 8500 with BS 811021. originally ppublished as Foundations18. for concrete cast against formwork. Minimum concrete cover is related to bond strength. durability and fire resistance. 15. originally published as Getting started 13. 13. It has a broad scope and includes the geotechnical design of spread foundations. Further guidance can found in Chapter 11. deep basements and embankments. up to class C90/105. Like all the Eurocodes it is based on limit state design principles. However.
It is the principal representative value from which other representative values may be derived. Set of forces. The value corresponds to a specified fractile for a particular property of material or product. f cd = f ck /g c . wind loads). It may be the characteristic value or an accompanying value. Design situation that is relevant during a period much shorter than the design working life of the structure. e. Design situation involving exceptional conditions of the structure. A value that may be derived statistically with a probability of not being exceeded during a reference period. which comply with the principles and satisfy their requirements. They are denoted by subscript ‘d’ (e. Application Rules Nationally Determined Parameter (NDP) These are generally recognised rules. Serviceability limit state where some consequences of actions will remain when the actions are removed. NDPs also allow certain other parameters (generally influenced by climate. frequent or quasipermanent. Set of design values used for the verification of the structural reliability for a limit state under the simultaneous influence of different and statistically independent actions. Qd = g Q Qk).g. They are identified by (P) after the clause number. requirements and analytical models for which no alternative is permitted. which seek to inform rather than require. Construction of the works. which themselves will not be harmonized. References in a National Annex which contains further information or guidance which does not contradict the Eurocode. combination. Serviceability limit state where no consequences of actions will remain when the actions are removed. Qk etc).g. Compliance with Eurocodes will generally be judged against the normative requirements. Action that may have various spatial distributions over the structure. that is unlikely to occur on a given structure during the design working life. Deformation or internal force caused by an action. geography and geology) to be left open for selection nationally: NDPs are advised in the National Annex.g. Introduction to Eurocodes Glossary of Eurocode terminology Term Principles Definition Clauses that are general statements. Design situation that is relevant during a period of the same order as the design working life of the structure. The characteristic values are denoted by subscript ‘k’ (e.g. permanent loads). An action in a combination that is not the leading variable action. NDPs are therefore used to allow a country to set its own levels of safety. Actions whose magnitude will vary with time (e. These refer to representative values modified by partial factors. deformations or accelerations acting on the structure. usually of short duration but of significant magnitude. National Annex (NA) Normative Informative NCCI Characteristic value Representative value Design values Action (F) Combination of actions Variable actions (Q) Effect of action (E) Accidental action (A) Accompanying action Transient design situation Persistent design situation Accidental design situation Irreversible serviceability limit state Reversible serviceability limit state Execution 7 . definitions. Value used for verification of a limit state. Fixed action Free action Permanent actions (G) Action that has a fixed distribution and position over the structure or structural member. Noncontradictory complementary information. A National Annex accompanies each Eurocode and it contains a) the values of NDPs b) the national decision regarding the use of Informative Annexes and c) references to NCCIs The term used for the text of Standards that forms the core requirements.g. A term used only in relation to annexes.1. Eurocodes may be used to satisfy national Building Regulations. Action. Actions that are likely to act throughout the life of the structure and whose variation in magnitude with time is negligible (e.
The Concrete Centre.xalter. 12 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. 2005. 4 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. 2 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. BSI. 1964. How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2: Getting started (TCC/03/17). Bridges. 2002. BS EN 1992. BS EN 10080: Steel for the reinforcement of concrete – Weldable reinforcing steel – General. 11 MOSS. BSI. Structural fire design. 21 HARRISON. 24 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. Eurocode 2: Design of concrete structures. BSI (6 parts). 18 WEBSTER. 2005. 6 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. The Concrete Centre. 9 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. BSI. How to use BS 8500 with BS 8110 (TCC/03/11). Web page: www. Designers’ guide to EN 1990. Thomas Telford. BSI. General rules and rules for buildings. BS EN 1991. BSI (10 parts). 10 BRITISH STANDARD INSTITUTION. 19 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. BS 8110: The structural use of concrete. BSI. Eurocode 8: Design of structures for earthquake resistance. CS 152: National structural concrete specification for building construction. BSI (3 parts). BS EN 1992–1–2. 2004. BSI. 2005. 3 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. 23 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. third edition. 14 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2: Foundations (TCC/03/21). 2005. 2005. CALGARO. O. 8 . 2002. BS EN 1990. 2006. 1987. Liquidretaining and containment structures. BS 6399: Loading for buildings. BS EN 1998.bsiglobal. BSI. Eurocode 1: Actions on structures. 2006. The Concrete Centre. O. O. BS EN 1992–2. T A & BROOKER. due 2006. M T. BS 8500: Concrete – Complementary British Standard to BS EN 206–1. The Concrete Centre. Eurocode 2: Design of concrete structures. 2004. BS EN 1992–3. BSI (2 parts). BSI. BSI. 2002 (2 parts). 7 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. Eurocode: Basis of structural design. 17 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. 2004. 2006. 16 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. EN 13670: Execution of concrete structures – Part 1: Common. Eurocode 2: Design of concrete structures. due 2008. Eurocode 7: Geotechnical design. BSI. BSI. Background paper to the UK National Annex to BS EN 1992–1–1. BS EN 1992–1–1. 13 BROOKER. 22 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. 20 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. H.1. O. BSI (3 parts). Eurocode 2: Design of concrete structures. 15 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. The Society. PD 6687. Introduction to Eurocodes References 1 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. R M & BROOKER. R & BROOKER. 8 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. BS 648: Schedule of weights of building materials. 25 THE CONCRETE SOCIETY. ´ 5 GULVANESSIAN. BS 4449: Specification for carbon steel bars for the reinforcement of concrete. BSI (4 parts). Eurocode 2: Design of concrete structures. BS EN 1997. BSI.com/Eurocodes/Progress/index. BS 8007: Code of practice for design of concrete structures for retaining aqueous liquids. How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2: Beams (TCC/03/19). J A & HOLICY.
The process of designing elements will not be revolutionised as a result of using Eurocode 21. MICE. material properties.How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2 2. selfweight. These should be used to determine the durability requirements for the design of reinforced concrete structures. With regard to specification. Further information on the individual codes can be found in Chapter 1. combinations of actions. It covers design life. Part 1–1: General actions – Densities. the process of detailing will not vary significantly from current practice. Design life The design life for a structure is given in Eurocode: Basis of structural design 4. minimum concrete cover and maximum crack widths. Concept designs prepared assuming that detailed design would be to BS 8110 may be continued through to detailed design using Eurocode 2. imposed loads for buildings6 gives the densities and selfweights of building materials (see Table 2 overleaf). The draft National Annex to this Eurocode gives the imposed loads for UK buildings and a selection is . method of analysis. CEng. Actions on structures Eurocode 1: Actions on structures5 consists of 10 parts giving details of a wide variety of actions. although much of the detail may change – as described in subsequent chapters. Guidance can be found in Chapter 10 or in Standard method of detailing 2. load arrangements. these are given in Table 1 (overleaf). Getting started O Brooker BEng. advice can be found in Chapter 1. The UK National Annex (NA) to Eurocode presents UK values for design life. MIStructE The design process This chapter is intended to assist the designer determine all the design information required prior to embarking on detailed element design. The key change to current practice is that the bulk density of reinforced concrete has been increased to 25 kN/m3. Similarly. In the longterm it is anticipated that Eurocode 2 will lead to more economic structures. Eurocode 1. stability and imperfections. actions on structures. originally published as Introduction to Eurocodes3.
Load set 3. Part 1–1 allows any of the following sets of load arrangements to be used for both the ultimate limit state and serviceability limit state: Table 2 Selected bulk density of materials (from Eurocode 1. ■ Any two adjacent spans carrying the design variable and permanent loads with other spans loaded with only the design permanent load (see Figure 2). All or alternate spans loaded Figure 2 Adjacent spans loaded The design values should be obtained from the more critical of: ■ All spans carrying the design variable and permanent loads (see Figure 3).25.g. it is advised that existing standards are considered for use where European standards have not yet been issued.0 Figure 1 Alternate spans loaded Load set 1. imposed and wind loads) to give the most onerous forces in a member or structure and are given in Eurocode 2 and its UK NA. It should be noted that there is no advice given for plant rooms. Figure 3 All spans loaded 2 10 .0 26. The value of gG should be the same throughout. provided the following conditions are met: ■ In a oneway spanning slab the area of each bay exceeds 30 m2 (a bay means a strip across the full width of a structure bounded on the other sides by lines of support). the UK NA to Eurocode 2.0 25. Part 1–1) Material Normal weight concrete Reinforced normal weight concrete Wet normal weight reinforced concrete Bulk density (kN/m3) 24. At the time of writing not all the parts of Eurocode 1 and their National Annexes are available. Simplified arrangements for slabs The load arrangements can be simplified for slabs where it is only necessary to consider the all spans loaded arrangement (see Figure 3). Load arrangements The term load arrangements refers to the arranging of variable actions (e. ■ The magnitude of the variable actions excluding partitions does not exceed 5 kN/m2.How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2 Table 1 Indicative design working life (from UK National Annex to Eurocode) Design life (years) 10 10–30 15–25 50 120 Examples Temporary structures Replaceable structural parts Agricultural and similar structures Buildings and other common structures Monumental buildings. while load set 1 will often require more than three arrangements to be assessed. bridges and other civil engineering structures reproduced in Table 3. For building structures. Alternatively. The value of gG should be the same throughout. Alternate or adjacent spans loaded The design values should be obtained from the more critical of: ■ Alternate spans carrying the design variable and permanent loads with other spans loaded with only the design permanent load (see Figure 1). ■ The ratio of the variable actions (Qk) to the permanent actions (Gk) does not exceed 1. the UK NA makes the following provision for slabs. Load set 2. The value of gG should be the same throughout. load set 2 will be used for beams and slabs in the UK as it requires three load arrangements to be considered. ■ Alternate spans carrying the design variable and permanent loads with other spans loaded with only the design permanent load (see Figure 1). Generally.
the design of these higher classes is not considered in this publication.8 per m height (min.0 at outer edge 2.0 2. There is no provision for the use of plain bar or mild steel reinforcement. 2.5 2.6 7. There are three SLS combinations of actions – characteristic.6 31 30 37 2. Part 1–1 Symbol fck (MPa) fck.0 2. For concretes with other aggregates refer to Cl 3.6 3. bars. there are additional rules and variations.g. A.0 Table 4 Selected concrete properties based on Table 3.2.g. for class C28/35 concrete the cylinder strength is 28 MPa. The numerical values of the partial factors for the ULS combination can be obtained by referring to Eurocode: Basis of structural design or to Chapter 1.5 5.0 34 3 11 . Typical concrete properties are given in Table 4.cube (MPa) fctm (MPa) Ecm b (GPa) Key a Concrete class not cited in Table 3. (6. There are three classes of reinforcement.1.0 10.2 30 25 30 2. For this reason.( Reinforcing steel Eurocode 2 can be used with reinforcement of characteristic strengths ranging from 400 to 600 MPa. Part 1–1 b Mean secant modulus of elasticity at 28 days for concrete with quartzite aggregates. concert halls.25 Gk + 1. 15. Eurocode 2.10b). Class A is not suitable where redistribution of 20% and above has been assumed in the design. For members supporting one variable action the ULS combination 1.1.3 (2) Description Characteristic cylinder strength Characteristic cube strength Mean tensile strength Secant modulus of elasticity Properties 12 15 1. Getting started Combination of actions The term combination of actions refers to the value of actions to be used when a limit state is under the influence of different actions. Eurocode) can be used provided the permanent actions are not greater than 4.5 4.9 29 20 25 2.9 33 35 45 3. The properties of steel reinforcement in the UK for use with Eurocode 2 are given in BS 4449 (2005): Specification for carbon steel bars for the reinforcement of concrete 8 and are summarised in Table 5 (on page 4). which provide increasing ductility. hospital wards and toilets Balconies in single family dwelling units Balconies in hotels and motels Offices for general use Assembly area without fixed seating. The numerical values are given in Eurocode: Basis of structural design. frequent and quasipermanent.5 times the variable actions (except for storage loads).0 7.5 Qk (derived from Exp. Concrete up to class C90/105 can be designed using Eurocode 2. but guidance is given in the background paper to the National Annex9.7 3. For classes above C50/60. Standard to BS EN 206–17 (e. Part 1–1) Category A1 A2 A3 A5 A7 B1 C5 D1/2 E12 E17 F Example use All uses within selfcontained dwelling units Bedrooms and dormitories Bedrooms in hotels and motels.0 2.8 36 50 60 4. Material properties Concrete In Eurocode 2 the design of reinforced concrete is based on the characteristic cylinder strength rather than cube strength and should be specified according to BS 8500: Concrete – complementary British Table 3 Selected imposed loads for buildings (from draft UK National Annex to Eurocode 1.2 34 40 50 3.0) 2.6 27 16 20 1. .5 1. whereas the cube strength is 35 MPa).0 2.8 32 32a 40 3. It should be noted that designated concretes (e. however.1 37 28a 35 2. A characteristic yield strength of 500 MPa has been adopted by the UK reinforcement industry.0 2. B and C.4 per m height 4. places of worship Shopping areas General storage Dense mobile stacking in warehouses Gross vehicle weight ≤ 30kN qk (kN/m2) 1. RC30) still refer to the cube strength.5 35 45 55 3.0 4.0 2.5 Qk (kN) 2.1 of Eurocode 2.0 min.
limitations of depth to neutral axis). 2 Applicable to 3 or more spans only and where Qk ≤ G k.e. linear elastic analysis with limited redistribution. abrasion or chemical attack. It should be taken as 10 mm.50 (G + Q) 0.sup is the support reaction and t is the breadth of the support. Corrosion induced by carbonation XC1 XC2 XC3/4 Dry or permanently wet Wet. Bending moment and shear force coefficients for beams are given in Table 6. Freeze/thaw with or without deicing agents XF1 XF2 XF3 XF4 Moderate water saturation without deicing agent Moderate water saturation with deicing agent High water saturation without deicing agent High water saturation with deicing agent or sea water Chemical attack (ACEC classes) Refer to BS 8500–1 and Special Digest 111 4 12 . and plastic analysis. splash and spray zones Minimum concrete cover The nominal cover can be assessed as follows: cnom = cmin + D cdev Exp. 4 l is the effective length.85 longest span. concrete section properties).55 (G + Q) may be used adjacent to the interior span.1) Where cmin should be set to satisfy the requirements below: ■ safe transmission of bond forces ■ durability ■ fire resistance and D cdev is an allowance which should be made in the design for deviations from the minimum cover. ■ Where a beam or slab is continuous over a support that may be considered not to provide rotational restraint.5 Structural analysis The primary purpose of structural analysis in building structures is to establish the distribution of internal forces and moments over the whole or part of a structure and to identify the critical design conditions at all sections. but should not be taken as less than 0. construction) is subjected to a quality assurance system. Q is the total of the ULS variable actions.35 Notes 1 Table derived from BS EN 1992–1–1 Annex C.63 (G + Q)a Shear 0.g. the moments derived from elastic analysis may be redistributed (up to a maximum of 30%) provided that the resulting distribution of moments remains in equilibrium with the applied loads and subject to certain limits and design criteria (e. 2 The nomenclature used in BS 4449: 2005 differs from that used in BS EN 1992–1–1 Annex C and used here. (4. the moment calculated at the centre line of the support may be reduced by (FEd.086 Ql – 0. G is the total of the ULS permanent actions. using linear stressstrain relationships.066 Gl + 0. BS 4449: 2005 and BS EN 1008010 . Regardless of the method of analysis used. 3 Minimum span ≥ 0. ≥ 1.e.100 Ql – 0. ■ For the design of columns the elastic moments from the frame action should be used without any redistribution.5 B 500 ≥ 5. rarely dry Moderate humidity or cyclic wet and dry Corrosion induced by chlorides other than from seawater XD1 XD2 XD3 Moderate humidity Wet. and assuming mean values of elastic modulus. these are suitable where spans are of similar length and the other notes to the table are observed.sup t/8).15 < 1. rarely dry Cyclic wet and dry Corrosion induced by chlorides from seawater XS1 XS2 XS3 Exposed to airborne salt but not in direct contact with sea water Permanently submerged Tidal. the following principles apply: ■ Where a beam or slab is monolithic with its supports. Linear elastic analysis may be carried out assuming cross sections are uncracked (i.45 (G + Q) Key a 0.090 Gl + 0. Table 6 Bending moment and shear coefficients for beams Moment Outer support Near middle of end span At first interior support At middle of interior spans At interior supports 25% of span moment 0. Table 7 Exposure classes Class Description No risk of corrosion or attack X0 For concrete without reinforcement or embedded metal where there is no significant freeze/thaw.65 times the full fixed end moment.2k (MPa) Minimum value of k = ( ft /fy ) k Characteristic strain at maximum force e uk (%) A 500 ≥ 2. where FEd. For the ultimate limit state only. the critical design hogging moment may be taken as that at the face of the support.08 ≥ 1. The following may be used: linear elastic analysis. in which case it is permitted to reduce D cdev to 5 mm. Notes 1 Redistribution of support moments by 15% has been included.How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2 Table 5 Characteristic tensile properties of reinforcement Class (BS 4449) and designation (BS 8666) Characteristic yield strength fyk or f 0.05 ≥ 1. The type of analysis should be appropriate to the problem being considered. The geometry is commonly idealised by considering the structure to be made up of linear elements and plane twodimensional elements. unless fabrication (i. in which case class A.094 (G + Q) l 0. 3 In accordance with BS 8666. class H may be specified.075 (G + Q) l 0.0 C 500 ≥ 7. B or C may be supplied.
a National Annex (Table 4. or equivalent bar diameter for bundled bars. 2 a is the axis distance (see Figure 4). The UK Table 10 Minimum dimensions and axis distances for reinforced concrete slabs Standard fire resistance REI 60 REI 120 REI 240 hs a hs a hs a = = = = = = Minimum dimensions (mm) Oneway Twoway spanning slab Flat slab spanning slab l y /l x ≤ 1. Minimum cover for durability The recommendations for durability in Eurocode 2 are based on BS EN 206–112. There are three standard fire exposure conditions that may be satisfied: R Mechanical resistance for load bearing E Integrity of separation I Insulation Tables 9 and 10 give the minimum dimensions for columns and slabs to meet the above conditions. Selected recommendations are given in Table 8 (on page 6) for the concrete strength. as set out below. Further information is given in Eurocode 2 and subsequent chapters.2b Minimum cover for bond The minimum cover to ensure adequate bond should not be less than the bar diameter.2.3 (N) (BS)) gives durability requirements that comply with BS 8500. 3 h s is the slab thickness. minimum concrete cover and maximum cement content for various elements in a structure based on the exposure of that element. Conservatively m fi may be taken as 0. The designer should ensure that a ≥ cnom + f link + f bar /2. section sizes can be reduced by increasing the axis distance. The various exposure classes from BS 8500 are given in Table 7. a (see Figure 4). Table 9 Minimum column dimensions and axis distances for columns with rectangular or circular section – method A Standard fire resistance Minimum dimensions (mm) Column width ( bmin)/axis distance (a) of the main bars Column exposed on more than one side ( m f i = 0. This is taken from Chapter 11. originally published as How to use BS 8500 with BS 811013. 5 13 . In the UK the requirements of BS EN 206 –1 are applied through the complementary standard BS 8500. This is the distance from the centre of the main reinforcing bar to the surface of the member. It is a nominal (not minimum) dimension. minimum cement ratio. but which significantly modify the approach taken in Eurocode 2. 2 m fi is the ratio of the design axial load under fire conditions to the design resistance of the column at normal temperature conditions. Getting started Figure 4 Sections through structural members. To determine the minimum cover for durability (and also the strength class and minimum water cement ratio) either the UK National Annex or BS 8500 can be used.5 1.7 and may be used.7) 155/25 175/35 295/70 Design for fire resistance Eurocode 2 Part 1–2: Structural fire design14.5 < l y /l x ≤ 2 80 20 120 40 175 65 80 10 120 20 175 40 80 15 120 25 175 50 180 15 200 35 200 50 Ribs in a twoway spanning ribbed slab (bmin is the width of the rib) bmin = a= bmin = a= bmin = a= 100 25 160 45 450 70 120 15 190 40 700 60 ≥200 10 ≥300 30 ––– Notes 1 Refer to BS EN 1992–1–2 for design limitations. Rather than giving the minimum cover. gives several methods for determining the fire resistance of concrete elements. Notes 1 Refer to BS EN 1992–1–2 for design limitations. unless the aggregate size is over 32 mm. the tabular method is based on nominal axis distance. including any noncombustible flooring. showing nominal axis distance.7) R 60 R 120 R 240 250/46 350/40 350/57* 450/51* † Exposed on one side ( m f i = 0. The tables offer more flexibility than BS 8110 in that there are options available to the designer e. including design limitations and data for walls and beams. See EN 1992–1–2 Table 5. Design for fire resistance may still be carried out by referring to tables to determine the minimum cover and dimensions for various elements.7 * Minimum 8 bars † Method B indicates 600/70 for R 240 and m fi = 0. further guidance can be obtained from specialist literature.g.
40.45. XD2. 320 <<< C25/30. and equivalent designated concrete (where applicable) designationsb Nominal cover to reinforcementd 15 + D c dev 20 + D c dev 25 + D c dev 30 + D c dev 35 + D c dev 40 + D c dev 45 + D c dev 50 + D c dev Internal mass concrete Internal elements (except humid locations) Buried concrete in AC1 ground conditions e Vertical surface protected from direct rainfall Exposed vertical surfaces X0 XC1 Typical example Primary Secondary ___ ___ All All Recommended that this exposure is not applied to reinforced concrete C20/25. 300 plus air g. 340 <<< C25/30. 0. SRPC <<< ___ <<< <<< a This table comprises a selection of common exposure class combinations. 360 C40/50.45.55. 360 C32/40.65. IIA. IIIA. IIBS. SRPC IIIB. 280 or RC40/50 or RC30/37 RC28/35 C40/50. 0. IIIA IIIB Exposed horizontal surfaces near coast Key XF4 CEM I.45. 0. IIA.45. Air entrained concrete is required. 380g. 340 C35/45. 340 or 0. 360 <<< C28/35. 0. 0. 340 g or RC40/50XFg <<< <<< <<< XF1 XC3 & XC4 All except IVB <<< <<< <<< <<< XF3 All except IVB <<< C32/40. 0. 0. 0. 280 or 0. 0. 360 g ___ CEM I. 0. C28/35. 0. IIIA Vertical elements subject to deicing spray and freezing XD3f XF2 CEM I. IIBS.40. This option may not be suitable for areas subject to severe abrasion.40. h 0. 0. 0. 0.45.Table 1. IIBS. 0.60.60. 320 C25/30.50. ramps and external areas subject to freezing and deicing salts XF4 XF4 (air entrained) CEM I. C25/30. 380 See BS 8500 C32/40. 0. 280 plus air g. 380 C35/45.60. 320 <<< <<< <<< <<< Exposed vertical surfaces near coast XF1 XS1f IIBV. 300 <<< <<< <<< Exposed horizontal surfaces XF3 (air entrained) All except IVB ___ ___ <<< <<< <<< Elements subject to airborne chlorides XD1f ___ All ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ d e f g h j <<< C35/45. Also adequate for exposure class XC3/4. 0.45. 0.45. 0. 300 0.70.40.55. 0.45. 360g. 260 or RC25/30 <<< <<< <<< <<< <<< XC2 AC1 All ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ <<< <<< <<< <<< <<< ___ All except IVB C40/50. 0.65. D c dev is an allowance for deviations. IVBV Car park decks. Freeze/thaw resisting aggregates should be specified.55. 380 g <<< C28/35. 300 0.40. 0.40. 0. Requirements for other sets of exposure classes.45. 340 C28/35. 0. 380 C28/35.45. IIIB CEM I.h or PAV2 C32/40. SRPC IIIB. Not recommended Indicates that concrete quality in cell to the left should not be reduced 6 14 . e. 380 See BS 8500 ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ C35/45. 380 See BS 8500 C32/40. SRPC <<< C28/35.55. h C32/40.55. 0. 0. 240 or RC20/25 <<< <<< C25/30. C30/37. 340g. h 0. 340 or 0. 380 C32/40 0.45. 0. 360 C32/40.50. 0. C28/35. 340 C25/30. IIBS. IVBV IIBV. 0. 340 C32/40.How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2 Table 8 Selected a recommendations for normalweight reinforced concrete quality for combined exposure classes and cover to reinforcement for at least a 50year intended working life and 20 mm maximum aggregate size Exposure conditions Cement/ Strength classc.40.50. 0. 0. IIBS.45. maximum w/c ratio. (CEM I is Portland cement.45. h. 380 See BS 8500 <<< C32/40. 280 plus air g. 360 C25/30. 0.40.) c For prestressed concrete the minimum strength class should be C28/35. 360 C40/50. 360 C40/50. For sections less than 140 mm thick refer to BS 8500. 360 C32/40. 0. b See BS 85002. IIA to IVB are cement combinations. 0. IIIA Car park decks and areas subject to deicing spray ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ See BS 8500 See BS 8500 C32/40. C30/37.50. C28/35 C28/35. 340 IIBV. j or PAV1 C28/35. 340 C40/50. 0.0.50. 260 or RC40/50 or RC30/37 RC28/35 RC25/30 C40/50.40.g. SRPC IIBV. IIA. 0. 340 C35/45.60.45. 0.55.50.50.h C40/50.60. XS2 and XS3 should be derived from BS 85001: 2002. Annex A.50. minimum cement or combination combination content (kg/m3). IIA. 360 C25/30. IIA.50.
3 mm in all exposure classes under the quasipermanent combination. Getting started Stability and imperfections The effects of geometric imperfections should be considered in combination with the effects of wind loads (i.prov = area of reinforcement provided d = ratio of redistributed moment to elastic moment To determine stress in the reinforcement (ss). which is similar in principle to the above. the imperfections may be represented by an inclination y i . y i = (1/200) x a h x a m where a h = (2/Rl). not as an alternative load combination). this limit may be relaxed (to say 0. originally published as Columns15).2. not both.req 1 ss can be calculated from the expression: ss = ssu As. read up the graph to the appropriate curve and read across to determine ssu . the effect of imperfections. Figure 5 Examples of the effect of geometric imperfections a) Bracing system b) Floor diaphragm c) Roof diaphragm Figure 6 Determination of steel stress for crack width control Table 11 Maximum bar size or spacing to limit crack width wmax = 0.prov d ( )( ) 7 15 . In the absence of specific durability requirements (e. The effect of the inclination may be represented by transverse forces at each level and included in the analysis along with other actions (see Figure 5): Effect on bracing system: Hi = y i (Nb – Na) Effect on floor diaphragm: Hi = y i (Nb + Na)/2 Effect on roof diaphragm: Hi = y i Na where Na and Nb are longitudinal forces contributing to Hi.4 mm) for exposure classes X0 and XC1 (refer to Table 7).3. In most cases.4 from Eurocode 2–1–1 or from the ‘deemed to satisfy’ requirements that can be obtained from Table 11.e. Crack control Crack widths should be limited to ensure appearance and durability are satisfactory. water tightness) the crack widths may be limited to 0.3 mm Maximum bar size (mm) 32 25 16 12 10 8 Maximum bar spacing (mm) 300 OR 250 200 150 100 50 40 32 20 16 12 10 300 OR 300 250 200 150 100 As. However for columns.req = area of reinforcement at the ULS As.5 l is the height of the building in metres m is the number of vertical members contributing to the horizontal force in the bracing system.g.5 (1 + 1/m)]0. to be taken as not less than 2/3 nor greater than 1.0 a m = [0. calculate the ratio Gk/Qk.req gms n As. As.3N of the Eurocode. In the absence of requirements for appearance.2N and 7. For global analysis. The theoretical size of the crack can be calculated using the expressions given in Cl 7. must be considered (see Chapter 5. The limits apply to either the bar size or the bar spacing. an allowance for imperfections is made in the partial factors used in the design of elements.4 mm Steel stress Maximum Maximum (s s)MPa bar bar size (mm) spacing (mm) 160 200 240 280 320 360 Note The steel stress may be estimated from the expression below (or see Figure 6): ss = where fyk gms m n = characteristic reinforcement yield stress = partial factor for reinforcing steel = total load from quasipermanent combination = total load from ULS combination fyk m As.prov d wmax = 0. which is based on tables 7.
12 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. Getting started References 1 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. BS EN 1990. The Concrete Centre. BS EN 1991. Special Digest 1: Concrete in aggressive ground. R M & BROOKER. 9 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. The Concrete Centre. BS EN 1991. 2002. (TCC/03/20). BSI. O. O. BRE. 4 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. Eurocode 2: Design of concrete structures. Eurocode: Basis of structural design. 2006. General rules – structural fire design. 8 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. Eurocode 1: Actions on structures. 14 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. BSI. 2006. 2002. 2006. Eurocode 2: Design of concrete structures. BS EN 1992–1–2. 16 . Eurocode 1: Actions on structures Part 1–1: General actions – Densities. performance. The Concrete Centre. R S & BROOKER. 2 INSTITUTION OF STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS/THE CONCRETE SOCIETY. 2000. BSI. imposed loads for buildings. BSI. 7 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. 5 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. 2004. 2005. 2005. 2002. BS EN 10080: Steel for the reinforcement of concrete – Weldable reinforcing steel – General. BSI.2. 10 BRITISH STAND ARDS INSTITUTION. BSI (10 parts). 11 BUILDING RESEARCH ESTABLISHMENT. How to use BS 8500 with BS 8110 (TCC/03/11). 2005. T A BROOKER. Background paper to the UK National Annex to BS EN 1992–1–1. ISE/CS. Standard method of detailing. BSI. 3 NARAYANAN. BSI (4 parts). BS EN 1992. selfweight. BS EN 206–1: Concrete – Part: Specification. 6 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. BSI. 2005. How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2: Columns. How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2: Introduction to Eurocodes (TCC/03/16). 15 MOSS. BSI. BS 4449: Specification for carbon steel bars for the reinforcement of concrete. 13 HARRISON. production and conformity. O. BS 8500–1: Concrete – Complementary British Standard to BS EN 206–1– Part 1: Method of specifying and guidance for the specifier. 2005.
actions. Slabs R M Moss BSc. There are. MIStructE Designing to Eurocode 2 This chapter covers the analysis and design of slabs to Eurocode 21 which is essentially the same as with BS 81102. CEng.info. the tabular method is based on nominal axis distance. MICE. Chapter 7. Further guidance on the advanced and simplified methods can be obtained from specialist literature. Rather than giving a minimum cover. however. including terminology. including values that are embedded in derived formulae.) A list of symbols related to slab design is given at the end of this chapter. MICE. This is the distance from the centre of the main reinforcing bar to the surface of the member. Using tables is the fastest method for determining the minimum dimensions and cover for slabs. Chapter 1. a. PhD. minimum concrete cover for durability and control of crack widths can be found in Chapter 2. CEng.How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2 3. DIC. Eurocode 2 does not contain the derived formulae or specific guidance on determining moments and shear forces. some restrictions which should be adhered to. originally published as Introduction to Eurocodes3. MIStructE O Brooker BEng. Fire resistance Eurocode 2. Part 1–2: Structural fire design6. This has arisen because it has been European practice to give principles in the codes and for the detailed application to be presented in other sources such as textbooks. material properties.eurocode2. originally published as Flat slabs4 covers the design of flat slabs. originally published as Getting started 5. highlighted the key differences between Eurocode 2 and BS 8110. More detailed advice on determining design life. the layout and content of Eurocode 2 may appear unusual to designers familiar with BS 8110. It should be noted that values from the UK National Annex (NA) have been used throughout. This assumes that the slab thickness has previously been determined during conceptual design. It is a nominal (not minimum) Continues page 19 . (Derivations can be found at www. gives a choice of advanced. Design procedure A procedure for carrying out the detailed design of slabs is shown in Table 1. methods of analysis. However. simplified or tabular methods for determining the fire resistance.
BS EN 1992–1–2: Section 5 BS EN 1992–1–1 Cl 4.2.req (x) is the distance of the section being considered from the centre line of the support.5 < ly / lx ≤ 2. Beams. for a distance of 0. c In two way slabs the axis refers to the lower layer of reinforcement.A1. or 3) where transverse redistribution of load effects cannot be achieved. 2 18 .5 f 80 10 g 100 15g 120 20 175 40 1.A1.1 BS EN 1992–1–1 section 7. The topping can be treated as a twoway slab where 1.req ( 0 ) A s.b spanning slab hs = a= REI 90 hs = a= REI 120 hs = a= REI 240 hs = a= Notes 1 This table is taken from BS EN 1992–1–2 Tables 5. 3 For fire resistance of R90 and above. The top reinforcement should be placed in the upper half of the flange.5 ( x/ l eff ) ) where: x A s.8 to 5. There should be at least one restrained edge. Standard NA to BS EN 1990 Table NA.b. or 2) there is no fixity over the end supports in a two span slab. cover for durability.2 BS EN 1992–1–1 section 7.3l eff from the centre line of each intermediate support.1 BS EN 1992–1–1 section 5 BS EN 1992–1–1 section 6.4 BS EN 1992–1–1 section 6. l eff R E I 4 There are three standard fire exposure conditions that need to be satisfied: Mechanical resistance for load bearing Integrity of separation Insulation 5 The ribs in a oneway spanning ribbed slab can be treated as beams and reference can be made to Chapter 4.1 and NA. If this is not the case. they should be treated as oneway spanning slabs. is the area of reinforcement required for normal temperature design. Twoway spanning slab a.1 BS EN 1991 (10 parts) and National Annexes NA to BS EN 1990 Tables NA. is the greater of the effective lengths of the two adjacent spans.5 <l y /l x ≤ 2f 80 15g 100 20 120 25 175 50 Ribs in a twoway spanning ribbed slabe REI 60 80 20 100 30 120 40 175 65 b min = a= b min = a= b min = a= b min = a= Key 100 25 120 35 160 45 450 70 120 15g 160 25 190 40 700 60 ≥200 10g ≥250 15g ≥300 30 ––– a The slab thickness hs is the sum of the slab thickness and the thickness of any noncombustible flooring.005 A c should be provided over intermediate supports if 1) cold worked reinforcement is used. 2 The table is valid only if the detailing requirements (see note 3) are observed and in normal temperature design redistribution of bending moments does not exceed 15%.2 (B) NA to BS EN 1992–1–1 BS 8500: 2002 Approved Document B.d l y /l x ≤ 1. b For continuous solid slabs a minimum negative reinforcement As ≥ 0.4.c. For flat slabs refer to Chapter 7.11. fire and bond requirements Analyse structure to obtain critical moments and shear forces Design flexural reinforcement Check deflection Check shear capacity Check spacing of bars 2: Getting started and Table 2 2: Getting started 2: Getting started and Table 3 See Figure 1 See Figure 3 See Table 7 2: Getting started Table 2 Minimum dimensions and axis distances for reinforced concrete slabs (excluding flat slabs) Standard fire resistance Minimum dimensions (mm) Oneway a. the area of top reinforcement should not be less than the following: A s. The values apply where there is predominantly uniformly distributed loading. g Normally the requirements of BS EN 1992–1–1 will determine the cover. e For twoway ribbed slabs the following notes apply: The axis distance measured to the lateral surface of the rib should be at least (a + 10).req ( 0 ) ( 1 – 2. d The term two way slabs relates to slabs supported at all four edges.3 Determine design life Assess actions on the slab Determine which combinations of actions apply Determine loading arrangements 2: Getting started 2: Getting started 1: Introduction to Eurocodes 2: Getting started Assess durability requirements and determine concrete strength 2: Getting started Check cover requirements for appropriate fire resistance period Calculate min.How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2 Table 1 Slab design procedure Step Task Further guidance Chapter in this publication 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Note NA = National Annex.req (x) = A s. f l x and l y are the spans of a twoway slab (two directions at right angles) where l y is the longer span. is the minimum area of reinforcement required at the section being considered but not less than that required for normal temperature design.
086Fl 0. Determine K’ from Table 4 or K’ = 0. Slabs Figure 1 Procedure for determining flexural reinforcement START dimension. Qk ≤ 1.21 where d ≤ 1.902 0.137 0.13% 0.8 2. Table 6 Minimum percentage of reinforcement required Table 3 Bending moment and shear coefficients for slabs End support /slab connection Pinned Continuous End End End End support span support span Moment 0 0.063Fl 0.07 0. Carry out analysis of slab to determine design moments (M) (Where appropriate use coefficients from Table 3) Flexure Outside scope of this publication Concrete class ≤C50/60? Yes Determine K from: K = M bd 2 fck No The design procedure for flexural design is given in Figure 1.46F First Interior Interior interior spans supports support –0.5 3.95d is not a requirement of Eurocode 2.04Fl 0.913 0.891 0.17 0.924 0.5F fck 25 28 30 32 35 40 45 50 Key a Where fyk = 500 MPa. Table 3 may be used to determine bending moments and shear forces for slabs.182a 0.85 0.00 0.53 K ≤ 0. Further information for the design of twoway.868 0.09 0. ribbed or waffle slabs is given in the appropriate sections on pages 5 and 6.0 Table 4 Values for K ’ % redistribution 0 Compression reinforcement required – not recommended for typical slabs d (redistribution ratio) K’ 1. l is the span 3 Minimum span > 0.6 2.60d – 0.1 Minimum % (0. fctm 2.21% Notes 1 Applicable to oneway spanning slabs where the area of each bay exceeds 30 m2.3. minimum 3 spans 4 Based on 20% redistribution at supports and no decrease in span moments 3 19 .075Fl Shear 0.8 4.934 0.19 0. so the designer should ensure that a ≥ cnom + f link + f bar /2.min = 0. Where appropriate.26 fctm /fyka ) 0.05 0.20 z/d 0.153 0.9 3.max = 0.17% 0.830 0.168 0.168 to ensure ductile failure.802 0.0 3.856 0.208a 0.15 0.10 0.16% 0.15% 0.11 0.2 3.70 0.880 K 0.06 0.771 Calculate tension reinforcement required from M As = fyd z ≤0.13 0.16 0. Obtain lever arm z from Table 5 or d z= 1 + 1 – 3.950a 0.816 0.26 fctm bt d fyk where fck ≥ 25 Check maximum reinforcement requirements As.120 No Is K ≤ K ’ ? 10 15 20 25 30 Key Yes No compression reinforcement required a It is often recomended in the UK that K´ should be limited to 0.20% 0.40F 0.18% 0. The requirements for various types of slab are given in Table 2.80 0.04 Ac for tension or compression reinforcement outside lap locations a Limiting z to 0.18 d 2 – 0.14% 0.08 0.12 Key Check minimum reinforcement requirements (see Table 6) As. but is considered to be good practice.75 0.85 longest span. this includes derived formulae based on the simplified rectangular stress block from Eurocode 2.18 0.063Fl –0.14 0.6F 0.086Fl – 0.90 0.95d 2 [ ] Table 5 z/d for singly reinforced rectangular sections K z/d 0.843 0.787 0.944 0.25 Gk and qk ≤ 5 kN/m2 2 F is the total design ultimate load.
req 1 ss can be calculated from the expression: ss = ssu As. The Eurocode gives recommendations for the design of concrete up to class C90/105.0 Determine Factor 2 (F2) Where the slab span exceeds 7 m and it supports brittle partitions. To determine stress in the reinforcement (ss). The spantodepth ratios should ensure that deflection is limited to span /250 and this is the procedure presented in Figure 3. It is understood that this was the intention of the drafting committee and is in line with current UK practice.5 As.prov ≤ 1.How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2 Eurocode 2 offers various methods for determining the stressstrain relationship of concrete. calculate the ratio Gk/Qk .prov d ( )( ) 4 20 . read up the graph to the appropriate curve and read across to determine ssu . Figure 2 Deflection Eurocode 2 has two alternative methods of designing for deflection.0) Note: As. F2 = 7/leff Otherwise F2 = 1. The latter is dealt with in detail in Chapter 8. for concrete greater than class C50/60.0 Determine Factor 3 (F3) F3 = 310/ss Where ss = Stress in reinforcement at serviceability limit state (see Figure 4) ss may be assumed to be 310 MPa (i. for class C28/35 the cylinder strength is 28 MPa.8† (bf is flange breadth and bw is rib breadth) Otherwise F1 = 1.req’d (UK National Annex) Increase As. F3 = 1. As. It is important to note that concrete strength is based on the cylinder strength and not the cube strength (i. whereas the cube strength is 35 MPa). which is similar to that found in BS 8110 (see Figure 2). However.e.1 ((bf/bw) – 1) ≥ 0.e. For simplicity and familiarity the method presented here is the simplified rectangular stress block. originally published as Deflection calculations7. the stress block is modified. Simplified rectangular stress block for concrete up to class C50/60 from Eurocode 2 Figure 3 Procedure for assessing deflection Figure 4 Determination of steel stress START Determine basic l/d from Figure 5 Determine Factor 1 (F1) For ribbed or waffle slabs F1 = 1 – 0.prov Is basic l/d x F1 x F2 x F3 ≥ Actual l/d ? No Yes Check complete † The Eurocode is ambiguous regarding linear interpolation. either by limiting spantodepth ratio or by assessing the theoretical deflection using the Expressions given in the Eurocode.
therefore it is only necessary to ensure that the concrete shear stress capacity without shear reinforcement (vRd.91 0.59 0.3.74 0.c – see Table 7) is more than applied shear stress (vEd = VEd /( bd )).c = 0.62 0.98 32 1.67 0.68 0.89 0.78 0.40 0. refer to Chapter 4.035 k1.69 0.10 45 1.73 0.75 0.94 28 0.53 0.2 = K 11 + r d [ fck ( )] r’ r0 1.4 for cantilevers 3 Compression reinforcement.50 0.79 0. r’.74 0.req’d/bd) 5 21 .516 Table derived from: v Rd.853 1.71 0.25% 0. Table 7 vRd. has been taken as 0.71 0.50% 0.75 0.43 0.70 0. Where shear reinforcement is required.02 Note 1 This table has been prepared for fck = 30.41 0.58 0.12 k (100r I fck)1/3 ≥ 0.47 0.80 0. However. originally published as Introduction to Eurocodes3.71 0.75% 0.82 0. originally published as Beams 8.64 0.36 0.87 0.52 0.76 0.45 0.55 0.47 0.943 1.55 0.59 0.816 1.756 1. the check should be carried out on the basis of the shorter span.577 1.5 fck r 0 l + = K 11 + d ( r – r ’) [ fck 12 ] where r > r 0 .56 0. For more information on combinations refer toChapter 1.00% 0. Figure 5 Basic spantoeffectivedepth ratios 1.68 ≥2.85 0.65 1.59 0.83 0.57 Twoway slabs Unlike BS 8110 there is no specific guidance given in Eurocode 2 on how to determine the bending moments for a twoway slab. lx is the shorter span and w (load per unit area) is the STR ultimate limit state combination.87 0.61 0.62 0.25% 0.54 0.71 0.82 0.632 1.5 fck 0.63 0.45 0.79 0. e. 2 This graph assumes simply supported span condition (K = 1.c resistance of members without shear reinforcement.94 0.52 0.68 0.000 1. The assessment of the bending moment can be carried out using any suitable method from Section 5 of the Code.71 k 2.50% 0.667 1.02 35 1.65 0.48 0.85 0.83 0.81 0.66 0.77 0. Percentage of tension reinforcement (As. Slabs Design for shear It is not usual for a slab to contain shear reinforcement.3 for end span condition K = 0.00% 0.5 where k = 1 + R(200/d) ≤ 2 and r I = As /(bd) ≤ 0.894 1.5 fck r 0 l + 3.72 0.80 0.57 0.5 r0 –1 r where r ≤ r 0 and 1.63 0.05 40 1.85 0.49 0.61 1.90 0. d (mm) As /(bd) ≤200 225 250 275 300 350 400 450 500 600 750 0. K = 1.78 0.51 1. 2 Where r I exceeds 0.14 50 1.g. for ribs in a ribbed slab.40% the following factors may be used: fck Factor 25 0.5 for interior span condition K = 1.54 0.69 0.75 0.75% 0.0). MPa rI = Effective depth.78 0.67 0.48 0.56 0.707 1.73 0.19 Notes 1 For twoway spanning slabs.64 0.51 0. 4 Curves based on the following expressions: 1.73 0. coefficients may be obtained from Table 8 (taken from the Manual for the design of building structures to Eurocode 29) to determine bending moments per unit width (Msx and Msy) where: Msx = bsx w lx2 Msy = b sy w lx2 Where bsx and bsy are coefficients.66 0.38 0.77 0.
087 0.083 0.f As = + fywd (d – 0.25 1.037 Neutral axis in web Calculate moment capacity of flange from: 0.045 Yes Calculate area of reinforcement required from MR. Design as rectangular section.032 Neutral axis in flange.044 0.065 0. and then the area of reinforcement can be calculated depending on whether it lies in the flange or web (see flow chart in Figure 6). originally published as Flat slabs4 The position of the neutral axis in the rib should be determined.2 l0 ≤ b2 Note: The flange width at the support will be different from that at midspan.067 0.038 0.How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2 Ribbed or waffle slabs Current practices for determining forces in ribbed and waffle slabs may also be used for designs to Eurocode 2.028 MR.063 0.062 0.0 Figure 6 Procedure for determining flexural capacity of flanged ribs START Concrete class ≤ C50/60? Yes No Outside scope of this publication Determine l0 (see Figure 7) and beff from: beff = (bw + beff1 + beff2) where beff1 = (0.25hf Yes One short edge discontinuous No Negative moment at continuous edge Positive moment at midspan 0.95d 2 [ ] 1.037 No 0.60d – 0.028 Is Kf ≤ K ’ Redesign section Two adjacent edges discontinuous Negative moment at continuous edge Positive moment at midspan 0. 0.18 d2 – 0.0 Interior panels Negative moment at continuous edge Positive moment at midspan 0.093 0.058 0.2.050 0. The main differences compared with BS 8110 are that the assessment of the flange width is more sophisticated (see Figures 7 and 8).5hf) and Kf = M – MR. but note that their torsional stiffness is significantly less than for a twoway slab and the bending moment coefficients may not be applicable.2b2 + 0. Cl 6.029 0.059 0.036 0.0 Calculate lever arm z from d z= 1 + 1 – 3.044 0.5 1.5 (d – z) 0.5 hf ) fywd z 0.048 0. For symbols refer to Figures 7 and 8 Determine K from: K = M bd 2 fck Determine K’ from Table 2 or K’ = 0.049 0.024 0.053 0.21 where d ≤ 1.57 fck (beff – bw) hf (d – 0.f M – MR.034 6 22 .040 0. Where it is treated as a flat slab reference may be made to Chapter 7.f fck bw d 2 One long edge discontinuous Negative moment at continuous edge Positive moment at midspan 0.75 Calculate depth to neutral axis x from: x = 2.045 0.53 K ≤ 0.2 l0 ≤ b1 beff2 = (0.059 0.1 l0) ≤ 0.078 0.066 0.031 1.047 0.089 0.073 0.030 0.2b1 + 0.1 l0) ≤ 0.047 0. Table 8 Bending moment coefficients for twoway spanning rectangular slabs supported by beams Type or panel and moments considered Short span coefficients for values of ly /lx Longspan coefficients for all values of ly /lx 2.4).039 0.050 0.f = 0.024 Is x ≤ 1.034 0.059 0.039 0.043 0.063 0.070 0. Where a waffle slab is treated as a twoway slab refer to previous section. Where a slab is formed with permanent blocks or a with a topping thickness less than 50 mm and onetenth of the clear distance between ribs it is recommended that a longitudinal shear check is carried out to determine whether additional transverse reinforcement is required (see BS EN 1992–1–1.055 0.067 0.
0 See Table NA.3 of the Code or Chapter 2.max = 0.0013b td. In areas near supports.85 for flexure and axial loads. Maximum area of reinforcement Outside lap locations.min = 0. only the width of the web is taken into account in calculating the value of b t. Selected symbols Symbol Ac As As2 As.2 (1) 0. ly M x Definition Cross sectional area of concrete Area of tension steel Area of compression steel Area of tension steel provided Area of tension steel required Effective flange width Mean width of the tension zone Width of beam or rib Width of rib web Effective depth Effective depth to compression reinforcement Design value of concrete compressive strength Characteristic cylinder strength of concrete Mean value of axial tensile strength Flange thickness Slab thickness Factor to take account of the different structural systems Effective span of member Distance between points of zero moment Limiting spantodepth ratio Spans of a twoway slab Design moment at the ULS Depth to neutral axis Limiting value for depth to neutral axis Lever arm Coefficient taking account of long term effects on compressive strength and of unfavourable effects resulting from the way load is applied Ratio of the redistributed moment to the elastic bending moment Partial factor for material properties Reference reinforcement ratio Required tension reinforcement at midspan to resist the moment due to the design loads (or at support for cantilevers) Required compression reinforcement at midspan to resist the moment due to the design loads (or at support for cantilevers) 1.5h but not more than 450 mm The exception is in areas with concentrated loads or areas of maximum moment where the following applies: ■ For the principal reinforcement: 2h but not more than 250 mm ■ For the secondary reinforcement: 3h but not more than 400 mm Where h is the depth of the slab. xmax z a cc d gm r0 r r’ As2/bd 7 23 .15 for reinforcement (gs ) 1. For slabs 200 mm thick or greater the bar size and spacing should be limited to control the crack width and reference should be made to section 7. 1.3. originally published as Getting started 5. req’d beff bt bmin bw d d2 fcd fck fctm hf hs K leff l0 l/d lx.4 in UK National Annex See Section 5. for calculation of effective flange width Figure 8 Effective flange width parameters Rules for spacing and quantity of reinforcement Minimum area of principal reinforcement The minimum area of principal reinforcement in the main direction is As.4)d where d ≤1.2.04 Ac Minimum spacing of reinforcement The minimum clear distance between bars should be the greater of: ■ Bar diameter ■ Aggregate size plus 5 mm ■ 20 mm Maximum spacing of reinforcement For slabs less than 200 mm thick the following maximum spacing rules apply: ■ For the principal reinforcement: 3h but not more than 400 mm ■ For the secondary reinforcement: 3. Slabs Figure 7 Definition of l0 . Eurocode 2) acc fck /gc Value bh Minimum area of secondary reinforcement The minimum area of secondary transverse reinforcement is 20% As. the maximum area of tension or compression reinforcement should not exceed As.3. For a Tbeam with the flange in compression.min . transverse reinforcement is not necessary where there is no transverse bending moment. where b t is the mean width of the tension zone (see Table 6).26 fc tm b t d/fy k but not less than 0.5 for concrete (gc ) Rfck /1000 As/bd 0.3.1.30 fck2/3 for fck ≤ C50/60 (from Table 3.4 (d – 0. prov As.0 for other phenomena (From UK National Annex) (d – z)/0.
9 THE INSTITUTION OF STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS/THE INSTITUTION OF CIVIL ENGINEERS. BS EN 1992–1–1: Eurocode 2: Design of concrete structures – Part 1–1 General rules and rules for buildings. The Concrete Centre. 2006. 2005. 3 NARAYANAN. R M & BROOKER. IStructE/ICE. 2005. 2006. 2006. O. BSI 2004. O. How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2: Introduction to Eurocodes.3. Slabs References 1 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. The Concrete Centre. Eurocode 2: Design of concrete structures. 7 WEBSTER. BSI. 1997. O. How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2: Deflection calculations. BS 8110–1: The structural use of concrete – Part 1. General rules – structural fire design. 2006. 2004. R & BROOKER. O. Manual for the design of concrete building structures to Eurocode 2. Code of practice for design and construction. BS EN 1992–1–2. 4 MOSS. R S & BROOKER. How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2: Beams. BSI. 5 BROOKER. The Concrete Centre. How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2: Flat slabs. The Concrete Centre. O. The Concrete Centre. 24 . 6 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. R M & BROOKER. 8 MOSS. 2 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2: Getting started.
Beams R M Moss O Brooker Designing to Eurocode 2 This chapter covers the analysis and design of concrete beams to Eurocode 21 which is essentially the same as with BS 81102 3 Design procedure in Fire resistance .4. Beams How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2 4.
asd . from the side of the beam to the corner bar should be a +10 mm except where bmin is greater than the values in columns C and F.6. for a distance of 0. showing nominal axis distances a and asd Figure 3 Simplified rectangular stress block for concrete up to class C50/60 from Eurocode 2 b x h>b h a d As Section Strain As2 d2 Neutral axis z εc ε sc 0.5 ( x/ l eff ) ) where: x is the distance of the section being considered from the centre line of the support.67 V Rd. in normal temperature design. is the greater of the effective lengths of the two adjacent spans. 3 The table is valid only if the detailing requirements (see note 4) are observed and.max .5 and 5. if both the following conditions exist: a there is no fixity at the end support.How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2 Table 1 Beam design procedure Step Task Further guidance Chapter in this publication Standard Note Table 2 Minimum dimensions and axis distances for beams made with reinforced concrete for fire resistance Standard fire resistance Minimum dimensions (mm) Possible combinations of a and bmin where a is the average axis distance and bmin is the width of the beam Simply supported beams Continuous beams A B C D E F G H 120 160 200 300 120 200 40 35 30 25 25 12a 150 200 300 400 150 250 55 45 40 35 35 25 200 240 300 500 200 300 450 500 65 60 55 50 45 35 35 30 280 350 500 700 280 500 650 700 90 80 75 70 75 60 60 50 R60 R90 R120 R240 bmin = a= bmin = a= bmin = a= bmin = a= Notes 1 This table is taken from BS EN 1992–1–2 Tables 5.req ( 0 ) is the area of reinforcement required for normal temperature design. and b the acting shear at normal temperature Vsd > 0.8x Fsc fcd F c asd b εs Fst Stress block and forces 2 26 .req (x) = A s.req (x) is the minimum area of reinforcement required at the section being considered but not less than that required for normal temperature design. redistribution of bending moments does not exceed 15%. A s.req ( 0 )( 1– 2. l eff 5 For fire resistances R120 – R240. A s. the width of the beam at the first intermediate support should be at least that in column F. 4 For fire resistance of R90 and above. Key a Normally the requirements of BS EN 1992–1–1 will determine the cover. the area of top reinforcement should not be less than the following: A s.3l eff from the centre line of each intermediate support. Figure 1 Section through structural member. 2 The axis distance.
Carry out analysis of beam to determine design moments (M) (see Table 3) Flexure The design procedure for flexural design is given in Figure 2. Beams Figure 2 Procedure for determining flexural reinforcement START member.094 (G + Q) l 0.0 Is K ≤ K ’ ? No Compression reinforcement required Yes Calculate lever arm z from z = d 1 + 1 – 3.60d – 0. provided the notes to the table are observed. G is the total of the ULS permanent actions. 3 Minimum span ≥ 0.086 Ql – 0. 2 Applicable to 3 or more spans only and where Qk ≤ G k.04 Ac for tension or compression reinforcement outside lap locations Table 5 z/d for singly reinforced rectangular sections K z/d K z/d Table 6 Minimum percentage of required reinforcement fck fctm Minimum percentage (0. Q is the total of the ULS variable actions.45 (G + Q) Concrete class ≤C50/60? Yes Determine K from K = M bd 2 fck No Outside scope of this publication Determine K’ from Table 4 or K’ = 0.min = where fck ≥ 25 fyk Calculate tension reinforcement required from As = K’fck bd 2 fyd z + As2 fsc fyd Key a Check maximum reinforcement requirements As.53 K ’ 2 Key a 0.63 (G + Q)a Shear 0. Table 3 may be used to determine bending moments and shear forces for beams.26 fctm / fyka) Key a Key a 3 27 .075 (G + Q) l 0. Notes 1 Redistribution of support moments by 15% has been included. 4 l is the span.26 fctm bt d As. this includes derived formulae based on the simplified rectangular stress block from Eurocode 2.066 Gl + 0.21 where d ≤ 1.55 (G + Q) may be used adjacent to the interior span.max = 0. No compression reinforcement required [ ] Obtain lever arm z from Table 5 or use z= d 2 [1 + 1 – 3. Table 3 Bending moment and shear coefficients for beams Moment Outer support At first interior support At middle of interior spans At interior supports 25% of span moment Gl + 0. It is a nominal (not minimum) dimension.95d Calculate compression reinforcement required from As2 = (K– K’) fck bd 2 fsc(d– d2) where fsc = 700 Table 4 Values for K ’ % redistribution d (redistribution ratio) K ’ Calculate tension reinforcement required from M As = fyd z [ x – d2 x ] ≤ fyd Check minimum reinforcement requirements (see Table 6) 0.4.50 (G + Q) 0.85 longest span.100 Ql – 0.18 d2 – 0. so the designer should ensure that: a ≥ cnom + f link + f bar /2 and asd = a + 10 mm Table 2 gives the minimum dimensions for beams to meet the standard fire periods.53 K ] ≤ 0.
y Longitudinal reinforcement in tension Vertical shear reinforcement Vertical shear Figure 5 Procedure for determining vertical shear reinforcement START Eurocode 2 introduces the strut inclination method for shear capacity checks.max . For simplicity and familiarity the method presented here is the simplified rectangular stress block.How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2 Figure 4 Strut inclination method Concrete strut in compression Eurocode 2 offers various methods for determining the stressstrain relationship of concrete. max cot y = 2.0? (see Table 7) No Redesign section Yes (cot y = 2. Eurocode 2 gives recommendations for the design of concrete up to class C90/105.27 N/mm2 (refer to Table 7).5 sin 1 0. for class C30/37 concrete the strut angle exceeds 21.max cot y = 1. Where shear reinforcement is required.5 or y = 21.68 4. As with BS 8110.02 6. (when cot y = 1.84 4.08 5.50 4.10 3. there is a maximum permitted shear capacity.max cot y = 2.38 8.20 fck (1 – fck /250) Deflection Calculate area of shear reinforcement: vEd bw Asw = s fywd cot y Check maximum spacing for vertical shear reinforcement: s l. The procedure for determining the shear capacity of a section is shown in Figure 5 (which includes UK NA values) and is in terms of shear stress in the vertical plane rather than a vertical force as given in Eurocode 2.75 d 7 Table 7 Minimum and maximum concrete strut capacity in terms of stress fck 20 25 28 30 32 35 40 45 50 v Rd. for concrete greater than class C50/60. depending on the shear force applied (see Figure 4). The angle of the concrete strut varies.00 Flanged beams 4 28 .43 3. For many typical beams the minimum angle of strut will apply (when cot y = 2. the stress block is modified.max coty = 2.15 4.5) Yes Determine y from: vEd y = 0. for class C30/37 the cylinder strength ( fck ) is 30 MPa.0 3. which is similar to that found in BS 8110 (see Figure 3). vEd = design shear stress [ vEd = VEd /(bwz) = VEd /(0 9 bwd)] Determine the concrete strut capacity v Rd.64 3.8º only when the shear stress is greater than 3.58 6.63 5.5? No Is v Ed < v Rd.72 7. then the angle of the concrete strut should be calculated.28 5.max cot y = 1.5 from Table 7 Is vEd < vRd.54 3. It is important to note that concrete strength is based on the cylinder strength and not the cube strength (i. vRd. whereas the cube strength is 37 MPa).8º) i. but this is not restricted to 5 MPa as in BS 8110.e. Determine vEd where .0 or y = 45º).51 v Rd.5 2.e. max = 0.97 5. In this method the shear is resisted by concrete struts acting in compression and shear reinforcement acting in tension. However.
6. F3 = 1.3. gG = 1.req’d (UK National Annex) Increase As. F2 = 7/leff ≤ 1.0 Determine Factor 3 (F3) F3 = 310/ss Where ss = Stress in reinforcement at serviceability limit state (see Figure 8) ss may assumed to be 310 MPa (i.35 c2 = 0.0 4.40% 0.8† (bf is flange breadth and bw is rib breadth) Otherwise F1 = 1.0 2.6. It is understood that it was the intention of the drafting committee that linear interpolation be used and this is in line with current UK practice. Beams Figure 6 Procedure for assessing deflection START Figure 8 Determination of steel stress 320 300 Unmodified steel stress. To determine stress in the reinforcement (ss).5 As.e.0 c2 = 0.80% 1.00% Percentage of tension reinforcement (A s. As.8. gG = 1. gG = 1.req 1 ss can be calculated from the expression: ss = ssu As.40% 1. gG = 1.00% 1. gG = 1.60% 0.2.4. gG = 1. ssu 280 260 240 220 200 180 Determine basic l/d and K from Figure 7 Determine Factor 1 (F1) For ribbed or waffle slabs F1 = 1 – 0.prov 1.0 Determine Factor 2 (F2) Where the slab span exceeds 7 m and it supports brittle partitions.prov d ( )( ) Figure 7 Basic spantoeffectivedepth ratios 36 Notes 34 32 30 28 26 24 22 20 18 16 14 12 0.35 c2 = 0.0 Otherwise F2 = 1. calculate the ratio Gk/Qk.25 Is basic l/d x K x F1 x F2 x F3 ≥ Actual l/d ? No Yes Check complete † The Eurocode is ambiguous regarding linear interpolation.0 Ratio Gk /Qk 3. read up the graph to the appropriate curve and read across to determine ssu .35 c2 = 0.80% fck = 50 fck = 45 fck = 40 fck = 35 fck = 32 fck = 30 fck = 28 fck = 25 fck = 20 1 2 3 r r r r r Span to depth ratio (l/d) r r r r r r r r r 2.60% 1.prov ≤ 1.0) Note: As.1 ((bf/bw) – 1) ≥ 0. gG = 1.35 c2 = 0.3.25 c2 = 0.25 c2 = 0.20% 1.2.req’d /bd) 5 29 .
0 beff As Calculate lever arm z from d z= 1 + 1 – 3.15 (l1 + l2 ) l0 = 0.How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2 Figure 11 Procedure for determining flexural capacity of flanged beams Figure 9 Definition of lo.1 l0) ≤ 0.18 d2 – 0. for calculation of effective flange width START l0 = 0.85 l1 Carry out analysis of beam to determine design moments.15 l2 + l3 l3 l1 Determine l0 (see Figure 9) and beff from: beff = (bw + beff1 + beff2) where beff1 = (0.25hf ? No Neutral axis in web Calculate moment capacity of flange from: MR.2 l0 ≤ b2 Note: The flange width at the support will be different from that at midspan.5 hf ) fywd Check longitudinal shear (see Figure 14) Fd + D Fd Fd + D Fd bw 6 30 .5 (d – z) beff1 bw beff2 Yes Is x ≤ 1.60d – 0.2b1 + 0.f As = + fywd (d – 0.53 K ≤ 0.5hf) and Kf = M – MR.f fck bw d 2 Neutral axis in flange.57 fck (beff – bw) hf (d – 0. M (see Table 3) l0 = 0. For symbols refer to Figures 9 and 10 Figure 10 Effective flange width parameters beff beff.f M – MR.1 l0) ≤ 0.2 Determine K from K = where b = bw at support b = beff in span M bd 2 fck b1 bw b1 b2 b2 b Figure 12 Placing of tension reinforcement in flanged cross section Determine K’ from Table 4 or K’ = 0.21 where d ≤ 1.7 l2 l2 l0 = 0.f = 0.95d 2 [ ] hf Calculate depth to neutral axis x from: x = 2. Design as rectangular section (Figure 2) and then check longitudinal shear (Figure 14) Figure 13 Notations for the connection between flange and web Fd Fd beff yf A Compressive struts Dx Sf Asf hf No Is Kf ≤ K ’? Redesign section A Longitudinal bar anchored beyond this projected point Yes Calculate area of reinforcement required from MR.2 l0 ≤ b1 beff2 = (0.2b2 + 0.1 beff.
160 fck (1 – fck/250) No Is v RD > vEd ? Determine y f from: yf = 0.25) Rules for spacing and quantity of reinforcement Minimum area of longitudinal reinforcement Table 8 Concrete strut capacity for longitudinal shear in flanged beams fck v Rd.195 fck (1 – fck/250) Determine the concrete strut capacity from Table 8 or from: vRd = 0.2 fck (1 – fck /250) No Is v RD > vEd ? Yes (cot y f = 2.4.0) Calculate area of transverse reinforcement from: vEd hf Asf = s fyd cot y f Yes (cot y f = 1. Beams Minimum area of shear reinforcement 4r r Figure 14 Procedure for determining longitudinal shear capacity of flanged beams Longitudinal shear Calculate the longitudinal shear stress from: vEd = D Fd/(hf D x) (see Figure 13) Is length of flange under consideration in tension? No Yes Determine the concrete strut capacity from Table 8 or from: vRd = 0.min fck r 20 25 28 30 32 35 40 45 50 7 31 .max Flange in compression Flange in tension Maximum area of longitudinal reinforcement Minimum spacing of reinforcement Table 9 Values for r w.5 sin1 vEd 0.
Beams Selected symbols Symbol Definition Value Symbol Definition Value d a d d a g g g r r R g r References 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 32 .4.
columns that do not contribute to resistance of horizontal actions) is shown in Table 1. CEng. highlighted the key differences between Eurocode 2 and BS 8110. the tabular method is based on nominal axis distance. Chapter 1.) A full list of symbols related to column design is given at the end of this chapter.How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2 5.info.6 The simplified method may give more economic columns. It sets out a design procedure to follow and gives useful commentary on the provisions within the Eurocode. Fire resistance Eurocode 2. including terminology. simplified or tabular methods for determining fire resistance of columns. DIC. Using tables is the fastest method for determining the minimum dimensions and cover for columns. Rather than giving a minimum cover. including values that are embedded in derived formulae. originally published as Introduction to Eurocodes 3. Column sizes should not be significantly different from those obtained using BS 8110.e. This assumes that the column dimensions have previously been determined during conceptual design or by using quick design methods. Steps 1 to 4 of Table 1 are covered by earlier chapters and the next step is therefore to consider fire resistance. It should also be noted that values from the UK National Annex (NA) have been used throughout this publication. This is the distance from the centre of the main Continues page 35 . There are. Part 1–2: Structural fire design5. Columns R Moss BSc. MICE. some restrictions and if these apply further guidance can be obtained from specialist literature.eurocode2. CEng. a (see Figure 1). however. for example those presented in Economic concrete frame elements 4. MIStructE O Brooker BEng. Design procedure A procedure for carrying out the detailed design of braced columns (i. PhD. MICE. Eurocode 2 does not contain the derived formulae. especially for small columns and/or high fire resistance periods. (Derivations can be found at www. this is because it has been European practice to give principles and general application rules in the codes and for detailed application rules to be presented in other sources such as textbooks or guidance documents. The layout and content of Eurocode 2 may appear unusual to designers familiar with BS 81102. gives a choice of advanced. MIStructE Designing to Eurocode 2 This chapter is intended to assist engineers with the design of columns and walls to Eurocode 21.
Table 2 Minimum column dimensions and axis distances for fire resistance Standard fire resistance Minimum dimensions (mm) Column width bmin/axis distance. a.fi Standard fire resistance Minimum dimensions (mm) Wall thickness/axis distance. of the main bars Column exposed on more than one side μfi = 0. Table 5.7) 155/25 Figure 1 Section through structural member. Key a Normally the requirements of BS EN 1992–1–1 will determine the cover.7. See BS EN 1992–1–2 Table 5. Key a Minimum 8 bars b Method B may be used which indicates 600/70 for R 240 and μfi = 0. 4 μfi is the ratio of the design axial load under fire conditions to the design resistance of the column at normal temperature conditions.fi ≤ 3m. Part 1–2. 3 The reinforcement area outside lap locations does not exceed 4% of the concrete REI 60 REI 90 REI 120 REI 240 Notes 130/10 a 140/25 160/35 270/60 cross section.7) Wall exposed on two sides ( μfi = 0.15b (or h).7) 140/10 a 170/25 220/35 350/60 may be taken as 50% of the actual length for intermediate floors and between 50% and 70% of the actual length for the upper floor column. cover for durability.A1.2a (method A) and is valid under the following conditions: 1 The effective length of a braced column under fire conditions lo. 4.2b 1 The table is taken from BS EN 1992–1–2 Table 5. BS EN 1992–1–2 BS EN 1992–1–1 Cl.8 BS EN 1992–1–1 section 6. 34 . of the main bars Wall exposed on one side ( μfi = 0. showing nominal axis distance a h≥b a 350/53 450/40 a 350/57 a 450/51a b 155/25 175/35 b 295/70 Table 3 Minimum reinforced concrete wall dimensions and axis distances for loadbearing for fire resistance Note The table is taken from BS EN 1992–1–2 Table 5.7.A1. μfi may conservatively be taken as 0. The eccentricity under fire conditions may be taken as that used in normal temperature design. Alternatively use method B (see Eurocode 2. a. 2 The first order eccentricity under fire conditions should be ≤ 0.2.5 R 60 200/36 300/31 R 90 300/45 400/38 a R 120 350/45 a 450/40 a R 240 450/75a μfi = 0.1 BS EN 1992–1–1 section 5 BS EN 1992–1–1 section 5.4.7 250/46 350/40 Column exposed on one side ( μfi = 0.4.2 (B) BS 8500: 2002 Approved Document B.1 BS EN 1991 (10 parts) and UK National Annexes UK NA to BS EN 1990 Tables NA. fire and bond requirements Analyse structure to obtain critical moments and axial forces Check slenderness Determine area of reinforcement required Check spacing of bars 2: Getting started 2: Getting started 1: Introduction to Eurocodes 2: Getting started 2: Getting started and Table 2 2: Getting started 2: Getting started and ‘Structural analysis’ section See Figures 2 and 3 See Figures 2 and 3 ‘Rules for spacing’ section Standard UK NA to BS EN 1990 Table NA.2b).1 BS EN 1992–1–1 sections 8 and 9 Note NA = National Annex. 2 See note 4 of Table 2. The value of lo.1 and NA.How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2 Table 1 Column design procedure Step Task Further guidance Chapter in the publication 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Determine design life Assess actions on the column Determine which combinations of actions apply Assess durability requirements and determine concrete strength Check cover requirements for appropriate fire resistance period Calculate min.
Determine slenderness.6 M02 + 0. Alternatively. MEd = M02 Use column chart (see Figure 9) to ﬁnd As required for NEd and MEd. For slender columns. Mtop.8. plastic analysis and nonlinear analysis. concrete section properties).8) as illustrated in Figure 3.8. λlim. from: l 15. M0e + M2.) The design bending moment is illustrated in Figure 4 and defined as: MEd = Max {M02. Determine the actions on the column using an appropriate analysis method. h/30. The ultimate axial load is NEd and the ultimate moments are Mtop and Mbottom (Moments from analysis) Structural analysis Determine the effective length. The latter is expected to be adopted in the UK. Guidance is given in Figure 3. For columns there are two tables given in Eurocode 2 Part 1–2 that Figure 2 Flow chart for braced column design present methods A and B. lo.7. For slender columns a nonlinear analysis may be carried out to determine the second order moments.5.4 M02 M2 = NEd e2 where NEd is the design axial load and e2 is deflection due to second order effects M01 and M02 should be positive if they give tension on the same side. A nonslender column can be designed ignoring second order effects and therefore the ultimate design moment. In this situation Annex C of Eurocode 2.3) or nominal curvature method (Cl 5. For the design of columns the elastic moments from the frame action should be used without any redistribution. the eccentricity will often exceed the limits for both methods A and B. e2. 20} (units to be in millimetres). using linear stressstrain relationships and assuming mean values of longterm elastic modulus. Table 4 3. Yes Is l ≥ l lim? Column is slender (refer to Figure 3). The calculation of the eccentricity. Linear elastic analysis may be carried out assuming cross sections are uncracked (i.e. It is a nominal (not minimum) dimension. consideration can be given to treating the column as a beam for determining the design fire resistance. limits of applicability are given in the notes. No Column is not slender. alternatively use the moment magnification method (Cl 5. Mbottom} + ei NEd Where ei = Max {lo/400. Figure 5 2. The type of analysis should be appropriate to the problem being considered. linear elastic analysis with limited redistribution. Similar data for loadbearing walls is given in Table 3. solve by iteration or by using RC Spreadsheet TCC53 from Spreadsheets for concrete design to BS 8110 and Eurocode 2 7 Check rules for spacing and quantity of reinforcement (see page 7) 35 . Figure 3 will also be required. Part 1–2 may be used. For columns supporting the uppermost storey. Column design A flow chart for the design of braced columns is shown in Figure 2. is not simple and is likely to require some iteration to determine the deflection at approximately midheight.46 lo/h for rectangular sections (h = overall depth) or l = 4. Mbottom} + ei NEd M02 = Max {Mtop. Mbottom} + ei NEd ei = Max {lo/400. START Initial column size may be determined using quick design methods or through iteration. l. Alternatively. M01 and M02 should have the same sign if they give tension on the same side. although method A has smaller limits on eccentricity than method B. using either: 1.15) from BS EN 1992–1–1 Determine ﬁrst order moments (see Figure 4) M01 = Min {Mtop. MEd = M02. e2. The following may be used: linear elastic analysis. Columns reinforcing bar to the surface of the member. and the designer should ensure that: a ≥ cnom + f link + f bar/2. h/30.4C lim = √n (See ‘Slenderness’ section on page 5 for explanation. M01 + 0. 20} (units to be in millimetres).4 M01 ≥ 0. from either: l = lo/i where i = radius of gyration or l = 3. Mbottom = Moments at the top and bottom of the column M0e = 0. Mbottom} + ei NEd M02 = Max {Mtop.5 M2} where M01 = Min {Mtop. Both are equally applicable. Expression (5. Method A is slightly simpler and is presented in Table 2.0 lo/d for circular sections (d = column diameter) Design moments Determine slenderness limit.
However. See section on creep (page 6) Σl 2EIb b ≥ 0. solve by iteration or by using RC Spreadsheet7 No Is As req’d & As. the value of k could be 0.16) will be beneficial as they are particularly suitable for incorporation into design software. the relative flexibilities at either end. This relative stiffness.7l d) l0 = l /2 e) l0 = l f) l/2 < l0 < l g) l0 > 2l M01 First order moments for ‘stocky’ columns l + = 0. can therefore be calculated as follows (provided the stiffness of adjacent columns does not vary by more than 15% of the higher stiffness): k= EIc lc From Figure 2 Determine Kr from Figure 9 or from Kr = (nu . The effective length is then lo = Fl.est = the estimated total area of steel Ac = the area of concrete Calculate Kh from Kh = 1 + b hef ≥ 1 where hef = the effective creep ratio b = 0. It is also generally accepted that Table 3.est where Ic.77l. relative axial force NEd = the design value of axial force nu = 1 + w nbal = 0. For a 400 mm square internal column supporting a 250 mm thick flat slab on a 7. F.4 w = As.1 Kr ( ) Revise value of As.5 M2} Use column chart to ﬁnd As. M01 + 0. In both expressions.5 M2 Additional second order moments for ‘slender’ columns M01 + 0.15) and (5.16) is for unbraced members. If the internal column had a notionally ‘pinned’ support at its base then lo = 0. and Eurocode 2 provides two expressions to calculate the effective length for these situations.11.15) is for braced members and Expression (5.5 M2 Total moment diagram for ‘slender’ columns 36 . k1 and k2. In the long term. k. lb are the column and beam lengths Once k1 and k2 have been calculated. should be calculated. which in practice requires the use of framework analysis software. can be established from Table 4 for braced columns. Ib are the column and beam uncracked second moments of area lc. based on the stiffness of the beams attached to either side of the column. In the edge condition k is effectively doubled and lo = 0.4 M02 M2 = NEd e2 MEd = Max {M02.How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2 Figure 3 Flow chart for slender columns (nominal curvature method) Effective length Figure 5 gives guidance on the effective length of the column.45d Es where Es = elastic modulus of reinforcing steel (200 GPa) e2 = 0. Expressions (5. the effective length factor.nbal) ≤ 1 where n = NEd / (Ac fcd).4 M01 ≥ 0.n) / (nu . Figure 4 Design bending moments M0e = 0. M0e + M2.req’d for NEd and MEd Alternatively. Alternatively. Expression (5.6 M02 + 0.67l. est? Yes Check detailing requirements M02 Figure 5 Effective lengths for isolated members M ei NEd M02 M0e M2 = NEd e2 M0e + M2 y y y M a) l0 = l b) l0 = 2l c) l0 = 0.est fyd / (Ac fcd) As.1 Calculate e2 from Kh fyd 2 l0 0. and therefore lo = 0.35 + fck/200 – λ/150 l = the slenderness ratio. The expression for k given in the Eurocode involves calculating the rotation of the restraining members.5 m grid.19 of BS 8110 may conservatively be used to determine the effective length factor. for most real structures Figures 5f) and 5g) only are applicable. PD 6687: Background paper to the UK National annex 8 provides a simplification.59l.
00175 0.95 0.0 = 2.99 1.77 0.92 0. is not known. C will have the largest impact on l lim and is the simplest to calculate.83 0.7 105 kNm rm = 1.82 0.00 5.88 0.00 Pinned 0.85 0.82 0.77 0.50 0.71 0.84 0.20 0.50 0. originally published as Beams 9) may also be used for the design of columns (see Figure 7).80 0.89 0.88 0.83 0.79 0.86 0. but including a calculation for C (see Figure 6).71 0.00175 strain at middepth of the section.73 0.62 0. Slenderness.00 9. C = 0.7 + 1.96 0. Figure 6 Calculating factor C 105 kNm 105 kNm 105 kNm 105 kNm rm = 1.74 0.00175 a) Pure compression b) When x > h c) When x < h d) General relationship h d ex 0.30 0.77 0.77 0.65 0.92 0.80 0.98 0. and may be obtained by drawing a line from the point of zero strain through the ‘hinge point’ of 0.77 0.94 0.81 0.75 0.0 a) C = 1.00175 x / ( x – h /2) x h/ 2 h x hinge point ex 0. Column design resistance Figure 7 Stress block diagram for columns esc n. axis ecu 2 As2 f cd d2 s sc dc x h ey a) Strain diagram As d2 s st b) Stress diagram For practical purposes the rectangular stress block used for the design of beams (see Chapter 4.71 0.79 0.00175 and 0.7 – rm (if rm is not known.76 0.98 0.4C Pinned 0.0 c) C = 1. the maximum allowable strain is assumed to lie between 0.7 may be used – see below) n = NEd / (Ac fcd) rm = M01/M02 M01.76 0.80 0. A = 0. Care should be taken in determining C because the sign of the moments makes a significant difference. B = 1.7.72 0.75 0.0 = 1. rm should be taken positive.78 0. for braced columns k2 k1 0.93 0.91 0. Figure 8 Strain diagrams for columns 0.69 0.73 0. However.84 0.77 0.00175 min hinge point 0.7 Of the three factors A.90 0. is 0. B and C.68 0.00 2.77 0.62 0.86 0.69 0. As an alternative.69 0.75 0.89 0.79 0.0035 (see Figure 8c).74 0.93 0.86 0.85 0.84 0.83 0.68 0. then second order effects may be ignored.86 0.7 .90 0.80 0.73 0.70 1.5.40 0.00 2. An initial assessment of l lim can therefore be made using the default values for A and B.88 0.82 0. When the neutral axis lies within the section depth then the maximum compressive strain is 0. M02 are the first order end moments.67 0.84 0.64 0. if the slenderness (l) is less than the slenderness limit (l lim).86 0.59 0.82 0. Columns Table 4 Effective length factor.7 .72 0.00 n n where A = 1/(1+0.7 may be used) B= (if ω.64 0.71 0.95 0.2 hef) (if hef is not known.81 0. reinforcement ratio. F.90 0.69 0.85 0.90 0.30 0.00 0. l lim = 20ABC ≤ 15.85 0.87 0.78 0.74 0.75 0.80 0.66 0.40 0.97 0.86 0.1 = 0.0035 max x 0.87 0.82 0.91 0.00 9.66 0.20 0. When the neutral axis falls outside the section (Figure 8b).76 0.73 0.00175 (see Figure 8a).0035. the maximum compressive strain for concrete classes up to and including C50/60.70 0.82 0.98 0.75 0.10 0.99 Slenderness Eurocode 2 states that second order effects may be ignored if they are less than 10% of the first order effects.80 0.0035 max 37 .77 0.67 0.10 0.84 0.94 0.1 may be used) C = 1.7 0 rm = 0 b) C = 1. M02 ≥ M01 If the end moments M01 and M02 give tension on the same side. l = lo/i where i = radius of gyration and slenderness limit.91 0.73 0.80 0.00 5.73 0.97 0.83 0.75 0.70 1.79 0. when the whole section is in pure compression. For unbraced members C should always be taken as 0.88 0.
8 0.1. RC Spreadsheet TCC53 from Spreadsheets for concrete design to BS 8110 and EC27) or column design charts (see Figures 9a to 9e) may be used. refer to Table 5 for rectangular sections NRd = Ac fcd + As fyd Continues page 41 1.1 0 0 0.g.7 0.6 0.8 0. Where ggbs exceeds 65% or where pfa exceeds 35%.2 d2/h = 0.0 0. (based on a rectangular stress block. these can only be solved iteratively and therefore either computer software (e.5 0.7 0.1) for which the cement strength class is required.4 N/bhfck 0.4 & 5.4 0.40 0.2 0.8.1 0 0. it may be necessary to determine the effective creep ratio hef (ref.25 0.3 1.9 0.3 0.7 Kr = 0. 3.30 0.0 0.y = Moment of resistance in the respective direction a = 2 for circular and elliptical sections. which was first developed by Breslaer.05 0. at the design stage it often not certain which class applies.6 0.3 Asfyk/bhfck 1.y = Design moment in the respective direction including second order effects in a slender column MRdz.3 0. A nomogram is provided in the Eurocode (Figure 3.9 0.15 0. Class N may be assumed.4).05 0. Cl.6 0.2 1. Where the ground granulated blastfurnace slag (ggbs) exceeds 35% of the cement combination or where pulverized fuel ash (pfa) exceeds 20% of the cement combination.8 0. however. Class R should be assumed.How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2 The general relationship is shown in Figure 8d).5 0.1 1.10 0.0 0.2 0.4 0. For concrete classes above C50/60 the principles are the same but the maximum strain values vary.39). ( ) + ( ) ≤ 1.8 for ≤ C50/60 x = Depth to neutral axis h = Height of section AsM /2 = [M – fcd b dc(h/2 – dc/2)] / [(h/2–d2) (σsc+σst)] where AsM = Total area of reinforcement required to resist moment Realistically.9 0.5 0.45 M/bh fck 38 . Two expressions can be derived for the area of steel required. Biaxial bending The effects of biaxial bending may be checked using Expression (5. see Figure 7) one for the axial loads and the other for the moments: AsN /2 = (NEd – fcd b dc) / (σsc – σst) where AsN = Area of reinforcement required to resist axial load NEd = Axial load fcd = Design value of concrete compressive strength σsc (σst) = Stress in compression (and tension) reinforcement b = Breadth of section dc = Effective depth of concrete in compression = lx ≤ h l = 0. Class S may be assumed. Figure 9a Column design chart for rectangular columns d2 /h = 0.05 Creep Depending on the assumptions used in the design.35 0.0 MRdz MRdy MEdz a MEdy a where MEdz.20 2 1. Generally.
0 0.7 0.3 1.2 0.10 1.1 0 0 0.5 0.35 0.1 0 0 0.10 N/bhfck 0.25 0.35 0.3 Asfyk/bhfck 0.20 2 Kr =1 0.2 1.7 0.05 0.0 0.7 0.6 0.2 0.3 1.5 0.15 0.9 0.5.8 0.5 0.9 0.0 0.3 0.5 0.10 0.8 1.5 0.8 0.4 0 1.6 0.6 0.3 0.7 0.2 0.4 0.10 0.8 0.6 0.4 0.6 d2/h = 0.9 0.1 0 Asfyk/bhfck 0.1 1.40 0.45 M/bh fck Figure 9c Column design chart for rectangular columns d2 /h = 0.9 0.2 0.7 0.4 0.15 1.3 0.25 0.6 0.2 0.30 0.7 0.4 0.15 N/bhfck 0.1 0.5 0.9 0.8 0.05 0.9 0.40 39 .3 0.2 1.20 M/bh fck 2 Kr =1 0.1 1.15 0.30 0.0 0.2 0.8 0.4 d2/h = 0. Columns Figure 9b Column design chart for rectangular columns d2 /h = 0.3 0.
5 0.5 0.4 d2/h = 0.9 Kr = 1 0 0 0.3 0.5 N/bhfck 0.25 0.6 0.5 0.7 0.8 0.1 0 0.8 0.1 0 0.2 0.4 0.3 0.20 0.8 0.9 0.8 0.20 0.7 0.7 0.0 0.20 0.0 0.05 0.6 0.3 0.3 Asfyk/bhfck 1.7 0.35 Figure 9e Column design chart for rectangular columns d2 /h = 0.9 0.7 0.30 0.3 0.4 0.20 1.4 0.1 1.9 0.8 0.15 M/bh f ck 2 0.10 0.0 0.25 0.How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2 Figure 9d Column design chart for rectangular columns d2 /h = 0.9 d2/h = 0.10 0.2 0.8 0.6 0.2 1.4 0.0 0.1 0.5 0.7 0.6 N/bhfck 0.2 0.30 40 .6 0.5 0.2 1.15 M/bh fck 2 0.2 0.1 0 0.3 Asfyk/bhfck 1.25 0.3 0.1 1.6 0.2 1.4 0.2 0.05 0.9 Kr = 1 0 0.25 1.3 1.
002Ac Exp.0 2.7 1. As B c C d e2 ei Es fcd fck αcc fck/γc Walls When the section length of a vertical element is four times greater than its thickness it is defined as a wall.11 NEd rm x z αcc β εyd γm l l lim μfi Minimum reinforcement requirements The recommended minimum diameter of longitudinal reinforcement in columns is 12 mm. However. If required selfcompacting concrete may be used for particularly congested situations. However. Further guidance can be found in Selfcompacting concrete. The minimum area of longitudinal reinforcement in columns is given by: As. the principles of CIRIA Report 10810 may be followed. Alternatively the strut and tie method may be used (section 6. hef h (∞.7 should always be used in Expression (5.y+z} The maximum of values x or y + z 41 . Unbraced columns There is no comment made on the design of sway frames in Eurocode 2. The value for C of 0.10 NEd/fyd ≥ 0.45 d) Kr Kh 1/r0 Note Linear interpolation may be used.7 – rm 1 / (1+0. ■ Bending will be critical about the weak axis. 1. it gives guidance on the effective length of an unbraced member in Expression (5.5 for concrete (γc) lo/i M01/M02 (d – z)/0.4 M02 200 GPa (1/r)lo/c 10 (for constant crosssection) 1.5 1.16).4 M01 ≥ 0.0 for other phenomena (From UK NA) 0.12N) The diameter of the transverse reinforcement should not be less than 6 mm or one quarter of the maximum diameter of the longitudinal bars.M02 M2 M0e MEd MEqp n nbal nu Rules for spacing and quantity of reinforcement Maximum areas of reinforcement In Eurocode 2 the maximum nominal reinforcement area for columns and walls outside laps is 4% compared with 6% in BS 8110. However.to) MEqp /MEd 0. where the reinforcing bars should be spaced to ensure that the concrete can flow around them. The design of walls does not differ significantly from that for columns except for the following: ■ The requirements for fire resistance (see Table 3).1. The design moments should be assessed including second order effects.fi /NRd h(∞.2 hef) bh Value Table 5 Value of a for rectangular sections NEd /NRd a 0.min = 0.1 1.0 0. (9. this area can be increased provided that the concrete can be placed and compacted sufficiently.5 of the Eurocode).4 NEd/(Acfcd) 0. ■ There are different rules for spacing and quantity of reinforcement (see below). There is no specific guidance given for bending about the strong axis for stability.6 M02 + 0.13N).to) ω x Max.0 1/r0 1/r a A Ac εyd/(0.85 for flexure and axial loads.4 Mechanical reinforcement ratio Absolute value of x As fyd/(Ac fcd) NEd. however reference can be made to the Handbook to EN 1992–1–2 6.4 1 +ω NEd e2 0. l lo Kr Kh M01.15 for reinforcement (γs) 1.5. Columns Selected symbols Symbol Definition Reference curvature Curvature Axis distance for fire resistance Factor for determining slenderness limit Cross sectional area of concrete Area of total column reinforcement Factor for determining slenderness limit Factor depending on curvature distribution Factor for determining slenderness limit Effective depth Second order eccentricity Eccentricity due to geometric imperfections Elastic modulus of reinforcing steel Design value of concrete compressive strength Characteristic cylinder strength of concrete Clear height of compression member between end restraints Effective length Correction factor depending on axial load Factor taking into account creep First order moments including the effect of geometric imperfections M02 ≥ M01 Nominal second order moment Equivalent first order moment Ultimate design moment First order bending moment under quasipermanent loading Relative axial force Value of n at maximum moment of resistance Factor to allow for reinforcement in the column Ultimate axial load Moment ratio Depth to neutral axis Lever arm Coefficient taking account of long term effects on compressive strength and of unfavourable effects resulting from the way load is applied Factor Design value of strain in reinforcement Partial factor for material properties Slenderness Slenderness limit Degree of utilisation in a fire Effective creep ratio Final creep coefficient to Cl 3.35 + fck/200 – λ/150 fyd/Es 1. {x. The tabular method for fire resistance design (Part 1–2) does not explicitly cover unbraced columns.
How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2: Introduction. At a distance greater than the larger dimension of the column above or below a beam or slab these spacings can be increased by a factor of 1. 2004. Eurocode 2: Design of concrete structures. A review. General rules – structural fire design. 10 CIRIA. due 2006. The Society. BS EN 1992–1–2. BSI. 2006. R M. Eurocode 2: Design of concrete structures.5. Structural use of concrete – Part 1. where crack control is important. aggregate size plus 5 mm or 20 mm. No longitudinal bar should be further than 150 mm from transverse reinforcement (links) in the compression zone. BCA 1997. BSI. R M & BROOKER. The minimum area of horizontal reinforcement in walls is the greater of either 25% of vertical reinforcement or 0.min = 0. 2005. 1984.001 Ac. References 1 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. Background paper to the UK National Annex to BS EN 1992–1–1 and BS EN 1992–1–2. Code of practice for design and construction. 2004. Report 102: Design of shear wall buildings. R S & BROOKER. 2006. ■ 60% of the lesser dimension of the column. 8 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. 3 NARAYANAN. BSI. Spreadsheets for concrete design to BS 8110 and Eurocode 2.67. 2 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. O.e.5. 6 DEPARTMENT OF COMMUNITIES AND LOCAL GOVERNMENT. 42 . CIRIA. How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2: Beams. The minimum clear distance between the bars should be the greater of the bar diameter. O. 5 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. ■ 240 mm. The Concrete Centre. General rules and rules for buildings. C H. BSI. due 2006. version 3. Handbook to EN 1992–1–2. Economic concrete frame elements. 11 THE CONCRETE SOCIETY. BS 8110–1.002Ac Half of this area should be located at each face. 2005. However. 4 GOODCHILD.3(1)) should not exceed: ■ 12 times the minimum diameter of the longitudinal bars. 2004. DCLG. C H WEBSTER. Particular requirements for walls The minimum area of vertical reinforcement in walls is given by: As. The distance between two adjacent vertical bars should not exceed the lesser of either three times the wall thickness or 400 mm. The Concrete Centre. Columns Spacing requirements for columns The maximum spacing of transverse reinforcement (i. 9 MOSS. 7 GOODCHILD. BS EN 1992–1–1. The Concrete Centre. Technical Report No 62: Selfcompacting concrete. links) in columns (Clause 9. early age thermal and shrinkage effects should be considered explicitly.
There are two parts to Eurocode 7. Guidance on the design of retaining walls can be found in Chapter 9. the serviceability limit states (SLS) should be satisfied. which supersedes several current British Standards including BS 59302. It should be emphasised that this publication covers only the design of simple foundations.How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2 6. Geotechnical design is covered by Eurocode 71. BS 80023 and BS 80044. Therefore it should not be relied on for general guidance on this Eurocode. The design of any foundation consists of two components. FIStructE O Brooker BEng. although it is considered good practice to record that they have all been considered. originally published as Introduction to Eurocodes5. UPL Loss of equilibrium due to uplift by water pressure. the geotechnical design and the structural design of the foundation itself. which are a small part of the scope of Eurocode 7. STR Internal failure or excessive deformation of the structure or structural member. However. HYD Failure caused by hydraulic gradients. Limit states The following ultimate limit states (ULS) should be satisfied for geotechnical design. Part 1: General rules and Part 2: Ground investigation and testing. MICE. they each have their own combinations of actions. CEng. Foundations R Webster CEng.g. At the time of writing it is anticipated that the National Annex (NA) for Part 1 will be published in July 2007. In addition. for some foundations (e. . flexible rafts) the effect of the interaction between the soil and structure may be critical and must also be considered. Geotechnical Categories Eurocode 7 recommends three Geotechnical Categories to assist in establishing the geotechnical design requirements for a structure (see Table 1). (For an explanation of Eurocode terminology please refer to Chapter 1. GEO Failure due to excessive deformation of the ground. The new Eurocode marks a significant change in geotechnical design in that limit state principles are used throughout and this should ensure consistency between the Eurocodes. It will usually be clear that one of the limit states will govern the design and therefore it will not be necessary to carry out checks for all of them. MIStructE Eurocode 7: Geotechnical design Scope All foundations should be designed so that the soil safely resists the actions applied to the structure. The essential features of Eurocode 7.) EQU Loss of equilibrium of the structure. Part 1 relating to foundation design are discussed in this chapter.
25 Effective cohesion Undrained shear strength gcu 1.0 1.35 Gka 1. the geotechnical material partial factors being the same as for Combination 2 in Table 3.How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2 It is anticipated that structural engineers will take responsibility for the geotechnical design of category 1 structures.j. and that geotechnical engineers will take responsibility for category 3 structures.A1. The decision on which approach to use for a particular country is given in its National Annex.5b Qk – 1.0 1.0 1.5b co. For the SLS.4 Unconfined strength Bulk density gc’ 1.925d x 1.sup and Gk.ic Qk. For this Design Approach (excluding pile and anchorage design) there are two sets of combinations to use for the STR and GEO ultimate limit states.1 of the UK NA to BS EN 1990 (or see Table 3 of Chapter 1) The value of j in the UK NA to BS EN 1990 is 0.1 – 1.25 gqu 1.5b Qk – 1. Eurocode 7 does not give any advice on whether the characteristic. This decision will very much depend on individual circumstances.3b Qk. The partial factors for soil resistance to sliding and bearing should be taken as 1.5b co. STR/GEO ultimate limit state – persistent and transient design situations Combination Expression reference from BS EN 1990 Permanent actions Unfavourable Favourable Leading variable action Accompanying variable actions Main (if any) Others Combination 1 (Application of combination 1 (BS EN 1997) to set B (BS EN 1990)) Exp.925 Table 3 Partial factors for geotechnical material properties Angle of shearing resistance (apply to tan h) Symbol Combination 1 Combination 2 gh 1. The values for the partial factors Table 1 Geotechnical categories of structures Category 1 2 3 Description Small and relatively simple structures Conventional types of structure and foundation with no difficult ground or loading conditions All other structures Risk of geotechnical failure Negligible No exceptional risk Abnormal risks Examples from Eurocode 7 None given Spread foundations Large or unusual structures Exceptional ground conditions Table 2 Design values of actions derived for UK design.0 Gka 1.i Combination 2 (Application of combination 2 (BS EN 1997) to set C (BS EN 1990)) Exp. to be applied to the actions for these combinations of partial factors are given in Table 2 and the partial factors for the geotechnical material properties are given in Table 3.0 Gka 1. Where the prescriptive method is used for spread foundations (see page 3) then the characteristic values should be adopted.10b) 1.4 gg 1.0 44 .5 co. frequent or quasipermanent combination should be used.0 Gka 1.1c Qk – 1. (6. (6. gQ. Combination 1 will generally govern the structural resistance.ic Qk.10) Exp. (6.10a) Exp. Therefore.i Where the variation in permanent action is not considered significant Gk. The geotechnical design of category 2 structures may be undertaken by members of either profession.35 Gka 1.0 1.0 1. The partial factors to be applied to the actions at the EQU limit state are given in Table 4. and Combination 2 will generally govern the sizing of the foundations.5b co.i = 0 and the variable actions should be ignored The value of c o can be obtained from Table NA.i 1.ic Qk.inf may be taken as Gk Where the action is favourable.35 Gka 0.i b Qk.10) Key a b c d 1.0 for both combinations.0 Gka 1.i 1.3b co. For Methods of design and combinations There has not been a consensus amongst geotechnical engineers over the application of limit state principles to geotechnical design. (6.0 Gka 1. to allow for these differences of opinion. Eurocode 7 provides for three Design Approaches to be used for the ULS. In the UK Design Approach 1 will be specified in the National Annex.j.
or loose sand and gravel Compact sand Medium dense sand Loose sand Cohesive soils Very stiff boulder clay and hard clay Stiff clay Firm clay Soft clay and silt Very soft clay and silt Note These values are for preliminary design purposes only. This concept of increasing the factor of safety on bearing resistances to control settlement may still be used with the prescriptive method. j. The prescriptive method may be used where calculation of the soil properties is not possible or necessary and can be used provided that conservative rules of design are used. Spread foundations The geotechnical design of spread foundations (e. calculations are carried out for each limit state. Further information on design combinations can be found in Chapter 1.5b Qk – 1.i 1. inf may be taken as Gk b Where the action is favourable. Alternatively. j. At the ULS.90 Gka Table 5 Presumed allowable bearing values under static loading (from BS 8004) Category Noncohesive soils Type of soil Dense gravel. Part 1 and this gives three methods for design: ■ Direct method – calculation is carried out for each limit state. Therefore reference can continue to be made to Table 1 of BS 8004 (see Table 5) to determine presumed (allowable) bearing pressures for category 1 structures and preliminary calculations for category 2 structures.5c co. settlement will be the governing criterion. For most spread foundations in the UK. It should also clearly state whether the values are applicable to SLS or ULS and whether they are for Combination 1 or Combination 2. EQU ultimate limit state – persistent and transient design situations Combination Permanent actions Expression reference Unfavourable Favourable Exp. Table 4 Design values of actions derived for UK design.1 Gka 0. Groundwater level assumed to be below the base of the foundation. depending on whether the project is in Geotechnical Category 1. interpretation of the ground investigation report.10) Key a Where the variation in permanent action is not considered significant Gk. It is likely that this report will require input from more than one consultant. The exception is for soft clays where Eurocode 7 requires settlement calculations to be undertaken. the presumed bearing resistance to allow for settlement can be calculated by the geotechnical designer and included in the geotechnical design report. the bearing resistance of the soil should be checked using partial factors on the soil properties as well as on the actions.A1. monitoring and maintenance of the works.g. At the SLS the settlement of the foundations should be calculated and checked against permissible limits. The report should contain details of the site. ■ Prescriptive method in which a presumed bearing resistance is used.1 of the UK NA to BS EN 1990 Leading Accompanying variable variable actions action Main Others (if any) 1. gQ. originally published as Introduction to Eurocodes5. (6. traditionally ‘allowable bearing pressures’ have been used to limit settlement. and is not discussed further here). 2 or 3.6. Susceptible to longterm consolidation settlement 45 . Foundations direct methods of calculation the frequent combination can be used for sizing of foundations and the quasipermanent combination can be used for settlement calculations.i c Qk. The foundation design recommendations should include bearing resistances and characteristic values for soil parameters. even if it is only a single sheet. or medium dense sand and gravel Loose gravel. i = 0 and the variable actions should be ignored c The value of co can be obtained from Table NA. sup and Gk. geotechnical design recommendations and advice on supervision. Presumed allowable bearing value (kN/m2) > 600 < 200 to 600 < 200 > 300 100 to 300 < 100 300 to 600 150 to 300 75 to 150 <75 Not applicable Remarks Width of foundation not less than 1 m. strip and pad foundations) is covered by section 6 of Eurocode 7. When using the direct method. or dense sand and gravel Medium dense gravel. Geotechnical design report A geotechnical design report should be produced for each project. ■ Indirect method – experience and testing used to determine serviceability limit state parameters that also satisfy all relevant limit states (included in Eurocode 7 mainly to suit French design methods.
therefore it is only necessary to ensure that the concrete shear stress capacity without shear reinforcement (vRd. Both beam shear and punching shear should then be checked at the locations shown in Figure 3. The moments and shear forces should be assessed using the STR combination: 1. ■ Beam shear strength.5 L 3 e P P 6e 1+ L L e e = M/ P L = width of base P e P e P P 2e P M M L SLS pressure distributions ULS pressure distribution 46 .5 Qk STR combination 1 (Exp.10b) from the Eurocode. (See Chapter 4. originally published as Beams8 for an explanation of how to design shear reinforcement. It should also be noted that the ULS pressure distribution diagram will be rectangular and not trapezoidal. It is not usual for a pad foundation to contain shear reinforcement. the designer may increase the depth of the base.10)) However.10a) or (6. Eurocode 2–1–16). excessive rotation of the base).How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2 A flow chart showing the design process for shallow foundations is given in Figure 1.48).1 Gk for a destabilising permanent action) Qk. Use prescriptive method. If the basic shear stress is exceeded. Reinforced concrete pads Where the pad foundations require reinforcement the following checks should be carried out to ensure: ■ Sufficient reinforcement to resist bending moments. the amount of main reinforcement could be increased or.9 Gk + 1. No Design foundation (structural design) using the worst of Combinations 1 and 2 (ULS) for actions and geotechnical material properties. The critical bending moments for design of bottom reinforcement are located at the column faces. Combination 2 will usually govern.g. Figure 2 Pressure distributions for pad foundations M P 1 L P 6e L or 2P 1. shear links could be provided. the EQU limit state should also be checked. there may be economies to made from using Expressions (6.w is the destabilising characteristic variable wind action Figure 1 Procedures for depth of spread foundations Partial factors for the soil parameters used to determine the resistances can be obtained from Table 3 above (Combination 2). less desirably. (6.35 Gk + 1. Where there is a moment applied to the foundation.w EQU combination where: Gk is the stabilising characteristic permanent action (Use 1. the following combination should be used (the variable imposed action is not considered to contribute to the stability of the structure): 0.c – see Table 6) is greater than applied shear stress (vEd = VEd/(bd)). If the eccentricity is greater than L/6 at SLS. The pressure distribution under the base should be assessed to ensure that the maximum pressure does not exceed the bearing resistances obtained from the geotechnical design report at both EQU and GEO ultimate limit states (see Figure 2). then the pressure distribution used to determine the settlement should be modified because tension cannot occur between the base and the soil.) START Obtain soil parameters from Ground Investigation report Yes Design using direct method? No Size foundation (geotechnical design) using the worst of Combinations 1 or 2 (ULS) for actions and geotechnical material properties. For punching shear the ground reaction within the perimeter may be deducted from the column load (Expression (6. Size foundation (geotechnical design) using SLS for actions and presumed bearing resistance Is there an overturning moment? Yes Check overturning using EQU limit state for actions and GEO Combination 2 for material properties.5 Qk. Assuming the potential overturning of the base is due to the variable action from the wind. Alternatively. In this case the designer should satisfy himself that there will be no adverse consequences (e. ■ Punching shear strength.
63 0. Notes 1 Table derived from: vRd. Check complete.00% 1.67 0.43 0.78 0.72 1. Foundations Design for punching shear Eurocode 2 provides specific guidance on the design of foundations for punching shear. or provide punching shear reinforcement required.52 0.707 500 0.40 0. but it is generally acceptable to check at d and 2d.38)) (u0deff) where u0 is perimeter of column (see Clause 6.54 0.25% 1.85 1.73 0. The control perimeter will have to be found through iteration.50% 0.64 0.98 32 1.34 0. (6.5 where k = 1 + √(200/d) ≤ 2 and r I = √(rIy +r Iz) ≤ 0.447 0.58 0. where r l exceed 0.57 0.77 1.) Figure 3 Shear checks for pad foundations Yes No shear reinforcement required. (6.44 0.56 0.69 1. The procedure for determining the punching shear requirements is shown in Figure 4.64 0.10 45 1.35 0.max (refer to Table 7) No Is vEd.47 0. Table 6 vRd.61 0.632 600 0.035 k1.69 0. In Eurocode 2 the shear perimeter has rounded corners and the forces directly resisted by the ground should be deducted (to avoid unnecessarily conservative designs). a spreadsheet could be used (e. and this varies from that given for slabs.75% 1.74 1.max < vRd.51). Beam shear faces Punching shear perimeters.36 0.73 0.59 0.c directly. r Iy = Asy/(bd) and r Iz = Asz/(bd) 2 This table has been prepared for fck = 30.82 0. MPa Figure 4 Procedure for determining punching shear capacity for pad foundations START Determine value of factor β (β =1.69 0.12 k (100r I fck)(1/3) ≥ 0.67 0.c = 0.5 fck0.51 0. refer to Expressions (6.6.55 0.14 50 1.max? Redesign foundation Yes Determine value of vEd.40% the following factors may be used: Determine concrete punching shear capacity vRd (without shear reinforcement) from 2dvRd.44 0. (Not recommended for foundations. For eccentrically loaded bases.62 0.35 0.68 0. The critical perimeter should be found iteratively.54 0.43 0.c/a (Refer to Table 6 for vRd.48 0. (design shear stress) from: vEd = (VEd – DVEd) (u1deff) where u1 is length of control perimeter (refer to Figure 5).70 1.63 0.53 0. it will usually be between d and 2d a For depths greater than 1000 calculate vRd.68 1.55 0.42) from BS EN 1992–1–1 for other cases) Determine value of vEd.02 35 1.66 0.50 0.45 0.38 0.62 0.47 0.5 for columns at base edges) deff = (dy + dz)/2 where dy and dz are the effective depths in orthogonal directions rl Effective depth. Alternatively.577 700 0.535 800 0.05 40 1. refer to Exp.g.80 1.94 28 0.19 Is vEd < vRd at critical perimeter? No Either increase main steel.25% 0.77 0.0 when applied moment is zero.49 0.500 900 0.c) fck Factor 25 0.65 0.70 0.58 0.4.60 0.59 0.816 Determine value of vRd.max (design shear stress at face of column) from: vEd.02. (load within deducted from V Ed) Figure 5 Typical basic control perimeters around loaded areas 2d 2d u1 2d u1 bz d Bends may be required d h by 47 .c resistance of members without shear reinforcement.50% 1.66 0.51 0.471 1000a 0.00% k Key 0. spreadsheet TCC81 from Spreadsheets for concrete design to BS 8110 and Eurocode 2 7).65 0.71 0.62 0. d (mm) 300 400 0.73 0.max = β(VEd – DVEd) (from Exp.75% ≥2.38) to (6.
and specialist software will be required.4 and 6. the designer should increase the depth of the base. Alternatively.00 hF f /5 Beam shear 5 d from column face f /5 Punching shear 5 2d from column face f Figure 7 Shear reinforcement for pilecaps A s contributing to shear capacity Stress zone 45 o Figure 8 Dimensions for plain foundations a a bF 48 . For rafts bearing on granular subgrades or when contiguouspiled walls or diaphragm perimeter walls are present. However.g. flexure reference should be made to Chapter 4. Both beam shear and punching shear should then be checked as shown in Figure 6.02 6. the ground may be modelled as a series of Winkler springs.97 5.28 5. less desirably. the amount of main reinforcement could be increased or. For beam shear. The actions on the piles must be clearly conveyed to the pile designer.38 8. Thinner.58 6. and these should be broken down into the unfactored permanent actions and each of the applicable variable actions (e. As a minimum. more flexible rafts or those with a complex layout may require the application of a finite element or grillage analysis. Large radius bends may be required. this approach is unlikely to be valid. The only difference in approach lies in the selection of an appropriate method for analysing the interaction between the raft and the ground so as to achieve a reasonable representation of their behaviour. max fck 20 25 28 30 32 35 40 45 50 vRd. simplified approaches such as yield line or the flat slab equivalent frame method may be employed. Alternatively.e.72 7. where the critical bending moments for the design of the bottom reinforcement are located at the column faces. The pile designer can then carry out the structural and geotechnical design of the piles. For further guidance on designing for Table 7 Values for vRd.8° to the horizontal. originally published as Beams 8. a full anchorage should be provided from the inner face of piles. for cohesive subgrades.6. The strut angle y should be at least 21. Whatever simplifications are made. Where moments are applied to the pilecap the EQU combination should also be used to check the piles can resist the overturning forces. a truss analogy may be used. A pilecap may be treated as a beam in bending. When assessing the shear capacity in a pile cap. spantothickness greater than 10) with a fairly regular layout.max 3. imposed and wind actions). Figure 6 Critical shear perimeters for piles Piled foundations For the purpose of this chapter it is assumed that the pile design will be carried out by a specialist piling contractor.68 4. once an estimation of the variations in bearing pressure has been obtained from a geotechnical specialist. individual elastic raft reactions should equate to the applied column loads.50 4. Care should be taken that main bars are fully anchored. the design resistances in Table 6 may be used.How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2 Raft foundations The basic design processes for rafts are similar to those for isolated pad foundations or pilecaps. only the tension steel placed within the stress zone should be considered as contributing to the shear capacity (see Figure 7). shear links could be provided. These EQU loads must also be clearly conveyed to the pile designer and procedures put in place to ensure the piles are designed for the correct forces.5 of Eurocode 2–1–1. For stiffer rafts (i. this is covered in Sections 5. note that y should be measured in the plane of the column and pile. If the basic shear stress is exceeded.
2 3. as advised in Clause 9. hF. Eurocode 2 allows plain concrete foundations to contain reinforcement for control of cracking. 1.2% is provided in each face. Minimum area of principal reinforcement The minimum area of reinforcement is As.c vRd.1. The UK National Annex recommends that 0. req’d d deff fcd fck fctm Gk h leff M Qk Qk. The possibility of splitting forces. (see Figure 8) may be calculated from: where: sgd = the design value of the ground bearing pressure fctd = the design concrete tensile strength from Exp. or ■ 20 mm.0013bt d (see Table 8).1 Minimum % (0. fctm 2.4 (d – 0.2 (1) 0.15% 0.17% 0.16% 0.w VEd vEd VRd.85 for reinforced concrete. Maximum area of reinforcement Except at lap locations.0 See Section 5.26 fctm bt d/fyk but not less than 0. (3.04 Ac Minimum spacing of reinforcement The minimum spacing of bars should be the greater of: ■ Bar diameter. ■ The minimum foundation depth. ■ Aggregate size plus 5 mm.min = 0.8 2. Eurocode 2) (dy + dz) /2 acc fck /gc Value bh Rules for spacing and quantity of reinforcement Crack control Refer to Chapter 2.26 fctm /fyka ) 0.85 for flexure and axial loads. Selected symbols Symbol Ac As As.c vRd.4 of Eurocode 2–1–1.18% 0. originally published as Getting started 9.16) For many situations this is unlikely to offer any savings over the current practice of designing for hf ≥ a. c0 c1 c2 49 . the value of acc. the maximum area of tension or compression reinforcement.6 as opposed to 0. ■ In compression. For pile caps the side face may be unreinforced if there is no risk of tension developing.max x xmax z acc Definition Cross sectional area of concrete Area of tension steel Area of tension steel provided Area of tension steel required Effective depth Average effective depth Design value of concrete compressive strength Characteristic cylinder strength of concrete Mean value of axial tensile strength Characteristic value of permanent action Overall depth of the section Effective span of member Design moment at the ULS Characteristic value of a variable action Characteristic value of a variable wind action Design value of applied shear force Design value of applied shear stress Design value of the punching shear resistance without punching shear reinforcement Design value of the punching shear stress resistance without punching shear reinforcement Design value of the maximum punching shear resistance along the control section considered Depth to neutral axis Limiting value for depth to neutral axis Lever arm Coefficient taking account of long term effects on compressive strength and of unfavourable effects resulting from the way load is applied (From UK National Annex) Factor for determining punching shear stress Ratio of the redistributed moment to the elastic bending moment Partial factor for material properties Reference reinforcement ratio Required tension reinforcement at midspan to resist the moment due to the design loads (or at support for cantilevers) Factor for combination value of a variable action Factor for frequent value of a variable action Factor for quasipermanent value of a variable action fck/1000 As l bd 0. b d gm r0 rl Deep elements For deep elements the advice in Eurocode 2 for the side faces of deep beams may be followed.8 4. should be taken as 0. 3. The distance between bars should not exceed the lesser of twice the beam depth or 300 mm.5 3.max = 0.1. should not exceed As.30 fck2/3 for fck ≤ C50/60 (from Table 3.6.13% 0.3.8.21% longterm effects applied to design compressive strength (see Cl.6). the coefficient taking account of Table 8 Minimum percentage of reinforcement required fck 25 28 30 32 35 40 45 50 Key a Where fyk = 500 MPa.4)d where d ≤1. may need to be considered. Foundations Plain concrete foundations Strip and pad footings may be constructed from plain concrete provided the following rules are adhered to.2. prov As.0 for other phenomena (d – z)/0.20% 0.9 3.0 3.6 2.14% 0.
BS EN 1997: Eurocode 7: Geotechnical design. 5 NARAYANAN. 3 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. 9 BROOKER. 2006. Foundations References 1 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. General rules and rules for buildings. 2 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. 2004. BS 5930: Code of practice for site investigation. BSI. C H & WEBSTER R M.6. O. 4 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. BS 8004: Code of practice for foundations. 2005. BSI. 1999. The Concrete Centre. 6 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. BS EN 1992–1–1. R M & BROOKER. 1994. How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2: Getting started. The Concrete Centre. 2006. BS 8002: Code of practice for earth retaining structures. How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2: Introduction to Eurocodes. O. R S & BROOKER. 50 . BSI. O. The Concrete Centre. BSI. The Concrete Centre. 8 MOSS. Spreadsheets for concrete design to BS 8110 and Eurocode 2. Eurocode 2: Design of concrete structures. 1986. 7 GOODCHILD. How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2: Beams. BSI (2 parts). 2005. version 3.
This has arisen because it has been European practice to give principles in the codes and for the detailed application to be presented in other sources such as textbooks. MICE. PhD. More detailed advice on determining design life. a process which is essentially the same as when using BS 81102. the following guidance can be used for the design of flat slabs. material properties. Design procedure A procedure for carrying out the detailed design of flat slabs is shown in Table 1. originally published as Getting started 4. This assumes that the slab thickness has previously been determined during conceptual design. methods of analysis. originally published as Introduction to Eurocodes3.info). It should be noted that values from the UK National Annex (NA) have been used throughout this publication. loading. MIStructE O Brooker BEng. CEng. and control of crack widths can be found in Chapter 2. including terminology. Concept designs prepared assuming detailed design would be to BS 8110 may be continued through to detailed design using Eurocode 2. MIStructE Designing to Eurocode 2 This chapter covers the analysis and design of concrete flat slabs to Eurocode 21. However. the layout and content of Eurocode 2 may appear unusual to designers familiar with BS 8110. . The following methods may be used: ■ Equivalent frame method ■ Finite element analysis ■ Yield line analysis ■ Grillage analogy The Eurocode gives further advice on the equivalent frame method in Annex I and designers used to BS 8110 will find this very familiar.eurocode2. Chapter 1. MICE. Flat slabs R Moss BSc. Analysis Using Eurocode 2 for the analysis of flat slabs is similar to using BS 8110. Eurocode 2 does not contain the derived formulae or specific guidance on determining moments and shear forces. minimum concrete cover for durability and bond. including values that are embedded in derived formulae (derivations can be found at www. CEng. highlighted the key differences between Eurocode 2 and BS 8110. Once the bending moments and shear forces have been determined. DIC. A list of symbols related to flat slab design is given at the end of this chapter.How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2 7.
in the normal temperature design.A1. It is a nominal Table 1 Flat slab design procedure Step Task (not minimum) dimension. at least 20% of the total top reinforcement in each direction over intermediate supports required by BS EN 1992–1–1 should be continuous over the full span. 2 The axis distance is to the centre of the outer layer of reinforcement. this includes derived formulae based on the simplified rectangular stress block from Eurocode 2.2 (B) NA to BS EN 1992–1–1 BS 8500: 2002 Approved Document B. 4 For fire resistance of R90 and above. This reinforcement should be placed in the column strip. 3 The table is valid only if the detailing requirements (see note 4) are observed and. a 15a 25 35 50 180 200 200 200 52 .3 BS EN 1992–1–1 Annex I 1.A1.9.1 BS EN 1991 (10 parts) and National Annexes NA to BS EN 1990 Tables NA. some restrictions and if these apply further guidance can be obtained from specialist literature6. redistribution of bending moments does not exceed 15%. fire and bond requirements Analyse structure to obtain critical moments and shear forces Design flexural reinforcement Check deflection Check punching shear capacity Check spacing of bars Check resistance to moment transfer from column to slab 2: Getting started 2: Getting started 1: Introduction to Eurocodes 2: Getting started 2: Getting started 2: Getting started and Table 2 2: Getting started 2: Getting started and Table 3 See Figure 1 See Figure 3 See Figure 6 2: Getting started – NA = National Annex Table 2 Minimum dimensions and axis distances for reinforced concrete slabs Standard fire resistance Minimum dimensions (mm) Slab thickness.1 BS EN 1992–1–1 Section 7. Part 1–2: Structural fire design5. Axis distance.4 BS EN 1992–1–1 Section 6.How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2 Fire resistance Eurocode 2.1 and NA. There are. Rather than giving a minimum cover. gives a choice of advanced. Further guidance Chapter in this publication Standard NA to BS EN 1990 Table NA. Flexure The design procedure for flexural design is given in Figure 1. BS EN 1992–1–1: Section 5 BS EN 1992–1–1 Cl 4. simplified or tabular methods for determining the fire resistance.2(5) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 Note Determine design life Assess actions on the slab Determine which combinations of actions apply Determine loading arrangements Assess durability requirements and determine concrete strength Check cover requirements for appropriate fire resistance period Calculate min.4. a. however. the tabular method is based on nominal axis distance. so the designer should ensure that a ≥ cnom + f link + f bar /2 The requirements for flat slabs are given in Table 2. hs REI 60 REI 90 REI 120 REI 240 Notes 1 This table is taken from BS EN 1992–1–2 Table 5. This is the distance from the centre of the reinforcing bar to the surface of the member.1 BS EN 1992–1–1 Section 5 BS EN 1992–1–1 Section 6.4 BS EN 1992–1–1 Section 7. cover for durability. Using tables is the fastest method for determining the minimum dimensions and cover for flat slabs. 5 There are three standard fire exposure conditions that may need to be satisfied: R Mechanical resistance for load bearing E Integrity of separation I Insulation Key a Normally the requirements of BS EN 1992–1–1 will determine the cover.2. Where appropriate Table 3 may be used to determine bending moments for flat slabs.
787 0. whereas the cube strength is 35 MPa). for concrete strength greater than class C50/60.13 0.856 0.182a 0.04Fl 0.16 0.21 where d ≤ 1.816 0.4.90 0.13% 0. Qk. but is considered to be good practice Table 6 First Interior interior spans support Interior supports Minimum percentage of reinforcement required fck 25 28 30 32 35 40 45 50 Key a Where fyk = 500 MPa Continuous End End support span 0 0.153 0.11 0.26 fctm /fyka ) 0.60d – 0.18 0.8 4.20% 0.05 0.14 0.6 2. Flat slabs Figure 1 Procedure for determining flexural reinforcement START Carry out analysis of slab to determine design moments (M) (Where appropriate use coefficients from Table 3).16% 0.06 0.04 Ac for tension or compression reinforcement outside lap locations Table 3 Bending moment coefficients for flat slabs End support/slab connection Pinned End End support span Moment Notes 1 Applicable to slabs where the area of each bay exceeds 30 m2. Eurocode 2 offers various methods for determining the stressstrain relationship of concrete. Cl.26 fctm bt d As.7.95d is not a requirement of Eurocode 2.00 0. ≤ 1.12 z/d 0.168 0.4.208a 0. minimum 3 spans 4 Based on 20% redistribution at supports and no decrease in span moments Key a Limiting z to 0.max = 0.5 3.85 longest span.8 2.18 d 2 – 0. It is important to note that concrete strength is based on the cylinder strength and not the cube strength (i. the stress block is modified.20 z/d 0.70 K’ 0.15% 0.168 to ensure ductile failure Calculate tension reinforcement required from M As = fyd z Table 5 z/d for singly reinforced rectangular sections K ≤ 0. which is similar to that found in BS 8110.120 Yes No compression reinforcement required z= Obtain lever arm z from Table 5 or d 1 + 1 – 3. l is the effective span 3 Minimum span > 0.1 requires the designer to concentrate the reinforcement over the columns.09 0.843 0.944 0.08 0.902 0.85 0.14% 0.086Fl – 0.15 0. for class C28/35 the cylinder strength is 28 MPa.2 3.21% 53 .17 0.95d 2 [ ] Key a It is often recommended in the UK that K´ should be llimited to 0.19 0.934 0.075Fl –0.063Fl fctm 2.10 0.75 0. 9.min = where fyk ≥ 25 fyk Check maximum reinforcement requirements.137 0.1.25 Gk and qk ≤ 5 kN/m2 2 F is the total design ultimate load. For simplicity and familiarity the method presented here is the simplified rectangular stress block (see Figure 2).1 Minimum % (0.0 3.e.924 0.063Fl – 0.913 0. Designers using grillage. The Eurocode gives recommendations for the design of concrete up to class C90/105. As.802 0.9 3.086Fl 0.950a 0.53 K ≤ 0. Whichever method of analysis is used.891 0.17% 0.868 0.18% 0.771 Check minimum reinforcement requirements (see Table 6) 0.80 0.07 0. 9. Annex I of the Eurocode gives recommendations for the equivalent frame method on how to apportion the total bending moment across a bay width into column and middle strips to comply with Cl. Compression reinforcement required – not recommended for typical slabs Concrete class ≤C50/60? Yes Determine K from: Determine K from: K = M bd 2 fck No Outside scope of this publication Determine K’ from Table 4 or K’ = 0.0 No Is K ≤ K ’ ? Table 4 Values for K ’ % redistribution 0 10 15 20 25 30 d (redistribution ratio) 1. However.880 K 0.830 0. finite element or yield line methods may also choose to follow the advice in Annex I to meet this requirement.
60% 0. originally published as Deflection calculations 7. F3 = 1.00% Percentage of tension reinforcement (A s /bd) Determine Factor 3 (F3) F3 = 310/ss Where ss = Stress in reinforcement at serviceability limit state (see Figure 5) ss may be assumed to be 310 MPa (i. ■ Standard factors for edge and corner columns that allow for Figure 2 Simplified rectangular stress block for concrete up to class C50/60 from Eurocode 2 moment transfer (b) are greater in Eurocode 2.80% 2. 2 Compression reinforcement.5 r0 –1 r where r ≤ r 0 and where r > r 0 .0 19 17 15 0.5/leff Otherwise F2 = 1. The main differences are as follows.req’d (UK National Annex) Increase As.38) to (6. F2 = 8. will usually be the support reaction at the ultimate limit state.5 fck r 0 + 3. In principle the design for punching shear in Eurocode 2 and BS 8110 is similar.2).0) Note: As.80% 1.5 As. has been taken as 0.46) of the Eurocode to give more efficient designs. However.How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2 Deflection Eurocode 2 has two alternative methods of designing for deflection. VEd. either by limiting spantodepth ratio or by assessing the theoretical deflection using the Expressions given in the Eurocode. Figure 4 Basic spantoeffectivedepth ratios for flat slabs 39 Figure 3 Procedure for assessing deflection Spantoeffectivedepth ratio (l/d) 37 35 33 31 29 27 25 23 21 START Determine basic l/d from Figure 4 fck fck fck fck fck fck fck fck fck = = = = = = = = = 50 45 40 35 32 30 28 25 20 Determine Factor 1 (F1) For ribbed or waffle slabs F1 = 1 – 0.1 ((bf/bw) – 1) ≥ 0.40% 1.40% 0.2 = K 11 + r d l 1. r’. 54 .prov Notes 1 This graph assumes a simply supported flat slab (K = 1. Punching shear The design value of the punching shear force. It is understood that this 3 Curves based on the following expressions: l 1.prov ≤ 1. The spantodepth ratios should ensure that deflection is limited to span/250 and this is the procedure presented in Figure 3. The Background paper to the UK National Annex 8 notes that the spanto depth ratios are appropriate where the structure remains propped during construction or until the concrete attains sufficient strength to support the construction loads.8† (bf is flange breadth and bw is rib breadth) Otherwise F1 = 1. Is basic l/d x F1 x F2 x F3 ≥ Actual l/d ? No Yes Check complete † The Eurocode is ambiguous regarding linear interpolation.5 m and it supports brittle partitions. The latter is dealt with in detail in Chapter 8.60% 1.20% 1. It can generally be assumed that early striking of formwork will not significantly affect the deflection after installing the cladding and/or partitions9.00% 1.e.0 Determine Factor 2 (F2) Where the slab span exceeds 8.5 fck r 0 + = K 11 + ( r – r ’) d was the intention of the drafting committee and is in line with current UK practice. b can be calculated directly from Expressions (6. [ [ fck fck 12 ( ) ] ] r’ r0 1.
For further explanation refer to How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2: Introduction to Eurocodes3. ss can be calculated from the expression: ss = ssu ( As. Other techniques are available for increasing punching shear resistance and these are covered in a best practice guide10.5 fywd.22) allows them to be laid out in a radial or cruciform pattern and gives spacing requirements for both. read up the graph to the appropriate curve and read across to determine ssu .ef = b VEd/(vRd. ■ With Eurocode 2 the permissible shear resistance when using shear links is higher. Determine layout of punching shear reinforcement (see ‘Spacing of punching shear reinforcement’ Section and Figure 9).c d) c2 is the factor for quasipermanent value of a variable action.max = β VEd /(ui deff) where u1 is length of control perimeter (see Figure 8) Determine concrete punching shear capacity (without shear reinforcement).25 c2 = 0. gG = 1.8.c)sr u1/(1. Flat slabs ■ In Eurocode 2 the maximum value of shear at the column face is not limited to 5 MPa.75vRd. The procedure for determining the punching shear requirements is shown in Figure 6. gG = 1. the reinforcement can be laid on a grid provided the spacing rules are followed.c from Table 8 where r l = (r ly r lz)0. the point at which no shear reinforcement is required can be calculated directly and then used to determine the extent of the area over which shear reinforcement is required.max from Table 7 320 300 Unmodified steel stress.max = β VEd /(ui deff) where ui is perimeter of column deff = (dy + dz)/2 (dy and dz are the effective depths in orthogonal directions) Figure 5 Determination of steel stress Determine value of vRd.7.35 c2 = 0.max? Yes No Redesign slab Determine value of vEd. calculate the ratio Gk/Qk . taken over a width equal to column width plus 3d each side. (design shear stress) from: vEd.0 2.35 c2 = 0. START However.46) of the Eurocode) Determine value of vEd.0 4.req As.6. vRD. gG = 1.ef = 250 + 0.) 1.35 3.ef) where sr is the radial spacing of shear reinforcement (see Figure 9) fywd. gG = 1.5 (r ly.25 deff ≤ fywd (see Table 9) To determine stress in the reinforcement (ss).6. gG = 1.35 c2 = 0. although such designs may not be economic or desirable. 55 . ■ It is assumed that the reinforcement will be in a radial arrangement.max (design shear stress at face of column) from: vEd.2.0 Is vEd > vRd.max ≤ vRd.3. ssu 280 260 240 220 200 180 Is vEd.25 Yes Determine area of punching shear reinforcement per perimeter from: Asw = (vEd – 0. ■ The control perimeters for rectangular columns in Eurocode 2 have As an alternative to using shear links. ■ Where shear reinforcement is required the procedure in Eurocode 2 is simpler. Determine value of factor β (refer to Figure 7 or Expressions (6. r lz are the reinforcement ratios in two orthogonal directions for fully bonded tension steel.25 c2 = 0.c? No Punching shear reinforcement not required c2 = 0.3.0 Ratio Gk/Qk c2 = 0. gG = 1. Eurocode 2 (Figure 6. proprietary shear stud rails may be used. gG = 1. Figure 6 Procedure for determining punching shear capacity rounded corners. and depends on the concrete strength used.38) to (6.2.prov )( ) 1 d Determine the length of the outer perimeter where shear reinforcement not required from: uout.
59 0.78 0.707 1.48 0.49 0.63 0.56 0.85 0. The minimum area of a link leg for vertical punching shear reinforcement is 1.02 5.94 0.19 F can be obtained from Table 10 Maximum area of reinforcement Outside lap locations.59 0.82 0.58 0.73 0.75 0.78 0.67 0. max 3.69 0.73 0.516 fck Factor 25 0.59 0.51 0.min /(sr.57 0.79 0.5Asw. Where r I exceeds 0.85 0.71 0.756 1.69 0.ef deff 150 175 200 225 250 275 300 325 350 fywd.52 0.667 1.91 0.How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2 Table 7 Values for vRd.51 0.5 where k = 1 + R(200/d) ≤ 2 and r I = R(r ly + r lz) ≤ 0.632 1.68 0.71 0.ef 288 294 300 306 313 319 325 331 338 Figure 7 Recommended standard values for b Corner column b = 1.80 0.85 0.5 Edge column Internal column b = 1.00% 1.52 0.5h but not more than 450 mm by The exception is in areas with concentrated loads or areas of maximum 56 .25% 0.853 1.05 6.71 k Notes 1 Table derived from: v Rd.64 0.c resistance of members without shear reinforcement.66 0.min = 0.68 0.48 4.78 0.50% 1.71 0.80 0.st)/F where sr = the spacing of the links in the radial direction st = the spacing of the links in the tangential direction 0.55 0. MPa rI Effective depth.83 0.94 28 0.81 0.66 0.05 4.90 0.54 0.40 0.65 0.36 0.63 0.000 1.87 0. r ly = Asy/(bd) and r lz = Asz/(bd) 2 This table has been prepared for fck = 30.12 k (100r I fck)1/3 ≥ 0.min ≥ (sr.61 0.40% the following factors may be used: 2.47 0. the maximum area of tension or compression reinforcement should not exceed As.74 0.77 0.42 6.05 40 1.14 50 1.98 32 1.max = 0.08fck½/fyk which can be rearranged as Asw.57 0.75% 0.10 45 1. max fck 20 25 28 30 32 35 40 45 50 vRd.15 Table 8 vRd.65 0.4 b = 1.67 0.4 Ac Figure 8 Typical basic control perimeters around loaded areas Minimum spacing of reinforcement u1 2d u1 2d The minimum spacing of bars should be the greater of: ■ Bar diameter ■ Aggregate size plus 5 mm ■ 20 mm bz Maximum spacing of main reinforcement For slabs less than 200 mm thick the following maximum spacing rules apply: ■ For the principal reinforcement: 3h but not more than 400 mm ■ For the secondary reinforcement: 3.64 7.77 0.53 0.0013b d (see Table 6).00% 0.20 Table 9 Values for fywd.55 0.38 0.45 0.02.894 1.48 0.83 0.75% 1.c = 0.71 0.68 ≥ 2.56 0.41 0.02 35 1.26 fctm bt d/fyk but not less than 0.st) ≥ 0.816 1.43 0.72 0.75 0.79 0.62 0.75 5.76 0. d (mm) ≤200 225 250 275 300 350 400 450 500 600 750 Rules for spacing and quantity of reinforcement Minimum area of reinforcement The minimum area of longitudinal reinforcement in the main direction is As.5 fck 0.74 0.45 0.62 0.89 0.64 0.47 0.73 0.61 0.25% 1.50% 0.54 0.50 0.035 k1.70 0.87 0.943 1.82 0.31 4.75 0.577 1.
5 for concrete (gc ) Rfck /1000 As/bd 0.5d A 0.7.5 d sr x xmax z a cc ≤1.4 Factor. k is 1. ■ The tangential spacing of the links should not exceed 2d for any other perimeter.85 for flexure and axial loads.75d A ≤1.30 fck2/3 for fck ≤ C50/60 (from Table 3.3. for determining Asw. ■ The tangential spacing of the links should not exceed 1. In this case the reinforcement should be placed in the zone 0. 1.4 in UK National Annex See Section 5. ■ The distance between the face of the column and the nearest shear reinforcement should be less than 0.3.3d to 1.5.4 (d – 0.5d within 2d of the column face. Flat slabs Table 10 Factor.75d (see Figure 9). unless the perimeter at which reinforcement is no longer required is less than 3d from the face of the column.5d. For slabs 200 mm thick or greater.0 for other phenomena (From UK National Annex) (d – z)/0.A As2/bd 57 . F 1875 1772 1712 1657 1585 1482 1398 1326 Spacing of punching shear reinforcement Where punching shear reinforcement is required the following rules should be observed.2 (1) 0.3 of the Eurocode or Chapter 2. Figure 9 Punching shear layout hs Outer perimeter of shear reinforcement Outer control perimeter u out fck has been taken as 500 MPa Selected symbols Symbol Ac As As2 As.5d from the face of the column.5 d (2 d if > 2d from column) st d sr ≤ 0. min fck 25 28 30 32 35 40 45 50 Note moment where the following applies: ■ For the principal reinforcement: 2h but not more than 250 mm ■ For the secondary reinforcement: 3h but not more than 400 mm Where h is the depth of the slab.4)d where d ≤1. ■ It should be provided between the face of the column and kd inside the outer perimeter where shear reinforcement is no longer required. prov As.0 See Table N 7. the bar size and spacing should be limited to control the crack width and reference should be made to Section 7. F. ■ The radial spacing of the links should not exceed 0. Eurocode 2) acc fck /gc Value bh K leff l/d M ≤ 0.1.15 for reinforcement (gs ) 1. req’d b d d2 fcd fck fctm Definition Cross sectional area of concrete Area of tension steel Area of compression steel Area of tension steel provided Area of tension steel required Width of slab Effective depth Effective depth to compression reinforcement Design value of concrete compressive strength Characteristic cylinder strength of concrete Mean value of axial tensile strength Slab thickness Factor to take account of the different structural systems Effective span of member Limiting spantodepth ratio Design moment at the ULS Depth to neutral axis Limiting value for depth to neutral axis Lever arm Coefficient taking account of long term effects on compressive strength and of unfavourable effects resulting from the way load is applied Ratio of the redistributed moment to the elastic bending moment Partial factor for material properties Reference reinforcement ratio Required tension reinforcement at midspan to resist the moment due to the design loads (or at support for cantilevers) Required compression reinforcement at midspan to resist the moment due to the design loads (or at support for cantilevers) 1. originally published as Getting started.75 d ≤ 0.2.5 d Outer control perimeter kd gm r0 r r’ Section A . ■ There should be at least two perimeters of shear links.
BSI. P. 2004. 8 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION.7. How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2: Deflection calculations. Construct. O. BCA. 3 NARAYANAN. BS 8110–1: The structural use of concrete – Part 1. BS EN 1992–1–2. R S & BROOKER. 10 BRITISH CEMENT ASSOCIATION. How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2: Introduction to Eurocodes. 2 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. BSI. O. General rules – structural fire design. Flat slabs References 1 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. DCLG. How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2: Getting started. due 2006. 4 BROOKER. Code of practice for design and construction. 2004. 2003. Eurocode 2: Design of concrete structures – General rules and rules for buildings. O. BSI. 2006. The Concrete Centre. Background paper to the UK National Annex to BS EN 1992–1–1 and BS EN 1992–1–2. Handbook to BS EN 1992–1–2. 2001. 58 . Prefabricated punching shear reinforcement for reinforced concrete flat slabs. 2005. 9 PALLETT. 2005. 5 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. BS EN 1992–1–1. 6 DEPARTMENT OF COMMUNITIES AND LOCAL GOVERNMENT. 1997. BSI. The Concrete Centre. 7 WEBSTER. Guide to flat slab formwork and falsework. The Concrete Centre. Eurocode 2: Design of concrete structures. 2006. R & BROOKER.
The main factors are: • Concrete tensile strength • Creep • Elastic modulus Other factors include: • Degree of restraint • Magnitude of loading • Time of loading • Duration of loading • Cracking of the concrete • Shrinkage • Ambient conditions • Secondary loadpaths • Stiffening by other elements . as listed below: ■ When an estimate of the deflection is required. which makes the prediction of deflection difficult. ■ When deflection limits of span/250 for quasipermanent actions (see reference 5 for Eurocode terminology) or span/500 for partition and/or cladding loads are not appropriate. There are a number of reasons for this. However. These factors are also often timerelated and interdependent. which are appropriate and economic for the vast majority of designs. ■ Increases in concrete strength resulting from the need to improve both durability and construction time. What affects deflection? There are numerous factors that affect deflection. MIStructE Methods for checking deflection This chapter describes the use of Eurocode 21 to check deflection by calculation. ■ When the design requires a particularly shallow member.How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2 8. Slabs3 and Flat slabs4. Overview In the past structures tended to be stiff with relatively short spans. there are situations where direct calculation of deflection is necessary. Deflection calculations R Webster CEng. CEng. FIStructE O Brooker BEng. including: ■ The increase in reinforcement strength leading to less reinforcement being required for the ultimate limit state (ULS) and resulting in higher service stresses in the reinforcement. MICE. 4 and 7. more flexible structures have resulted. and leading to concrete that is more stiff and with higher service stresses. ■ To determine the effect on deflection of early striking of formwork or of temporary loading during construction. Further guidance on the spantoeffectivedepth method is given in Chapters 3. As technology and practice have advanced. The alternative method for complying with the code requirements is to use the deemedtosatisfy spantoeffectivedepth ratios. direct calculation of deflection may provide a more economic solution. originally published as Beams2.
Ecm. It also advises on the appropriate relative humidity to use in Figure 3. In Eurocode 2 the concrete tensile strength. is a mean value (which is appropriate for deflection calculations) and increases as the compressive strength increases.6 – h/1000)fctm > fctm where fctm. Where the ground granulated blastfurnace slag (ggbs) content exceeds 35% of the cement combination or where fly ash (pfa) exceeds 20% of the cement combination. Creep is usually considered in the design by modifying the elastic modulus using a creep coefficient. This is an advancement when compared with BS 8110 where the tensile strength is fixed for all concrete strengths. ■ The requirement to produce economic designs for slabs whose thicknesses are typically determined by the serviceability limit state (SLS) and which constitute 80% to 90% of the superstructure costs. fctm. Eurocode 2 gives recommended values for the 28day secant modulus. (in Table 3. Eurocode 2 gives advice on the calculation of creep coefficients in detail in Annex B.fl = (1. For a low restraint layout the following expression may be used for the concrete tensile strength: fctm. ■ Client requirements for longer spans and greater operational flexibility from their structures. The more important factors are discussed in detail below. which depends on the age at loading.How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2 ■ A greater understanding of structural behaviour and the ability to analyse that behaviour quickly by computer.fl = Mean flexural tensile strength of reinforced concrete fctm = Mean tensile strength of concrete Figure 1 Typical floor layouts Elastic modulus The elastic modulus of concrete is influenced by aggregate type. The longterm elastic modulus should be taken as: a) Favourable layout of restraining walls (low restraint) b) Unfavourable layout of restraining walls (high restraint) 60 . The effective elastic modulus under sustained loading will be reduced over time due to the effect of creep. Typical examples of wall layouts are given in Figure 1. h. A layout of walls with high restraint will decrease the effective tensile strength. Factors affecting deflection An accurate assessment of deflection can only be achieved if consideration is given to the factors that affect it. The cement strength class is required in the assessment of creep. It is often recommended that the design value of the concrete tensile strength for a low restraint layout is taken as the average of fctm. in particular relative humidity. size of the member and ambient conditions. however. The degree of restraint to shrinkage movements will influence the effective tensile strength of the concrete. Generally. Tensile strength The tensile strength of concrete is an important property because the slab will crack when the tensile stress in the extreme fibre is exceeded. Where ggbs exceeds 65% or where pfa exceeds 35% Class S may be assumed. workmanship and curing conditions.fl and fctm.1. at the design stage it is often not clear which class should be used. For high restraint fctm should be used. These factors mean that some judgement is required to determine an appropriate elastic modulus. Class R should be assumed. to allow for unintentional restraint. Creep Creep is the timedependant increase in compressive strain in a concrete element under constant compressive stress. Class N may be assumed.1) and makes recommendations for adjustments to these values to account for different types of aggregate.
then the degree of cracking (z) calculated for the frequent combination should also be used for the quasipermanent combination. It can generally be assumed that early striking of formwork will not greatly affect the deflection after installing the cladding and/or partitions. construction loads) may be carried by the suspended floor below7.LT = Ec28/(1 + h) where Ec28 = 28day tangent modulus = 1. but not for Figure 2 Loading history for a slab – an example 14 12 10 8 6 4 2 0 0 50 100 150 200 250 300 h b c a d Loading sequence Slab struck a 1st slab above cast b 2nd slab above cast c 3rd slab above cast d g f e Load (kN/m) e f g h Floor finishes applied Partitions erected Quasipermanent variable actions Frequent variable actions Duration (days) 61 . Often the critical situation is when the slab is struck. A loading sequence is shown in Figure 2. (Note that with Eurocode 2. Smaller loads are imposed when further slabs are cast above. The point at which cracking occurs is determined by the moments induced in the slab and the tensile strength of the concrete. h relates to a 28day shortterm elastic modulus. the quasipermanent combination should be used. The loads are then increased permanently by the application of the floor finishes and erection of the partitions.) However. Deflection calculations Ec.8. (See Chapter 1. Once the slab has cracked its stiffness is permanently reduced. Commercial pressures often lead to a requirement to strike the formwork as soon as possible and move on to subsequent floors. for the purpose of determining whether the slab might have cracked. Tests on flat slabs have demonstrated that as much as 70% of the loads from a newly cast floor (formwork. This critical loading stage corresponds with the minimum value of K. where: K = fctm Loading sequence The loading sequence and timing may be critical in determining the deflection of a suspended slab because it will influence the point at which the slab will crack (if at all) and is used to calculate the creep factors for the slab.05 Ecm h = Creep factor.) The assessment of the longterm Evalue can be carried out more accurately after the contractor has been appointed because they should be able to identify the concrete supplier (and hence the type of aggregates) and also the construction sequence (and hence the age at first loading). it is likely that the quasipermanent combination will be exceeded during the lifetime of the building and. whereas a ‘true’ creep factor would be associated with the modulus at the age of loading. depending on the construction method. the installation of the cladding and/or partitions. for the purpose of deflection calculation. ^W 0. the variable actions are applied to the structure and. which shows that in the early stages relatively high loads are imposed while casting the slab above. the frequent combination may be critical. originally published as Introduction to Eurocodes5 for further information on combinations of actions.5h where W = The serviceability loading applied up to that stage fctm = The concrete tensile strength at that stage Where the frequent combination is the critical load stage. rather than after. Finally. or when the load of the slab above is applied. with the minimum of propping. Cracking Deflection of concrete sections is closely linked to the extent of cracking and the degree to which cracking capacity is exceeded. This is because the deflection affecting partitions will be smaller if the slab becomes ‘cracked’ before. The loading sequence may vary. which increases with age. It is therefore necessary to find the critical loading stage at which cracking first occurs. wet concrete.
Ic (see Panel 2) ■ Calculate the flexural curvature: MQP MQP 1 rfl = g E e Ic + ]1 – g g E e Iu ■ Calculate the curvature due to shrinkage strain 1/rcs (see Panel 2) ■ Calculate the total curvature. and these are based on the advice in TR58 Deflections in concrete slabs and beams8.5(Mcr/M)2 [z = 0 for uncracked situation] Use these critical values of fctm and z for subsequent stages. the element will not crack at any stage. Panel 1 Determining long term elastic modulus of elasticity Repeat at 1/20 points for all three loading stages Determine the curvature of the slab ■ When the slab is cracked calculate the following properties at the load stage being considered. repeat calculations for frequent combination and for loading at time of installation of partitions and/or cladding. where Eeff = Ec28/(1+h) Wn = Serviceability load at stage n h = Creep coefficient at relevant loading time and duration Estimate deflections: ■ Overall deflection (quasipermanent combination) ■ Deflection affecting partitions/cladding (Frequent combination deflection less deflection at time of installation) 62 . Figure 3 illustrates the principles of the method and shows how the factors affecting deflection are considered in the rigorous deflection calculations. relative humidity and the size and shape of the member. The Concrete Centre has produced a number of spreadsheets that use this method to carry out deflection calculations for a variety of slabs and beams9. If. xc (see Panel 2) • Second moment of area for cracked condition. Methods for calculating deflections Two methods for calculating deflection are presented below. Rigorous method The rigorous method for calculating deflections is the most appropriate method for determining a realistic estimate of deflection. Further information can be found in the best practice guide Early striking and improved backpropping6. ■ Does the moment at the critical load stage exceed the cracking moment? • If yes. the z value at that stage should be carried forward to all subsequent stages. In this case the principles in Figure 3 should be applied if credible results are to be obtained. Mcr from: Mcr = fctm Iu/(h – xu). Calculate longterm elastic modulus. the element is cracked at all subsequent stages.1 Eeff. xu (see Panel 2) • Second moment of area for uncracked condition. The effect of shrinkage in an asymmetrically reinforced section is to induce a curvature that can lead to significant deflection in shallow members. • If no. 4 Eeff. ae from: ae = Es /ELT • Neutral axis depth for uncracked condition. it is only suitable for use with computer software.05 Ecm ■ Critical arrangement of actions (or repeat the calculations for each arrangement to determine the critical case) Shrinkage curvature Shrinkage depends on the water/cement ratio. 3 Eeff. However. using appropriate value for fctm. z = 1 – 0.How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2 any of the earlier load stages. however. z and ELT: • Neutral axis depth for cracked section. ELT from: E LT = RW c W1 W2 W3 W4 W5 + + + + Eeff. • Striking the formwork • Casting the floor above • Erection of the partitions and/or cladding • Application of finishes The sequence will vary from project to project ■ Concrete properties (see Table 1) • Mean compressive strength (fcm) • Mean tensile strength (fctm or fctm. Figure 3 Outline of rigorous method for calculating deflection Collate input data ■ Element dimensions and reinforcement details and arrangements from the ultimate limit state design ■ Loading sequence e. (See ‘Cracking’ on page 3) ■ Calculate the following properties: • Creep coefficients.g. Iu (see Panel 2) • Calculate cracking moment. and they include the ability to consider the effect of early age loading of the concrete. h (Annex B of Eurocode 2 or Figure 4) • Long term elastic modulus. 1/rt = 1/rfl + 1/rcs Repeat the calculations at frequent intervals (say at 1/20 points) and integrate twice to obtain the overall deflection. 2 Eeff. an earlier stage proves critical. This effect should be considered in the deflection calculations. 5 m If deflection affecting cladding and/or partitions is required. ELT (see Panel 1) • Effective modulus ratio. Finite element analysis may also be used to obtain estimates of deflection. These offer a costeffective way to carry out detailed deflection calculations. Assess whether the element has flexural cracking ■ Determine the critical load stage at which cracking first occurs. using appropriate values for fctm.fl) • Elastic modulus (Ec28) = 1.
Deflection calculations Table 1 Concrete properties fck fcm fctm = (fck + 8) = MPa MPa MPa MPa GPa GPa microstrain microstrain microstrain microstrain microstrain microstrain microstrain 320 328 332. RH = 50% ecd.0 6.2 337.1 > C50/60)a Ecm Ec28 = = ecd.0 h (?.50 337.0 h (?.1 g 6 As ]d .0 CEM class R.90 333.0 CEM class S.1 g ] Asd + As2 d2 g xu = bh + ] ae .0 2.0 3.0 CEM class N.5 746 416 544 303 441 246 325 325 333 332.1 g As2 ^ d2 .xu g + As2 ] x u .0 CEM class N.0 3.09 331.0 5.9 683 381 494 275 397 221 345 330 338 332.1 536 299 379 212 298 166 100 (0.0 2.1 335.27 332.x c g Sc Su 1 rcs = g f cs a e I u +^1 .8.0 CEM class S.t0) 1 2 3 5 t 0 10 20 30 50 100 7.g h fcs ae I c Figure 4 Method for determining creep coefficient h(∞.0 1.3 335.x c g + ^ ae .0 6.0 4.21 332.02 333.RH = 80% Notes 1 t0 = age of concrete at time of loading 2 h0 = 2A c /u 3 Intersection point between lines D & E can also be above point A 4 For t0 > 100 it is sufficiently accurate to assume t = 100 How to use Nonogram A E B D C 0 100 300 500 700 900 1100 1300 h o (mm) S N R 63 .77 330.0 5.68 334.3 (1.^ As ae + As2 ] ae .21 333. t 0 ) a) Inside conditions .08 ln(fcm) + 0.1 g ] As + As2 g 2 2 2 bh 3 h I u = 12 + bh a 2 .0 1.51 333.d 2 g @ where As = Area of tension reinforcement As2 = Area of compression reinforcement b d = Breadth of section = Effective depth to tension reinforcement = Overall depth of section xc = # 7 ^ As ae + A s2 ] ae . RH = 50% ecd.0 706 394 512 286 413 230 338 328 336 332.96 335.1 g h  b d2 = Depth to compression reinforcement h ae = Modular ratio Su = As(d – xu) – As2 (xu – d2) Sc = As(d – xc) – As2 (xc – d2) 3 bx c 2 2 I c = 3 + ae As ^ d .51 333.0 CEM class R. t 0) b) Outside conditions . Panel 2 Useful Expressions for a rectangular section bh 2 2 + ] ae .07 334.5 333. RH = 80% ecd.56 333.39 332.RH = 50% Ke y C20/25 C25/30 C30/37 C35/45 C40/50 C45/55 C50/60 0 100 300 500 700 900 1100 1300 h 0 (mm) S N R 1 2 3 5 t 0 10 20 30 50 100 7.0 653 364 471 263 377 210 355 335 343 333.xuk + ] ae .3 fck(2/3) ≤ C50/60 or 2.12 ln(1 + (fcm/10)) > C50/60) (22 [(fcm)/10]0.05 Ecm) fctm* = (0.3 339. RH = 50% ecd.8 632 353 454 253 363 202 363 340 348 333.3 fcm(2/3) ≤ C50/60 or 1.77 333. RH = 80% eca(∞) Key a fctm* may be used when striking at less than 7 days or where construction overload is taken into account.8 334. RH = 80% ecd.1 g h A 0.0 598 334 428 239 340 189 375 350 358 334.3 333.5.1 g h 2+ 2 b ^ As d ae + A s2d2 ] ae .0 331.5 668 372 482 269 387 216 350 332 340 333.0 4.
Calculate quasipermanent deflection from dQP W Wal End deflection a (3 a ) = 6 load at end K = 0.0625 Yes Is Mcr > MQP? No Section is uncracked z=0 Section is cracked z = 1 – 0.125 a2 6 Calculate flexural curvature 1 rn = g MQP Eeff Ic + ^1 – g h E MQP eff Iu q ql 2 8 q ql 2 0.t0) ≈ h(∞. see Table 2 ecd. Simplified creep factors are used and deflection from the curvature of the slab is approximated using a factor. and Ec28 from Table 1 Calculate creep coefficient. K = 1 12 2 0. K = 0. Iu K 0. For bc(t.102 15. using h(t. Ic 0. 1 Calculate the creep coefficient h(t.t0) refer to Figure 7. see Table 1 Calculate curvature due to shrinkage strain 1/rcs (see Panel 2) 1 Calculate total curvature r t.t0).QP 1 rn 1 rcs 0. partitions/cladding and any other loads which have been applied prior to the installation of the cladding/partition.t0) bc(t. xc and calculate second moment of area for cracked condition. The major simplification is that the effects of early age loading are not considered explicitly. fctm. or used where a computer is not available.9 fctm I u al W l M = Wa (1a ) l 3 4a 2 48 (1a) If a = 1 . and they could be used to roughly verify deflection results from computer software. dpar. rather an allowance is made for their effect when calculating the cracking moment.e.9 has been introduced into this method because the loading sequence is not considered) Calculate cracking moment. curvature and hence deflection. xu 4 Calculate second moment of area for uncracked condition.6 q MC MB K = 0. 2 Calculate the moment due to selfweight.t0)] 2 Calculate effective modulus ratio.t0).t0) 4 The approximate deflection affecting cladding and partitions is d = dQP – dpar MA MC al al MB K = 0. midspan or at support for cantilever) Obtain concrete properties.t0).25 b ) 4 Do you need to calculate deflection due to cladding and partitions? Yes No Finish al q qa l 2 2 2 Calculate the deflection that will occur at the time of application of the load due to partitions and/or cladding.0 = Nominal unrestrained drying shrinkage. Mpar and use in place of MQP 3 Recalculate the section properties. where t is the age when partition/cladding loads are applied and t0 is the age of striking.QP where K can be obtained from Figure 6 and L is the span. h(t.083 (1 b= MA + MB MC 2 Wl (3 4a 2) 24 2 1 (5 4a 2 ) 80 3 4a 64 . due to quasipermanent actions at the critical section (i. where Es is elastic modulus for reinforcement (200 GPa) 3 Calculate depth to neutral axis for uncracked condition.How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2 Simplified method A simplified method for calculating deflection is presented in Figure 5.125 M M h – xu (Note the factor 0. ae from ae = Es/Eeff.0 = Drying shrinkage strain kh = Coefficient based on notional size.5(Mcr/MQP)2 M W/2 al W/2 al M= Wal 2 Calculate depth to neutral axis for cracked condition.333 a (4 a ) 12 if a = l . h(∞. MQP. Eeff from: Eeff = Ec28/[1+h (∞. Figure 6 Values for K for various bending moment diagrams Loading Bending moment diagram M Figure 5 Simplified method for calculating deflection START Calculate the moment.t0) or equivalent instead of h(∞.104 Calculate total shrinkage strain ecs from ecs = ecd + eca where: ecd = kh ecd. see Table 1 eca = bas(t) eca(∞) = eca(∞) for longterm deflection. using either Figure 4 or Annex B (in which case lookup fcm in Table 1) 1 Calculate long term elastic modulus. It is feasible to carry out these calculations by hand. Mcr from: Mcr = 0. alternatively refer to Annex B of Eurocode 2.104 (1 b= al MA + MB MC b ) 10 = + = MA 1 KL 2 rt.
8. Deflection calculations
Table 2
Values for Kh h0 >100 >200 >300 >500
Notes h0 is the notional size (mm) of the crosssection = 2Ac/u where Ac = Concrete crosssectional area u = Perimeter of that part of the cross section which is exposed to drying
Precamber
kh 1.0 0.85 0.75 0.70
A slab or beam can be precambered to reduce the effect of deflection below the horizontal (see Figure 8). However, in practice too much precamber is generally used and the slab remains permanently cambered. This is because of the difficulty in accurately calculating deflection. A precamber of up to half the quasipermanent combination deflection could be used, but a lower figure is recommended. Precamber does not reduce the deflections affecting partitions or cladding.
Flat slabs
Flat slabs are very popular and efficient floor systems. However, because they span in two directions, it can be difficult to calculate their deflection. TR58 8 gives several suitable methods for assessing flat slab deflection. Of these, a popular method is to take the average deflection of two parallel column strips and to add the deflection of the middle strip spanning orthogonally to get an approximation of the maximum deflection in the centre of the slab. The recommended acceptance criteria for a flat slab are shown in Figure 9.
Figure 7
Coefficient for development of creep with time after loading
0.60
0.55
0.50
Coefficient, bc (t, t0)
0.45
Accuracy
The calculation of deflection in Eurocode 2 using the rigorous method presented here is more advanced than that in BS 811010. It can be used to take account of earlyage construction loading by considering reduced early concrete tensile strengths. However, the following influences on deflections cannot be accurately assessed:
300 500 h 0 (mm) 700 900
■ Tensile strength, which determines the cracking moment. ■ Construction loading. ■ Elastic modulus.
0.40 0.35
0.30 0.25 100
t = 90, t0 = 3 t = 60, t0 = 3 t = 28, t0 = 3
Notes
t = 90, t0 = 7 t = 60, t0 = 7 t = 28, t0 = 7
t = Age of concrete when partitions/cladding applied t0 = Age of concrete when struck fck = 30 (fcm = 38), however the coefficient is not particularly sensitive to concrete class
Therefore any calculation of deflection is only an estimate, and even the most sophisticated analysis can still result in +15% to 30% error. It is advisable to give a suitable caveat with any estimate of deflection that others are relying on.
Figure 8
Precambering of slabs
Just before installation of partitions
Figure 9
Recommended acceptance criteria for flat slabs
Precamber
Notes If maximum permitted d = L/n and X is the position of maximum d where L = Span n = Limiting spantodepth ratio, e.g. 250 then the deflection at X should not be greater than 2a/n. (Maximum deflection on gridlines may be more critical.)
a X
Deflection due to quasipermanent combination
Deflection due to frequent combination Deflection affecting partitions
65
8. Deflection calculations
Cladding tolerances
Deflection may affect cladding or glazing in the following ways:
■ When a slab deflects, the load on the central fixings will be relieved
■ Manufacturers may say that their glazed systems can only
accommodate deflection as low as 5 mm. There should be open discussions between the designers for the various elements to determine the most costeffective way of dealing with the interaction of the structure and cladding.
and shed to outer fixings.
References
1 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. BS EN 1992–1–1, Eurocode 2: Design of concrete structures. General rules and rules for building. BSI, 2004. 2 MOSS, R M & BROOKER, O. How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2: Beams. The Concrete Centre, 2006. 3 MOSS, R M & BROOKER, O. How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2: Slabs. The Concrete Centre, 2006. 4 MOSS, R M & BROOKER, O. How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2: Flat slabs. The Concrete Centre, 2006. 5 NARAYANAN, R S & BROOKER, O. How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2: Introduction to Eurocodes. The Concrete Centre, 2005 6 BRITISH CEMENT ASSOCIATION. Early striking and improved backpropping. BCA, 2001. (Available from www.concretecentre.com) 7 PALLETT, P. Guide to flat slab formwork and falsework. Construct, 2003 8 THE CONCRETE SOCIETY. Technical report No. 58 Deflections in concrete slabs and beams. The Concrete Society, 2005. 9 GOODCHILD, C H & WEBSTER, R M. Spreadsheets for concrete design to BS 8110 and EC2, version 3. The Concrete Centre, 2006. 10 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. BS 8110–1. Structural use of concrete – Code of practice for design and construction. BSI, 1997.
66
How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2
9. Retaining walls
A J Bond MA, MSc, PhD, DIC, MICE, CEng O Brooker BEng, CEng, MICE, MIStructE A J Harris BSc, MSc, DIC, MICE, CEng, FGS
Introduction
This chapter covers the analysis and design of reinforced concrete retaining walls to Eurocodes 21 and 72. It considers retaining walls up to 3 m high and propped basement walls up to two storeys high (7 m). These limits have been chosen so that simplifications can be made in the geotechnical design. The selfweight of these walls, including the selfweight of backfill on them, plays a significant role in supporting the retained material. The chapter does not cover the analysis and design of embedded retaining walls, which rely primarily on passive earth pressure and flexural resistance to support the retained material. Prior to the publication of the structural Eurocodes, the geotechnical design of retaining walls was covered by BS 80023. Although certain provisions of this code are superseded by Eurocode 7, the former still contains useful qualitative information regarding the design of reinforced concrete walls. A more general introduction to the Eurocodes is given in Chapters 1 and 2 originally published as Introduction to Eurocodes4 and Getting started5. The essential features of Eurocode 7 Part 1 are covered in Chapter 6, Foundations6, which includes a discussion of limit states, Geotechnical Categories, methods of design, and the Geotechnical Design Report. It should be read in conjunction with this chapter. Essential features of Eurocode 7 are presented, along with theoretical models for the analysis of retaining walls. A procedure for analysis and design is given on page 70.
Geotechnical Categories
Eurocode 7 Part 1 defines three Geotechnical Categories that can be used to establish geotechnical design requirements. Simple structures with negliable risk belong in Geotechnical Category 1. Walls that retain soil or water and do not involve exceptional risk or difficult soil or loading conditions belong in Geotechnical Category 2, for which routine procedures for field and laboratory testing and for design and execution may be used. The design of such structures requires quantitative geotechnical data and analysis. Walls that involve abnormal risk or where there is unusual or exceptionally difficult soil or loading conditions belong in Geotechnical Category 3, for which alternative provisions and rules to those given in Eurocode 7 may be needed; they are outside the scope of this publication.
Limit states
The design of reinforced concrete retaining walls requires verification that the
which greatly simplifies the mathematics involved. c1 or c2 (see Chapters 1 and 6) Similarly the design value. i.0 1. because its contribution to resistance is often small for reinforced concrete walls and is only mobilized after considerable movement of the wall.0 Key a gG is applied to unfavourable permanent actions b gh is applied to tan h’k 68 2 . the selfweights of the wall stem. such as clays and silts. drained) behaviour.5 1. and to the soil’s angle of shearing resistance and effective cohesion in longterm (drained) situations. depends greatly on how quickly excess pore water pressures in the ground dissipate after loading. Eurocode 7 requires allowance to be made for unplanned excavations in front of retaining walls.0 1.25 gcu 1. the effects of effective cohesion may be included in the design. The beneficial effect of passive earth pressures in front of the wall is ignored in this publication.e. partial factors greater than 1 are applied to actions and structural materials only: to the selfweight of the wall and backfill (treated as permanent actions).e.3 gϕb 1. wall base. Xd.0 1. as appropriate). the UK National Annex permits only Design Approach 1 to be used in the UK. of an action can be expressed as: Fd = gF c Fk where gF = partial factor for the action Fk = characteristic value of the action c = either 1.0 gQ 1.How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2 following ultimate limit states are not exceeded (see Figure 1): ■ Overall failure of the ground containing the wall. two calculations must be performed with different combinations of partial factors for the STR/GEO limit state (see Table 1). which further reduces the effects of passive earth pressures.0.e. c0.25 gc 1. in the interests of economy. The design value. ■ Failure of the wall by sliding. ■ Structural failure of the wall. undrained) situations.35 1. tan h´d = (tan h´k)/gh. In the expressions used here. Figure 1 Ultimate limit states for reinforced concrete retaining walls Although Eurocode 7 provides three Design Approaches. In calculations for Combination 1. undrained) behaviour of the ground and for longterm (i. to any imposed loads or surcharges at the top of the wall (permanent or variable actions. Furthermore.fav 1. The limit states above therefore need to be checked both for shortterm (i. which are explained below. and backfill are favourable actions when sliding and toppling are considered. ■ Bearing failure of the ground beneath the wall (which may involve settlement and rotation of the wall).4 gγ 1. and to the earth and pore water pressures acting on the wall’s boundary (permanent actions). This is a safe assumption but.e. In calculations for Combination 2. but are typically unfavourable actions for bearing (but since they reduce the inclination and eccentricity of d) Bearing e) Structural failure Table 1 Partial factors to be used for retaining wall design according to design approach 1 (UK National Annex) Combination 1 2 Partial factors on actions Partial factors on material properties of soil gGa 1.0 1. It is assumed that soils have negligible effective cohesion c’. a) Overall stability b) Sliding c) Toppling Calculation models for strength limit states The mechanical behaviour of reinforced concrete cantilever walls is commonly analysed using one of two assumed calculation models. ■ Failure of the wall by toppling (usually only relevant to walls founded on rock). In this approach. of an action can be expressed as: Xd = Xk / gM where gM = partial factor for the action Xk = characteristic value of the action It is important to note that the partial factor for h´ applies to tan h´. Fd. partial factors greater than 1 are applied to variable actions only and to the strength of the ground and structure: to the soil’s undrained strength in shortterm (i.0 1.0 gG. The resistance available in finegrained soils.
9. Retaining walls
the total action, they may be favourable – both situations should be checked). In the design calculations, favourable actions are multiplied by different partial factors to unfavourable actions – see Table 1.
and the earth pressure coefficient used to calculate the thrust is given by Rankine’s formula. If bh is too small, then the wall stem interferes with the Rankine zone and c should be reduced to c ≤ (h’/3 to 2h’/3) – although strictly Rankine’s theory is no longer applicable and calculation model B should be used instead. For sliding and toppling, the most unfavourable location of any imposed surcharge is as shown in Figure 2a), with the edge of the surcharge coincident with point B. In that position it increases unfavourable earth pressures acting on the virtual plane BF but does not increase favourable vertical forces acting on the wall heel, DC. For bearing, the most unfavourable location of the surcharge is when it extends to the back of the wall, point A.
Calculation model A
In the first calculation model (see Figure 2), the wall including backfill in block ABCD resists sliding and toppling caused by the earth pressures acting on the vertical ‘virtual’ plane, BF. The ground beneath the wall base must also be strong enough to carry the wall’s selfweight and any tractions (vertical components of force) on the virtual plane. An attractive feature of this model is that, provided the wall heel CD is large enough, the earth thrust Pa (see Figure 2b) is inclined at an angle to the horizontal equal to the ground slope at the top of the wall (i.e. c = b ), provided always that c ≤ h’. The test for the model’s applicability is bh ≥ ha tan (45 – h’d /2), which (if met) means that a Rankine active zone forms within the confines of block ABCD Figure 2
Calculation model A
Calculation model B
In the second calculation model (see Figure 3), the wall including backfill in block ACD resists sliding and toppling caused by earth
a h
Figure 3
Calculation model B
h
69 3
How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2
pressures acting on the inclined ‘virtual’ plane, AF. The earth thrust Pa (Figure 3b) is inclined at an angle y + d to the horizontal. (The same model is used to analyse plain concrete gravity walls.) The ground beneath the wall base must also be strong enough to carry the wall’s selfweight and the downwards component of the earth thrust on the virtual plane. A key theoretical advantage of this model is that it can be used consistently for walls of all shapes and sizes. However, its main disadvantage is that it involves careful consideration of trigonometry, with the angle y playing a significant role, leading to a complicated expression for Ka and values are not so readily obtained from published charts. To prevent the mathematics becoming too involved, various simplifications about the wall’s geometry and that of the enclosed backfill are usually made. Except for situations where bh is very small, it is reasonable to assume that the angle of friction d mobilized along the virtual plane AF is equal to the angle of shearing resistance of the soil, h'. The most unfavourable location of any imposed surcharge is typically when it extends to the back of the wall, point A (as shown in Figure 3a). However, since the surcharge also reduces the inclination and eccentricity of the total action, situations with it distant from the wall should also be considered. Figure 4
Overall design procedure Start
Design procedure
The overall procedure for the design of reinforced concrete retaining walls is given in Figure 4 and explained in more detail over the next few pages. Since the sizing of reinforced concrete walls is often controlled by sliding with partial factors from Combination 2, it is sensible to undertake that verification first. The other checks should also be performed for both combinations. Bearing can also control the design (depending on the wall geometry and soil properties).
Overall stability of the site
An essential part of the geotechnical design of retaining structures is checking the stability of the site against overall rotational failure (see Figure 1a) and other forms of overall ground failure. Guidance on how to perform the necessary verifications is outside the scope of this document, but can be found elsewhere, e.g. reference 7.
Initial sizing
The base width B of a reinforced concrete cantilever retaining wall is usually between 0.5 and 0.7 times its overall height8, h (see Figure 5). The breadth of the wall stem bs is normally h/15 to h/10 , as is the thickness of the wall base tb. The breadth of the wall toe bt is typically equal to B/4 to B/3. For basement walls in most structures, the thickness will normally be determined by the waterproofing requirements; often a minimum thickness of 300 mm is used. For simplicity, it is assumed that adequate drainage systems will be installed behind the retaining wall so that pore water pressures need not be considered. Since this is a potentially unsafe assumption, the expressions given here need to be adjusted if this is not the case. Figure 5
Symbols for initial sizing
Check overall stability of the site
Carry out initial sizing of the wall
Determine characteristic material properties (see Figure 6) Calculate the characteristic value of actions (see Figure 6)
Calculate the design value of actions (see Figure 6) No, revise geometry Sufficient capacity? Design against bearing failure (see Figure 10) Yes Structural design (see Figure 13) Design complete
Design against sliding (see Figure 7) Carry out separately for both Combinations 1 and 2
Design against toppling (see Figure 9)
70 4
9. Retaining walls
Material properties
The characteristic value of a geotechnical parameter is defined in BS EN 1997–1 Cl. 2.4.5.2(2)P as “a cautious estimate of the value affecting the occurrence of the limit state”, determined on the basis of laboratory and field test results complemented by wellestablished experience and taking account of the zone of soil involved. Characteristic geotechnical parameters should be determined by an experienced geotechnical engineer and recorded in the Geotechnical Design Report. The properties chosen for the backfill behind the retaining wall are critical to the geotechnical design of the wall and should be selected carefully (see Figure 6). These include its weight density, g, angle of shearing resistance, h, and (if cohesive) undrained strength, cu. It is uncommon for retaining walls to retain cohesive fills, since this can lead to the retention of water (which should be avoided). Further, considering cohesion reduces the calculated earth pressures, which is not conservative. For granular backfill the characteristic angle of shearing resistance is normally taken between 30˚ and 35˚. The foundation beneath the wall base is critical to the wall’s sliding Figure 6
Procedure for determining material properties, geometry and actions From Figure 4 Determine characteristic material properties • Weight density (gk,f) and angle of shearing resistance (h’k,f) of backfill • Weight density (gk,fdn), undrained strength (cuk,fdn), and angle of shearing resistance (h’k,fdn) of foundation soil • Weight density (gk,c) and cylinder strength (fck) of concrete
Panel 1
General expressions for geometry and actions
Wk,s = bs H gk,c Wk,b = tb B gk,c bh = B – bs – bt Ls = bt + bs 2 Lb = B 2 For calculation model A: h = tb + H + bhtan b b tan b Wk,f = bh H + h gk,f 2 bh Lf & bt + bs + 2 W= b Lvp = B For calculation model B: hb = tb + H b H Wk,f & h gk,f 2 b Lf = bt + bs + h 3 y = tan1 W= y Lvp = Lt + Ls + Lf 3 bh hb
Panel 2
Determine initial geometry and actions (see Panel 1) 1 Determine initial geometry (see Figure 5) • For calculation model B find inclination of virtual plane (y ) 2 Determine lever arms (see Figures 2c or 3c) 3 Calculate forces • Characteristic selfweights (Wk,s, Wk,b, Wk,f) • Total weight ΣWk,i = Wk,s + Wk,b + Wk,f • Total moment Σ(Wk,i Li) = (Wk,s Ls) + (Wk,b Lb) + (Wk,f Lf) Carry out separately for both Combinations 1 and 2 Determine design material properties and earth pressures (see Panel 2) 1 Apply partial material factors to obtain design material properties • Weight density gd = gk / gg = gk since gγ = 1 • Angle of shearing resistance h’d = tan1(tan h’k / gφ’) • Undrained strength cud = cuk / gcu 2 Determine earth pressure • Earth pressure coefficient Kad = function of h’d,f and b (depending on calculation model used) • Earth pressure is function of vertical load and Kad To Figure 4 General expressions for material properties and earth pressures
For calculation model A: Kad = cos b – R sin2 hd,f – sin2 b cos b + R sin2 hd,f – sin2 b cos b
gk,f h2 Pad = Kad gG 2 + gQ qkh For calculation model B: sin b mt = 1 cos1 + h’d,f – b 2 sin h’d,f Kn = 1 – sin h’d,f 1 + sin h’d,f sin (2mt – hd,f ) e – 2 ( mt + b – h’d,f – y ) tan h’d,f
Kq = Kn cos2 b Kg = Kn cos b cos (b – y ) Pad = gG Kg gk,f h2 + gQ Kq qkh 2
71 5
H’Rd (Panel 3) Verify HEd ≤ HRd (if appropriate) and HEd ≤ H’Rd If necessary.b + Md. The key has three benefits: ■ It moves the failure surface away from the interface between the wall and the foundation. For cohesive soils the undrained situation will be critical. 6. In the shortterm (i.3(12)P.4Vd – see BS EN 1997–1 Cl.fav / Wk. angle of shearing resistance.i i • Calculate vertical traction from Pad (Panel 2) • Calculate drainned sliding resistance.e. The destabilising moment about the wall toe (point E in Figures 2a and 3a) arising from the thrust on the virtual plane must be resisted Figure 9 Procedure for design against toppling From Figure 4 Panel 3 Undrained sliding resistance: HRd = cud.fdn H’Rd = Vd tan dd.fdn = hcvd. If necessary.fdn 1+ Dt0 i B R 2 To Figure 4 72 6 . it is the properties of the soil/concrete interface that are required unless a shear key is provided. repeat the above with a shear key To Figure 4 Carry out separately for both Combinations 1 and 2 Design against toppling The procedure for designing reinforced concrete retaining walls against toppling is given in Figure 9. fdn are independent of the soil’s relative density and typically range from 27˚ to 33˚ for granular soils. HEd ≤ HRd. so that an improved value of dfdn = ffdn may be assumed.fdn = gG. ■ It lengthens the failure surface. If necessary. ■ It potentially increases the passive resistance in front of the wall.f Lf • From active thrust.vp = Pad sin W Lvp • MRd = Md. If air can reach the interface between the base and a clay foundation.fav / Wk. For concrete cast against soil. Values of fcv. where fcv.6. which is not considered here. Figure 7 Procedure for design against sliding From Figure 4 Determine horizontal thrust on virtual plane (see Panel 2) • HEd = Pad cos Ω If appropriate determine undrained sliding resistance on underside of wall base • HRd = cud. Design against sliding The procedure for designing reinforced concrete retaining walls against sliding is given in Figure 7.s Ls • Wall base Md.5. fdn is the constant volume angle of shearing resistance of the foundation soil. (see Panels 1 and 2) MEd = Pad cos W h/3 Determine stabilising moments about point E • Wall stem Md.f = Wd. a shear key can be used to improve the wall’s resistance to sliding (Figure 8).How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2 and bearing resistance and its properties should be chosen carefully. The resistance depends largely on the properties of the soil/structure interface between the wall base and the foundation soil. to use dfdn ≤ ffdn).5. and by friction in the longterm (under drained conditions).3(10) recommends dfdn = fcv. HEd ≤ H’Rd. its magnitude can be reduced by using backfill with a greater angle of shearing resistance. Generally this check is only needed when the retaining wall is founded on rock or very hard soil. If drainage occurs at the interface.fdn B Determine drained sliding resistance on underside of wall base • Calculate vertical action Vd = ga S Wk. BS EN 1997–1 Cl. For consideration of sliding.c = 25 kN/m3 for reinforced concrete in accordance with Eurocode 19.fdn i Carry out separately for both Combinations 1 and 2 Expressions for drained sliding resistance Determine destabilising moment MEd about point E.fdn B Drained sliding resistance: dd.s + Md. drained conditions may apply even for shortterm loading.s = Wd. It is usual to assume full adhesion in calculations for the undrained condition based on total stresses (i. then the undrained resistance should be limited to HRd ≤ 0. The weight density of concrete determines part of the wall’s selfweight and should be taken as gk.f + Md. and (if cohesive) undrained strength. to use full cu) and reduced friction in calculations for the drained condition based on effective stresses (i.b = Wd.i tan h’d. the horizontal component of the thrust on the virtual plane must be resisted by adhesion on the underside of the wall base. under undrained conditions). Md. The thrust depends largely on the strength properties of the backfill. fdn ≤ ffdn. from B to&R B2 + Dtb2.vp Verify MEd ≤ MRd With a shear key: H’Rd & gG. These include its weight density. For bearing resistance a conservative estimate of the properties of the foundation soils is required.b Lb • Backfill Md.e.e.i tan hcvd.
The bearing pressure acting beneath the wall base must be less than both the foundation’s shortterm (undrained) bearing capacity. The destabilising moment depends largely on the strength properties of the backfill.) Typically.e. including the backfill. 73 7 .9. then toppling will not be critical to the design. where Nc= p + 2 ic = 1 1 + 2 R 1– P cos W B’ cud. qRd (if appropriate. Retaining walls by the stabilising moment about the same point arising from the wall’s selfweight. qEd ≤ q’Rd. if the retaining wall has been sized appropriately for sliding.5 Values for Nc. The stabilising moment depends largely on the wall’s selfweight.i + (Pad sin W) i g q 1. because the strength of the ground is significant in providing resistance. N Determine bearing pressure (see Panels 1 and 2) qEd = (Vd + Pad sin Ω) / B’ c Angle . its magnitude can be reduced by using a backfill with a greater angle of shearing resistance. from ground properties g Carry out separately for both Combinations 1 and 2 Determine undrained bearing capacity.fdn ad Drained bearing resistance: q’Rd = q’d Nq iq + ( gd.fdn Ncic + qd . Ng and Nq can be obtained from Figure 11 Figure 11 Bearing capacity factors. qEd ≤ qRd. N. and any downwards traction on the virtual plane. Eurocode 7 gives simple analytical methods for bearing resistance calculations. dimensionless factors reducing the standard bearing capacity factors Figure 10 Procedure for design against bearing failure From Figure 4 B e= – 2 gG / (Wk. the stability of a reinforced concrete retaining wall supporting soil is not governed by limit state EQU. MEd ≤ MRd. see Panel 4) Determine drained bearing capacity q’Rd (see Panel 4) Verify qEd ≤ qRd (if appropriate) and qEd ≤ q’Rd To Figure 4 Bearing capacity factor. (Somewhat counterintuitively. Since the centre of action of the resultant bearing force is almost inevitably eccentric to the centre of the wall base. Instead. If necessary. and its longterm (drained) value.i Li ) + (Pad sin W Lvp ) – Pad cos W i h 3 Vd + (Pad sin W) B’ = B – 2 e Undrained bearing resistance: qRd = cud. defined in Eurocode 7 as “loss of stability of the structure or the ground. including backfill. considered as a rigid body”. i.fdn – gw ) B’ N i 2 g g 2 Pad cos W iq = 1 – gG / Wk. The bearing pressure depends on the wall’s selfweight. based on classical bearing capacity theory. Since the resultant bearing force is almost inevitably inclined. The bearing capacity depends largely on the strength of the foundation soil. toppling is usually governed by limit state GEO. the bearing pressure must be calculated over an effective width B’ (see Figure 12). Figure 8 Effects of shear key 0 Panel 4 Expressions for bearing resistance Design against bearing failure The procedure for designing reinforced concrete retaining walls against bearing failure is given in Figure 10.
Depending on how the wall is constructed it should either be designed for ‘compaction pressures’10 or for ‘atrest’ pressures.How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2 are needed. owing to wall yield. If the centrifugal force is unknown. the line load should be taken as the roller’s selfweight. they should be designed to withstand the atrest earth pressures illustrated in Figure 16. toppling. shear and deflection Check the toe and heel of the wall in bending and shear using the expressions in Panel 5 to determine applied forces and the design expressions from Chapter 3 to check bending. Since the wall is not perfectly rigid. All forces should be entered per unit length along the wall. the equations given in Panel 6 are conservative. Note that the overburden pressure used in the expression for bearing capacity is that due to backfill above the wall’s toe (and is likely to be a small value). Panel 5 gives the earth pressure s h acting at depth z down the wall stem AD owing to the characteristic compaction line load Pk. This will be conservative for situations where groundwater can be guaranteed to be a distance ≥ B below the wall base.2(3) and (4) as: K0 = (1 – sin h’) ROCR (1 + sin b ) where OCR is the overconsolidation ratio of the retained soil and b is the angle of Figure 13 Design procedure for structural design Structural design A retaining wall is likely to be much stiffer than the ground it supports.5. Details of typical compaction equipment are given in Table 2 Figure 12 Effective base width. and therefore the stem of a reinforced concrete cantilever wall must be designed to withstand earth pressures greater than the active pressures assumed in the calculations of sliding. Compaction earth pressures Walls that are constructed before the placement of backfill should be designed to withstand the compaction earth pressures (see Figure 14). Atrest earth pressures Many basement walls are constructed to retain existing ground. The wall should be constructed with adequate drainage so that water pressures will not build up against the stem in the longterm and so do not need to be considered in the design. The design procedure is given in Figure 13. The earth pressure coefficient used to determine the horizontal pressures acting on the wall is given in BS EN 1997–1 Cl. If the roller is allowed to reach AD then the depth zj will be greater than that given in Panel 6. As with sliding. and bearing resistance there are two combinations of partial factors to check at the ultimate limit state. the sum of the selfweight and the centrifugal vibrator force should be used. This method for compaction earth pressure calculation assumes that the fill is placed using a vibrating roller that is prevented from coming up to the face of the wall AD. toppling. For static rollers. The formulation for the drained bearing capacity given in Figure 10 and Panel 4 assumes that the groundwater level is at the underside of the base of the retaining wall. B’ From Figure 4 Check the stem of the retaining wall for compaction pressures or atrest conditions as appropriate: Carry out separately for both Combinations 1 and 2 • Maximum design moment = Ms (see Panel 5 or 6) • Maximum design shear force = Vs • Refer to Chapter 3. then for a vibrating roller twice the selfweight may be used instead. For vibrating compaction equipment. This rule of thumb should be used with caution and is not appropriate for use with vibrating plate compactors. 9. shear and deflection To Figure 4 Figure 14 Compaction earth pressures for structural design of cantilever retaining walls zJ zK zD 74 8 . originally published as Slabs11 for the design expressions to use to check bending. and bearing resistance.
K)(zD – zK)2 Moment. Mh & G K.J D J + hd.0 27.3 81.W (zD – zW) σhd.f – sin2 b cos b + R sin2 h’d.5 t pedestrianoperated vibrating roller 2. Verification of the structural resistance of basement walls follows the same procedure as that for cantilever walls (see Figure 13).f – sin2 b cos b – R sin2 h’d.J(zD – zJ) + (σhd.6 73. 75 9 .d = s’h. Mt = Panel 6 Expressions for the structural design of basement walls for ‘atrest’ pressures K0d = (1 – sin h’d.J = σhd at J etc.J zJ Shear.D (zD – zW) + 2 2 See Panel 5 for forces for base design.d = K0d sv.W (zD – zW)2 6 Shear. zJ = Kpd Depth of point K.f – qEd (bh – B + B’) Forces for toe design (see Figure 15a) qEd bt2 2 Shear.9. horizonal stress (in units of kPa) shd = Kpd gk. zK = Kad 2Pd pgK. Vs = σhd. Retaining walls Panel 5 General expressions for designing walls for compaction pressures ground surface. The OCR is the ratio of maximum past level of vertical stress to the current level of vertical effective stress. Ms = σhd.W zW 2 + σhd.f – sin2 b cos b + R sin2 h’d.d = K0d (sv. Table 2 Design line load (in units of kN/m). Vh & γG WK. Vt = qEd bt Moment. Ms = hd. Many basements involve one or two levels of propping and so verification of sliding and toppling resistance is unnecessary (at least for persistent design situations – they may still be relevant while the wall is being constructed).f z Between J and K shd = Typical compaction equipment12 Description of compaction equipment 80 kg vibrating plate compactor 180 kg vibrating plate compactor 350 kg pedestrianoperated vibrating roller 670 kg vibrating plate compactor 1. It is not conservative to ignore it. with suitable allowance for any water pressures that may build up on the back of the wall AD.4 R 2PdgK.K )(zD – zK)/2 2 where σhd. Forces for heel design (see Figure 15b) γ W b q (b – B + B’)2 Moment.f z + qd Between A and W ud = 0 sh.f ) ROCR (1 + sin b ) sv.A zW 2 + σhd.d = s’h.f z Forces for stem design (see Figure 14) σ z 2z σ (z – z )2 (σ – σhd.6 t smooth wheeled roller Mass (kg) Centrifugal vibrator force (kN) 14 80 12 96 58 N/A 118 N/A Design force (kN) 14.8 15.4 102. especially if no provision is made for drainage.d Between W and D ud = gw (zD – zw) s’h.f R R 2Pd pgK.f p 80 180 350 670 1530 2800 6900 8600 Betwwen K and D shd = Kad gk.W ZW 2 6 zD – 2z W 3 + Figure 15 Pressure diagram for design of reinforced concrete base 2σhd.J J zD – J + hd.f h – Ed h 2 2 Shear.9 t double vibrating roller 8.d + ud Forces for stem design Moment. OCR is typically obtained from an oedometer test and/or knowledge of the geological history of the site.A zw 2 zD – zW 3 + + σhd.8 t smooth wheeled roller 6. Pd = gQ Pk Kad = cos b – R sin2 h’d.d – ud) sh.D – σhd.7 84.D (zD – zW)2 σhd.f – sin2 b cos b Kpd = cos b Depth of point J in Figure 13.f Between A and J.5 185. Vs = + σhd.d = gd.D 2 3 2 6 σhd.
3. Cracks may be limited to acceptable widths by the following measures: ■ Provide a minimum amount of reinforcement.e. Strictly. The relevant expressions for the total earth pressure s h (= effective earth pressure. low permeability soils) then BS EN 1997–1 Cl. Control of cracking may either be assessed by using the deemedtosatisfy method. detailed guidance on the design of waterresisting basements is given in CIRIA Report 13913.min.2 Maximum Maximum bar size bar spacing (mm) (mm) 25 200 16 OR 150 12 100 8 50 6 – 5 – Detailing Control of cracking It may be necessary to control the cracking of a reinforced concrete wall. or by calculating the crack widths directly (refer to Cl 7. 2.eff = fct.1 of BS EN 1992111) Act = area of concrete in that part of the section which is calculated to be in the tension zone i. unless the adequacy of the drainage system can be demonstrated and its maintenance ensured”. In this case any level of steel Figure 16 Earth and pore water pressures for structural design of retaining walls subject to 'atrest' conditions zW W The steel stress may be estimated from the expression below fyk m As.0 for pure tension and 0.prov d where: zD fyk = the characteristic reinforcement yields stress gms = the partial factor for reinforcement steel m = the total load from quasipermanent combination n = the total load from ULS combination As. which lead to a reduction of restraint forces fct..65 where it exceeds 800 mm thick. These expressions assume that the wall is rigid (owing to the propping) and no stress relief occurs during wall installation.3 mm in all exposure classes under quasipermanent load combinations (see Chapter 1). in tension just before the formation of the first crack Table 3 Maximum bar size or spacing to lmit crack width (mm) Steel stress (ss) MPa 160 200 240 280 320 360 Note Wmax = 0. so that the reinforcement does not yield immediately upon formation of the first crack.e. watertightness).How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2 When the structure retains: ■ Sands and gravels (i. limit the bar diameter to that shown in Table 3. e. ■ Where restraint is the main cause of cracking. limit the bar diameter or the bar spacing to that shown in Table 3. For intermediate conditions interpolation may be used. but the principles can be used with BS EN 1992–1–1 and BS EN 1992–33. stress may be chosen but the selected value must then be used in the calculation of As.req ss = gms nAs.min = kc k fct. u) acting at depth z down the wall AD are given in Panel 6 for a water table at depth dw below the top of the wall. which is presented here.4 of BS EN 1992–1–1).1(11) requires the water table to be taken at the “maximum possible level.3 Maximum Maximum bar size bar spacing (mm) (mm) 32 300 25 OR 250 16 200 12 150 10 100 8 50 Wmax = 0. The minimum area of reinforcement in tensile zones to control cracking should be calculated for each part of the member as follows: As. or ■ Silts and clays (i.6.0 where the wall is less than 300 mm and K = 0. the limiting calculated crack width wmax may be restricted to 0. For the latter.e. s’h + pore water pressure. this report has been written for use alongside BS 8110 and BS 800714.req = the area of reinforcement at the ULS As. for aesthetic reasons or to minimise water ingress for a basement wall.m (see table 3.. which may be the ground surface . Factor allows for the effect of nonuniform selfequilibrating stresses. high permeability soils) without a reliable drainage system installed. Both of these assumptions are conservative.min and the size of the bar should be limited as shown.prov = the area of reinforcement provided d = the ratio of redistribution moment to elastic moment 76 10 .4 for pure bending (allows for the nature of the stress distribution within the section immediately prior to cracking and for the change of the lever arm as a result of cracking) k = 1.eff = mean value of the tensile strength of concrete effective at the time cracks may be first expected to occur at the appropriate age fct.eff Act /ss where kc = 1.4. As.g. In the absence of specific requirements (e.g. ■ Where loading is the main cause of cracking.
The National structural concrete specification16 recommends pour sizes with a maximum area of 25 m2 and maximum dimension 5 m for waterresisting walls. the minimum percentage of reinforcement can be obtained from Table 6 of Chapter 3. Large radius bends It is often necessary to provide large radius bends to the main reinforcement at the base of the stem because of the high tensile forces in the bars.002Ac. The value should be chosen bearing in mind the limits on bar size and spacing indicated in Table 3 For walls with a high axial load (eg basement walls). this may be doubled at lap locations. A drainage pipe. the maximum area of vertical reinforcement is 0. Typically pour sizes are up to one storey high. transverse reinforcement is not required. it is generally accepted practice to have expansion joints every 20 – 30 m. to limit hydrostatic pressures on formwork.9. For a temperature range of 40°C. which should be protected to prevent it becoming blocked with fines. contains some useful tables that will assist in determining the minimum mandrel size. The system should be designed for the anticipated rainfall. should be provided at the base of the freedraining material. Where welded mesh and bars of diameter f ≤ 16 mm are used with cover larger than 2f. which induces strains in the concrete. Horizontal reinforcement The minimum area of horizontal reinforcement is the greater of either 25% of vertical reinforcement or 0.04Ac. The distance between two adjacent vertical bars should not exceed the lesser of either three times the wall thickness or 400 mm. early age thermal and shrinkage effects should be considered. Outside lap locations. appendix B. A typical drainage system is illustrated in Figure 17. Weepholes should be provided as a backup as they act as an overflow and as a visual warning that maintenance is required should the primary system become blocked. the joint should allow for 10 mm of movement for every 10 m length of wall. fm. The minimum mandrel diameter.001 Ac. Further advice on calculating strains and crack widths for restrained walls can be found in appendices L and M of BS EN 1992–31. even so the base of the wall will still be restrained. 11 77 . Therefore. It is usual to cast alternate bays in a wall to reduce the effects of early shrinkage. laid to falls. For long lengths of retaining walls. these requirements may be relaxed to 20% of the vertical reinforcement area. The zone immediately behind the wall should be of a freedraining granular material. a full load of a readymixed concrete). the main reinforcement placed nearest to the wall faces should have transverse reinforcement in the form of links with at least four per m2 of wall area. pour size and sequence of construction should be planned to control the resultant cracking. Rules for spacing and quantity of reinforcement Vertical reinforcement Where axial forces dominate. The contractor will seek to use the largest pour size possible and will want to ensure that the minimum volume of concrete for a pour is 6 m3 (i. Otherwise.min should be assessed as follows: fm. The base of a retaining structure is usually restrained by the soil on which it is bearing.. and rodding points provided for maintenance of the drainage systems. Where flexural forces dominate.e. Retaining walls ss = absolute value of the maximum stress permitted in the reinforcement immediately after the formation of the crack. it is important to provide drainage material behind a retaining wall.min ≥ Fbt(1/ab+1/(2f))/fcd where Fbt = tensile force from ultimate loads in a bar at the start of the bend ab = half the pitch of the bars or nominal cover plus f/2 f = bar diameter fcd = design value of concrete compressive strength The Standard method of detailing structural concrete15. half this area should be placed in each face. where crack control is important. the reinforcement detailing. Figure 17 Typical drainage layout for a retaining wall Drainage 300 mm wide granular backfill Weep hole Drainage pipe Large radius bend if required To prevent pore water pressures from building up. Practical issues Design for movement Concrete shrinks due to early thermal effects immediately after casting. However. the minimum area of vertical reinforcement is 0.
The Concrete Centre. 265–283. M. The Concrete Centre. BS 8007: Code of practice for design of structures for retaining aqueous liquids. Eurocode 2: Design of concrete structures. R. 13 CIRIA. although the loads imposed during compaction of the backfill may be onerous. The Concrete Centre. 3 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. R. 7 FRANK. How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2: Slabs. For instance. Retaining walls Construction It is particularly important when designing retaining walls to consider how they will be constructed. Blackie & Son Ltd. R M & BROOKER. O. The effects of compaction on retaining walls. BSI (2 parts). 2006. 6 WEBSTER. The temporary works may affect the soil pressures acting on the wall and the construction sequence could give rise to temporary actions that exceed the permanent actions imposed on the wall. 2002. It is possible to use contiguous piles. 4 NARAYANAN. IStructE/The Concrete Society. Standard method of detailing structural concrete. either a king post wall or sheet pile wall will be used as temporary supports. 10 INGOLD. secant piles or diaphragm walling as temporary supports but it is more usual for these to be installed as part of the permanent works. R S & BROOKER. C. Report 139. pp. 2006. 2005. BS EN 1997. DRISCOLL. O. a sheet pile wall may be used to affix an external waterproofing system. The designer should consider how the temporary works will affect the installation of the waterproofing for a basement wall. Glasgow. Eurocode 7: Geotechnical design. Waterresisting basements. because it will not be possible to complete the waterproofing when the props are removed. 1986. How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2: Introduction to Eurocodes. Designers’ guide to BS EN 1997–1. Similarly. 16 CONSTRUCT. The simplest form of construction is in an open excavation with the sides battered back to a safe angle to allow the construction of the wall. B. 9 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. A W. T & SCHUPPENER. BS 8002: Code of practice for earth retaining structures. 2004. 2005. Thomas Telford Publishing. The designer should consider this aspect and prepare a method statement indicating the assumptions made so the temporary works designer can work to the assumptions made or make alternative proposals. National structural concrete specification (third edition). The designer should ensure there is sufficient space to install the temporary works. The Concrete Centre.9. How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2: Foundations. but this would prevent the sheet piles from being removed at the end of construction. especially for a twostorey basement. Transport Research Laboratory. BSI (4 parts). BSI. 5 BROOKER. BS EN 1992. The Concrete Society. C R I & MILITITSKY. imposed loads for buildings. Geotechnique 29(3). N. 15 INSTITUTION OF STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS/THE CONCRETE SOCIETY. KREBS OVESEN. Often some form of temporary works is required and these may impact on the design. 1992. external waterproofing should not be used where temporary propping would penetrate it. 2 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. Earth pressure and earthretaining structures. 2006. and these may require propping. 8 CLAYTON. selfweight. BS EN 1991–1–1: General actions – Densities. 11 MOSS. Eurocode 7: Geotechnical design – General rules. 12 PARSONS. 1987. O. 2004. How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2: Getting started. Where there is insufficient space for opening an excavation. Compaction of soils and granular materials. References 1 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. BSI. 1994. T S. 1979. 1995. ORR. J. CIRIA. In this case there is little impact on the design. 78 12 . BSI. O. 14 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. KAVVADAS. R & BROOKER. BAUDUIN.
Type and grade of reinforcement The 2005 revision of BS 4449 introduced a characteristic yield strength of 500 MPa. Many of the derived expressions and figures assume UK values for the National Determined Parameters (NDPs). In this publication a number of assumptions have been made. Grade C is for seismic conditions or where additional ductility is required. which replaced BS 5328: Concrete on 1 December 2003 and should already be familiar. ■ BS 8666: 2005. dimensioning.How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2 10. H12). Grade A is not suitable for use where redistribution above 20% has been assumed in the design and a grade B bar should be specified in these circumstances (e. A. introducing Eurocode 2 requirements and a greater range of shape codes. including: ■ BS 8500: Concrete – Complementary standard to BS EN 206–12. It is assumed that bars sizes are 40 mm or less and that the bars will not be bundled together. B and C (see Table 1).8. ■ BS 4449: Specification for carbon steel bars for the reinforcement of concrete3 was revised in 2005 so that it became a complementary standard to BS EN 10080: Steel for the reinforcement of concrete4 and Normative Annex C of Eurocode 2. MIStructE Introduction This chapter is intended for use by detailers to prepare reinforcement drawings for projects that have been designed using Eurocode 21. It is expected that for the design of UK buildings all three grades A. reference should be made to Eurocode 2. B or C will be appropriate and in this case the bar size can be prefixed with an H (e. MICE. It provides a summary of the requirements of the Eurocode and simplifies them where appropriate.7. Scheduling. CEng. which offer increasing ductility. guidance on procedures. It is also assumed that the concrete class will not exceed C50/60. There are now three grades of reinforcement. Detailing O Brooker BEng.g. B12). responsibilities and preparation of drawings can be found in other documents6. To pave the way for the introduction of Eurocode 2. . bending and cutting of steel reinforcement for concrete – specification5 has also been revised.g. other supporting standards have been introduced or revised. This chapter focuses on detailing the reinforcement to comply with Eurocode 2. For additional requirements outside these limits.
How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2 Table 1 Notation for steel reinforcement Type of steel reinforcement Grade B500A. 3 Design stress has been taken as 435 MPa. 4 The anchorage and lap lengths have been rounded up to the nearest 10 mm.82. 5 Where 33% of bars are lapped in one location. plus the allowance for deviations. 2 a1 = a3 = a4 = a5 = 1. originally published as. The nominal cover should be shown on the drawings and should refer to the reinforcement nearest to the surface of the concrete e. (see Figure 1) Straight bars only Anchorage length. the cover to the main bar should be at least equal to the size of that bar. Note In the Grade description B500A. the links in a beam. a2 < 1). l0 Notes 1 Nominal cover to all sides and distance between bars ≥ 25 mm (i.16 C28/35 0.0. Where there are no links the nominal cover should be at least equal to the size of the bar plus Dcdev. bar diameter. refer to Table 13 for other classes or use the following factors for other concrete classes. a 250 c) h > 250 mm Direction of concreting a) 45º < a < 90º Direction of concreting ≥ 300 h h b) h < 250 mm Key ‘Good’ bond conditions d) h > 600 mm Anchorage of bars and links All reinforcement should be anchored so that the forces in it are safely transmitted to the surrounding concrete by bond without causing ‘Poor’ bond conditions Table 2 Anchorage and lap lengths for concrete class C25/30 (mm) Bond condition. 6 The figures in this table have been prepared for concrete class C25/30. Dcdev may be 5 or 10 mm depending on the quality assurance system assumed for the project. f (mm) 8 230 330 320 460 320 460 340 490 10 320 450 410 580 440 630 470 680 12 410 580 490 700 570 820 610 870 16 600 850 650 930 830 1190 890 1270 20 780 1120 810 1160 1090 1560 1170 1670 25 1010 1450 1010 1450 1420 2020 1520 2170 32 1300 1850 1300 1850 1810 2590 1940 2770 40 1760 2510 1760 2510 2460 3520 2640 3770 Reinforcement in compres40f 58f 40f 58f 57f 81f 61f 87f Lap length. this may be significant for bar diameters greater than 12 mm.4) 100% lapped in one location (a6 = 1.63 80 .g.93 C30/37 0.68 C50/60 0.. A number of assumptions can be made that enable Table 2 to be developed for anchorage and lap lengths. Concrete class Factor C20/25 1. Figure 1 Description of bond conditions Direction of concreting Direction of concreting Anchorage and lap lengths Eurocode 2 introduces a range of factors (a1 to a6) for use when calculating the appropriate anchorage and lap lengths. decrease the lap lengths for ‘50% lapped in one location’ by a factor of 0. etc. Lap lengths for unequal size bars may be based on the smaller bar.7.73 C45/55 0.89 C32/40 0. The minimum lap length is given in cl 8. Dcdev. ’B’ indicates reinforcing steel. the detailer should consult with the designer. Where the design stress in the bar at the position from where the anchorage is measured. ssd.15) Good Poor Good Poor Good Poor Good Poor Reinforcement in tension. Cover Notation H A B C X The nominal cover should generally be specified by the designer and full details of how to determine this are given in Chapter 2.80 C40/50 0.e. Grade B500B or Grade B500C conforming to BS 4449:2005 Grade B500A conforming to BS 4449: 2005 Grade B500B or Grade B500C conforming to BS 4449: 2005 Grade B500C conforming to BS 4449: 2005 Reinforcement of a type not included in the above list having material properties that are defined in the design or contract specification. Getting started9. is less than 435 MPa the figures in this table can be factored by ssd/435. although this is not stated in the Code.3 of Eurocode 2. If the cover needs to be increased to meet these requirements. If the conditions noted in the table are not met then reference should be made to Eurocode 2. lbd Other bars 50% lapped in one location (a6 = 1. Also.85 C35/45 0.
3 times the lap length. f.0As). the transverse reinforcement should have a total area. The longitudinal distance between two adjacent laps should not be less than 0. 2. f. but ≥ 50 mm 10f.65l0 0. Detailing cracking or spalling. it is generally acceptable to assume that transverse reinforcement is not required. the permissible percentage of lapped bars in tension may be 100% where the bars are all in one layer. Where the diameter. e. a. In this case the design lap length. near the point of contraflexure. Percentage of lapped bars in one lapped section l0 bar 1 bar 2 bar 3 bar 4 Example: bars 2 and 3 are outside the section being considered. The transverse bar should be placed perpendicular to the direction of the lapped reinforcement and between that and the surface of the concrete. the clear distance between adjacent bars should not be less than 2f or 20 mm. one bar of the transverse reinforcement should be placed outside each end of the lap length of bars in compression and within 4f of the ends of the lap length (see Figure 6b). as set out below: 1. Ast (sum of all legs parallel to the layer of the spliced reinforcement – see Figure 6a) of not less than the area As of one lapped bar (ΣAst ≥ 1.3l0 Fs l0 ≤ 50 mm ≤ 4f f Fs Fs Fs a ≥ 2f ≥ 20 mm Fs Fs 81 . between adjacent laps at a section is ≤ 10f (see Figure 5) transverse reinforcement should be formed by links or Ubars anchored into the body of the section. Figure 2 Arrangement of laps Where possible laps in a member should be staggered (see Figure 4) and not located in areas of high stress. or the percentage of lapped bars in any section is less than 25%. The anchorage of links is shown in Figure 3. The clear distance between lapped bars should not be greater than 4f or 50 mm. In case of adjacent laps. then any transverse reinforcement or links necessary for other reasons may be assumed sufficient for the transverse tensile forces without further justification. The arrangement of lapped bars should comply with Figure 5.4 0. Where the lapped bars in a slab are located in an area of low stress.10. Table 3 gives recommended minimum areas for transverse reinforcement. for any shape measured along the centreline lbd f Figure 3 Anchorage of links 5f. 3. Design anchorage length lbd. l0.g. l0. All bars in compression and secondary (distribution) reinforcement may be lapped in the same location. If more than 50% of the bars are lapped in one location and the distance. but ≥ 70 mm f f a) Bend angle > 150º b) Bend angle ≤ 150º Figure 4 Transverse reinforcement Bars in tension Transverse tensile stresses occur at the ends of lapped bars. lbd. from Table 2. (which can be obtained from Table 2) is measured along the centreline of the bar (see Figure 2). Therefore a6 = 1. the bars should be considered as being lapped in one section. Where the bars are in several layers no more than 50% should be lapped in any one layer. Where this is not the case. of the lapped bars is less than 20 mm. Where the diameter. Bars in compression In addition to the rules for bars in tension (Figure 6a). The design anchorage length. When the provisions comply with 1 and 3 above. otherwise the lap length should be increased by a length equal to the clear distance. must be increased (see note 5). of the lapped bars is greater than or equal to 20 mm.65l0 Section considered Figure 5 Arranging adjacent lapping bars ≥ 0.
25% lbd Number of bars at each lap 2 3 4 5 6 7 Bar size (mm) 20 As = 314 10 10 8 8 8 N/A 25 As = 491 16 12 10 8 8 8 32 As = 804 16 16 12 12 10 10 40 As = 1260 25 20 16 16 12 12 Notes 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0. the curtailment length of the longitudinal reinforcement should be extended beyond the point at which it is required for flexural strength (this is known as the ‘shift rule’) using the following expression (see also Figure 7): al = z cot y /2 for vertical shear reinforcement.How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2 Beams Curtailment Unless the additional tensile force in the longitudinal reinforcement due to shear has been calculated. al is the distance to allow for tensile force due to shear force. originally published as Beams.30l – al b) Bars in compression 4f l0/3 l0 l0/3 4f 100% Position of effective support Reinforcement for maximum sagging moment b) Continuous member. bottom reinforcement Table 3 Bar sizes for transverse reinforcement Lap length (mm). The shortest span must be greater than or equal to 0. top reinforcement Ast/2 Ast/2 ≤ 150 mm Fs Fs 30% 0. Figure 6 Transverse reinforcement for lapped splices Ast/2 l0/3 Fs Ast/2 l0/3 Figure 7 Illustration of curtailment of longitudinal reinforcement Hogging reinforcement Envelope of MEd/z + NEd Acting tensile force Fs Resisting tensile force FRs D Ftd lbd lbd lbd al lbd al D Ftd lbd lbd lbd lbd Sagging reinforcement Figure 8 Simplified detailing rules for beams Face of support 100% ≤ 150 mm Fs Reinforcement for maximum hogging moment 60% 35%* *reduce to 25% for equal spans 0. Applies where 15% redistribution has been used. 82 . where z = lever arm y = angle of compression strut This can conservatively be taken as: al = 1.10 the simplified rules shown in Figure 8 may be used. Qk ≤ Gk. lbd is the design anchorage length.125d For beams designed using the coefficients given in Table 3 of Chapter 4. the simplifications are conservative and economies can be achieved by curtailing bars to suit the actual moments.85 times the longest span.30l + al a) Bars in tension l0 a) Continuous member. Applies to uniformly distributed loads only. However.08l Position of effective support c) Simple support.15l + al ≥ lbd 0. for transverse bars at 150 mm centresa ≤450 451 – 900 901 – 1350 1351 – 1800 1801 – 2250 2251 – 2700 Key a For transverse bars at less than 150 mm centres use the following expression to calculate the required number of bars and hence the required transverse bar diameter: Number of bars required = 1 + l0/(3s) where s = spacing of the transverse bars. Minimum of two spans required. bottom reinforcement 100% l is the effective length.
13% 0. For slabs designed using the coefficients given in Table 3 of Chapter 3.75d.18% 0.88 0. Note the requirement for a maximum spacing of 150 mm where the shear reinforcement acts as a transverse reinforcement at laps in the longitudinal bars. should be at least 25% of the area of steel provided in the span.max = 0. even when simple supports have been assumed in design. the maximum area of tension or compression reinforcement should not exceed As. The transverse spacing of the legs in a series of shear links should not exceed: st.e.15% 0.26 fctm / fyk2) 0.max = 0. FE. For a Tbeam with the flange in compression. Table 4 Minimum percentage of reinforcement required fck fctm 2. lbd. Flanged beams At supports the tension reinforcement to resist hogging moments should be distributed across the full width of the effective flange as shown in Figure 9. The bars should be anchored to resist a force.21% rw.8 2.1 Minimim percentage (0. part of it may be concentrated over the web.04 Ac. as given in the section on beams.07 1. otherwise 100% of the reinforcement may be continued to the support.0013btd. Figure 9 Placing of tension reinforcement in flanged cross section beff As 25 hf 28 30 beff1 bw beff2 32 35 40 45 50 Key a Assuming fyk = 500 MPa 83 . the simplified rules shown in Figure 10 may be used.5 3. Detailing Reinforcement in end supports In monolithic construction. min x 103 0. where bt is the mean width of the tension zone (see Table 4).20% 0.10.01 1.min = 0.80 0. Beyond the face of the support 15% of the area of maximum reinforcement should be provided (see Figure 10c). should be measured beyond the line of contact between the beam and support.91 0. the section at supports (top reinforcement) should be designed for a bending moment arising from partial fixity of at least 25% of the maximum bending moment in the span (i. except that a value of al = d may be used.min can be obtained from Table 4. FE.min where rw. FE = (VEd al / z) + NEd where VEd = absolute value of shear force NEd = the axial force if present The anchorage. only the width of the web is taken into account in calculating the value of bt. Minimum spacing of reinforcement The minimum clear distance between bars should be the greater of: ■ Bar diameter ■ Aggregate size plus 5 mm ■ 20 mm Shear reinforcement The longitudinal spacing of vertical shear reinforcement should not exceed 0. s bw Slabs Curtailment The curtailment rules for beams should be followed.75d ≤ 600 mm The minimum area of shear reinforcement in beams.26 fctm bt d/fyk but not less than 0. originally published as Slabs11. Asw.2 3.6 2. The area of bottom reinforcement provided at supports with little or no end fixity assumed in design. Provided ssd is taken as 435 MPa in the calculation of the anchorage length (which is assumed in Tables 2 and 13) then it should not be necesary to calculate FE. provide 25% of midspan bottom reinforcement).14% 0. The bars should be anchored to resist a force . Reinforcement in end supports In simply supported slabs.9 3.0 3.95 1.16% 0. the area of reinforcement may be reduced to half the calculated span reinforcement and continued up to the support.13 Maximum area of longitudinal reinforcement Outside lap locations. Minimum area of longitudinal reinforcement The minimum area of reinforcement is As.85 0.min should be calculated from: Asw ≥ rw.17% 0.8 4.
Edge reinforcement Along a free (unsupported) edge. the spacing requirements are given in Table 5. lbd is the design anchorage length. ■ For the secondary reinforcement: 3. Minimum of two spans required. Where the designer has not specified the required spacing or provided the steel stress. bottom reinforcement Notes 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 360 Table 6 Apportionment of bending moments in flat slabs – equivalent frame method Location Column strip Middle strip Negative moments 60% – 80% 40% – 20% Positive moments 50% – 70% 50% – 30% l is the effective length. where dg is the maximum size of aggregate. The shortest span must be greater than or equal to 0.25 Gk and qk ≤ 5kN/m2.How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2 Minimum spacing requirements The minimum clear distance between bars (horizontal or vertical) should not be less than the bar size.04Ac. The exception is in areas with concentrated loads or areas of maximum moment where the following applies: ■ For the principal reinforcement: 2h but not more than 250 mm.max = 0. generally arranged as shown in Figure 11. b.5h but not more than 450 mm. Applies where 20% redistribution has been used. top reinforcement Table 5 40% 0. (dg + 5 mm). Maximum area of longitudinal reinforcement Maximum spacing of reinforcement For slabs less than 200 mm thick the following maximum spacing rules apply (h is the depth of the slab): ■ For the principal reinforcement: 3h but not more than 400 mm.08Ac. the division of the moments between the column and middle strips is given in Table 6. it can generally be assumed that ss will not exceed 320 MPa for a typical slab. should not exceed As.85 times the longest span.min Steel stress (es) MPa 160 200 240 wmax = 0. For slabs 200 mm thick or greater. the maximum area of tension or compression reinforcement. Flat slabs A flat slab should be divided into column and middle strips (see Figure 12).2l Position of effective support 100% Reinforcement for maximum sagging moment Values for rw. or 20 mm. Figure 10 Simplified detailing rules for slabs Face of support 100% 0.3 mm Maximum bar size (mm) 32 25 16 12 10 8 OR Maximum bar spacing (mm) 300 250 200 150 100 50 b) Continuous member. ■ For the secondary reinforcement: 3h but not more than 400 mm. Notes The total negative and positive moments to be resisted by the column and middle strips together should always add up to 100% 84 . Figure 11 Edge reinforcement for slab h ≥ 2h a) Continuous member.15l ≥ lbd 0. ss. Minimum areas of reinforcement The minimum area of reinforcement to be provided varies with the concrete strength (see Table 4). Where the slab supports office or residential areas it is unlikely that ss will exceed 280 MPa. At lap locations As. bottom reinforcement 15% lbd 280 320 100% Face of support c) Simple support. Applies to uniformly distributed loads only. a slab should normally contain longitudinal and transverse reinforcement.max = 0. Qk ≤ 1.30l Reinforcement for maximum hogging moment 50% Outside lap locations.4 mm Maximum bar size (mm) 40 32 20 16 12 10 OR Maximum bar spacing (mm) 300 300 250 200 150 100 wmax = 0.
unless the perimeter at which reinforcement is no longer required is less than 3d from the face of the column.3d to 1. Whilst it is not a code requirement it is considered good practice to provide two bars running parallel to the slab edge between the reinforcement of an external column.75d Outer control perimeter u out A ≤1.75 d ≤0. In this case the reinforcement should be placed in the zone 0.5d 0. unless rigorous serviceability calculations are carried out. top reinforcement of area 0.5d from the face of the column.5d (2d if > 2d from column) st s r ≤ 0. It is also advisable to apply this requirement to perimeter columns as far as is possible. be. ■ There should be at least two perimeters of shear links.5d A sr ≤ 1. ■ The radial spacing of the links.5 At should be placed in a width equal to the sum of 0. sr should not exceed 0.08√ f ck fyk which can be rearranged as: Asw. shown in Figure 13.5d ≤ 0. Reinforcement perpendicular to a free edge required to transmit bending moments from the slab to an edge or corner column should be placed within the effective width. k is 1. ■ It should be provided between the face of the column and kd inside the outer perimeter where shear reinforcement is no longer required. ■ The tangential spacing of the links should not exceed 2d for any other perimeter.5d Outer control perimeter kd Section A . cx Slab edge Slab edge cy y y cx cy z be = cx + y Slab edge z can be > cx and y can be > cy b) Corner column be = z + y/2 y can be > cy a) Edge column Note y is the distance from the edge of the slab to the innermost face of the column Figure 14 Punching shear layout Outer perimeter of shear reinforcement Punching shear reinforcement Where punching shear reinforcement is required the following rules should be observed.min /(sr s t ) ≥ 0. At represents the area of reinforcement required to resist the full negative moment from the sum of the two half panels each side of the column. Detailing Figure 12 Division of panels in flat slabs lx > ly ly /4 ly /4 Middle strip = lx – ly /2 The intention is to provide an even distribution/density of punching shear reinforcement within the zone where it is required.5d within 2d of the column face. ■ The distance between the face of the column and the nearest shear reinforcement should be between 0. The minimum area of a link leg for vertical punching shear reinforcement is ly /4 ly /4 1.5. be of a flat slab At internal columns. ■ The tangential spacing of the links.A 85 .75d (see Figure 14). One simplication to enable rectangular perimeters of sheer reinforcement is to use an intensity of Asw/u1 around rectangluar perimeters. At internal columns at least two bars of bottom reinforcement in each orthogonal direction should be provided and they should pass between the column reinforcement.min ≥ (s r s t )/F ly Middle strip = ly /2 Column strip = ly /2 where sr = the spacing of the links in the radial direction s t = the spacing of the links in the tangential direction F = factor obtained from Table 7 Figure 13 Effective width.10.5Asw.125 times the panel width on either side of the column. sd should not exceed 1.3d and 0.
min = 0.g.vmin = 0.How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2 Columns and walls Maximum areas of reinforcement In Eurocode 2 the maximum nominal reinforcement area for columns and walls outside laps is 4% compared with 6% in BS 8110. Table 9 Minimum area of vertical reinforcement in walls (half in each face) Wall thickness (mm) 200 250 300 350 400 As. Half the area should be provided in each face. (mm) 6 c Key a b c At a distance greater than the larger dimension of the column above or below a beam or slab.002Ac. There is no advice given in the Code on provision of reinforcement to control cracking in plain walls. Minimum reinforcement requirements The recommended minimum diameter of longitudinal reinforcement in columns is 12 mm. –25 Table 8 Requirements for column reinforcement Bar dia. –25 25 1875 28 1772 30 1712 32 1657 35 1585 40 1482 45 1398 50 1326 fyk has been taken as 500 MPa +5.002Ac (see also Table 9). min fck Factor. Tolerances The tolerances for cutting and/or bending dimensions are given in Table 10 and should be taken into account when completing the bar schedule.5 mm ≥ 350 mm for 8. for determining Asw. (mm) 12 16 192b 6c 20 240b 6c 25 240b 8 32 240b 8 40 240b 10 Table 11 Deductions to bar dimensions to allow for deviations between two concrete faces Distance between concrete faces (mm) 0 – 1000 1000 – 2000 Over 2000 Any length Type of bar Links and other bent bars Links and other bent bars Links and other bent bars Straight bars Total deduction (mm) 10 15 20 40 Max spacinga (mm) 144b Min link dia. links) then an allowance should be made for deviations in the member size and bending tolerances. The minimum area of longitudinal reinforcement in columns is given by: As. this area can be increased provided that the concrete can be placed and compacted sufficiently.min for layered fabric is as follows: ≥ 150 mm for f ≤ 6 mm ≥ 250 mm for 6 mm < f ≤ 8.min /m length of wall (mm2) 400 500 600 700 800 Particular requirements for walls The minimum area of vertical reinforcement in walls is given by: As. However. –10 +5.67. laps of fabric should be arranged as shown in Figure 15. Table 7 Factor. but reinforcement may be provided if required. Lapping fabric Unless ‘flying end’ fabric is being specified. Selfcompacting concrete may be used for particularly congested situations. –5 +5. When fabric reinforcement is lapped by layering. 86 . The diameter of the transverse reinforcement (link) should not be less than 6 mm or one quarter of the maximum diameter of the longitudinal bars (see Table 8). But not greater than minimum dimension of the column. early age thermal and shrinkage effects should be considered. dimensions can be increased by a factor of 1. where the reinforcing bars should be spaced to ensure that the concrete can flow around them.5 mm < f ≤ 12 mm There should generally be at least two bar pitches within the lap length. Further guidance can be found in Selfcompacting concrete12. 6 mm bars are not readily available in the UK. No longitudinal bar should be more than 150 mm from a transverse bar. The minimum area of horizontal reinforcement in each face of a wall is the greater of either 25% of vertical reinforcement or 0. ■ All secondary reinforcement may be lapped at the same location and the minimum lap length l0. the following should be noted: ■ Permissible percentage of fabric main reinforcement that may be lapped in any section is 100% if (As/s) ≤ 1200 mm2/m (where s is the spacing of bars) and 60% if As/s> 1200 mm2/m. The distance between two adjacent vertical bars should not exceed the lesser of either three times the wall thickness or 400 mm. There is no guidance given in Eurocode 2. but Table 11 gives guidance on the deductions to be made for deviations.10 NEd/fyd ≥ 0.001Ac. where crack control is important. F Note Table 10 Tolerance Cutting and bending processes Cutting of straight lengths (including reinforcement for subsequent bending) Bending: ≤ 1000 mm > 1000 mm to ≤ 2000 mm > 2000 mm Tolerance (mm) +25. Where the reinforcement is required to fit between two concrete faces (e. This could be reduced to one bar pitch for f ≤ 6 mm. However. F.
2005.int = [(qk + gk)/7. frames or walls supporting any two adjacent floor spans in the direction of the tie under consideration Ft = (20 + 4n0) ≤ 60 kN (n0 is the number of storeys) The maximum spacing of internal ties is 1. R M & BROOKER. BSI. r (mm) 16 20 24 32 70 87 112 140 Mimimum end projection. internal ties should be capable of resisting a design value of tensile force Ftie. 2 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. 2002. 1994. BSI. The Concrete Society. including links where bend > 150° (mm) 115a 120a 125a 130 190 240 305 Links where bend < 150° (min 10d straight) (mm) 115a 130 160 210 290 365 465 580 8 10 12 16 20 25 32 40 Key a The minimum end projections for smaller bars is governed by the practicalities of bending bars. 9 BROOKER. in whole or in part. dimensioning. BS 8666: Scheduling. 2004. 2005. BS EN 1992.2 m from the edge. References 1 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. An area of reinforcement of 138 mm2 is sufficient to resist this force. In walls they should be within 0. 11 MOSS. BSI. The Construction (Design and Management) Regulations. d (mm) Minimum radius for scheduling. Technical report 62: Selfcompacting concrete. 2005. a) Intermeshed fabric (longitudinal section) Fs l0 Fs Minimum radii and end projections The minimum radii for bends and length of end projections are given in Table 12. O. 12 THE CONCRETE SOCIETY. The Concrete Centre. 4 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. Detailing Figure 15 Lapping of welded fabric Fs l0 Fs lr = the greater of the distances (in m) between the centres of the columns. National structural concrete specification (third edition). P General (min 5d straight). BS EN 10080: Steel for the reinforcement of concrete – Weldable reinforcing steel – General. BSI (4 parts). Internal ties should be provided at each floor and roof level in two directions approximately at right angles. 1997. Standard method of detailing structural concrete. 2006. 3 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. bending and cutting of steel reinforcement for concrete – Specification. QPOAP. Table 12 Minimum scheduling radii and bend allowances b) Layered fabric (longitudinal section) Tying requirements At each floor and roof level an effectively continuous peripheral tie should be provided within 1. 6 INSTITUTION OF STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS/CONCRETE SOCIETY. BS 4449: Specification for carbon steel bars for the reinforcement of concrete.5](lr/5)(Ft) ≥ Ft kN/m where (qk + gk) = sum of the average permanent and variable floor loads (in kN/m2) r ≥ 5d P Nominal size of bar. How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2: Slabs. O. 10 MOSS.5 m from the top or bottom of floor slabs. The Concrete Centre. How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2: Getting started. BCA. The internal ties may. The Concrete Centre. In each direction. How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2: Beams. BCA.5lr. ISE/CS. Eurocode 2: Design of concrete structures. for most buildings the tie should resist a tensile force of 60 kN. BS 8500: Concrete – Complementary standard to BS EN 206–1. 8 CONSTRUCT.int (in kN per metre width): Ftie. CCIP–001. 2006. 2005.10. They should be effectively continuous throughout their length and should be anchored to the peripheral ties at each end. 1994. A guide to contractor detailing of reinforcement in concrete. be spread evenly in the slabs or may be grouped at or in beams. 7 CONSTRUCT. walls or other appropriate positions. 2006. 13 QUEENS PRINTER OF ACTS OF PARLIAMENT. In practice. 87 . O. unless continuing as horizontal ties to columns or walls. BS1. 2006. this need not be additional reinforcement. R M & BROOKER. 5 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION.
l0 Concrete class C28/35 Straight bars only Anchorage length.5) Good Poor Good Poor Good Poor Good Poor 210 290 290 410 290 410 310 430 280 400 360 520 390 560 420 600 360 520 430 620 510 720 540 780 530 750 580 820 740 1050 790 1130 690 990 720 1030 970 1380 1040 1480 900 1280 900 1280 1260 1790 1350 1920 1150 1640 1150 1640 1610 2290 1720 2460 1560 2230 1560 2230 2180 3110 2340 3340 36f 51f 36f 51f 50f 72f 54f 77f Lap length.4) 100% lapped in one location (a6 = 1. f (mm) (see Figure 1) 8 10 12 16 20 Concrete class C20/25 Straight bars only Anchorage length.4) 100% lapped in one location (a6 = 1.4) Good Poor Good Poor Good Poor Good Poor 270 380 370 530 370 530 400 510 370 520 470 670 510 730 550 790 480 680 570 810 660 950 710 1010 690 990 750 1080 970 1380 1030 1480 910 1290 940 1340 1270 1810 1360 1940 1180 1680 1180 1680 1640 2350 1760 2320 1500 2150 1500 2150 2100 3000 2250 3220 2040 2920 2040 2920 2860 4080 3060 4370 47f 67f 47f 67f 66f 94f 70f 100f Reinforcement in compression 25 32 40 Lap length.5) Good Poor Good Poor Good Poor Good Poor 210 300 300 420 300 420 320 450 300 420 380 540 410 590 440 630 380 540 450 650 530 760 570 810 550 790 600 860 770 1100 830 1180 730 1030 750 1070 1010 1450 1090 1550 940 1340 940 1340 1320 1880 1410 2010 1200 1720 1200 1720 1680 2400 1800 2570 1630 2330 1630 2330 2280 3260 2450 3470 37f 53f 37f 53f 52f 75f 56f 80f Lap length. lbd Other bars 50% lapped in one location (a6 = 1. lbd Other bars 50% lapped in one location (a6 = 1. bar diameter. lbd Other bars 50% lapped in one location (a6 = 1. l0 Concrete class C32/40 Straight bars only Anchorage length. lbd Other bars 50% lapped in one location (a6 = 1.5) Good Poor Good Poor Good Poor Good Poor 230 330 320 460 320 460 340 490 320 450 410 580 440 630 470 680 410 580 490 700 570 820 610 870 600 850 650 930 830 1190 890 1270 780 1120 810 1160 1090 1560 1170 1670 1010 1450 1010 1450 1420 2020 1520 2170 1300 1850 1300 1850 1810 2590 1940 2770 1760 2510 1760 2510 2460 3520 2640 3770 40f 58f 40f 58f 57f 81f 61f 87f Lap length.How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2 Table 13 Anchorage and lap lengths Bond condition Reinforcement in tension. l0 100% lapped in one location (a6 = 1.4) 100% lapped in one location (a6 = 1. l0 Concrete class C30/37 Straight bars only Anchorage length.5) Concrete class C25/30 Straight bars only Anchorage length. lbd Other bars 50% lapped in one location (a6 = 1.5) Good Poor Good Poor Good Poor Good Poor 200 280 270 390 270 390 290 420 270 380 350 490 380 540 400 570 350 500 420 590 490 690 520 740 510 720 550 790 710 1010 760 1080 660 950 690 980 930 1320 990 1420 860 1230 860 1230 1200 1720 1290 1840 1100 1570 1100 1570 1540 2200 1650 2350 1490 2130 1490 2130 2090 2980 2240 3200 34f 49f 34f 49f 48f 69f 51f 73f Lap length. l0 88 .4) 100% lapped in one location (a6 = 1.
5) Good Poor Good Poor Good Poor Good Poor 170 240 240 340 240 340 250 360 230 330 300 430 330 460 350 500 300 430 360 510 420 600 450 640 440 620 480 680 610 870 650 930 570 820 600 850 800 1140 860 1220 740 1060 740 1060 1040 1480 1110 1590 950 1350 950 1350 1330 1890 1420 2030 1290 1840 1290 1840 1800 2570 1930 2760 30f 42f 30f 42f 41f 59f 44f 63f Lap length. ssd.5) Good Poor Good Poor Good Poor Good Poor 150 210 220 310 220 310 230 330 200 290 280 390 300 430 320 460 260 370 330 470 390 550 420 590 380 540 440 630 560 800 600 860 490 700 550 780 740 1060 790 1130 640 910 690 980 960 1370 1030 1470 820 1170 880 1250 1230 1750 1310 1880 1110 1580 1190 1700 1670 2380 1780 2550 25f 36f 27f 39f 38f 55f 41f 58f Lap length. 5 Where 33% of bars are lapped in one location. l0 Concrete class C45/55 Straight bars only Anchorage length.7.e. bar diameter. decrease the lap lengths for '50% lapped in one location' by a factor of 0. f (mm) (see Figure 1) 8 10 12 16 20 25 Concrete class C35/45 Straight bars only Anchorage length. lbd Other bars 50% lapped in one location (a6 = 1. l0 Notes 1 Cover to all sides and distance between bars ≥ 25 mm (i. The mimimum lap length id given in cl 8.5) Good Poor Good Poor Good Poor Good Poor 160 220 220 310 220 310 230 330 220 310 280 390 300 430 320 460 280 400 330 470 390 550 420 590 400 580 440 630 560 800 600 860 530 760 550 780 740 1060 790 1130 690 980 690 980 960 1370 1030 1470 880 1250 880 1250 1230 1750 1310 1880 1190 1700 1190 1700 1670 2380 1780 2550 27f 39f 27f 39f 38f 55f 41f 58f Lap length.0.10. lbd Other bars 50% lapped in one location (a6 = 1. l0 100% lapped in one location (a6 = 1.4) Good Poor Good Poor Good Poor Good Poor 190 260 260 370 260 370 280 390 260 360 330 470 360 510 380 540 330 470 390 560 460 650 490 700 480 680 520 740 670 950 710 1020 630 890 650 930 870 1250 940 1340 810 1160 810 1160 1130 1620 1210 1730 32 40 Reinforcement in compression 1040 1480 1040 1480 1450 2070 1550 2220 1410 2010 1410 2010 1970 2810 2110 3010 32f 46f 32f 46f 45f 65f 48f 69f Lap length.4) 100% lapped in one location (a6 = 1. a2 < 1). l0 Concrete class C50/60 Straight bars only Anchorage length. Detailing Bond condition Reinforcement in tension.4) 100% lapped in one location (a6 = 1. 2 a1 = a3 = a4 = a5 = 1.3 of Eurocode 2. lbd Other bars 50% lapped in one location (a6 = 1. 89 .5) Concrete class C40/50 Straight bars only Anchorage length. 4 The anchorage and lap lengths have been rounded up to the nearest 10 mm. lbd Other bars 50% lapped in one location (a6 = 1. 3 Design stress has been taken at 435 MPa.82. Where the design stress in the bar at the position from where the anchorage is measured. is less than 435 MPa the figures in this table can be factored by ssd/435.4) 100% lapped in one location (a6 = 1.
165 8.594 4 1.10.689 42.551 6.083 4.439 7.567 49.946 7.228 5.729 30.882 90 .850 2.076 56.439 7.019 36.680 56.631 4.323 6 2.441 25.157 4.783 24.255 3.092 22.5 113 201 314 491 804 1260 2 101 157 226 402 628 982 1610 2510 3 151 236 339 603 942 1470 2410 3770 4 201 314 452 804 1260 1960 3220 5030 5 251 393 565 1010 1570 2450 4020 6280 6 302 471 679 1210 1880 2950 4830 7540 7 352 550 792 1410 2200 3440 5630 8800 8 402 628 905 1610 2510 3930 6430 10100 9 452 707 1020 1810 2830 4420 7240 11300 10 503 785 1130 2010 3140 4910 8040 12600 Table 15 Sectional areas per metre width for various spacings of bars (mm2) Bar size (mm) 8 10 12 16 20 25 32 40 Spacing of bars (mm) 75 670 1050 1510 2680 4190 6540 10700 16800 100 503 785 1130 2010 3140 4910 8040 12600 125 402 628 905 1610 2510 3930 6430 10100 150 335 524 754 1340 2090 3270 5360 8380 175 287 449 646 1150 1800 2800 4600 7180 200 251 393 565 1010 1570 2450 4020 6280 225 223 349 503 894 1400 2180 3570 5590 250 201 314 452 804 1260 1960 3220 5030 275 183 286 411 731 1140 1780 2920 4570 300 168 262 377 670 1050 1640 2680 4190 Table 16 Mass of groups of bars (kg per metre run) Bar size (mm) 8 10 12 16 20 25 32 40 Number of bars 1 0.865 15.797 23.413 25.165 8.133 98.331 19.932 7.368 3.958 35.267 31.195 34.458 275 1.378 84.507 78.838 21.242 3.395 0.740 3.263 26.946 6.3 78.567 49.932 7.103 12.435 2. Detailing Table 14 Sectional areas of groups of bars (mm2) Bar size (mm) 8 10 12 16 20 25 32 40 Number of bars 1 50.783 24.762 4.551 5.261 8.157 4.729 3 1.267 31.178 131.221 11.699 5.878 15.820 88.157 4.073 9.878 15.012 22.215 11.974 44.627 19.253 39.739 8.968 14.662 38.369 200 1.560 18.940 29.044 32.917 150 2.932 7.892 12.059 43.776 3.528 100 3.323 225 1.507 78.845 21.663 4.126 28.865 15.522 16.843 250 1.534 63.827 50.959 5.551 6.413 25.534 63.888 1.313 9.646 125 3.313 9.221 12.627 19.707 12.458 5 1.110 5.466 3.331 19.103 12.892 12.578 2.781 10 3.261 8.578 2.917 9 3.754 2.729 30.233 1.871 300 1.048 17.188 7 2.253 39.470 14.961 17.466 3.133 98.205 22.865 2 0.523 5.044 32.853 6.019 14.973 3.617 0.662 38.466 3.764 175 2.827 50.578 2.646 Table 17 Mass in kg per square metre for various spacings of bars (kg per m2) Bar size (mm) 8 10 12 16 20 25 32 40 Spacing of bars (mm) 75 5.316 6.973 3.990 14.315 2.946 6.398 11.549 7.089 65.789 1.919 10.193 69.015 10.880 59.055 2.882 51.627 19.735 7.327 9.120 37.052 8 3.313 9.184 1.083 4.
Table 2 is not intended to cover all concrete exposure situations and reference should be made to BS 8500 for those cases not included. FICT O Brooker BEng. XD or XS exposure class. It is important to quote the compressive strength class in full to avoid confusion. CEng. An allowance should be made in the design for deviations from the minimum cover (Δcdev).How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2 11. cover. Selecting concrete strength and cover Having identified the relevant exposure condition(s). PhD. MICE. BS 8500 for building structures T A Harrison BSc. The recommendations for XD and XS exposure classes are sufficient for exposure class XC and it is only necessary to check each face of the concrete element for either XC. further explanation is given below. In BS 8500 exposure classification is related to the deterioration processes of carbonation. This should be added to the minimum cover to obtain the nominal cover. cement content and water/cement ratios for various exposure conditions. MIStructE Introduction BS 8500 Concrete – Complementary British Standard to BS EN 206–11 was revised in December 2006 principally to reflect changes to Special Digest 12 and bring it into line with other standards. the notation used gives the cylinder strength as well as the cube strength (see Table 3). All of these deterioration processes are subdivided. CEng. MICE. Continues page 94 1 91 . chemical attack from aggressive ground and freeze/thaw (see Table 1). Compressive strength BS 8500 uses ‘compressive strength class’ to define concrete strengths. a recommended strength class and cover should be chosen. Concrete design information Exposure classification Initially the relevant exposure condition(s) should be identified. Table 2 indicates the minimum cover and strengths required to meet common exposure conditions for a 50year working life. and where a 100year working life is required. The guidelines given in BS 8500 for durability are based on the latest research and recommends strength. Cover to reinforcement The durability guidance given in BS 8500 is based on the assumption that the minimum cover for durability is achieved. ingress of chlorides.
Vertical concrete surfaces such as facades and columns exposed to rain and freezing. exposed to freezing and to deicing salts either directly or as spray or runoff. including deicing salts. pavements and car park slabs). Reinforced and prestressed concrete surfaces exposed to alternate wetting and drying. Unreinforced concrete in cyclic wet and dry conditions not subject to abrasion.) Note: BS 85001 refers to ACEC classes rather than XA classes used in BS EN 2061 Key a The moisture condition relates to that in the concrete cover to reinforcement or other embedded metal but. such as parts of buildings. freezing or chemical attack. conditions in the concrete cover can be taken as being that of the surrounding environment. 2 92 . The least extreme is in the tidal zone where conditions can be similar to those in XS2. bathrooms. Elements subjected to frequent splashing with water containing deicing agents and exposed to freezing. XC2 XC3 & XC4 Wet. High water saturation with deicing agent or sea water d. The most extreme conditions are in the spray zone. Horizontal concrete surfaces. Reinforced and prestressed concrete surfaces totally immersed in water containing chlorides b.g.g. which would otherwise be classified as XF1 but which are exposed to deicing salts either directly or as spray or runoff.g. walls. use at least XC1. Elements subjected to frequent splashing with water and exposed to freezing. e. Reinforced and prestressed concrete surfaces inside enclosed structures except areas of structures with high humidity. This might not be the case if there is a barrier between the concrete and its environment. but exposed to freezing and to rain or water. Moderate water saturation with deicing agent. splash and spray zones. where one surface is immersed in water containing chlorides and another is exposed to air. Concrete surfaces exposed to airborne chlorides. Corrosion induced by chlorides from sea water (XS classes) a (Where concrete containing reinforcement or other embedded metal is subject to contact with chlorides from sea water or air carrying salt originating from sea water. Reinforced and prestressed concrete surfaces in the upper tidal zones and the splash and spray zones c. poorly ventilated. or exposed to. in many cases. External reinforced and prestressed concrete surfaces sheltered from. Corrosion induced by chlorides other than from sea water (XD classes) a (Where concrete containing reinforcement or other embedded metal is subject to contact with water containing chlorides. kitchens). concrete below midtide level b. Specialist advice should be sought where necessary. For other situations see ‘chemical attack’ section below. Unreinforced concrete completely buried in soil classed as AC1 and with hydraulic gradiant not greater than 5. Reinforced and prestressed concrete completely submerged and remaining saturated. especially where the dry side is at a high ambient temperature. Elements such as parts of bridges. Horizontal concrete surfaces. NOTE: For reinforced concrete. Cyclic wet and dry.How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2 Table 1 Exposure Classes Class Class description Informative example applicable to the United Kingdom No risk of corrosion or attack (XO class) X0 For concrete without reinforcement or embedded metal where there is no significant freeze/thaw. The recommendations given take into account the most extreme UK conditions within this class. where water accumulates and which are exposed to freezing. b Reinforced and prestressed concrete elements. External reinforced and prestressed concrete surfaces in coastal areas. are potentially a more severe condition. parapet edge beams and buried structures less than 1 m below carriageway level. Reinforced and prestressed concrete surfaces inside structures with high humidity (e. Moderate humidity or cyclic wet and dry. Nonvertical concrete surfaces not highly saturated.) XF1 XF2 XF3 XF4 Moderate water saturation without deicing agent. d It is not normally necessary to classify in the XF4 exposure class those parts of structures located in the United Kingdom which are in frequent contact with the sea. rarely dry.) XD1 XD2 XD3 Moderate humidity. rarely dry. Wet. c Exposure XS3 covers a range of conditions.) XS1 XS2 XS3 Exposed to airborne salt but not in direct contact with sea water. High water saturation without deicing agent. Reinforced and prestressed concrete surfaces permanently submerged in nonaggressive water. abutments and columns within 10 m of the carriageway. Reinforced and prestressed concrete completely buried in soil classed as AC1 and with a hydraulic gradient not greater than 5. Reinforced and prestressed concrete surfaces directly affected by deicing salts or spray containing deicing salts (e. abrasion or chemical attack. Unreinforced concrete permanently submerged in nonaggressive water. such as roads and pavements. Freeze/thaw attack (XF classes) (Where concrete is exposed to significant attack from freeze/thaw cycles whilst wet. Chemical attack (ACEC classes) (Where concrete is exposed to chemical attack. direct rain.) XC1 Dry or permanently wet. Unreinforced concrete surfaces inside structures. from sources other than from sea water. Permanently submerged. Tidal. to develop a specification that is appropriate to the actual conditions likely to be encountered. Parts of structures exposed to occasional or slight chloride conditions. Corrosion induced by carbonation (XC classes) a (Where concrete containing reinforcement or other embedded metal is exposed to air and moisture.
320 <<< <<< <<< <<< Exposed vertical surfaces near coast XF1 XS1f IIBV.h or PAV2 C32/40. 360 C32/40. Annex A.60. 360 C40/50.65.g. IIBS.45. 380 See BS 8500 C32/40.50.50. 380 C32/40 0.50. 360 C32/40. 340 IIBV. h C32/40.0. 0. (CEM I is Portland cement. Air entrained concrete is required.45.45.60. IIA. 0. SRPC IIIB. 0. 0.40. C28/35. SRPC IIBV. IIBS. 260 or RC40/50 or RC30/37 RC28/35 RC25/30 C40/50. 0. 0.45.50. 340 C40/50. 0. j or PAV1 C28/35.55. IVBV IIBV.70. XD2. C30/37.55.40.40. 0. 0. 320 <<< C25/30. 380 C35/45.40. 0.45. 0. minimum cement or combination combination content (kg/m3). 360 <<< C28/35. 300 plus air g. 340 C32/40. 0. 0. 320 C25/30.55. C28/35.50. 240 or RC20/25 <<< <<< C25/30. 360 C25/30.Table 1. C25/30. 0.55. SRPC <<< C28/35.50. IIIA Car park decks and areas subject to deicing spray ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ See BS 8500 See BS 8500 C32/40. h 0. Requirements for other sets of exposure classes. 0.40.h C40/50. C28/35 C28/35.45. 360 C25/30. 380 C28/35. 360g. 280 or RC40/50 or RC30/37 RC28/35 C40/50. 0. 340g. IIIA.45. b See BS 85002. 380g. 0. 340 C35/45. h 0.55. 0. 0. 0. IIA. 0. 360 C32/40.40.45. 0. IIIA IIIB Exposed horizontal surfaces near coast Key XF4 CEM I.) c For prestressed concrete the minimum strength class should be C28/35. 380 See BS 8500 <<< C32/40. 360 g ___ CEM I. IVBV Car park decks.60. 340 or 0. ramps and external areas subject to freezing and deicing salts XF4 XF4 (air entrained) CEM I. SRPC IIIB.65. 0. 380 See BS 8500 C32/40. IIIB CEM I. maximum w/c ratio.45.50. 380 g <<< C28/35. Also adequate for exposure class XC3/4. This option may not be suitable for areas subject to severe abrasion. 0. 0. IIA. 280 plus air g. 380 See BS 8500 ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ C35/45. and equivalent designated concrete (where applicable) designationsb Nominal cover to reinforcementd 15 + D c dev 20 + D c dev 25 + D c dev 30 + D c dev 35 + D c dev 40 + D c dev 45 + D c dev 50 + D c dev Internal mass concrete Internal elements (except humid locations) Buried concrete in AC1 ground conditions e Vertical surface protected from direct rainfall Exposed vertical surfaces X0 XC1 Typical example Primary Secondary ___ ___ All All Recommended that this exposure is not applied to reinforced concrete C20/25.45. SRPC <<< ___ <<< <<< a This table comprises a selection of common exposure class combinations. 340 <<< C25/30. XS2 and XS3 should be derived from BS 85001: 2006.45.60. D c dev is an allowance for deviations. IIIA Vertical elements subject to deicing spray and freezing XD3f XF2 CEM I.55. 0. e. 260 or RC25/30 <<< <<< <<< <<< <<< XC2 AC1 All ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ <<< <<< <<< <<< <<< ___ All except IVB C40/50. 0. 0. 0. Not recommended Indicates that concrete quality in cell to the left should not be reduced 3 93 . IIA to IVB are cement combinations. 360 C40/50.40.BS 8500 for building structures Table 2 Selected a recommendations for normalweight reinforced concrete quality for combined exposure classes and cover to reinforcement for at least a 50year intended working life and 20 mm maximum aggregate size Exposure conditions Cement/ Strength classc. IIBS.60. IIBS. 0. 360 C40/50. 0. 0.45. 300 0. 340 g or RC40/50XFg <<< <<< <<< XF1 XC3 & XC4 All except IVB <<< <<< <<< <<< XF3 All except IVB <<< C32/40.45. 280 plus air g.50.50. 0. C30/37. IIA. IIBS. 0. 300 <<< <<< <<< Exposed horizontal surfaces XF3 (air entrained) All except IVB ___ ___ <<< <<< <<< Elements subject to airborne chlorides XD1f ___ All ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ d e f g h j <<< C35/45. 340 or 0. IIA. 0. h.40.45. 280 or 0. 300 0. Freeze/thaw resisting aggregates should be specified. 340 C25/30. 0. 340 C35/45. 0. For sections less than 140 mm thick refer to BS 8500. 340 C28/35.40.
therefore. For designated concretes. The producer is then obliged to conform to the requirements given in BS 8500–2: 2006. CIIAS CEM II/AV.g. a design chemical class (DC class) can be obtained from Table 5. CIIAL. or 6–10% silica fumec Portland cement with 21–35% ground granulated blastfurnace slag Portland cement with 25–35% fly ash Portland cement with 25–35% fly ash Portland cement with 36–65% ground granulated blastfurnace slag Portland cement with 36–65% ground granulated blastfurnace slag with additional requirements that enhance sulfate resistance Portland cement with 66–80% ground granulated blastfurnace slag Portland cement with 66–80% ground granulated blastfurnace slag with additional requirements that enhance sulfate resistance Portland cement with 36–55% fly ash Cement/combination types (BS 8500) CEM I SRPC CEM II/AL.3. or 0 mm if the element can be rejected if it is out of tolerance (e.4. IIIA+SR may be used. CIII/A+SRf Cube strengthC Air content Where air entrainment is required for exposure classes XF3 and XF4 the minimum air content by volume of 3. Knowing the ACEC class. CIIAV CEM II/A–D CEM II/BS. Table 1. An aggressive chemical environment for concrete class (ACEC class) should be assessed for the site.3. water/cement ratio and minimum cement content may vary depending on the cement type used. although in most concrete production plants either ground granulated blastfurnace slag or flyash (pfa) is available. 4 94 . 5. CIIBV CEM II/BV+SR. Table A. N/mm2 Table 4 Cement and combination typea Broad Composition designationb CEM I SRPC IIA Portland cement Sulfateresisting Portland cement Portland cement with 6–20% of fly ash. IIIB+SR may be used. CEM II/ALL.2. A FND concrete has the strength class of C25/30.).5% should be specified for 40 mm.How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2 Table 3 Compressive strength class for normal and heavyweight concrete Example Compressive strength classes (BS 8500) C20/25 Designated concrete (BS 8500) RC20/25 RC25/30 RC28/35 RC30/37 RC32/40 RC35/45 RC40/50 – – Previous Grade of concrete (BS 53283 & BS 81105) C25 C30 C35 – C40 C45 C50 – C60 Eurocode 24 recommends that Δc dev is taken as 10 mm. c When IIA or IIAD is specified. e Inclusive of low early strength option (see BS EN 1974 and the “L” classes in BS 85002:2006. the cover should be determined from Table 2 for the applicable exposure classes. CIIIB+SRf IVBV CEM IV/B(V). See BS 85002:2006. footnote D. f “+SR” indicates additional restrictions related to sulfate resistance. 20 mm and 10 mm maximum aggregate size respectively. g Where IIIB is specified. all cement/combinations are available (except SRPC). for the sulfateresisting characteristics of other cements and combinations. See BRE Special Digest 12. CIIIB CEM III/B+SRf . Table 1. 3. limestone. precast elements). CIIALL. CIIBV+SR CEM III/A. It should be noted from Table 2 that the strength. For designed concretes. an appropriate foundation concrete (FND designation) can be selected using Table 6. CIIBS CEM II/BV. CIVB Key a There are a number of cements and combinations not listed in this table that may be specified for certain specialist applications. select from the notations given in BS 85002:2006. IIIBe. CIIIA CEM III/A+SRf.1. CEM I and silica fume may be combined in the concrete mixer using the kvalue concept.2. b The use of these broad designations is sufficient for most applications. IIBS IIBV IIB+SR IIIAd. Explanation of the compressive strength class notation C25/30 C28/35 C30/37 C32/40 C35/45 C40/50 C45/55 C50/60 NOTE: Refer to BS 85001: 2006. g IIIB+SRe CEM III/B. N/mm2 C Minimum characteristic cube strength. Where a more limited range of cement or combinations types is required. e IIIA+SRe Freeze/thaw aggregates For exposure conditions XF3 and XF4 freeze/thaw resisting aggregates should be specified. ‘C’ for normal weight concrete A ‘LC’ for lightweight concrete C 40 /50 Cylinder strengthB A Includes heavyweight concrete B Minimum characteristic 150 mm diameter by 300 mm cylinder strength. When using a designated concrete (see section below). see BS EN 2061:200.. unless the fabrication is subjected to a quality assurance ystem where it is permitted to reduce Δc dev to 5 mm. BRE Special Digest 12 gives guidance on the assessment of the ACEC class and this is normally carried out as part of the interpretive reporting for a ground investigation. Cl.0%. CEM II/AS. Aggressive ground Where plain or reinforced concrete is in contact with the ground further checks are required to ensure durability.5. where a higher strength is required a designed concrete should be specified. not both. d Where IIIA is specified. ground granulated blastfurnace slag. Table A.5% or 5.20 for full list of Compressive strength classes. it is not necessary to specify the types of cement/combinations. Cement types and minimum cement content Table 4 may be used to understand the cement/combination designations. the concrete producer should be advised of the DCclass (see section on specification). In the UK.
refer to BS 8500. In BS 8500 the ‘specifier’ is the person or body responsible for the final compilation of the technical requirements. The most popular are designated and designed. e ACECclass (Aggressive Chemical Environment for Concrete class) AC1s. instead reference should be made to BS 820426 or Concrete Society Technical Report 347. minimum cover plus fixing tolerance) should be a minimum of 75 mm for concrete cast directly against the earth and 50 mm for concrete cast against blinding. This will generally be the contractor. f This should include APM3 (surface protection). b For guidance on precast products see Special Digest 12.g. the designer will want to ensure their requirements are incorporated and this will normally be through their own specification for the works (e. Appropriate Designated Concrete RC 25/30 FND2 FND2z FND3 FND3z FND4 FND4z FND4m Consistence The term ‘workability’ has been replaced by the term ‘consistence’ and a series of consistence classes has been introduced. d For section widths < 140 mm refer to BS 8500.BS 8500 for building structures Table 5 Selection of the DCclass and the number of Addition Protection Measures (APMs) where the hydrostatic head of groundwater is not more than five times the section width a. pretensioned or heat cured should normally be specified as chloride class Cl0.10. with the NSCS). as one of the APMs. Specification Method of specifying There are various methods of specifying concrete to BS 8500 (see Table 8).10. Table 9 gives the slump and flow classes and the likely target slump/flow. Chloride Class Concrete that is to be prestressed. Posttensioned elements in an internal building environment may also be specifed as class Cl0. however. e Where any surface attack is not acceptable e. BS 8500 also introduces a new method ‘proprietary concrete’. where practicable.e. AC1 AC2s. d. which should be specified as class Cl0. Reinforced concrete should be specified as class Cl0. the nominal cover should be checked in accordance with Eurocode 24. c. DCclass Intended working life At least 50 years DC1 DC2 DC2z DC3 DC3z DC3 DC4 DC4z DC4 DC4m DC4m DC4f DC4zf DC4mf At least 100 years DC1 DC2 DC2z DC3 DC3z Refer to BS 8500 DC4 DC4z Refer to BS 8500 DC4m Refer to BS 8500 DC4f DC4z/1 f DC4mf Concrete cast against uneven surfaces The nominal cover (i. c For structural performance outside these values refer to BS 8500. b. refer to BS 8500.20. Table 6 Guidance on selecting designated concrete for reinforced concrete foundations DCClass DC1 DC2 DC2z DC3 DC3z DC4 DC4z DC4m NOTE Strength class for all FND concrete is C25/30.g.40 except for concrete made with cement conforming to BS 402710 (SRPC). for fire cover. Abrasion BS 8500 does not contain abrasion classes. Table 7 summarises the factors that affect the abrasion resistance of floors. Figures 1 and 2 have been annotated to indicate which information is typically provided by the designer and contractor. The specifier Figures 1 and 2 show standard specification forms produced by the Quarry Products Association for designated and designed concretes8. called the specification. ACZ AC2z AC3s AC3z AC3 AC4s AC4z AC4 AC4ms AC4m AC5 AC5z AC5m Key a Where the hydrostatic head of groundwater is greater than five times the section width. Continues page 98 5 95 . Similar tables are included in the National Structural Concrete Specification 9 (NSCS). The designer should require that any reported nonconformities are passed to them for assessment. refer to BS 8500. with friction piles. Fire design Having selected concrete cover and strength to meet the durability recommendations of BS 8500. which is passed to the concrete producer.
Dec ‘04 Contract Title: BS 85001 reference 4. F4. Coarse aggregate usually has no direct effect on abrasion resistance. F4. S3. Cement content should not be less than 325 kg/m3. S3. the concrete Where identity testing is routine: Type of test Volume of concrete in assessment Number of tests on this volume Whether a nonaccredited laboratory will be used C Other information from the specifier 48 m3 12003 m3 72 m3 3 6 m /day 18 m /hr 6 m3/day Skip + tamped N/A Pumping + float N/A Skip + tamped N/A C 5.2d) Requirement Schedule The concretes below shall be supplied as Designated Concretes in accordance with this specification and the relevant clauses of BS 85002A D Concrete designation Maximum aggregate size when other D than 20 mm FND2 z –– RC25/30 RC32/40 –– 10 S1. Coarse and fine aggregates should not contain soft or friable materials. F4.50 is likely to increase abrasion resistance but lowering further is unlikely to give further enhancement. F5 D D S1. 7.1 5.How to design concrete structures using Eurocode 2 Table 7 Factors affecting the abrasion resistance of concrete floors Factor Power floating Curing Cement content Water/cement ratio Aggregates Effect Power finishing and. F3. F4.2. S4 F2. It should not exceed 0. e. and finishing.55.2.1 Total volume required Anticipated peak delivery rate C Any access limitations Intended method of placing.1b) C C 5. Cement contents above 360 kg/m3 are unlikely to enhance abrasion resistance and excessive cement content can impair the power finishing process. power C floating. S4 F2. F3. F3. however. Water/cement ratio is of great importance. S4 (Ring the class required when other than F2. 7. except in floors in very aggressive environments where the surface is expected to be worn away. Prompt and efficient curing is essential in order to retain sufficient water in the surface zone to complete hydration and the development of concrete strength at and close to the surface.2c) 4. maximum aggregate size and any additional requirements Contractor specifies consistence.2. Reducing to 0. 7. pumping.2.3 C D Additional requirements –– –– –– C D Exchange of information BS EN 2061. S2. in particular. F5 Consistence S1. S2. S4 F2. Dry shake finishes Figure 1 Example specification of Designated Concrete Schedule for the specification requirements of designated concretes for use on contract New Office Contract period: June . Dry shake finishes can be used to enhance the surface properties in high abrasion locations. excessive repetitions of the process do not necessarily further enhance performance.1a) KEY D Designer specifies concrete designation. repeated power trowelling is a significant factor in creating abrasion resistance.g. Use a separate column for different consistence with the same designated concrete) C Other (specify) O S1.1 & BS EN 2061.2a) 4.g. S3. F5 C 4. 6 96 .2 C to the producer Information required from –– –– –– –– –– –– C C C the producer Red text Example specification A There is no need to cite BS EN 2061 as BS 85002 has a clause that requires conformity to BS EN 2061. F3.2. S2. S3.2 & BS EN 2061. F5 the default classes of S3 for the GEN. S2.2b) 4. FND and RC series and S2 for the PAV series. any additional requirements and completes exchange of information section C 5. e.
F3. F3. F4. IIA.1 & BS EN 2061.2c) The concretes below shall be supplied as designed concretes in accordance with this specification and the relevant clauses of BS 85002A D Concrete reference. IIB IIIA.3b) C D to n) Exchange of information BS EN 2061.1 5.10 RC Cl 1. S3.10 RC Cl 1. the concrete Where identity testing is routine: Type of test Volume of concrete in assessment Number of tests on this volume Whether a nonaccredited laboratory will be used Other information from the specifier to the producer Information required from the producer 48 m3 1200 m3 72 m3 6 m3/day 18 m3/hr 6 m3/day Skip + tamped N/A Pumping + float N/A Skip + tamped N/A C C C C –– –– –– –– –– –– C C A There is no need to cite BS EN 2061 as BS 85002 has a clause that requires conformity to BS EN 2061. S2. IVB CEM 1. S2. requirement for third party product conformity certification (recommended) and any additional requirements Contractor specifies consistence. S3. SRPC. IVB 0. IIIB.1 5. white.3.3. IVB 20 Cl 0.20. e.7. B Where RC is ringed. F5 S1.3. the chloride class shall be Cl 0.10 RC Cl 1. IIA.2e) 4. F3. IIIB.2f) D D D 4.55 300 CEM 1.10 RC Cl 1.BS 8500 for building structures Table 8 Methods of specifying concrete BS 8500 Designated concrete Designed concrete Prescribed concrete Standardized prescribed concrete Proprietary concrete BS 5328 (superseded by BS 8500 1 Dec 2003) Designated mix Designed mix Prescribed mix Standard mix No equivalent Figure 2 Example specification of Designed Concrete Schedule for the specification requirements of designed concretes for use on contract Contract Title: New Office Contract period: June .1a) 5.g.2a) Requirement Schedule 4.70 240 CEM 1. SRPC. F4.Dec ‘04 BS 85001 reference 4. IIB IIIA. SRPC.g. cement or combination types (unless design chemical class is specified).2d) & 4. chloride class. any additional requirements and completes exchange of information section D D O O S1. S4 F2. F5 S1. 7. S4 F2. if any Pads Slab Cols D Compressive strength class C28/35 C25/30 C32/40 DCDCFor sulfate resisting concrete. maximum water/cement ratio. IIIB.3. In this case the chloride class shall be Cl 0.3.3. design chemical class DC2z D D DC D D D D 4.3.2b) 4. SRPC. F3. target density (excluding normal weight concrete).g.2 D Note 2 4.2 C C Volume required Anticipated peak delivery rate Any access limitations Intended method of placing. kg/m3 Cement or combination types (delete those not permitted) Other special property. IIA. S4 F2. F5 O S1.2 & BS EN 2061. and finishing.2g) & h) 4.0 Cl 0. low heat. F5 C D Yes Yes Yes Yes D C D C C C 5. IIB IIIA. IIB IIIA. pumping.40 except where SRPC is used. S2. power floating. minimum cement content. S3. e. target density Consistence (Ring the class required. limiting values of composition: Maximum w/c ratio Minimum cement/combination content. IIIB. 7.1b) For other concretes.3a) O O O 4. maximum aggregate size. mm Chloride class (ring the one required) Prestressed or heat cured reinforced concrete Reinforced B Unreinforced with no embedded metal For lightweight and heavyweight concrete. Use separate columns for the same basic concretes with different consistence) Other (specify) UKAS or equivalent accredited third party product conformity certification (delete if not required) Additional requirements 0. +SR (specify) Maximum aggregate size.2i) D C D 4. S4 F2. e. IIA.3.3.0 20 Cl 0. S3. Red text Example Specification 7 97 .0 10 Cl 0.3. S2. F4.0 D D KEY D Designer specifies compressive strength class.3. F4. IVB xx xx CEM 1. design chemical class.
Where this is not adopted. e. BSI. Part 2: Concrete wearing surfaces – Code of practice. Visit the Webpage www. BS 81101: The structural use of concrete – Part 1: Code of practice for design and construction. 2003.g. 1999.org/pro_rea. BRE. the specifier is advised to adopt adequate identity testing to ensure the concrete is as specified. recommended that the concrete supplier should have third party certification. 9 CONSTRUCT. e. certain information must be provided in addition to the specification. Eurocode 2: Design of concrete structures. 1997. Exchange of information To enable the concrete producer to design and produce a suitable concrete. 7 THE CONCRETE SOCIETY. 2 BUILDING RESEARCH ESTABLISHMENT. The Concrete Society. BS1. the concrete producer is now required to follow a formal procedure called ‘conformity’ to verify that the concrete is in accordance with the specification.qpa. 8 QUARRY PRODUCTS ASSOCIATION.BS 8500 for building structures Table 9a Consistence slump classes and likely target values Slump class S1 S2 S3 S4 Target slump (mm) 20 70 130 190 Conformity Under BS 8500. Technical report 34: Concrete industrial ground floors. 4 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. BSI. 6 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. where the concrete needs to be pumped or a high quality finish is required. which is in all but in name acceptance testing. References 1 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. Identity testing Table 9b Consistence flow classes and likely target values Flow class F2 F3 F4 F5 Target flow (mm) 380 450 520 590 The specifier is responsible for organising any identity testing. 2006. 2005. BS 82042: Screeds. consistence and air content. BS 4027: Specification for sulfate–resisting Portland cement. BSI. BSI (4 parts). 98 . BS 8500: Concrete – Complementary British Standard to BS EN 206–1. National structural concrete specification for building construction. (Withdrawn by BSI on 1 December 2003). BRE Special Digest 1 – Concrete in aggressive ground (3rd edition). BSI. high strength columns ■ for spot checks on the producer. 1996. 5 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. BS 5328: Concrete. 10 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. BS EN 1992. 2004. 3 BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION.g. Construct. It is. Identity testing can include strength. There are a number of situations where it is recommended: ■ where the producer does not hold third party certification ■ in cases of doubt ■ for critical elements. therefore. bases and insitu floorings.
Members of the Steering Group John Mason Stuart Alexander Pal Chana Charles Goodchild Tony Jones Andy Lyle Richard Moss Nary Narayanan Richard Shipman Robert Vollum Russ Wolstenholme Rod Webster Alan Baxter & Associates (Chairman) WSP Group plc British Cement Association The Concrete Centre Arup NRM Consultants Formerly of Powell Tolner Associates Clark Smith Partnership DCLG Imperial College. University of London WS Atkins & DTI Project Ofﬁcer Concrete Innovation and Design Members of the Concrete Industry Eurocode 2 Group (CIEG) John Moore Clive Budge Pal Chana John Clarke Colin Cleverly Charles Goodchild Haig Gulvanessian Geoff Harding Tom Harrison Tony Jones John Mason Richard Moss Nary Narayanan Richard Shipman Martin Southcott Russ Wolstenholme Rod Webster Consultant (Chairman) British Precast Concrete Federation British Cement Association The Concrete Society Construct The Concrete Centre BRE DCLG Quarry Products Association Arup Alan Baxter & Associates Formerly of Powell Tolner Associates Clark Smith Partnership DCLG Consultant W S Atkins Concrete Innovation and Design .
He is consultant to Clark Smith Partnership. Camberley. Rod Webster of Concrete Innovation and Design is an expert in the design of tall concrete buildings and in advanced analytical methods. Prof R S Narayanan in past Chairman of CEN/TC 250/SC2. He is technical consultant to the QPA–BRMCA and a visiting industrial professor at the University of Dundee.CI/Sfb UDC 624.001. and is the ICE’s representative on the National Strategy Committee for implementation of Eurocodes. Surrey. Blackwater.. GU17 9AB Tel: +44 (0)1276 606800 Fax: +44 (0)1276 606801 www.012.4.concretecentre..com . Dr Richard Moss is formerly of Building Research Establishment and is author of a number of their technical publications. CCIP006 Published December 2006 ISBN 1984818471 Price Group P © The Concrete Centre Riverside House. the committee responsible for structural Eurocodes on concrete. speciﬁcation and detailing of a broad range of concrete elements. the geotechnical Eurocode. Andrew Harris is a former Associate Dean of Kingston University and has prepared publications and gives presentations on Eurocode 7. the geotechnical Eurocode. Station Approach.63 How to Design Concrete Structures using Eurocode 2 This publication brings together in one place “How to. 4 Meadows Business Park. data tables and design aids to enable designers to apply Eurocode 2 quickly and conﬁdently to the design of concrete structures. ﬂow charts. Prof Tom Harrison is chairman of the BSI concrete committee.” guidance for the design. Dr Andrew Bond is a UK delegate on the CEN/TC 250/SC7 committee responsible for Eurocode 7. presentations and the national helpline. Owen Brooker is Senior Structural Engineer for The Concrete Centre where he promotes efﬁcient concrete design through guidance documents. This publication take the practising engineer through the process of designing to Eurocode 2 and includes commentary.
This action might not be possible to undo. Are you sure you want to continue?
We've moved you to where you read on your other device.
Get the full title to continue reading from where you left off, or restart the preview.